JP2018192201A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To effectively enhance performance effects by a retention device for retaining game balls.SOLUTION: A special game state includes at least a first special game state (a small winning game state), and a second special game state (a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player more than the first special game state. A game machine includes: a first variable winning device that, in response to production of the first special game state, can be transformed from a state where it is impossible for a game ball to win or difficult to win, to a state where it is possible for the game ball to win; and a second variable winning device that, in response to production of the second special game state, can be transformed from a state where it is impossible for a game ball to win or difficult to win, to a state where it is possible for the game ball to win. The first variable winning device and the second variable winning device have a retention function for retaining a game ball. The game machine further includes a guide part for guiding a game ball flowing down to a downstream side without entering the second variable winning device, to an arrangement direction of the first variable winning device, arranged at the downstream side of the second variable winning device.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention can execute a variable display game in which identification information is changed based on winning of a game ball in a starting area provided in the game area, and the player is given a result of the variable display game. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state for giving a gaming value to a player.

Conventionally, the game ball flowing down the game area is provided with a first start opening and a second start opening where the game ball can win a prize, and to the second start opening rather than the amount of bonus provided to the player based on the winning to the first start opening. The gaming machine in which the amount of bonus awarded to the player based on the winning of the game is high, and the first winning passage communicating with the first starting opening, the second winning passage communicating with the second starting opening, and the game ball And distribution means for distributing the first prize passage and the second prize passage, and a speed adjustment unit provided in the middle of the path of the first prize passage and slowing the moving speed of the game ball passing through the first prize passage. The moving time for the game ball distributed to the second winning passage to move to the second starting port is shorter than the moving time for the game ball distributed to the first winning passage to move to the first starting port A gaming machine is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-046179, A

However, the conventional gaming machine only allows the gaming ball to be retained by the retention device (speed adjustment unit), and the moving time for the gaming ball to move to the first starting opening is only extended, and a further effect can be expected It was not a thing. An object of the present invention is to effectively improve the rendering effect by a retention device for retaining gaming balls.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 can execute a variable display game in which identification information is changed based on winning of a game ball in a starting area provided in a game area, and the variable display In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state for giving a player a gaming value when a game result is a special result, the special gaming state includes a first special gaming state and a first special gaming state than the first special gaming state. A second special game state advantageous to the player, and at least, the game ball can be converted from a state incapable of winning or in a state difficult to win to a state in which the gaming ball is capable of winning according to the occurrence of the first special game state. The first variation winning device, and the second variation winning device capable of converting the gaming ball from a state incapable of winning or difficult to winning to a state in which the gaming ball can be won according to the occurrence of the second special gaming state, First The fluctuation winning device and the second fluctuation winning device have a retention function for holding gaming balls, and the second fluctuation winning device is disposed on the upstream side of the first fluctuation winning device, 2 A feature is that a guiding unit for guiding a game ball flowing downstream without winning in the fluctuation winning device in the arrangement direction of the first fluctuation winning device is disposed downstream of the second fluctuation winning device I assume.

According to the present invention, it is possible to effectively improve the rendering effect by the retention device for retaining the gaming balls.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of a back component. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the lower movable feature unit. It is a front view explaining operation of the 1st lower movable member. It is a front view explaining operation of the 2nd lower movable member. It is a front view explaining operation of the 2nd lower movable member. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the upper movable character unit. It is a front view of the upper movable character unit. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of an upper movable character part unit, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) It is a back view. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of an upper movable character part unit, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) It is a back view. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the center movable character unit. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of a center movable role unit, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) It is a back view. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of a center movable role unit, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) It is a back view. It is a front view of a special fluctuation winning combination device. It is a top view of a special fluctuation winning combination device. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of an opening / closing member, Comprising: (a) closed state, (b) It is an open state. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of special fluctuation winning combination device. It is a rear view of a front wall member. It is a figure which shows a rear wall member, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) It is a back view. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the main-body part. It is the figure seen from the left explaining the operation | movement of an opening / closing member unit, Comprising: (a) closed state, (b) It is an open state. It is a figure which shows an opening / closing member, Comprising: (a) Top view, (b) It is a front view. (A) Front view of opening-and-closing member unit, (b) It is AA sectional drawing. It is a bottom view explaining operation of an opening and closing member unit, and is (a) closed state and (b) open state. It is a top view explaining the flow-down aspect of the game ball in a special fluctuation winning combination device. It is a figure explaining the flow-down aspect of the game ball in a special fluctuation winning combination device, and is a perspective view seen from the (a) top view and the (b) right side. It is a figure explaining the flow-down aspect of the game ball in a special fluctuation prize-winning device, and is a perspective view seen from the left. It is a front view explaining the flow-down aspect of the game ball in a special fluctuation winning a prize device, and is (a) closed state and (b) open state. It is a figure explaining the behavior of the game ball at the time of opening an opening-and-closing member. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flow chart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining input processing. It is a flow chart explaining switch reading processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payment command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flow chart explaining game machine state check processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payment busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining special processing usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining special drawing information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining distribution processing. It is a flowchart explaining 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining the time reduction change frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining a production mode information check process. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a process transfer setting process 1 during fan fare / interval. FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process 1; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during special winning opening open. It is a flow chart explaining processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a process transfer setting process 2 during fan fare / interval. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting processing 2. FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating special processing ordinary processing shift setting processing 2; (A) is a flowchart explaining the small hit fanfare medium process, (b) is a flowchart explaining the small hit medium process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit middle process. It is a flowchart explaining small hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing. (A) is a flowchart explaining small hit residual ball processing, (b) is a flow chart explaining small hitting end processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining small hit end processing. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating special processing ordinary processing shift setting processing 3; It is a flowchart explaining a production | presentation command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining symbol change control processing. It is a flow chart explaining common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a common drawing usual processing. FIG. 17 is a flowchart for explaining a general-purpose process shift setting process 1; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the processing transfer setting processing during common drawing fluctuation. (A) is a flowchart explaining the processing during the common drawing fluctuation, (b) is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing during the common drawing display. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing display. It is a flowchart explaining a process transfer setting process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a power transmission operation shift setting process. (A) is a flow chart for explaining the routine electric bulb remaining ball processing, (b) is a flow chart for explaining the end processing shift setting process per common drawing. (A) is a flow chart for explaining the end processing per common drawing, (b) is a flow chart for explaining the common processing shift processing 2 for common processing. It is a flowchart explaining segment LED edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining starting opening signal editing processing. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in special game state. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in special game state. It is a figure explaining the selection rate of a state suggestion display. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a production control device. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining pre-reading symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining pre-reading change system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining big hit system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a count production setting process. It is a flow chart explaining fanfare production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining round production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining interval production setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining an ending production setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production in special gaming state. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production in special gaming state. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the special game state in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the count production setting processing in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the ending production setting processing in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the special game state in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the reset table of the state suggestion display in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the production button operation production processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the ending production setting processing in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the special game state in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the count production setting processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the ending production setting processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the presentation point control processing in the 3rd modification. It is a top view of the induction | guidance | derivation part in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the special change winning a prize apparatus in the 4th modification, and is a figure seen from the (a) top view and the (b) left. It is a figure explaining the special change winning a prize apparatus in the 4th modification, and is a figure seen from the (a) top view and the (b) left. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the special fluctuation winning combination device in the 5th modification. It is a rear view of the back wall member in the 5th modification. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the main-body part in the 5th modification. It is the perspective view seen from the back surface side of the main-body part in the 5th modification, Comprising: (a) Door part is a blockage | prevention state, (b) Door part is a permission state. It is a rear view of the main-body part in a 5th modification, Comprising: (a) Door part is blocking state, (b) Door part is in permission state. (A) The front view of a main-body part in the 5th modification, (b) BB sectional drawing in the state where a door part is blocked, (c) It is BB sectional drawing in a state where a door part is permitted. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of the game machine in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the operation state of the special fluctuation winning combination device in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability change operation area | region switch monitoring process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end processing in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the lever solenoid control process in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the modification of the induction channel in the 5th modification, and is a back view of (a) back wall member, (b) An enlarged view of a crooked part in the 1st mode, (c) the 2nd FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of a bent portion in the aspect of FIG. It is a front view of the game board in the 6th modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in the 6th modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in the 6th modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in the 6th modification. It is a front view of the game board in the 7th modification. It is a figure explaining the image in the reflective surface in a 7th modification. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the modification of the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the modification of the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a game state transition diagram showing an example of transition of a game state in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relationship between operation | movement and the various time of the normal fluctuation prize winning device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a table which shows an example of the big hit probability in the 2nd embodiment, the small hit probability, the losing probability, and the probability variation probability. It is a flowchart explaining the starting opening switch monitoring process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening switch common processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining special map reservation information judging processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining big hit flag 1 setting processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining big hit flag 2 setting processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining small hit judging processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a special figure display in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the time reduction change frequency update process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 1 in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 2 in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit middle processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining small hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment.

First Embodiment Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps and LEDs are internally incorporated on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration or effect, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a delivery abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. has an abnormality notification color (for example, red , And a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting a sound (for example, a sound effect). Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided on a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reserved plate) for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There are provided an upper flat ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower tray (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls dispensed in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a hitting launch device, and the like. Further, at the upper edge portion of the upper tray 21, a presentation button 25 incorporating a presentation button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided. Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25 A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Also, to the right of the effect button 25, the ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball loan from the adjacent ball lending machine, and the discharge button operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device is supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming ball 32 toward the gaming area 32 on the front of the gaming board 30. To fire. In addition, the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to perform an operation or the like in which the player operates in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. Further, on the left side of the gaming area 32, a guiding wall 491 is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 and forms a guiding path 490 for guiding the shot gaming ball to a predetermined position of the gaming area 32.

In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and to project forward than the display surface of the display device 41 to make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (brown tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect, etc. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, and the like) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen. In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that performs a game effect by operating. The panel rendering device 44 is operable toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common drawing start gate) 34 is provided which gives a start condition of the common drawing variation display game. The game ball that has won the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 32). Also, two general winning openings 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening is on the lower right portion of the special variation winning device 38 arranged at the lower right portion of the center case 40. 35 are arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 32).

Below the center case 40, the first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) and the second special view fluctuation display for giving the start condition of the first special view fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) There is provided a winning device 90 having a second start winning opening 97 (start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of a game (special figure 2 variation display game). The winning device 90 includes a distributing member 92 which alternately distributes the gaming balls having flowed into the inflow port 91 at the upper portion into the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97. The distributing member 92 is pivotable about a pivoting axis along the front-rear direction, and the tilting direction changes according to the weight of the game ball flowing in, and the first start winning hole 36 on the left and the second on the right The game balls are distributed alternately to the start winning opening 97. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 32), and the game ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 has the start opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 32) Detected by Further, below the winning device 90, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that have not been won in a winning port or the like.

Further, on the right side of the center case 40, a normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the second special view fluctuation display game is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow gaming balls to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the right, and this movable member 37b is always It is almost vertical and keeps the closed closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to which the game ball can not flow. Then, when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is turned so that the upper end side falls to the right by the common electric solenoid 37c (refer to FIG. 32) as a driving device The game ball can easily change into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 32). In addition, it is possible to be able to win even when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the closed state, and in the closed state, it may be harder to win than in the open state.

On the right side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a flow-down path 615 covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicating with the upper and lower is formed, and gaming balls that did not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 pass downward through the flow-off path 615 Flow down. Below the flow passage 615, a guiding portion 616 is provided. The guiding portion 616 is an inclined surface where the upper surface 617 falls to the left, and the gaming ball falling downward is received by the upper surface 617 so as to be guided to the left where the special fluctuation winning device 38 is present. Further, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 for displaying information related to the special figure variation display game.

The information display device 630 is a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special view variable display game, and the second start memory, which is the right to execute the second special view change display game. A second information display unit for displaying the number of In addition, the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation display game is displayed by the fourth symbol separately from the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed by the display device 41 by the first to third symbols. The decoration special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the 2nd special figure fluctuation display game with the 4th design separately from the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed with the 1st-3rd symbol with the 3rd information display part or the display device 41 A fourth information display unit for displaying a display game is provided.

The first information display unit and the second information display unit are each configured by two light emitting members, and the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit are each configured by one light emitting member. In the second display device, these six light emitting members are arranged side by side in two rows, three on each side. The upper two light emitting members in the right row constitute a first information display unit, and the upper two light emitting members in the left row constitute a second information display unit. The lower one light emitting member in the right row constitutes a third information display unit, and the lower one light emitting member in the left row constitutes a fourth information display unit.

Although the first information display unit and the second information display unit are each configured by two light emitting members, a design is applied around the respective information display units to show that the two light emitting members are related. At first glance, it can be understood that one light emitting member constitutes one information display unit. In addition, although the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit are each configured by one light emitting member, the designs around these information display units are designed to be independent. At first glance, it can be understood that the information display unit is constituted by one light emitting member. The design around the light emitting member is considered to have a sense of unity with the design of the entire game machine so that the aesthetic appearance is not lost. In addition, the design around the light emitting member is not the one to which a seal or the like is attached, but is formed to a member constituting the guiding portion 616, which can reduce the labor and cost at the time of manufacturing.

Furthermore, in the lower right portion of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, a special fluctuation winning device (big winning opening) 38 which can be converted into a non-accepting state and an easily accepting state according to the result of the special view fluctuation display game is arranged. It is set up. The details of the configuration of the special variation winning device 38 will be described later, but from the closed state where the opening / closing member 990 closed the big winning opening as a result of the special view variation display game as an auxiliary game The opening / closing member 990 retracts to convert the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) that can be received. That is, the special variation winning device 38 has a special winning opening which is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 990 driven by the special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 32) as a drive device, and is in the special gaming state (second special gaming state) In the small hit game state (first special game state), by converting the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, the flow of gaming balls into the big winning opening is facilitated, and the player is given a predetermined The game value (prize ball) is given. A special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 32) is disposed inside the special winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. .

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is taken as the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is taken as the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the power to shoot the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike) to the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the general winning opening 35 of the winning device 90. It is possible to aim for winning in the common drawing start gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special fluctuation winning device 38 by firing the game ball to the right game area (so-called right hitting). It has become.

In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game making a special figure change display game and winnings for the common view start gate 34 A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a common drawing variation display game as a trigger and displaying various information.

The collective display device 50 is a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. The special view 1 display (first special view change display unit) 51 for the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display The game includes a special view 2 display (second special view fluctuation display unit) 52 and various displays configured of LED lamps. The various displays include a special view 1 reserve display for notifying the start memory number of the special view 1 change display game, and a special view 2 reserve display for notifying the start memory number of the special view 2 change display game. . In addition, the round display section which displays the number of rounds at the big hit (the number of opening and closing times of the special variation winning device), the first gaming status display section which reports whether it is a time saving status (during general power support or specific gaming status), left A second gaming state display unit is included to notify the player of a striking manner (a striking manner corresponding to the gaming state) to the player among the striking (normal striking) and the right striking. In addition, the third gaming state display unit (third gaming state indicator, probability state display unit) that displays that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the common drawing fluctuation display game And a general drawing hold indicator for informing the starting memory number of the common drawing variation display game.

In the special figure 1 display 51, during the variation time of the first special figure variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display is repeatedly performed in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the variation time of the first special view variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (resulting mode) corresponding to the result of the first special view variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 1 in-motion display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result aspect form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the first special figure variation display game.

In the special figure 2 display 52, during the variation time of the second special figure variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display is repeatedly performed in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the variation time of the second special view variation display game is ended, the lighting pattern (resulting mode) corresponding to the result of the second special view variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the special figure 2 fluctuating display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result aspect form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the second special figure variation display game.

In the common drawing indicator, during the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing fluctuation display is repeatedly performed in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game ends, the lighting pattern (resulting aspect) according to the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the general drawing fluctuating display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result aspect form identification information (common drawing, normal symbol) for displaying the common drawing fluctuation display game.

The special view 1 suspension display displays the number of first start memories (first suspension number), which is the right to execute the first special view variation display game, by turning off, flashing, or lighting the plurality of light emitting units. The special view 2 suspension display displays the number of second start memories (second suspension number), which is the right to execute the second special view variation display game, by turning off, flashing, or lighting the plurality of light emitting units. The common drawing suspension display displays the number of common drawing start memories (the common drawing reservation number), which is the right to execute the common drawing variable display game, by turning off, blinking, and lighting the plurality of light emitting units.

When the special game mode is not in effect, the round display unit turns off all the light emitting units, and during the special game mode, the lighting mode corresponds to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. In the case of a normal gaming state in which the time saving state is not occurring (when the fluctuation time shortening function is not activated), the first gaming state display portion (time shortening state informing portion) turns the lamp off and the time saving state occurs. If it is (when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated), the lamp is turned on. The second gaming state display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 turns off the lamp if the game state in which the left-handed game is more advantageous for the player than the right-handed game (normally hit), turns the lamp off. If the player is in the game state advantageous to the player (right strike), the lamp is turned on. The third gaming state display unit turns on the LED when the power is turned on in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when it is not in the high probability state.

Next, details of the gaming board 30 in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming board 30 comprises a gaming board main body 80 having a substantially rectangular plate shape, a front component 600 constituting the front portion of the center case 40, and a rear side portion of the center case 40. And 30 a rear component 700 to which the various members required are attached.

The front component 600 is attached by being fitted from the front side to an opening 81 which is formed in the game board main body 80 and which penetrates back and forth. The front component has an annular base member 610 to which various members are attached. The base member 610 is inserted into an opening 81 penetrating in the back and forth direction formed in the game board main body 80, and with a peripheral wall 611 forming a front portion of an inner peripheral wall in a concave chamber-like space recessed backward than the game area 32 And a plate-like hook-shaped attachment portion 612 formed vertically to the peripheral wall 611 at the front end of the peripheral wall 611.

The portion of the attachment portion 612 formed outside the space surrounded by the peripheral wall 611 is the portion of the opening 81 when the front component 600 is inserted from the front side into the opening 81 formed in the game board main body 80. It extends outside the peripheral edge, and its back surface is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80. As a result, the front and rear positions of the front component 600 with respect to the gaming board main body 80 are set to predetermined front and rear positions. Further, a plurality of screw holes are formed in the mounting portion 612, and the front component 600 can be fixed to the game board main body 80 by screws. Furthermore, a part of the attachment portion 612 is disposed on the front side of the gaming board main body 80 and at a position visible to the player, and the front face is decorated. In addition, in the base member 610, a screw hole, a screwing portion, a boss for positioning, a recess for receiving the boss, a slit for receiving the rib, and the like are formed, so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. It has become.

A restriction wall 613 is provided on the front surface of the base member 610 except for a portion where a stage portion 620, a warp flow passage forming member 614, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 described later are disposed. The restriction wall 613 is moved forward by an amount equal to the width of the play area 32 (the width from the front of the game board main body 80 to the back of the cover 14 covering the front of the game board 30) than the attachment portion 612 It has been extended. Therefore, by attaching the front structural member 600 to the predetermined position of the gaming board main body 80, the restriction wall 613 located on the front side of the mounting portion 612 extends into the gaming area 32, and the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32 is the center It is designed to regulate the flow into the case 40. Thereby, the visibility of the display device 41 is secured, and the number of inflows of gaming balls to the stage unit 620 is limited.

In addition, a warp flow is formed on the left side of the base member 610 on the left side as viewed from the front side to form a warp flow path for receiving the game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40 and guiding it to the stage portion 620. A path forming member 614 is attached. The warp flow path forming member 614 is attached to the front of the attachment portion 612, and a cover glass (transparent member) 14 for covering the front and rear of the game board 30 from the front of the game board main body 80 It is designed to extend forward by an amount equal to the width to the back of the. Further, the upper end of the warp flow passage forming member 614 is continuous with the lower end of the restriction wall 613 attached so as to extend forward than the attaching portion 612 at the left side when viewed from the front side of the base member 610 It has become.

The warp flow path formed by the warp flow path forming member 614 is a cylindrical flow path having an inner diameter that allows the game balls to flow down in a row, and opens toward the left playing area 32 of the center case 40, It is possible to receive game balls flowing down the game area 32. The upstream end forms an inlet of the warp channel. Furthermore, the warp flow path is an L-shaped flow path for guiding the gaming ball, which has flowed in from the upstream end, downward and to the right and then to the rear. The downstream end opens rearward, and guides the game ball to the left end of the stage unit 620.

In the stage unit 620, the game balls can roll back and forth and left and right, and both left and right sides are inclined surfaces toward the center, and a central portion directly above the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90 protrudes upward. It is formed in a substantially W shape. The central portion of the stage portion 620 protrudes upward but is lower than the left and right ends. The gaming ball having passed through the warp flow path from the left end flows into the stage portion 620, and rolls along the left-right direction. In addition, a game ball bounced below the stage unit 620 can also flow.

In the substantially W-shaped stage portion 620, an inclined surface 621 that descends forward is formed at the lowest portions located on both sides of the upwardly projecting central portion. Due to the inclined surface 621, the gaming ball whose flow is weakened on the stage unit 620 is guided from the front end of the stage unit 620 to the game area 32 below.

Further, in the substantially W-shaped stage portion 620, a groove-like downflow passage 622 which extends along the front-rear direction and descends rearward is provided at the apex of the upwardly projecting center portion. It is formed. The flow-down path 622 is a shallow groove, and many gaming balls roll left and right without fitting into the groove. The gaming ball fitted in the flow-off path 622 is guided rearward, flows into an inlet (not shown), and flows into a guiding channel 623 formed below the stage portion 620. The induction flow channel 623 is a flow channel that descends forward, and the downstream end is located immediately above the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90 so as to flow into the winning device 90 with high probability.

In addition, on the right side of the front component 600 as viewed from the front side, a general drawing start gate 34 through which game balls can pass is provided at the top and bottom. The common view starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a for detecting the passing game ball. Further, a normal fluctuation winning device 37 having a movable member 37 b is provided below the common view starting gate 34. The gaming ball that has won a prize in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is guided to the rear of the front component 600 and flows into a discharge flow path (not shown). Also, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a starting opening 2 switch for detecting a winning game ball and a common electric solenoid 37c for driving the movable member 37b.

On the right side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a flow-down path 615 covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicating with the upper and lower is formed, and gaming balls that did not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 pass downward through the flow-off path 615 Flow down. Below the flow passage 615, a guiding portion 616 is provided. The upper surface 617 of the induction portion is an inclined surface which descends to the left, and the upper surface 617 receives the gaming ball flowing down the downflow passage 615 downward and guides it to the left. Further, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 for displaying information related to the special figure variation display game.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the rear component 700 has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess 711 opened forward, and the rear base member 710 has screw holes and screws. A stopper, a boss for positioning, a recess for receiving the boss, a slit for receiving the rib, and the like are formed so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. Further, at the front end of the rear base member 710, a hook-like fixing portion 713 extending outward perpendicularly to the side wall 712 is formed, and the rear component 700 is formed on the back surface of the game board main body 80. It can be fixed in position. Further, a through hole 715 is formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 so as to penetrate in the front and rear direction. The through holes 715 allow visual recognition of the display surface of the display device 41 attached to the rear of the rear base member 710.

The display device 41 attached to the back surface of the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 includes a liquid crystal display device having a display surface capable of covering the whole of the through holes 715 formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. There is. The display device 41 is attached so that the display surface is on the front side, so that an image of the display surface can be viewed from the front of the game board 30 through the through holes 715 formed in the rear base member 710. It is done. The display device 41 is not limited to one including a liquid crystal display device, and may include, for example, a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A lower movable character unit 730, an upper movable character unit 800, and a central movable character unit 880 are provided inside the recess 711 of the rear base member 710 to form a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operation. ing.

As shown in FIG. 3, the lower movable item unit 730 is disposed below the through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the lower movable product unit 730 includes two first lower movable members 740 and 741 which simulate a brow and a second lower movable member 770 which simulates a brow. The first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are operable to appear on the front side of the display device 41. In the lower movable role product unit 730, a first lower portion disposed on the front side as a base portion for mounting a drive mechanism for operating the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 and various members. A base portion 731, a second lower base portion 732 disposed in the center, and a third lower base portion 733 disposed on the back surface side are provided.

The motor 734 serving as a drive source for driving the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 has a drive shaft in the front-rear direction at the lower right portion seen from the front side of the third lower base portion 733 It is attached along the line. The lower movable role unit 730 is provided with first lower movable members 740 and 741 and a second lower movable member 770, which are driven by one motor 734. The driving force from the motor 734 is a first gear 735 rotatable about an axis along the longitudinal direction and a second gear 737 rotatable about an axis along the longitudinal direction meshing with the first gear 735. It is simultaneously transmitted. The first gear 735 is for operating the first lower movable members 740 and 741, and on the front side, a first drive shaft 736 for transmitting power to the first lower movable members 740 and 741 extends forward. It is provided to do.

Also, the second gear 737 is a second
A second drive shaft 738 for transmitting power to the second lower movable member 770 is provided on the back surface side so as to extend rearward, for operating the lower movable member 770. As described later, when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 drive the motor 734 in a predetermined direction (here, clockwise when viewed from the front side), the driving force is transmitted via the first drive shaft 736 to operate. When the second lower movable member 770 drives the motor 734 in the direction opposite to the above predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise as viewed from the front side), the driving force is transmitted via the second drive shaft 738. Are configured to operate.

As shown in FIG. 6, one first lower movable member 740 has a bearing portion 742 at the lower end portion, and the pivot portion 751 along the front and rear direction provided with the bearing portion 742 at the upper portion of the second lower base portion 732. Is pivotally supported by The bearing portion 742 is a gear, and the first lower movable member 740 can operate around the rotation shaft 751 by receiving the driving force from the motor 734. Similarly, the other first lower movable member 741 is also provided with a bearing 743 at its lower end, and this bearing 743 is pivoted by a pivot shaft 752 along the front and rear direction provided at the top of the second lower base 732 It is pivotally supported. The bearing portion 743 is a gear, and the first lower movable member 741 can operate around the pivot shaft 752 by receiving the driving force from the motor 734.

The gears of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740 pivotally supported by the left pivot shaft 751 when viewed from the front are doubled in the front and rear, and the driving force from the motor 734 with the front gear It is supposed to receive The rear gear transmits the driving force to the gear of the bearing portion 743 provided on the other first lower movable member 741, and the two first lower movable members 740, one motor 734, The 741 can operate at the same time.

The gear on the front side of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740 pivotally supported by the left pivot shaft 751 when viewed from the front is disposed below the bearing portion 742 and is centered on an axis along the longitudinal direction Meshing with the rotatable gear 753. The gear 753 engages with a rack gear 761 provided on the top of a slide member 760 slidably provided to the left and right with respect to the second lower base 732 on the front surface of the second lower base 732. The first lower movable members 740 and 741 operate by moving the slide member 760 to the left and right.

The slide member 760 is a flat member, and the plate surface is disposed along the front surface of the second lower base portion 732. The slide member 760 is formed with an oblong supported portion 762 that penetrates back and forth and extends to the left and right, and the supported portion 762 is a support shaft that protrudes forward and is formed on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732. By inserting 754, it is supported slidably in the left and right direction. Furthermore, the first lower base portion 731 attached to the front of the second lower base portion 732 covers the slide member 760 so that the slide member 760 is held so as not to fall forward.

Further, in the slide member 760, a linear through hole 763 penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed. The through hole 763 includes an arc-shaped portion and a straight portion extending downward from the right end of the arc-shaped portion when viewed from the front side. The first drive shaft 736 provided in the first gear 735 is inserted from the rear into the through hole 763 so that the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the slide member 760.

FIG. 6A shows an initial state in which both the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are at initial positions. In this state, the first drive shaft 736 is located at the connecting portion between the arc-like portion and the straight portion in the through hole. The radius of the circular arc in the circular arc portion of the through hole 763 is equal to the length from the center of the first gear 735 to the center of the first drive shaft 736. In the initial state, the center of the first gear 735 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arc-like portion of the through hole 763 coincide with each other in the front-rear direction.

From this initial state, when the first gear 735 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front side, the first drive shaft 736 moves the linear portion of the through hole 763 while pushing the slide member 760 to the left. As a result, as shown in FIG. 6B, the slide member 760 slides to the left, and the rack gear 761 rotates the gear 753 to rotate the first lower movable members 740 and 741 upward. And appear in the front side of the display device 41. When returning to the initial state, the operation is opposite to that described above. The second lower movable member 770 can be operated by driving the motor 734 such that the first gear 735 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front side from the initial state as described later. At this time, since the first drive shaft 736 moves along the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 763, the slide member 760 is not pressed and the first lower movable members 740 and 741 do not operate. The same applies to returning the second lower movable member 770 from the operated state to the initial state.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the second lower movable member 770 has a pivot shaft 771 at the lower end along the front-rear direction, and this pivot shaft is the second lower base portion 732 and the third lower base portion 733. Is rotatably supported. Further, in the vicinity of the rotation shaft 771, a linear through hole 772 penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed. The through hole 772 has an arc-shaped portion and a straight portion extending from the left end of the arc-shaped portion as viewed from the front side in the state shown in FIG. The second drive shaft 738 provided in the second gear 737 is inserted from the front into the through hole 772 so that the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the second lower movable member 770.

FIG. 7A shows an initial state in which both the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are at initial positions. In this state, the second drive shaft 738 is located at the connecting portion between the arc-like portion and the straight portion in the through hole 772. The radius of the circular arc in the circular arc portion of the through hole 772 is equal to the length from the center of the second gear 737 to the center of the second drive shaft 738. Then, in the initial state, the center of the second gear 737 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arc-like portion of the through hole 772 coincide with each other in the front-rear direction.

From this initial state, when the motor 734 is driven to rotate the second gear 737 clockwise as viewed from the front side, the second drive shaft 738 pushes the second lower movable member 770 upward, while the through hole 772 is formed. Move the straight part. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7B, the second lower movable member 770 pivots upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41. When returning to the initial state, the operation is opposite to that described above. As described above, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 can be operated by driving the motor 734 such that the second gear 737 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the second drive shaft 738 moves along the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 772, the second lower movable member 770 does not operate without pressing the second lower movable member 770. The same applies to the case where the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are returned from the operating state to the initial state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, in a state where the second lower movable member 770 pivots upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41, effect display is performed to emphasize the second lower movable member 770 on the display device 41. It has become possible. Of course, even when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 appear on the front side of the display device 41, effects may be displayed in the same manner. Further, the display mode of the effect display is not limited to this, and any display that emphasizes the movable member appearing on the front side of the display device 41 may be used.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs are provided in a portion imitating the eyelid in the second lower movable member 770, so that decoration by light emission can be performed. In addition, the letters "Dearka" are also made to emit light. These four characters are designed to emit light independently of one another, but for "ru", the part "no" and the part "le" emit light independently further. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7 (b) and FIG. 8, it becomes possible to cause only the “de” part and the “no” part of “ru” to emit light and display “dere”. There is. By dividing the characters and displaying different information as described above, it is possible to perform a novel effect. In addition, the display of "Dele" informs that it is the Dere mode which is one of a plurality of effect modes. In this manner, by notifying the effect mode by the display on the movable member, it is possible to convey the set effect mode to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIG. 3, the upper movable character unit 800 is disposed above and on both sides of the through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the upper movable character unit 800 includes a circular first upper movable member 848 and a second upper movable member 860 imitating a tiger hand, and these first upper movable members By performing operation 848 and the second upper movable member 860, effects are provided.

The upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a base member 801 attached to the rear base member 710, and a movable member unit 820 which is vertically movable with respect to the base member 801 and includes a first upper movable member 848. . The base member 801 is U-shaped as viewed from the front side, and the upper base portion 802 disposed above the through hole 715 and the left base portion disposed to the left as viewed from the front side of the through hole 715 And a right base portion 804 disposed to the right when viewed from the front side of the through hole 715.

At the right end portion of the left base portion 803 and at the left end portion of the right base portion 804, a guide portion 805 extending in the vertical direction is provided. The guide portion 805 guides the movable member unit 820 in the vertical direction. The left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 are each provided with a drive mechanism 806 for driving the movable member unit 820 up and down. Each drive mechanism 806 has a motor 807 as a drive source, and by driving the motor 807, the arm 808 is pivoted. At the tip of the arm 808, a drive shaft 809 is provided. The drive shaft 809 is connected to the link member 830 of the movable member unit 820. By driving the motor 807, the link member 830 can be operated to drive the movable member unit 820 up and down.

The movable member unit 820 includes a link member 830 connected to the drive mechanism 806, a unit base 841 for attaching various members, a first upper movable member 848 disposed on the front side of the unit base 841, and a unit base A drive unit 850 disposed on the back surface side of the unit 841 to drive the first upper movable member and the second upper movable member, a back surface cover 849 covering the back surface of the unit base 841 from the rear of the drive unit 850, and a back surface cover 849 And a guided member 842 fixed to the back surface of the base member and guided by a guide portion 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804.

The link members 830 are rotatably attached to the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804, respectively, and are arranged to extend in directions opposite to each other. The link member 830 is a pivot shaft 810 extending forward along the longitudinal direction provided to the left base portion 803 or a pivot shaft extending forward along the longitudinal direction provided to the right base portion 804. A bearing portion 831 into which one end 810 is inserted is provided at one end, and is rotatably supported by the left base portion 803 or the right base portion 804. Further, the link member 830 is formed with a first guide portion 832 which is an elongated hole for inserting the drive shaft 809 provided to the arm 808 of the drive mechanism 806, and the motor 807 is driven to rotate the arm 808. By doing this, the link member 830 is pivoted up and down while the drive shaft 809 moves along the first guide portion 832.

Furthermore, a connection shaft 833 for connecting to the unit base 841 of the movable member unit 820 is provided so as to extend backward at the other end opposite to the one end where the bearing 831 is provided in the link member 830 ing. Further, the link member 830 is provided with a support shaft 86 provided at one end portion of the back surface of the second upper movable member 860 attached so as to cover the front side of the link member 830.
A second guide 834 which is an elongated hole through which 1 can be inserted is formed, and the second guide 834 guides and supports one end of the second upper movable member 860.

The unit base portion 841 includes a circular main body portion 844 and a supported portion 845 extending from the main body portion 844 to the left and right. A third guiding portion 846 which is a long hole penetrating in the front and rear direction and extending left and right is formed in the supported portion 845, and the connecting shaft 833 of the link member 830 can slide on the third guiding portion 846. The unit base 841 is operated up and down according to the operation of the link member 830 based on the drive of the motor 807. Further, at the center of the main body 844 is formed an insertion portion 847 through which a drive shaft (not shown) extending backward from the center of the circular first upper movable member 848 can be inserted. The insertion portion 847 rotatably supports the first upper movable member 848 by rotatably supporting the inserted drive shaft.

The drive unit 850 includes a motor 851 serving as a drive source, a rotation drive unit 852 connected to the first upper movable member 848, and a drive arm 853 for driving the second upper movable member 860. By driving the motor 851, the rotational drive unit 852 rotates about an axis along the front-rear direction. The drive arm 853 has one end connected to a connection shaft 856 provided on the back surface of the gear 855 rotated by the drive of the motor 851, and the drive arm 853 swings to the left and right by driving the motor 851. It is supposed to be.

The drive shaft of the first upper movable member 848 inserted into the insertion portion 847 of the unit base portion 841 is connected to the rotation center of the rotation drive portion 852 and the drive shaft is rotated by the rotation of the rotation drive portion 852 The first upper movable member 848 is configured to rotate. Further, the other end of the drive arm 853 is connected to a connection shaft 862 provided on the back surface of the other end of the second upper movable member 860, and the drive arm 853 swings laterally to move the second upper The member 860 swings to the left and right.

Further, back surface cover 849 is fixed to the back surface side of unit base portion 841 so as to cover drive portion 850. A guided member 842 is fixed to the back surface of the back cover 849, and thereby, the guided member 842 and the unit base 841 are fixed. The guided member 842 is a plate-like member arranged to extend in the left-right direction, and guided at the left and right ends by a guiding portion 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 A part 843 is provided.

10 to 12 show the operation of the upper movable part unit 800. Note that some members are omitted for the sake of explanation. FIG. 10 shows an initial state where the movable member unit 820 is at the upper end of the operating range, and FIGS. 11 and 12 show an operating state where the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operating range. In the initial state shown in FIG. 10, the movable member unit 820 is at the upper end position in the operation range. From this initial state, when the drive mechanism 806 is operated to rotate the drive shaft 809 provided at the tip of the arm 808 toward the display device 41, the link member 830 rotates downward, and the movable member unit 820 Moves down. Then, in an operating state where the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operating range, as shown in FIG. 11A, the drive shaft 809 is located at the lower end in the rotating range, and the link member 830 is also at the lower end in the rotating range It is located in That is, the first drive mechanism section for the first upper movable member 848 to be a first effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive mechanism 806 and the link member 830 to operate the first effect movable body And constitute a first effect device.

Further, when the drive unit 850 is operated, the first upper movable member 848 rotates in one direction, and the second upper movable member 860 is closer to the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. Repeating the operation from side to side between the state separated from the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. When the second upper movable member 860 is close to the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. 11 (a), the connecting shaft 856 provided on the back surface of the gear 855 is as shown in FIG. 11 (b). In this state, the drive arms 853 bring the second upper movable member 860 closer to the first upper movable member 848. By rotating the gear 855 from this state, the connection shaft 856 pushes the drive arm outward, and the second upper movable member 860 operates to be separated from the first upper movable member 848.

Then, in the state where the second upper movable member 860 is most separated from the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. 12A, the connection shaft provided on the back surface of the gear 855 as shown in FIG. 856 is in the state of being most separated from each other, and the driving arm 853 is in the state of separating the second upper movable member 860 from the first upper movable member 848. By rotating the gear 855 from this state, the connection shaft 856 pulls the drive arm inward, and the second upper movable member 860 operates to approach the first upper movable member 848. As the gear 855 continues to rotate in one direction, this operation is repeated, and the second upper movable member 860 moves to the left and right. That is, the second upper movable member 860 is a second effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive unit 850 is a second drive mechanism portion for operating the second effect movable body. These constitute the second effect device.

In addition, the second upper movable member 860 is disposed so as to cover and hide the link member 830 in both the initial position shown in FIG. 10 and the position after the operation shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. It is supposed to work. By covering the link member 830 with the second upper movable member 860 in operation, the player's awareness can be attracted to the second upper movable member 860, and it is possible to effectively prevent the line of sight from going to the link member 830. A high concealing effect can be obtained as compared to the case of covering with a decorative member that does not Also, particularly at the initial position, as shown in FIG. 2, the link member 830 is covered so as not to be visible to the player. As a result, in the initial position which occupies most of the game, unnecessary portions can not be seen from the player and the decorativeness is improved.

From the above, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and in the gaming machine 10 that generates the special game state advantageous to the player when the game result is a special result, the game-related effects are controlled The first effect device (the first upper movable member 848, the drive mechanism 806, the link member 830) and the second effect device that perform effects related to the game by being controlled by the effect control means (effect control device 300) and the effect control means. And a first effect movable body (a first upper movable member 848) capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, provided with the effect device (a second upper movable member 860 and a drive unit 850). A second effect movable body including a first drive mechanism (a drive mechanism 806 and a link member 830) for operating the first effect movable body, and the second effect device can perform a predetermined effect operation (2nd top) Moving member 860) and a second drive mechanism (drive unit 850) for operating the second effect movable body, and the second effect movable body is disposed to cover the first drive mechanism. It will be.

Therefore, since the second effect movable body is disposed so as to cover the first drive mechanism portion, it becomes difficult for the player to see an unnecessary part, and the effect of the effect device operated can be enhanced. Can be improved. In particular, by covering the first drive mechanism with the second effect movable body operating, the player's awareness can be attracted to the second effect movable body, and the line of sight can be effectively prevented from going to the first drive mechanism. As compared with the case of simply covering with a decorative member that does not operate, a high hiding effect can be obtained.

In addition, the second effect movable body (second upper movable member 860) is played with the first drive mechanism (link member 830) in a state where at least the first effect movable body (first upper movable member 848) is in the initial position. It is made to cover so that it can not be seen visually. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to see an unnecessary part when in the initial position which occupies most of the game, so that the rendering effect by the operating rendering device can be enhanced, and the interest of the gaming can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 3, the central movable product unit 880 is disposed to surround the through hole 715. As shown in FIG. 13 to FIG. 15, the central movable character unit 880 operates such that a plurality of central movable effect members 900, 910, 920, 930 divided into four are combined in front of the display device 41. It is the one that performs the

The center movable character unit 880 includes a movable effect base member 881 attached to the rear base member 710. In addition, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 which are disposed and operated on the upper front side of the movable effect base member 881 and the third which are disposed and operated on the lower front side of the movable effect base member 881 The center movable effect member 920 and the fourth center movable effect member 930 are provided.

In the movable effect base member 881, the first center movable effect member 900 and the second center movable effect member 910 are attached at the center in the left-right direction of the portion located on the upper side of the display device 41. In this portion, a first pivot shaft 882 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the first central movable effect member, and the operation of the first central movable effect member are guided. A first guiding portion 883 is provided which is a long hole penetrating back and forth for the purpose. In addition, a second rotation shaft 884 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the second central movable effect member, and front and rear for guiding the operation of the second central movable effect member A second guiding portion 885 is provided which is an elongated hole passing through.

A drive source for operating the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 is on the right side as viewed from the front side of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located above the display device 41. A motor 886 is provided. A plurality of gears or the like for transmitting the driving force of the motor 886 to the first central movable effect member 900 is provided on the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 and in the portion from the first rotation shaft 882 to the motor 886 A drive mechanism is disposed, and a back surface cover 896 is attached to cover the back surface of the drive mechanism.

Further, in the movable effect base member 881, the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are attached to the center in the left-right direction of the portion positioned below the display device 41. In this part, the operation of the third pivot shaft 891 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the third central movable effect member and the operation of the third central movable effect member are guided. A third guiding portion 892 is provided which is a long hole penetrating back and forth for the purpose. In addition, the fourth pivot shaft 893 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the fourth central movable effect member, and the longitudinal for guiding the operation of the fourth central movable effect member A fourth guiding portion 894 is provided which is an elongated hole passing through. A motor serving as a driving source for operating the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 on the left side of the front side of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located below the display device 41 895 is provided.

The first central movable effect member 900 disposed at the upper right portion includes a decorative portion 901 which is to be decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. In addition, a first bearing portion 902 is provided at one end of the first central movable effect member 900 before and after the first pivot shaft 882 is inserted, and the first central movable effect member 900 is the first It is pivotally supported around a dynamic shaft 882.

Further, in the vicinity of the first bearing portion 902, a fan-shaped first sector gear 903 and a second sector gear 904 centered on the rotation center of the first central movable effect member 900 are provided. The first sector gear 903 is provided to face the right as viewed from the front side. The first sector gear 903 faces the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 through penetrating portions 887 which are formed on the right side of the first rotation shaft 882 of the movable effect base member 881 and which penetrates back and forth. There is. The rear surface side of the movable effect base member 881 meshes with a gear for transmitting the driving force from the motor 886.

Further, the second sector gear 904 is provided to face the left as viewed from the front side. The second sector gear 904 is engaged with a third sector gear 913 provided on a second central movable effect member 910 disposed adjacent to the left of the first central movable effect member 900. As a result, the driving force from the motor 886 received by the first sector gear 903 is also transmitted to the second central movable effect member 910 via the second sector gear 904. Further, on the back surface of the first center movable effect member 900, a guided shaft 905 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 905 is inserted into the first guide portion 883 and is guided along the extending direction of the first guide portion 883 when the first center movable effect member 900 rotates. Thus, the smooth operation of the first center movable effect member 900 is enabled.

The second center movable presentation member 910 disposed at the upper left portion includes a decorative portion 911 which is to be decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Further, at one end of the second central movable effect member 910, there is provided a second bearing portion 912 penetrating back and forth through which the second pivot shaft 884 is inserted, and the second central movable effect member 910 is the second It is pivotally supported about a dynamic shaft 884.

Further, in the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912, a fan-shaped third sector gear 913 centering on the rotation center of the second center movable presentation member 910 is provided. The third sector gear 913 is provided to face the right as viewed from the front side. The third sector gear 913 engages with the second sector gear 904 provided on the first center movable effect member 900 disposed adjacent to the right of the second center movable effect member 910. Further, on the back surface of the second central movable effect member 910, a guided shaft 914 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 914 is inserted into the second guiding portion 885, and is guided along the extending direction of the second guiding portion 885 when the second center movable effect member 910 rotates. Thus, the smooth operation of the second center movable presentation member 910 is enabled.

In the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912, an engaging portion 915 extending rearward is provided. The engaging portion 915 is configured to face the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 through the penetrating portions 888 that are formed on the left side of the second rotation shaft 884 in the movable effect base member 881 and that penetrates back and forth. There is. Then, as shown in FIG. 14B, one end portion of the torsion coil spring 889 is engaged with the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881. The other end of the torsion coil spring 889 is locked to a locking portion 890 formed on the movable effect base member 881 so that the engaging portion 915 of the second central movable effect member 910 is urged upward. It is supposed to be. Thus, the biasing force of the torsion coil spring 889 assists in holding the first center movable effect member 900 and the second center movable effect member 910 at the initial position, which is the position of the upper end in the operation range, and This assists in returning the first center movable effect member 900 and the second center movable effect member 910 that have been operated to the initial position.

As shown in FIG. 13, the third central movable effect member 920 disposed at the lower left portion includes a decorative portion 921 which is to be decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. In addition, a third bearing portion 922 is provided at one end of the third central movable effect member 920 before and after the third pivot shaft 891 is inserted. It is pivotally supported rotatably about a dynamic shaft 891.

Further, in the vicinity of the third bearing portion 922, a sector-shaped fourth sector gear 923 and a fifth sector gear 924 centering around the rotation center of the third central movable effect member 920 are provided. The fourth sector gear 923 is provided to face the lower left side as viewed from the front side. The fourth sector gear 923 meshes with the gear of the motor 895 disposed at the lower left portion of the third rotation shaft 891 in the movable effect base member 881.

The fifth sector gear 924 is provided to face the right as viewed from the front side. The fifth sector gear 924 meshes with the sixth sector gear 933 provided on the fourth central movable effect member 930 disposed adjacent to the right side of the third central movable effect member 920. Accordingly, the driving force from the motor 895 received by the fourth sector gear 923 is also transmitted to the fourth central movable effect member 930 via the fifth sector gear 924. Further, on the rear surface of the third central movable effect member 920, a guided shaft 925 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 925 is inserted into the third guiding portion 892 and is guided along the extending direction of the third guiding portion 892 when the third central movable effect member 920 is rotated. As a result, the smooth operation of the third central movable effect member 920 is enabled.

The fourth central movable effect member 930 disposed at the lower right portion includes a decorative portion 931 which is to be decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. In addition, a fourth bearing portion 932 is provided at one end of the fourth central movable effect member 930, which is penetrated before and after the fourth pivot shaft 893 is inserted, and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is the fourth It is pivotally supported rotatably about a dynamic shaft 893.

Further, in the vicinity of the fourth bearing portion 932, a fan-shaped sixth sector gear 933 and a seventh sector gear 934 are provided around the rotation center of the fourth central movable effect member 930. The sixth sector gear 933 is provided to face the left as viewed from the front side. The sixth sector gear 933 engages with the fifth sector gear 924 provided on the third central movable effect member 920 disposed adjacent to the left side of the fourth central movable effect member 930. Further, on the rear surface of the fourth central movable effect member 930, a guided shaft 935 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 935 is inserted into the fourth guiding portion 894 and is guided along the extending direction of the fourth guiding portion 894 when the fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates. As a result, the smooth operation of the fourth central movable effect member 930 is enabled.

The seventh sector gear 934 is provided to face the lower right side as viewed from the front side. The seventh sector gear 934 meshes with the eighth sector gear 942 provided in the biasing mechanism 940 disposed at the lower right of the fourth central movable effect member 930. The biasing mechanism 940 is pivotable about a pivot shaft 941 in the front-rear direction, and includes an eighth sector gear 942. The biasing mechanism 940 is provided so as to extend leftward from the pivot shaft as viewed from the front side, and is biased downward (counterclockwise direction) by a biasing member (not shown). As a result, the third center movable effect member 920 and the fourth center movable effect member 930 are urged in the direction toward the initial position, which is the position of the lower end in the operation range. Therefore, the biasing force by the biasing mechanism assists in holding the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 at the initial position, and also operates the third central movable effect member 920 operated upward. It helps the fourth center movable effect member 930 to return to the initial position.

The central movable service unit 880 configured as described above can be converted into the initial state shown in FIG. 14 and the operation completed state shown in FIG. In the initial state shown in FIG. 14, the first center movable effect member 900 and the second center movable effect member 910 are at the initial position which is the upper end of the operation range, and the third center movable effect member 920 and the fourth center movable effect member 930 Is at the initial position, which is the lower end of the operation range, and is in a state of being retracted from the front surface of the approximate display device 41. From this initial state, when the motor 886 is operated, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are pivoted to descend, and when the motor 895 is operated, the third central movable effect member 920 and The fourth central movable effect member 930 pivots to ascend.

Then, in the operation completed state shown in FIG. 15, the decoration portion 901 of the first center movable effect member 900, the decoration portion 911 of the second center movable effect member 910, the decoration portion 921 of the third center movable effect member 920, and the fourth center The decorative portion 931 of the movable effect member 930 is disposed to overlap the front surface of the display device 41. Further, the end face of each of the decorative parts 901, 911, 921 and 931 is opposed to and adjacent to the end face of the adjacent decorative part 901, 911, 921 and 931 so as to form one annular shape as a whole. ing. Each of the decorative portions 901, 911, 921 and 931 is made of a material capable of transmitting light, and the display device 41 can be viewed through the decorative portions 901, 911, 921 and 931.

Next, the configuration of the special variation winning device 38 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 16 to 18, the special variation winning device 38 is disposed in front of the flow path rear wall 962 disposed along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and in front of the flow path rear wall 962. Between the flow path front wall 952 and the flow path front wall 952, the gaming ball is provided with a flow down flow path 38f which can flow down in a row. The flow-down path 38f is inclined to the left as viewed from the front side, and the gaming balls flow downward in a row in a row.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the bottom surface of the substantially central portion of the flow-down path 38 f is configured by an opening / closing member 990 which can slide in the front-rear direction. The opening / closing member 990 is in a closed state in which the game ball can not win the special variation winning device 38 (big winning opening 38d) by protruding forward as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18A. As shown in FIG. 5, the game ball can be converted to an open state in which the game ball can be won to the large winning opening 38d by retreating backward. That is, the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 38f flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state, passes through the big winning opening 38d, and when the opening / closing member 990 is in the open state. It is supposed to flow into the big winning opening. In addition, when the opening and closing member 990 is in the closed state, there is a gap between the channel front wall 952 and the gap, but it is a gap to such an extent that the gaming ball can not flow.

As shown in FIG. 19, the special variation winning device 38 has a front wall member 950 having a flow path front wall 952, a rear wall member 960 having a flow path rear wall 962, a main body 970 to which an opening / closing member 990 etc. are attached. And a cover member 979 which covers the back surface of the main body portion 970.

The front wall member 950 includes a plate-like front surface 951. The front surface of the front portion 951 is disposed close to the back surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15 so that the game ball does not flow forward of the front surface. Further, the front surface of the front portion 951 is a surface that can be viewed by the player, and it is a lens that is decorated and can transmit light. An LED (not shown) is arranged on the back surface of the front wall member 950 as a decoration means, and the special fluctuation winning device 38 can be decorated with light. The color of the light for decorating the special variation winning device 38 is a color different from the color of light emitted from the batch display device 50, thereby preventing the display of the adjacent batch display device 50 from being obscured. Further, an upper portion of the plate-like front surface portion 951 is a flow path front wall 952 which forms a side wall on the front side of the flow-down path 38f.

As shown in FIG. 17, on the back surface side of the flow path front wall 952, a plurality of front wall protrusions 954 that project rearward are provided. The front wall projecting portion 954 is a triangular prism-shaped projecting portion in which the left and right side surfaces are inclined, and slightly upstream of the projecting portion 992 in front of each of the projecting portions 992 provided in the opening / closing member 990. It is provided to be located in The front wall projecting portion 954 and the projecting portion 992 have a function of guiding the gaming ball flowing to the left backward, in order to meander the gaming ball flowing down the flowing path 38 f as described later. That is, the gaming balls flowing down the flow-off path 38f form a contact portion that can be contacted. Since the front wall projection 954 is slightly upstream, the gaming ball flowing to the left is guided to the rear by the front wall projection 954 and then to the rear by the projection 992, The game balls are effectively guided.

As shown in FIG. 20, on the back surface side of the front wall member 950, a plurality of rib-like extending walls 953 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-like front surface portion 951 are provided. The extension wall 953 has different functions depending on the place where it is provided, and a bottom surface portion 953a forming the bottom surface of the flow-down path 38f, a large winning hole formation portion 953b forming a side wall or bottom surface of the large winning opening 38d, A guide channel forming portion 953c forming a guiding channel 955 for guiding a game ball winning in the opening 38d, a switch mounting portion forming portion 953d forming a mounting portion 956 for mounting the large winning opening switch 38a, and a general winning opening 35 It has a function as a surrounding wall 953f for preventing the entry into the inside of the game ball flowing down around the special winning hole formation portion 953e and the special variation winning device 38.

The bottom portion 953a that forms the bottom surface of the flow-down path 38f is an inclined surface that slopes to the right when viewed from the back surface side. Also, the special winning opening formation portion 953b is inclined so as to collect the gaming balls having flowed into the special winning opening 38d into the guiding channel 955. A game ball can flow in a row into the guiding channel 955, and a winning hole switch 38a is provided in the flowing portion into the guiding channel 955. As a result, all the game balls having flowed into the special winning opening 38d are detected by the special winning opening switch 38a and then flow into the guiding channel 955. The guiding channel 955 formed by the guiding channel forming portion 953c is a channel for guiding the gaming ball from the big winning opening 38d to the back side of the gaming board 30, and the back of the front portion 951 is behind the gaming ball. Ribs 957 are formed for guiding to. In addition, the general winning a prize opening formation part 953e forms the general winning a prize opening 35 which is opened to the right when viewed from the front side of the special variation winning device 38. A rib 958 is formed on the back of the front face 951 for guiding the gaming ball having flowed into the general winning opening 35 to the rear.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the rear wall member 960 is provided with a plate-like rear surface portion 961. A front wall member 950 is attached to a front surface of the rear surface portion 961, and a part of the front surface of the rear surface portion 961 which is not hidden by the front wall member 950 is decorated. An upper portion of the rear surface portion 961 is a flow path rear wall 962 which forms a rear side wall of the flow-down path 38f. Further, at a position to be a lower end of the flow path rear wall 962, an open / close member insertion portion 963 which penetrates in the back and forth direction for inserting the open / close member 990 from the back surface side of the rear wall member 960 is formed.

Further, on the front side of the flow path rear wall 962, a plurality of rear wall protrusions 964 that project forward are provided. As shown in FIG. 17, the rear wall projecting portion 964 is a triangular prism-shaped projecting portion in which the left and right side surfaces are sloped, and is provided at a position adjacent to the recess 993 provided in the opening / closing member 990. The rear wall projection 964 and the recess 993 have a function of guiding the gaming ball flowing to the left forward, in order to meander the gaming ball flowing down the flowing path 38 f as described later. That is, the gaming balls flowing down the flow-off path 38f form a contact portion that can be contacted. The back wall projection 964 is provided adjacent to the recess 993, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down the right side of the flow-down path 38f at the portion where the recess 993 is not provided, and the game ball It is possible to meander.

Referring back to FIG. 21, the induction flow channel 955 is in communication with the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961 in the central portion of the rear surface portion 961 and in the front wall member 950 opposite to the portion where the induction flow channel 955 is formed. A through portion 968 is formed in the front and back. Further, a switch mounting portion 965 which penetrates the front and back so as to be able to accommodate the rear portion of the big winning opening switch 38a is formed above the induction flow channel 955. Further, on the right side portion of the rear face portion 961 and facing the portion where the general winning opening 35 is formed in the front wall member 950, the gaming balls winning in the general winning opening 35 are made to the back side of the rear wall member 960. A penetrating portion 966 a which is penetrated back and forth is formed so as to communicate the general winning hole flow passage 966 to be guided with the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961.

As shown in FIG. 21B, on the back surface side of the rear wall member 960, a plurality of rib-like extending walls 967 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-like rear surface portion 961 are provided. The extending wall 967 has different functions depending on the place where it is provided, and a guiding channel forming portion 967a forming the guiding channel 955, and a general winning hole channel forming portion 967b forming the general winning hole channel 966, It has a function as a surrounding wall 967c that forms the periphery of the special variation winning device 38.

The guiding channel forming portion 967a forms a guiding channel 955 so as to guide the gaming ball guided from the penetrating portion 968 to the back side downward. In addition, a rib 969 for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the downstream end of the guide channel 955 formed in the rear surface portion 961. The general winning opening flow passage forming portion 967 b forms a general winning opening flow passage 966 so as to guide the gaming ball guided from the penetrating portion 966 a to the back side downward. Further, a rib 966 b for guiding the game ball backward is formed at the downstream end of the general winning opening channel 966 formed in the rear face portion 961.

The surrounding wall 967c is formed in accordance with the shape of the penetrating portion formed in the portion to which the special variation winning device 38 is attached in the gaming board main body 80, and the special variation winning device 38 is attached to the gaming board main body 80 At this time, the surrounding wall 967c is in a state of being inserted into the through portion. Further, the back surface of the rear surface portion 961 located outside the surrounding wall 967c is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the special variation winning device 38 is attached to the game board main body 80. A plurality of bosses for positioning and a plurality of screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 22, the main body 970 includes a peripheral wall 971 that coincides with the peripheral wall 967 c of the rear wall member 960 in the front-rear direction. The main body portion 970 is provided with a rear wall portion 972 which is opposite to the guide channel forming portion 967 a formed on the back surface of the rear wall member 960 and forms a rear wall of the guide channel 955. In the rear wall portion 972, the gaming ball guided to the back surface of the rear wall member 960 through the penetrating portion 968 is formed in the guiding flow path 955 at a position facing the penetrating portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960. Ribs 973 are formed to guide rightward along. Further, at a position facing the downstream end of the guide channel 955 formed in the rear wall member 960 in the rear wall portion 972, a penetrating portion 974 penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed. The gaming ball which has flowed down the guiding channel 955 is guided to the rear by the rib 969 formed on the back wall member 960, passes through the penetrating portion 974, and is guided to the back side of the main body 970 to the outside of the gaming machine. Flow into the discharge channel to discharge the

In a portion facing the downstream end of the general winning opening channel 966 formed in the back wall member 960, a penetration for guiding the game ball flowing down the general winning opening channel 966 to the back surface side of the main body 970 Portion 975 is formed. The game ball which has flowed down the general winning opening flow path 966 is guided to the back side of the main body 970 through the penetrating portion 975 and detected by the winning opening switch 35a, and then the discharging flow is for discharging the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine. It is supposed to flow into the road.

Further, at a position facing the opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960, an opening / closing member holding portion 976 for guiding and supporting the opening / closing member 990 operating in the front-rear direction is provided. The opening and closing member holding portion 976 is a slit-like penetrating portion that penetrates the front and back of the main body portion 970, can contact the upper, lower, left, and right surfaces of the opening and closing member 990 and can guide and support the opening and closing member 990 A guide wall 977 is provided to extend in the front-rear direction.

An opening and closing member unit 980 including an opening and closing member 990 and an operating mechanism for operating the opening and closing member 990 is attached to the back surface side of the main body 970. The opening and closing member unit 980 includes a unit base member 981 for attaching various members, an opening and closing member 990 slidable in the front-rear direction, and a special winning opening solenoid 38b for operating the opening and closing member 990.

The opening and closing member unit 980 opens and closes the special fluctuation winning device 38 with the opening and closing member 990 projecting forward as shown in FIG. 23A, and opens and closes as shown in FIG. 23B. The open / close member 990 can be converted to a state in which the special variation winning device 38 is opened with the member 990 retracted to the rear. The opening / closing member 990 can appear above the winning opening 38 d through the opening / closing member holding portion 976 formed in the main body 970 and the opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960.

The opening and closing member 990 is slidably disposed forward and backward in a holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981. As shown in FIG. 24A, the opening / closing member 990 is formed as a flow path forming portion 991 which forms the bottom surface of the flow-down path 38f so that the front end portion extending upward of the large winning opening 38d on the upper surface is one step lower. ing.

The flow passage forming portion 991 is formed with a plurality of projecting portions 992 projecting upward in the vicinity of the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990. The side surface on the upstream side of the projecting portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side is directed to the downstream side, and it is possible to smoothly guide the game ball flowing down from the right toward the recess 993 to the rear. Further, the downstream side surface of the projecting portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side is directed to the upstream side, so that it can be guided in the downstream direction when the game ball flowing out forward from the recess 993 comes in contact.

Further, a recessed portion 993 in which the stepped portion is recessed rearward is formed in the stepped portion of the flow path forming portion 991 which is one step lower and which is opposed to the projecting portion 992 in the sliding direction. The distance between the side surface of the stepped portion forming the recess 993 and the side surface of the projecting portion 992 is such that the game balls can flow down in a row at any position. Further, the side surface on the downstream side of the side surfaces of the step portion forming the recess 993 is obliquely formed so that the front side is directed to the downstream side, and the gaming ball can smoothly flow out from the recess 993 to the front There is.

That is, on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990, undulations such as the protruding portion 992 and the recessed portion 993 are provided. As will be described later, the time during which the game balls stay on the opening and closing member 990 is extended by such unevenness.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24B, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is an oblique surface which falls to the left, and the game ball is allowed to flow to the left. Further, on the left and right of the lower surface of the opening and closing member 990, sliding portions 994 extending downward are formed. The sliding portion 994 is formed to extend along the front-rear direction, and the open / close member 990 is held on the holding portion 982 by coming into contact with the upper surface of the holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981. It becomes possible to slide.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23A, the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996 which is inclined such that the lower end is positioned rearward of the upper end. By forming the inclined surface 996 in this manner, when a game ball is present between the opening / closing member 990 and the flow path front wall 952 when the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state, the game ball is upward. Alternatively, the game ball can be released downward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at the central portion of the lower surface of the opening and closing member 990, a connection portion 995 to which a driving arm 983 for transmitting the driving force from the big winning opening solenoid 38b for driving the opening and closing member 990 is connected is formed. ing. The drive arm 983 is located below the holding portion 982. As shown in FIG. 25B, the holding portion 982 is formed with a through portion 982a through which the connection pin 983a extending upward from the drive arm 983 can be inserted. The connection pin 983a is an opening and closing member through the through portion 982a. It is connected to the connection part 995 of 990. Further, as shown in FIG. 25A, the holding portion 982 is formed with a guide rib 982b located on the left and right of the connection portion 995 and extending in the front-rear direction. The guide rib 982b guides the opening / closing member 990 in the front-rear direction by guiding the connecting portion 995 in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 26, one end of the drive arm 983 is connected to a connecting member 984 connected to the big winning opening solenoid 38b. Further, the drive arm 983 is provided with a pivot shaft 983b along the vertical direction, and can be pivoted about the pivot shaft 983b. The pivot shaft 983 b is rotatably held by being pinched from the front and rear by the main body 970 and the rear wall member 960 (see FIG. 19).

As shown in FIG. 26 (a), when the special variation winning device 38 is in the closed state, the drive shaft 38g of the big winning opening solenoid 38b is extended and the drive arm 983 is positioned at the front end of the rotation range . In this state, the drive arm 983 is pivoted most in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear surface side about the pivot shaft 983b, and the connection pin 983a is located at the front end of the movement range.

When the special variation winning device 38 is opened from this state, the drive arm 983 is counterclockwise viewed from the back side centering on the pivot shaft 983b by retracting the drive shaft 38g of the large winning opening solenoid 38b. By pivoting in the direction, the connection pin 983a is moved rearward to retract the opening / closing member 990 backward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), the special fluctuation winning device 38 is in the open state. When the special variation winning device 38 is closed, the reverse operation to the above-described operation is performed.

In FIGS. 27-30, the flow-down aspect of the gaming ball in the special variation winning device 38 is shown. In FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, a portion of the front wall member 950 is seen through for the sake of explanation. The gaming balls flowing down from the right to the left in the flow-down path 38 f are first guided obliquely forward by the rear wall projecting portion 964 located most upstream, and flow into the flow path forming portion 991 in the opening / closing member 990. Then, it is guided obliquely backward by the front wall projection 954 and is guided obliquely backward by the projection 992 of the opening / closing member 990 and flows into the recess 993. The gaming ball having flowed into the recess 993 is again guided diagonally forward by the downstream side surface of the recess 993 formed obliquely toward the downstream side, and the front wall projection 954 adjacent to the downstream side.

Thereafter, the guidance to the oblique back by the front wall projection 954 and the projection 992 and the guidance to the oblique front by the recess 993 and the back wall projection 964 are repeated, and the gaming ball flowing down the falling path 38f meanders back and forth While it will flow down. As a result, there is no ups and downs of the front wall projecting portion 954, the rear wall projecting portion 964, the projecting portion 992, the recess 993 and the like in the flow-down path 38f, and the time of staying on the opening and closing member 990 is longer than when flowing straight down. It will be. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30A, the gaming ball is always present on the opening and closing member 990, and the opening and closing member 990 is opened even when the opening time of the special variation winning device 38 is short. As shown in FIG. 30 (b), there is a high possibility that the game ball existing on the opening and closing member 990 falls and wins in the large winning opening 38d as shown in FIG. 30 (b). Can have a sense of expectation for In addition, it is preferable to secure the time required for the gaming ball to stay on the opening and closing member 990 for the interval time in which the special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed before the short open round. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 31A, when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, the gaming ball which has been retained on the opening and closing member 990 is brought into contact with the projecting portion 992 formed on the opening and closing member 990 as shown in FIG. As shown in 31 (b), it is bounced and guided away from the big winning opening 38d. In addition, the bouncing game ball may be further separated from the big winning opening 38d by contacting the front wall projecting portion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protruding portion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, and the like. Further, since the projecting portions 992 formed in the opening and closing member 990 are disposed at intervals through which the game balls can pass, they may fall without contacting the projecting portions 992 through the intervals. In addition, special fluctuation winning device 38 opening time when it becomes short opening which it mentions later becomes time which can flow into big winning a prize opening 38d even if it is the game ball which contacts and bounces to projection 992 etc as mentioned above ing. Thus, even if the opening is short, it is possible to flow into the big winning opening 38d.

By providing the projecting portion 992, the front wall projecting portion 954, and the rear wall projecting portion 964 in this manner, the rolling aspect of the game ball when opening the opening / closing member 990 becomes colorful, and the interest of the game can be improved. . In addition, when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, the inflow timings of the plurality of gaming balls existing on the opening and closing member 990 to the large winning opening 38d can be shifted, and the ball clogging occurs in the large winning opening 38d. Can be prevented.

In addition, although the front wall protrusion part 954, the back wall protrusion part 964, the protrusion part 992, and the recessed part 993 were provided in the downflow path 38f as ups and downs, you may be another thing. For example, a groove may be formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 as a relief, and the gaming ball may flow down while meandering along the groove. In addition, rib-like protrusions and grooves are provided on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the flow-down direction as undulations, so that the game balls flow downward while being moved vertically by the protrusions and grooves. You may

From the above, the start area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second start winning opening) provided in the gaming area 32 is provided with the gaming board 30 provided with the gaming area 32 in which gaming balls can flow 97) a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed based on the winning of the game ball, and a special game state which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result The game machine is provided with a special fluctuation winning device 38 which can be converted into a closed state where the gaming ball can not win a prize and an open state where the gaming ball can win a prize, and is converted into an open state in the special gaming state. An opening and closing member which can receive a game ball from an opening facing upward, closes the opening in the closed state to disable winning of the game ball, and opens the opening in the open state to enable winning of the game ball. 990 is equipped In the closed state, the game ball is configured to allow the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 to flow downward, and the opening and closing member 990 is provided with relief (protrusion 992, recess 993) on the top It will be made for the time when a game ball stays in the upper surface of member 990 to become long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game balls in the special game state, and to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, around the outflow passage 38f constituted by the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990, contact portions (front wall projection 954 and rear wall projection 964) to which the game balls flowing down the outflow passage 38f can contact are provided It will be Therefore, by contacting the contact portion, the time for which the gaming balls stay on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 becomes longer, and the decrease of the gaming balls during the special gaming state can be suppressed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

In the closed state, the game ball is made to flow down from one of the left and right ends of the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 to the other, and the unevenness formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 It will be formed so as to meander. Therefore, the time during which the game balls stay on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 becomes longer, and the decrease of the game balls in the special game state can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The special variation winning device 38 is opened and closed by the opening and closing member 990 sliding in the front and rear direction, but in the closed state, the upper surface becomes parallel so as to cover the big winning opening 38d and it is opened. May be configured to pivot downward.

In addition, the game area 30 is provided with the game area 32 in which the game balls can flow, and the start area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, the second start winning opening 97) provided in the game area 32 In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed based on the winning of the game ball, and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. The game ball is capable of being converted into an open state in which the game ball can not win a prize and an open state in which the game ball can win a prize, and the special fluctuation prize device 38 is converted into an open state in the special gaming state. The game ball can be won from the opening that faces, it protrudes forward in the closed state to close the opening and disable the game ball winning and retracts backward in the open state to open the opening and win the game ball To enable In the closed state, the gaming ball is allowed to flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990, and the opening and closing member 990 has relief (protruding portion 992, recess 993) on the upper surface. The game ball is provided for a longer time on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 than in the case where there is no unevenness, and is perpendicular to the front end portion of the opening and closing member 990 in the sliding direction toward the front end The inclined surface 996 is formed such that the thickness in the negative direction is reduced.

Therefore, the opening / closing member 990 is provided with a relief on the upper surface, and the time during which the gaming ball is retained on the upper surface of the opening / closing member is longer than in the absence of the relief. Can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, since the inclined surface 996 is formed at the front end portion of the opening and closing member 990 so that the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction decreases toward the front end, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being pinched when closing.

Further, the upper surface of the front end portion of the opening and closing member 990 is a flat surface along the sliding direction, and the portion below the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being pinched at the time of closing, and it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game ball in the special game state by being guided downward by the inclined surface 996 and to enhance the interest of the game. it can.

FIG. 32 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference clock for the CPU operating clock or timer interrupt and a random number generation circuit. An oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like is generated. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

The power supply apparatus 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of 12 V and 5 V lower than DC voltage of 32 V. A power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure, having a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at power failure and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 or the main substrate. Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated,
Based on this, processing is performed to forcibly initialize the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a random access memory (RAM) 111C which can be read and written as needed.

The ROM 111B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same The state where the identification information is obtained, but excluding the special result aspect) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in reach display or non-reach variation display, and a random number generation circuit for generating a collision random number etc for determining hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit or small hit) of the special view variation display game or a probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special view variation display game as the current gaming state. State), the operation state of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 as the current game state (time-saving operation state (general power support state)), the number of starting memories, etc., from among a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables, any one Select and acquire the variation pattern table. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize balls. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

In the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, and a starting opening 2 switch in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 37a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning opening 97, the gate switch 34a in the common view starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38, these switches An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which is supplied with a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V supplied from the circuit and is converted to a 0 V-5 V positive logic signal. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7 V-11 V, so the leads of the sensor or proximity switch are improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead is disconnected and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state as it has become and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the start opening 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the big winning opening switch 38a It is input to port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payment control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 can accept a command), a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that the game ball is stored in the lower tray 23 by a predetermined amount or more (full)), a touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the above and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. Gaming microcomputer 11
This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in 1 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done to the trial shot test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38 b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special fluctuation winning device 38 and a solenoid (common electric solenoid) 37 c opening the movable member 37 b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided to output open / close data of The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the common power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 to the output unit 130. The second driver 138 b for outputting the on / off driving signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 Third driver 138c outputting on / off driving signal of lead-in side digit line, fourth driver 138d outputting external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to external device such as management device to external information terminal board 71 Is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 450. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 450 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG. The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 which can be held, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, and motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Also, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325 ) Is connected.

Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the information display device 630. The frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15 is provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls the panel effect device 44 (for example, a movable object or the like which enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if a frame rendering device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for presentation) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame rendering movable body control circuit for driving and controlling this frame rendering device is provided. good.

Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided in the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. To detect the on / off state of the effect combination product switch 47 (rendering motor switch) to detect the detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by striking a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by turning members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common view starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 38, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and from the game area 32 Exhausted. And, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the special fluctuation winning device 38, the number of the number according to the type of winning opening won. The winning balls are discharged from the dispensing unit controlled by the dispensing control device 200 (see FIG. 32) to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15.

A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 32) including a non-contact switch or the like for detecting gaming balls having passed through the common view start gate 34 is provided in the common view start gate 34, and the game area 32 When the game ball driven in passes through the inside of the drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100, the number of common drawing start memories is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34. If it is less than (1), the common drawing start memory number is added (+1) and one common drawing start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of memories of the common drawing start winning is displayed on the common drawing reservation display of the batch display device 50. Further, the common drawing start memory stores a random number value (hit random number) for hit determination for determining the result of the common drawing variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a. It is supposed to be

If the common drawing start memory is present and the common drawing fluctuation display game can be started, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game is not being executed, and the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If it is not the hit state, the hit determination random number value stored in the first stored common drawing start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit deviation of the common drawing fluctuation display game And perform a process of starting a common drawing variation display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the common drawing variation display game becomes a hit, and a specific result aspect (common drawing identification result) is derived.

Further, as processing for executing the common drawing change display game, the common drawing display provided in the batch display device 50 is predetermined with a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined for a predetermined change time as the game control apparatus 100 executes the common drawing change display game. After the common map fluctuation display which is repeatedly displayed in the above order is performed, processing is performed to display the common drawing fluctuation display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed. In addition, a common view display is configured by the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, it is stopped and displayed. You may.

If the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern which becomes any of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol which makes a special result aspect to the common drawing indicator corresponding to the kind of hit is stopped While displaying, the common power solenoid 37c is operated to perform control to open the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In the case where the result of the common drawing variation display game is a release, control is performed to display a lighting pattern as a result of the deviation on the common drawing display.

In addition, the winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97 and the winning ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are each provided with the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 provided therein. It is detected by the switch 37a and the start opening 3 switch 97a. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100, the first start memory for making a start memory (a special view start memory) based on the winning on the first start winning opening 36 has a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). The second starting memory (starting memory) is stored based on winnings on the second starting winning opening 97 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 while storing in the limit and limiting the second starting memory to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) Remember to Big hit random number value and big hit symbol random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information based on the winning of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 respectively The extracted random number value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start storage or the second start storage. And while being displayed on the special figure 1 reservation indicator and special figure 2 reservation indicator of package display 50, the memory number of this starting memory is also displayed on display 41 of center case 40 as a decoration special figure starting memory indication Is displayed. Furthermore, the information display device 630 is also displayed.

The CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first start memory corresponding to the special view change display game to be started when the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game can be started. A process of determining the hit of the special figure variation display game or the like is performed by comparing the determined big hit determination random number value with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B. Furthermore, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view variation display game to be executed.

And, when executing the first special figure fluctuation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 1 display 51 (the fluctuation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 1 is displayed during the change, a process is performed to display a first special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, when the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 2 display 52 (the variable display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 2 is displayed during the change, a process of displaying a second special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, A process of displaying a decorative special view variable display game in which numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are variably displayed is displayed. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

The decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, a left variation display area (first special symbol), a right variation display area In each of the second special symbol) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high speed variation) at a speed that makes identification difficult. Then, the symbols changing after a predetermined time are stopped sequentially in the order of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area, and stopped in each of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. In addition, in the display device 41, various effect display such as appearance of a character is performed to improve interest. In addition, the decoration special figure fluctuation display game in information display device 630 blinks the light emission component during fluctuation display, when the stop time comes, the light emission feature (lights up, blinks and goes out corresponding to the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game) Etc.). That is, the result mode is displayed by the decorative special symbol (fourth pattern) configured by the light emitting mode of the light emitting member.

And, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result aspect or a small hit result aspect to the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. While displaying a lighting pattern, the processing which generates a special game state and a small hit game state is performed. In addition, the result mode of the decorative feature variation display game displayed on the display device 41 or the information display device 630 corresponding to this is also a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

In the processing to generate the special gaming state or the small hitting gaming state, for example, the CPU 111A of the gaming control device 100 opens the opening / closing member 990 of the special variation winning device 38 by the big winning opening solenoid 38b, and plays the game into the big winning opening Control to allow inflow of balls. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. Is a round, and the control (cycle game) is performed to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is disapproval, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of being a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure even in the high probability state based on the result form of the special figure fluctuation display game of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (a specific game state, a common drawing high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the probability (common drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is set to a high probability (general drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general drawing low probability state) Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 in the present embodiment, the drawing probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 ms, When the common game variation display game hits and results in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 being opened, the opening time of the first hit stop symbol (general electric station opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms × 1 time), The opening time of the second stop symbol (general power opening time) and the number of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the third opening time of the stopping symbol (general power opening time) and the number of opening (for example, 1700 ms × It can be set to be 3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of general electric power release, and the general electric power release time are appropriately set to perform control to set the common fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time operation state For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general drawing fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above to be a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time. (For example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Moreover, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is 704 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (the general public opening time) is the normal state (general drawing low probability state) It is possible to control to become the 2nd opening time longer than 1 opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Also, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, four times). Also, in the time saving state, the probability of becoming a hit result of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing probability) is higher than the normal probability (general drawing low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to have a probability (generally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of common power release times, the common power release time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In the case of a hit, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

The special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special view fluctuation display so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices or separate display areas in the first special view variable display game and the second special view variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. The decoration special feature variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently and simultaneously, though it is good. Further, the special view variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10. In the description of the present embodiment, when the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are not distinguished from one another, they are referred to simply as a special view variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the start opening 1 switch 36 a in the first start winning opening 36, the start opening 2 switch 37 a in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, and the start opening 3 in the second start winning opening 97 The switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the big winning opening switch 38a are provided with a coil for magnetic detection and non-contact to detect a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. Type magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used. Also, a micro-switch having a mechanical contact on the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like and the body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 etc. Can be used.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 38 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main Process] First, the main process will be described. The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, first, the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then, when the interrupt occurs, the start address of the area to save the value of the register etc. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the upper order, and the head 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5). The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and a process of setting a power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. It can be detected. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing that. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

After the process of setting the power on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the waiting time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, set the number of times (for example, 2 times) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 through the port and data bus and check (step S8), and determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure does not occur, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11). Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, the access permission of read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). And outputs the off data to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. From the state of the first input port 122, it is determined whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

If the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S17). If it is (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection region 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection region check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), the checksum calculation processing of calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the check sums of the two match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 of FIG. 35, and the processing in the case of normal recovery from the power failure is performed.

In addition, it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N) If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 35 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

In step S21 of FIG. 35, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 is ready to receive a command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined. Thereafter, the area storing the gaming state in the RWM is checked to determine whether the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step S22). Here, when it is not in the high probability of the special view (step S22; N), the process skips steps S23 and S24 and shifts to step S25. Also, when the special drawing is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 (On) data is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control board (presentation control device 300) (step S25) Go to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a screen designated command (a command for a customer waiting demo screen when waiting for a customer, other than that If so, a plurality of commands such as a recovery screen command are sent. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step S26), and all areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). Here, the area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the effect mode. Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (displaying a customer waiting demo screen and displaying a predetermined time ( For example, for 30 seconds, a plurality of commands such as a command for performing notification of the RAM initialization with light and sound are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

In step S31, processing is performed to activate a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process of step S31, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S32). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining symbols per special drawing) (Big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number to determine the hit of the common drawing (hit random number), RWM specified as the initial value (start value) of the random number to determine the hit symbol of the common drawing (hit symbol random number) After saving in the area (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, the hit symbol random number are generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit Is configured as. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program processing It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC 2 different from CTC (CTC 0) in timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as timer interrupt processing as a unit. Also, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value changing method of changing the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random type update in which all the values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process of step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus is set (step S36) It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and the initial value random number update processing in step S35 described above In order to prevent the value random number update process from being performed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem in canceling the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed but is performed only in the main process, and the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination (step S37) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the processing for temporarily prohibiting the interrupt (step S39) A process (step S40) of outputting off data to the output port is performed.

Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S41), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S42). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum at the time of power interruption of the RWM, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), and then a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45) ) And wait for the power to the game machine to shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of external operation, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum Calculation Process] FIG. 36 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and "0" is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes of RAM being used is set to the number of repetitions.

Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the contents of the calculated address is taken as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56) It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

[Initial Value Random Number Updating Process] FIG. 37 shows the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the jackpot symbol initial value random number is updated by 1 (step S61), and the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by 1 (step S62). Then, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S64), and the initial value random number updating process is ended. Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, and "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the small hit of the special figure variation display game It is the random number which becomes the initial value of the random number which decides the stop design. In addition, “the initial hit random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the common view variation display game, and “the first hit random number” is a random number that determines the stop symbol for the common view variation display game. It is a random number that becomes an initial value. Thus, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing. In addition, small hit design random numbers naturally do not exist in models without small hits. In addition, depending on the model, there is also a gaming machine in which there is no hit symbol initial value random number.

[Timer Interrupt Processing] Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 38 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input from various sensors and switches, and taking in of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S104) is performed to control the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, a common power solenoid 37c). Note that when a signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main processing, the output processing causes the emission permission signal to be output, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of release permission seen from the game control device, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating the state of release permission viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) are performed. Thereafter, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the start opening 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a of the common drawing, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a Also, a winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) is performed to monitor errors (whether or not the front frame or the glass frame is opened). In addition, special figure game processing (step S109) which performs processing concerning a special figure fluctuation display game and common drawing game processing (step S110) which performs processing concerning a common drawing fluctuation display game is performed.

Next, segment LED editing processing (step S111) provided in the gaming machine 10 to drive the segment LED for displaying the special view variation display game and displaying various information related to the game to display desired content (step S111) Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs processing to check the detection signal from the sensor to determine whether there is an abnormality or board radio fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S114) is performed to set signals output to various external devices in the output buffer (step S114), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Input Process] Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). And the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is an inverted bit of the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data Are prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, "prepare" in the present embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is an inverted bit of the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data Are prepared (step S132), the switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is ended.

Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port. Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 may be different data but may be data of the same value as a result. is there. Moreover, although the bit data to be inverted of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, there is a possibility that they may be data of the same value as a result. is there.

[Switch Reading Process] Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Save (store) (step S144). Then, it waits for the delay time (for example, about 100 microseconds) until the second reading to elapse (step S145).

When the delay time has elapsed, the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S147), and the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Save (store) (step S149). After that, a definite bit pattern in which the bit in the same state is 1 and the bit in the other is 0 in the first and second readings is created (step S150), and the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 are ANDed this time The decision bit is set (step S151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern in which the state is 0 and the other bit is 1 in the first and second readings is created (step S152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the determined state at the previous interrupt The product is taken and it is set as the previously held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed. Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the currently decided state (step S154), exclusive OR is performed between the previous and currently decided states, and saved as the rising edge (step S155). , Finish the switch reading process.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing the result with the previous reading result. Although there is a method of determining whether or not a change has occurred, if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the correct determination can not be made. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interruption process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output Process] Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, in the output process, first, the off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 which outputs the data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output is synthesized and output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the common power solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step S164). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, data of "door / frame open" data of "security signal") are output ports for digit / external information output It outputs to 136 (step S166). Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S168). In the present embodiment, for example, special display 1 display 51, special view 2 display 52, general drawing display, special view 1 reserve display, special view 2 reserve, which are various displays provided in collective display device 50. The indicator, the general drawing hold indicator, the round indicator and the second gaming status indicator are turned on dynamically.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are synthesized (step S169), and the synthesized data (for example, data of "big hit signal 1", data of "big hit signal 2", data of "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal" Output data of 4 "data of" pattern decision number signal ", data of" starting opening signal ", data of" main prize ball signal ") and output data of firing permission (step S170), and the synthesized data is The information is output to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / emission permission signal (step S171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S172). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S173).

Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S174). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S176), the output process ends.

[Discharge Command Transmission Process] Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10). In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments by collating these two signals.

In these winning number counter areas, the winning number counter area is set according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (three winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls in the case of this embodiment). The counter number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, while transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated. Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in the three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1, respectively. The three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the winning balls remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining winning balls area (step S187). In addition, as the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before this processing, a fraction which does not meet a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, whenever the number of remaining winning balls is ten, the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal is updated by +1. Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number area of the winning balls (step S191), and the process returns to the process of step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, when the payout of the game ball such as during a big hit is concentrated by outputting the main prize ball signal, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accurate occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted. Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194).

The payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is in the on state (busy state) when the payout control can not be immediately started. Be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

If the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. That is, in this embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay the prize ball. When in the state, it is configured to transmit a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

The conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy status) are, for example, during the payout operation, the ball lending operation, the shoot ball out error, the overflow error, the frame radio wave illegal occurrence, the payout ball detection switch (dispensed The number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormality of a switch for monitoring a shot ball, a shortage of payout error, a payout excess error, and the number of unpaid balls Etc) (when it is not = 0) etc.

If the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, "0" in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number.

Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S 197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S195 that there is a counted number (step S195; Y), the counted number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 The payout amount command corresponding to the address of is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout amount command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms is set as an initial value, for example.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200) indicates that the game control device 100 can start the payout control. In this case, the winning ball command transmitting means transmits the winning ball command to the payout control means.

As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

Random Number Updating Process 1 FIG. 43 shows the random number updating process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating an initial value (start value) of a big hit symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a hit random number, and a hit symbol random number which is an object of the initial value random number update processing. In the random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211). If the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the small hitting symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214). If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number loaded corresponds The start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value (step S213). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not the random number for the general drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217). If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial initial of the loaded small hit symbol random number A value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). After that, it is determined whether or not the random number in the general drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

When the hit random number in the common drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), it is determined whether the hit symbol random number in the common drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220). If the random number per block is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the next initial stage of the random number per block is loaded The value is set in the register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the hit symbol random number in the common drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220).

If the hit pattern random number in the common drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. Also, if the hit pattern random number in the common drawing is waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; Y), the next initial value is loaded with the initial symbol random value (step S221), and The next initial value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S222), and the random number updating process 1 is ended.

Random Number Updating Process 2 FIG. 44 shows the random number updating process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1 byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2 byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and both random update processing 2 Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, updating of 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach variation mode determination) by random number updating process 2 executed in one interrupt process for main process is performed for either upper 1 byte or lower 1 byte. Are configured to

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for specifying in order which random number of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step S231). In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Then, when the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the variation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when “1”, the variation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when “2” The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is "3", the variation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232). Next, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referenced based on the calculated address (step S234). In the table referred to at this time, the upper limit judgment value for each kind of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random number has made a round is stored.

Subsequently, for example, the CPU used as a gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as "R register") used for refreshing DRAM etc. In addition, although the counter "M1 counter" which operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). The randomness can be given randomness by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). The mask value is the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number. When the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter is updated. When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower order of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited thereto.

Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). Then, if the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S 236; Y), the value left by masking the value of the M 1 counter with the mask value as the added value Is set as a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “masked value”, and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S 237), and the process proceeds to step S 239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S 236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value ( The process proceeds to step S239). The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and adding "0" later does not change from the value before addition, so to avoid it. is there.

Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2-byte) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), Go to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated as the lower 1 byte of the random value (1 A byte is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S 242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S 237 or S 238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether this new random value is larger than the upper limit judgment value acquired in step S 233 (step S243). Then, if the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; N), the new random number value is saved in a lower random number area of 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number value is taken as a new random number again (step S244). The data is saved in a lower random number area of byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number updating process 2 is ended. If the random number is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), the new random number value (when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the high-order random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S247). And the random number updating process 2 ends. In the case of this embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated (1-byte random number, 2-byte random number (upper), 2-byte random number (lower)) on the effect random number update table. The address of the update area, etc. is defined for the type of random number to be updated (4 blocks).

As described above, the CPU 111A updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls to the starting winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37. It is a random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for

[Payout mouth switch / state monitoring process] FIG. 45 shows a winning mouth switch / state monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the special winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the special winning opening is opened. Even though there is no such prize, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S304) is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize at the special prize opening and to detect a normal prize.

In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input on the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of a fraud winning number area, a fraud winning error notification command, a fraud winning The information of the number upper limit value (the number of irregularities judged), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. In addition to the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches) in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit, lower address of winning number counter area 1, winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The lower address information of is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared for each of the switches to be monitored.

Next, prepare the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the general public (step S305), and monitor whether there is an incorrect winning and detect the normal winning while the fraud & winning monitoring process (Step S306) is executed. Then, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) which does not require fraud monitoring processing (step S307). A winning number counter updating process (step S308) is performed to update the number.

Next, a state scan counter for specifying in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state should be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the current monitoring is updated (step S309). In the case of the present embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is “0”, a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. The monitoring of the state based on one signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is “2”, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is “3”, monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal is configured. Ru.

Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. The monitoring of the state is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. Moreover, when the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is It is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines whether or not an error has occurred. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. Monitoring of the state based on two signals is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) is performed to check a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. Note that the processing in steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

[Unauthorized & prize monitoring process] FIG. 46 shows the improper & prize monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The fraud & prize monitoring process is a process performed on the special winning opening switch 38 a of the special variation winning device 38 and the starting opening 2 switch 37 a of the normal variation winning device 37. The detection of winnings is easy for the large winnings opening (special variation winning device 38) and the Fuden (normal variation winning device 37) because the opening and closing members are forcibly opened to insert the game balls and the award balls are paid out. In addition to the monitoring of fraud.

In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S 321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S 322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special game state in which the special variation winning device 38 is opened when the winning hole switch targeted for error monitoring is the large winning hole switch 38a, and the winning hole switch for error monitoring is started In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is being executed based on the hit of the drawing.

Then, if it is a fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S323). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (Step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (Step S332). If there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target number of incorrect winnings is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of updated incorrect winnings is equal to or greater than the number of monitoring targets. It is determined whether there is any (step S325).

In the case of this embodiment, regardless of the type of winning opening switch subject to error monitoring, the number of fraud determination determinations is set to five, but the number of unauthorized occurrences defines a different number for each type of winning opening switch. It can also be done. For example, when the winning opening in the open state is converted to the closing state, the gaming ball is caught in the door member of the winning opening, and the gaming ball is in the effective period of the winning opening switch. The reason is that it is not to judge that the signal is illegitimate if the player has won a prize or the signal has a noise, and it is not so easy to judge it as an error although it is not illegitimate.

Then, if the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrences to be monitored (Step S325; N), a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (Step S330). If the number of fraudulent prizes is equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrences to be monitored (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent prizes is limited to the number of fraudulent occurrences (step S326). (For example, 60000 ms) is saved (step S327). Next, a target fraudulent generation command is prepared (step S328), a fraudulent prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step S329), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step S338). ).

On the other hand, if the fraud monitoring period is not underway (step S322; N), the winning hole monitoring table of the target winning hole switch is prepared (step S330), and the winning number counter update process (step S331) for setting the winning balls is performed. Do. Then, if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S332). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero. Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S333). If the value is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, prepare the target fraud release command (step S334), and set the fraud winning flag as the fraud flag. Prepare (step S335). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the present fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of wrong prizes is cleared ( Step S337) The prepared injustice flag is compared with the value of the injustice flag area of interest (step S338). Also, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S 336; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the incorrect flag area (step S338).

Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S 338; Y), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S 338; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S 339), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step S340), the fraud & prize monitoring process ends. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the occurrence of an error, and an incorrect prize error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 along with the release of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set. It will be done.

[Paying Number Counter Updating Process] FIG. 47 shows the winning number counter updating process (steps S308 and S331) in the above-described winning hole switch / state monitoring process and fraud & prize monitoring process. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is obtained from the winning opening monitoring table (step S 351), and whether there is an input (accurate change in input) to the target winning opening switch It determines (step S352).

If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step S362). If the target winning opening switch has an input (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether it overflows (step S355). When no overflow occurs (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). Also, when an overflow occurs (step S 355; Y)
The value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S 357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for winning balls (delivery command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S 357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S 358), and it is determined whether the overflow occurs (step S 359). When no overflow occurs (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). It is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has ended (step S362). If an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step S362). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main winning ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

If monitoring of all the switches has not ended (step S362; N), the process returns to the process (step S352) of determining whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is ended. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning on the winning area, and the information on the winning is stored.

[Game Machine State Check Process] FIG. 48 shows a game machine state check process (steps S311, S313, and S316) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is obtained (step S371), and it is determined whether a signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the winning hole switch / state monitoring process). As this information, for example, the lower address of the head address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal Judgment data of ON, state OFF command (make error notification end command in case of error system), state ON command (make error notification start command in case of error system), state OFF monitoring timer comparison value, state ON monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S373), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S374). Thereafter, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S 375), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S 379). If the target signal is not on (step S 372: N), it is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (is normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S372; Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S376), and the state on command of the target is acquired and prepared (step S377). Thereafter, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is on (step S 372; Y) is a state indicating that the error signal is an error (abnormal or incorrect), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. Is a state showing

If the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the current signal (step S379; Y), that is, if the state of the signal has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382) It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the state of the current signal (step S379; N), that is, if the state of the signal changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area Step S380). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S 381), the target status monitoring timer is updated by 1 (step S 382), and it is determined whether the target status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step S383).

If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and the comparison value is kept at -1 (step S384). The status flag thus compared is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S385).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check process is ended. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the rendering command setting process is performed. Then (step S387), the gaming machine state check process is ended. As a result, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in step S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout Busy Signal Check Process] FIG. 49 shows a payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 can not start the payout control.

If the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy status flag is prepared as a status flag (step S392), and an on determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S393) It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an off determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S395) It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interrupts.

If the value of the busy signal status area does not match the status of the current signal (step S396; N), save the status of the current signal in the busy signal status area (step S397), and clear the busy signal monitoring timer (Step S398), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400). If it is not greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The payout busy signal check process ends. Also, if it is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of comparison value -1 (step S401) to prepare in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process is ended.

By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, and the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be influenced by

In addition, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an undefined state until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout control device 200 immediately outputs the winning ball command even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. And the payout ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

[Special Figure Game Process] Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special view game process, the monitoring of the input of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, and the start opening 3 switch 97a, the control of the entire processing related to the special view variation display game, and the display of the special view are performed.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the special view game process, first, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) is performed to monitor winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 97a. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when the first starting winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the second starting winning opening 97 have a game ball winning, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted and In the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the game result prior determination which determines in advance the game result based on the winning is performed.

Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of the gaming ball at the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure variation A special drawing routine processing (step A8) is performed to set information necessary for performing processing. At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "1", the special figure variation process which performs setting of the stop display time of the special figure, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

If the special figure game processing number is "2" at step A7, and if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the big winning opening of each big hit The special chart display process (step A10) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the release pattern, set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process, and the like.

If the special figure game processing number is "3" at step A7, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. A fanfare / interval process (step A11) is performed. At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing of setting the ending command when the final round, the big winning opening remaining A special winning opening open process (step A12) is performed to set information necessary for ball processing.

If the special figure game processing number is "5" in step A7, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the big hit end processing A special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) is performed to set information necessary for the execution. If the special figure game process number is "6" in step A7, a big hit end process (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is “7”, to set the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, to set the fanfare command, to perform the small hit middle processing A small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) is performed to set necessary information. At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hitting middle process (step A16) is performed to set the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball processing, etc. . At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hit middle process, a small hit end process The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the above. At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "10", small hit ending process (step A18) is performed to set information etc. necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special view 1 display 51 (step A19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) related to the special view 1 display 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol variation control processing (step A22) concerning the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the special figure game processing is ended. Do. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" at step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs and it is special as a special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 38 continuously is set (the character continuous operating device is operated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting Port Switch Monitoring Process] Next, the details of the starting port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the starting opening switch monitoring processing, first, a first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), a prize monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (here, the starting port 1 switch 36a), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port is provided. Set the information to indicate that there was a prize. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the first starting opening which is the starting opening of the special view 1 (step A103). When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning on the first starting opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning on the first starting opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during general public support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. . That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless it is left hitting the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), and does not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 unless it is hit right. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a win in the first starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation. Next, after preparing a table for setting information of suspension by the first start port (first start winning port 36) (step A107), the special view start port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, a second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared for a prize monitoring table (step A109), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A110) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (here, the starting port 2 switch 37a), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port is provided. Set the information to indicate that there was a prize. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the second starting opening which is the starting opening of the special view 2 (step A111). When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning on the second starting opening (step A111; N), the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the second starting opening (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37) is in operation, ie, normal fluctuation If it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which winning of the gaming ball is possible (step A112), and it is determined that the ordinary electric role is in operation (step A112; Y), It transfers to the process of A114 and performs the process after it. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary motor-operated combination is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether a common electric charge fraud is occurring (step A113).

In step A113, when the number of incorrect winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the determined number of fraud occurrences (for example, 5), it is determined that the fraud is in progress. In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the gaming ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a gaming ball winning in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent winnings. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

If it is determined in step A113 that no ordinary power transmission is occurring (step A113; N), prepare a table for setting information of suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step A114) After the special view starting opening switch common process (step A115) is performed, the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed. If it is determined in step A113 that a common electric power fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Next, a third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) is prepared for a prize monitoring table (step A116), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A117) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition processing, when the target starting port switch (in this case, the starting port 3 switch 97a) has an input, the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port Set the information to indicate that there was a prize. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the third starting opening which is the starting opening of the special view 2 (step A118). If it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning on the third starting opening (step A118; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A118 that there is a winning on the third starting opening (step A118; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during general support) (step A119). ).

When it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing time is not short (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing time is short (step A119; Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. . That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless it is hit left to the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), and does not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 if it is hit right. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a winning in the third starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation. Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the third start port (the second start winning port 97) (step A122), the special view start port switch common process (step A123) is performed to monitor the start port switch. End the process.

[Hard Random Number Acquisition Processing] Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition processing (steps A102, A110, and A117) in the above-described starting opening switch monitoring processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 52, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the first starting port (first starting winning port 36), the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37), and the third starting port (second starting winning) Among the openings 97), the prize absence information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A131), and the starting opening to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 97a It is determined whether there is an input on the switch (step A132). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A133), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. If latch data exists in the target random number latch register (step A134; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded and prepared in the hard random number latch register to be monitored (step A135). Then, among the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), the second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), and the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), winning of the starting opening for monitoring The presence information is set (step A136), and the hard random number acquisition process is ended.

[Special figure starting mouth switch common processing] Next, the details of the special figure starting mouth switch common processing (Step A108, A115, A123) in the above-mentioned starting mouth switch monitoring processing are explained. The special view starting port switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the special view starting port switch common process, first, the number of winnings on the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a. Is loaded the number of times of starting opening signal output which is the number of times of outputting information related to the outside to the control device of the gaming machine 10 (step A141), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A142), the number of outputs overflows It is determined (step A143). If the output number does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start opening signal output number area (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A143; Y), the process proceeds to step A145. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows and saving is not performed.

Next, whether the number of to-be-updated special views (starting memory) corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 97a is less than the upper limit It determines (step A145). If the number of to-be-updated holdings to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special drawing starting opening switch common processing ends. In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), the number of to-be-updated special figures (number of special figures 1 or number of special figures 2) is updated by +1 Step A146), prepare the decoration special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special drawing reservation number (step A 147), perform the rendering command setting process (step A 148), and start the starting opening winning flag Is saved (step A149). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special drawing reservations is calculated (step A150), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process of steps A102, A110 and A117 is RWM. In the big hit random number storage area (step A151). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting opening switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A152), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A153). This jackpot symbol random number is used in the special image reservation information determination process (step A160).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random number (in the case of this embodiment, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) is saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of RWM (step A154). Then, it is determined whether it is a winning on the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step A155). If it is determined in step A155 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step A155; N), the process proceeds to step A158. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A155 that the first starting opening has been won (step A155; Y), small hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (step A156), RWM small hit symbols It saves in the random number storage area (step A157). In step A158, the address (one of places from 1 to 8) of the fluctuation order flag storage area corresponding to the sum of the special drawing 1 holding number and the special drawing 2 holding number is calculated (step A158), and the calculated area Save the change order flag of the target (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) (Step A159), perform the special view reserve information determination process (Step A160), and end the special view starting opening switch common process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of gaming balls into the start winning area of the first start winning opening 36, the second start winning opening 97, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37. A start storage means is provided which stores a predetermined number at the upper limit as a start storage which becomes the right of execution of the variable display game. In addition, the starting memory means (game control device 100), various random number values which are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the 1st starting winning a prize mouth 36 which is the starting mouth of the special figure 1 Various starting random numbers that are stored as starting memory and extracted based on winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97 which is the starting opening of the special figure 2 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second starting with a predetermined number as the upper limit Store as a memory.

[Special chart holding information determination process] Next, the details of the special chart holding information determination process (step A160) in the above-mentioned special view starting port switch common process will be described. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

As shown in FIG. 54, first, a big hit determination process (step A161) is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is made depending on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step A162; Y), set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (step A163), and correspond to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A152. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A171.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A162; N), it is determined whether it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A165). If it is determined in step A165 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step A165; N), stop symbol information of the release is set (step A170), and the process proceeds to step A171. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A165 that the first starting opening has been won (step A165; Y), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit or not A small hit determination process (step A166) to determine whether or not to perform. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A167; N), the stop symbol information of the removal is set (step A170), and the process proceeds to step A171. On the other hand, if the judgment result is a small hit (step A167; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A168), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A156 It acquires (step A169) and it transfers to the process of step A171.

Then, a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A171), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A172). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A 173) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A174).

Thereafter, a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special view fluctuation display game is prepared (step A175), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step A176), the special figure hold information determination process is ended. The special figure information setting process in step A173 and the variation pattern setting process in step A174 are similar to the process executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process.

With the above processing, the prefetch pattern command including the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and the prefetch fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared And sent to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning memory storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained (Determine whether or not etc.) Make pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring processing (step A2) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “4”, that is, whether the special winning opening is being processed (step A201). . When the special winning opening open process is being performed (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special drawing game processing number is "5", that is, the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (step A202).

If the special winning opening game is being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening game is not being processed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, the small hit is being processed (step A203). ). If the small hit is being processed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the small hit is not being processed (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special process game processing number is "9", that is, the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A204). Since the special figure game process number does not shift next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, it is possible to check the progress of the game by the special figure game process number.

If the small hit residual ball processing is not in progress (step A 204; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. If the small hit residual sphere process is being performed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Then, "0" is set to the winning counter (step A205), and it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch (step A206).

If there is no input on the special winning opening switch (step A206; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). When the special winning opening switch has an input (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), and effect command setting processing (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

When the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214), if the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215). When the special winning opening residual ball processing is under (step A215; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and when the special winning opening residual ball processing is not under (step A215; N), the small hitting residual ball processing It is determined whether it is medium (step A216). If small ball remaining ball processing is underway (step A216; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended, and if small ball remaining ball processing is not underway (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter is made large winning It is added to the mouth count number (step A217), and it is determined whether the big winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example "9") (step A218).

When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step A218; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening count is equal to or higher than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special view game processing timer area is cleared to 0 ( Step A220) It is determined whether the small hit is being processed (step A221). If the small hit is not under process (step A221; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is finished, and if the small hit is under processing (step A221; Y), the big hit opening control pointer area is small hit. The value of the opening operation end is saved (step A222), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special Drawing Ordinary Processing] Next, the details of the special drawing ordinary processing (step A8) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the special view ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether both the special view 1 reservation number and the special view 2 reservation number are “0” (step A301). If it is determined in step A301 that both the special drawing 1 holding number and the special drawing 2 holding number are not "0" (step A301; N), the flags are loaded from the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total number of holdings 1). Then (step A302), it is determined whether the current variation is the variation of the special figure 1 (step A303). If it is determined in step A303 that the current variation is the variation in special figure 1 (step A303; Y), a decoration special figure reserve number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserve number is prepared (step A304), The effect command setting process (step A305) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended. At this point in time, the special figure 1 pending number is not updated by -1, but at step A304, a command (decorative special figure pending number command) corresponding to the value updated by -1 is prepared.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A303 that the present fluctuation is not the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, if the present fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 2, A decoration special figure reservation number command to be prepared is prepared (step A307), a rendering command setting process (step A308) is performed, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended. At this point, although the special figure 2 pending number is not updated by -1, in step A307, a command (decorative special figure pending number command) corresponding to the value updated by -1 is prepared.

If it is determined in step A301 that both the special drawing 1 holding number and the special drawing 2 holding number are "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether a customer waiting demo has been started ( Step A310) If the customer waiting demo has not been started (Step A310; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (Step A311). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and an effect command setting process (step A313) is performed. Next, "0" is set as the processing number for the special drawing routine processing (step A314), the processing number is saved in the special drawing game processing number area (step A315), and the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared ( Step A316). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the special view normal processing is ended.

[Special Figure 1 Variation Start Process] Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A306) in the above-mentioned special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 57, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321). A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed to set deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a big hit.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A 323) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A325). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the first special figure fluctuation display game (Step A327) is performed. Next, “1” according to the special figure variation process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).

Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area For example, 52 ms is saved (step A333), an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 change start processing] Next, the detail of the special figure 2 change start processing (Step A309) in the above-mentioned special figure usual processing is explained. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the process similar to the process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. It is done as.

As shown in FIG. 58, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341). A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A 342) is performed to set deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a big hit.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (Step A347) is performed. Next, “1” according to the special figure variation process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).

Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A 352), the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 52 blink timer) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area For example, 104 msec is saved (step A353), an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing] Figure 59 shows the big hit flag 1 setting processing (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing described above. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A 361), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A 362). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A 363), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A364). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A365) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit.

Then, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is a big hit (step A366; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the outlier information was saved in step A362 (step A367) ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is not a big hit (step A366; N), whether the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value or not Small hit determination processing (step A 368) to determine.

Then, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is a small hit (step A369; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area where the outlier information is saved in step A361. (Step A370), the big hit flag 1 setting processing ends. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is not the small hit (step A369; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed with the outlier information saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special view variation display game is one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “deterioration”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing] Figure 60 shows the big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A 342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing described above. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A372). It should be noted that the one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A 374) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit.

If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is a big hit (step A 375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area saved with the out information in step A 371 (step A 375). ), And the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is not a big hit (step A 375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special view variation display game is either “big hit” or “losing”.

[Large Hit Determination Processing] FIG. 61 shows the big hit determination processing (steps A161, A365, A374) in the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination processing, the big hit flag 1 setting processing, and the big hit flag 2 setting processing. In the jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (step A381), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (step A382). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 387), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Specifically, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A365) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a drop, "other than a big hit (small hit or drop)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A 374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A 382; Y) Therefore, "other than big hit (out)" is set as the determination result (step A387). If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; N), it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (step A 383).

Then, if it is in the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (step A384), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386). ). If the state is not the high probability state (step A383; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386) .

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 357), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Specifically, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A365) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y) Since it is a hit or a drop, "other than big hit (small hit or drop)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A 374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A 386; Y), it is an off As the determination result, "other than big hit (out)" is set (step A387). If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A 388), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small Hit Determination Processing] FIG. 62 shows the small hit determination processing (steps A166 and A368) in the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination processing and the big hit flag 1 setting processing. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit judgment value is set, and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is smaller than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391). In addition, small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. That is, being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is a loss, a hit is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit judgment value is set and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (Step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is a disconnection, a gap is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A394) and the small hit judgment processing is ended. Do.

[Special Figure 1 Stop Symbol Setting Process] FIG. 63 shows a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A 323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area ) And the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A 407), the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability fluctuation judgment The data is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409).

These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. In the case of the present embodiment, the rendering mode shifts in response to a hit, and the transition destination of the rendering mode, which shifts after an end, changes in accordance with the type of the hit symbol (type of big hit symbol or small hit). In addition, if it becomes a specific big hit symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) among the big hit in the special figure 1, depending on whether or not the game state is in a definite change, the transition destination's effect mode will be a definite change definite It is determined whether to shift to a rendering mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether the rendering mode is a definite variation or not. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410). If it is a small hit (step A410; Y), the special figure 1 small hit A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413). Thereafter, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), the off stop symbol pattern is in the stop symbol pattern area Save (step A417), and prepare a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A419), and effect command setting processing (step A420) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422) The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special Figure 2 Stop Symbol Setting Process] FIG. 64 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this special view 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A 431). If it is a big hit (step A 431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of reservations 1) ) And the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step A433), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired, it saves in the special figure 2 stop design number territory (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

Thereafter, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A 437), the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability fluctuation judgment The data is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A 442).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A 441). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A443), and a rendering command setting process (step A444) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446). 2 Stop symbol setting processing ends.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as a variation display game based on the detection of the gaming ball at the first start winning opening (starting entry 36), and the second start winning opening (normal variation winning) The variable display game execution means is configured to execute the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the gaming ball in the device 37). In addition, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special chart information setting process] Next, the details of the special chart information setting process (steps A173, A324, A344) in the above-mentioned special chart reservation information determination process, special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process Do. In the case of this embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, presence / absence of time reduction) does not affect the distribution of the change, and the effect mode managed by the game control apparatus 100 affects the distribution of the change. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence or absence of a time saving state, the progress status of the special view variation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the special view information setting process, first, the former half fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the former half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the rendering mode information is acquired (step A452). Then, the first half variation group selection offset table is set (step A453), and the offset data corresponding to the target special drawing reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454). Next, the former half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, in the variable distribution information 1 area, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation mode before the start of reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, although depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when the number of reservations is large, it is only in the case of loss, and as a result, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation group is selected, and one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Then, the second half fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the second half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458). Then, the second half fluctuation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and the offset data corresponding to the target special drawing reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460). Then, the latter half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is ended. As a result, in the variable distribution information 2 area, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (including the type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of reservations only in the case of an outfall (the reach incidence rate decreases when the number of reservations is large). Does not affect

[Variation Pattern Setting Process] Next, the details of the above-described special view reserve information determination process, special view 1 variation start process, and special figure 2 variation start process (steps A174, A326, and A346) will be described. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation aspect from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation which is the fluctuation aspect from the reaching state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game The second half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection address table is set (step A 471), the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472) Load and prepare the variation pattern random number 1 from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) (step A 473). In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half fluctuation group table is different in structure between a hit and a break. Specifically, it has a 1-byte size for hit and a 2-byte size for release. Since the rate of occurrence per hit is lower than the rate of occurrence of departure and even one byte is sufficient, the footprint is one byte in size from the viewpoint of saving of data capacity. Therefore, the hit time uses only the lower value of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1. In addition, the rate of occurrence of outliers is higher than the incidence rate of hits, and in order to make various renditions appear, the size for the removal is 2 bytes.

Then, it is judged whether or not the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is disapproval (step A 474), and if it is disapproval (step A 474; Y), 2-byte distribution processing (step A 475) is performed and the process of step A 477 is performed. Transfer to processing. If not (step A474; N), the distribution process (step A476) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A477.

Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A 477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1), Prepare (step A 478). Then, distribution processing (step A 479) is performed, and the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half fluctuation number area (step A 480). By this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step A 481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A 482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holdings 1). To do (step A 484). Thereafter, distribution processing (step A485) is performed, the first-half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and saved in the first-half fluctuation number area (step A486), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

[Distribution Process] FIG. 67 shows the distribution process (steps A476, A479, and A485) in the above-described fluctuation pattern setting process. In the distribution process, the latter half variation selection table of the special view variation display game is selected from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, or the second half variation selection table is selected In the process for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number) or selecting the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table based on is there.

In this distribution process, first, the head data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in step A472, the latter half variation selection table prepared in step A477, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A483) Is checked if it is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (step A2201). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number) or first half variation pattern (first half variation number) In the case of a selection table that stores the distribution value of, but does not require distribution, the distribution value "0", that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

Then, if the head data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table or first half fluctuation selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2202; Y), the data corresponding to the distributed result The address is updated (step A2207), and the distribution process is ended. On the other hand, when the first data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table or first half fluctuation selection table) is not a code without distribution (step A2202; N), the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table) And one distribution value defined first in the latter half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table) (step A2203).

Subsequently, the distributed value acquired in step A2203 is subtracted from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2 or fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in step A473, A478 or A484, and a new random number value is calculated. Is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203 and the subsequent steps Do the processing.

That is, the distribution value defined next in the target selection table (the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (step A2203), and then it is determined in the previous step A2205. A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205). The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y). Thereby, at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number) or first half variation pattern (first half variation pattern) defined in the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table or first half variation selection table) Any one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number) and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from the variation numbers). Then, if it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A2207), and the distribution processing is ended. Do.

[2-Byte Allocation Processing] FIG. 68 shows 2-byte allocation processing (step A 475) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the top data in the selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in step A 472) is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (step A2301). Here, although the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, the second half specifies only the second half fluctuation selection table in which the second half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the fluctuation group table (for example, a part of fluctuation group table when the result is out), since there is no need to distribute, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the head .

Then, if the first data in the selection table (second-half variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step A2307). End the distribution process. On the other hand, if the first data in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), one distribution value first defined in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is acquired (Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2303 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A473 (step A2304), and the calculated new randomness It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than "0" (step A2305). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step A2305; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), the process proceeds to step A2303 and the subsequent steps Do the processing. That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and then the distribution value is newly subtracted by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305. A random number value is calculated (step A2304), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305).

The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y). Thereby, any one second half fluctuation selection table is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table). When it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A2307), and 2-byte distribution processing is performed. Finish. The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 67 and the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG. 68 are basically the same, but whether the size of the random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes? Because they differ in that, the program instructions to calculate are different.

[Variation Start Information Setting Process] Next, the details of the variation start information setting process (steps A327 and A347) in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the former half fluctuation time value and the latter half fluctuation time value are added (step A 496), and the addition value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 497). Thereafter, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A 498), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A 499), and rendering command setting processing is performed (step A 500). ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), and the free space after the shift is cleared (step A504). Further, the fluctuation order flag storage area is shifted (step A505), the free space after the shift is cleared (step A506), and the fluctuation start information setting process is ended.

Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game A variation command including information on a pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of a stop time may be mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the process in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special Figure Variation Processing] Next, the details of the special figure variation processing (step A9) in the special figure game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the special figure variation processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is prepared (step A601), and effect command setting processing (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of this embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and if the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, 2000 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol is If the pattern is a small hit pattern, 2000 ms is set as the display time. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, "2" according to the special figure display process is set as the process number (step A605), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A606). Furthermore, save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A 607), the signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 Save the fluctuation signal OFF) in the test signal output data area (Step A 608), and select the number of times the symbol determination frequency related to the special display fluctuation display game is output to the external information terminal. Save (for example, 256 ms) (step A 609). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 1 display 51 is saved in the special view 1 change control flag area (step A610) Save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52 in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A611) The special figure changing process ends.

[Process in Special Figure Display] Next, the process in the special figure display (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, in the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A 701). The small hit flag area is cleared (step A702). Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded (Step A703) A process (Step A704) of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is performed. Then, it is judged whether the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A 705) and when it is determined that it is a big hit (step A 705; Y), the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special view fluctuation display game Save the test signal for the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the commodity continuous operation device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 signal is ON) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A 708), A round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 (step A 705; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706) and a big hit (step A706; Y), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the feature continuous operation device operating signal ON) regarding the start of the big hit (special feature 1 big hit) of the first special figure fluctuation display game, The special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A 707), and the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 709), the round number upper limit ("16" or "4" in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM is acquired. The number of rounds is saved in the upper limit value area of (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command is prepared according to the information that makes the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) (step A714). (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 1 or special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A716) Do A717).

Next, the information corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A 718, two jackpots and three jacks are saved as signals corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON if the jackpot is a jackpot with a jackpot (the jackpot opening information is not the jackpot opening information 1 (4R probability change (sudging))), a jackpot without jackpots (jacket opening) If the release information is large winning opening opening information 1 (4R probability variation (probability)), it will be ON if it is a big hit time in the time saving state, it will be OFF otherwise. In addition, the jackpot 3 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with some balls, and is OFF when the jackpot is a jackpot without balls.

After that, the big hit opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms or 300 ms) corresponding to the probability of being hit in the common view change display game and the special view change display game The setting is made (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special view when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the large winning a prize opening fraud winning number area of the special winning a prize opening (the special fluctuation winning a prize device 38) which corresponds to the special winning a prize opening opening information is cleared (step A722), the special winning a prize winning opening which corresponds to the special winning opening information The fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, fanfare / interval process shift setting process 1 (step A 724) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended. That is, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special fluctuation winning device 38 into the open state based on the result being a special result in any of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game. It is a special game state generating means that generates a state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725). If it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A 725; Y), time reduction variation number updating process (step A 726), effect mode information check process related to setting of effect mode (step A 727) ) To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the special drawing high probability is not found (step A728; N), the decoration special drawing command is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area and prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting The process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733. If it is determined in step A728 that the high probability of the special view is being reached (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is played In order not to make the person conscious, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed. Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Thereafter, the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A 725; N), time reduction variation number update processing (step A 735), presentation mode information check processing relating to setting of presentation mode (step A 736) is performed to set the switching preparation remaining rotation number corresponding to the rendering mode number (step A737), and it is determined whether the rendering remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A 738). Note that the switching preparation remaining rotational speed may be a different value (rotational speed) in all the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes, or the same value in any of the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes. When it is determined in step A 738 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step A 738; N), special figure normal processing shift setting processing 1 (step A 741) is performed, and special drawing display Finish the middle process. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A 738 that the effect remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A 738; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A 739). After the processing (step A740) is performed, special processing shift processing setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the processing of displaying the special drawing is ended. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several revolutions before the effect mode is switched, and the effect mode switching preparation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 to cross the mode. So that there is no contradiction.

[Time Reduction Variation Number Update Processing] Next, the details of the time reduction variation number update processing (steps A 726 and A 735) in the above-described special map display processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in the time reduction variation number updating process, first, it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (in the high probability state) (step A751). When the special figure height probability is in progress (step A 751: Y), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended. In addition, when it is not in the special figure height probability (step A 751; N), it is determined whether or not the time is short (step A 752). If the time is not being saved (step A 752: N), the time reduction change number update process is ended. If the time is short (step A 752; Y), the number of time reduction fluctuations is updated by −1 (step A 753), and it is determined whether the number of time reduction fluctuations has become “0” (step A 754).

If the time reduction variation count is not “0” (step A 754; N), the time reduction variation count update process is ended. Also, when the number of times of time-saving variation becomes “0” (step A 754; Y), a signal relating to the end of time saving (for example, 2 big hit signals OFF) is saved in the external information output data area. Then, the signal regarding the end of the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) to the test signal output data area Save.

Next, save the number with no time saving in the game state display number area (step A757), save the common drawing low probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A758), and make special drawing in the special drawing game mode flag area. The low probability & time saving none flag is saved (step A759). Next, save a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is OFF) relating to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step A760), and display the LED during right hitting (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57). In order to extinguish it, the number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 761), and the time shortening variation number updating process is ended.

[Demonstration Mode Information Check Processing] Next, the details of the rendering mode information check processing (steps A727 and A736) in the above-mentioned special map display processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode shift information is a code without update (step A771). If the next mode shift information is the no update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process is ended. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of special view variation display games that have been executed, and for example, the effect mode which continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

If the next mode transition information is not a no update code (step A 771; N), the effect remaining rotation number, which is the number of executable times of the special view variation display game up to the change of the effect mode, is updated by −1 (step A 772) Then, it is determined whether the effect remaining number of revolutions has become "0" (step A773). If the effect remaining number of revolutions is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is ended. If the effect remaining rotation speed becomes "0" (step A773; Y), that is, if the effect mode is to be changed from the next special image variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774) The address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), and the effect rotation number in the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation number in the RWM It saves in the area (step A677), acquires the next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted, and saves it in the next mode shift information area in the RWM (step A678). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, if the state of the probability has not changed, the rendering mode information check process is ended.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A782), An effect command setting process (step A 782) is performed. Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A783), and effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed. Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A 785), and effect command setting processing (step A 786) is performed. Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a mode to hit the left (step A 787), and if it is not a mode to hit the left (step A 787; N), the effect mode information check process is ended. If the mode is left-handed (step A 787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A 788), rendering command setting processing (step A 789) is performed, and rendering mode information check processing is ended. Do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of giving notice of switching from before the specified number of revolutions of switching of the effect mode. As described above, by managing the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100, for example, control such as generating a specific reach can be performed only in a specific effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / Inter-Intermediate Process Transition Setting Process 1] Next, details of the fanfare / inter-intermediate process transition setting process 1 (step A724) in the above-described special map display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1, first, the processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A 791), and processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A 792).

Next, save the signal about the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, 1 big hit signal ON (big hit + small hit output), big hit 4 signal ON (big hit output)) in the external information output data area (Step A793), a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, special The symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 794). Note that, even during the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the ordinary drawing, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal motorized combination 1 open extension state signal are always off. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A795), and a number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A796). The general drawing low probability flag is saved in the area (step A 797).

Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability notification flag area is used to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit) provided on the gaming board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. Is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801). The time reduction variation number area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high probability state and the short time state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

Thereafter, the effect mode 1 number is saved in the effect mode number area (step A 803), the effect remaining rotational speed area is cleared (step A 804), and the no update code is saved in the next mode shift information area (step A 805). . Then, save a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is ON) relating to the right-handling instruction in the test signal output data area (step A806), and turn on the display LED (for example, second gaming state display unit) during right-handing In order to cause the game state display number 2 area to save the number in the right-handed state (step A 807), the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is ended. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared as the special gaming state occurs.

[Small Hit Fanfare Medium Processing Transition Setting Processing 1] Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1 (step A734) in the special drawing display processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1, first, “7” according to the small hit fanfare medium process is set as the process number (step A811), and the process number is processed as a special drawing game process. Save to the number area (step A812).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 813), a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one signal for big hit is ON (big hit + small hit output) ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A 814), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 815).

Next, the special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A 816), and the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A 817). Next, a signal relating to a right-handed command (fire position designation signal 1 is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 818), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) is lit. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 819), and the small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Fanfare / Inter-interval Processing] Next, details of the fanfare / inter-interval processing (step A11) in the above-described special view game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902) And effect command setting processing (step A 903).

Thereafter, the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A 904), the release switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is obtained (step A 905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is the obtained release switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906). When the number of rounds is larger than the release switching determination value (step A 906; Y), the special winning opening open time (for example, 0.2 seconds) for short opening (second opening mode) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (Step A 907), the special winning opening open processing transition processing setting processing (Step A 909) is performed, and the fan fare / in-interval processing is ended. If the number of rounds is not larger than the release switching determination value (step A 906; N), the special winning opening open time (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening (first opening mode) is set as the special figure game processing timer area The game is saved (step A 908), the special winning opening open processing shift setting processing (step A 909) is performed, and the fanfare / interval processing is ended.

Here, in the present embodiment, as a big hit pattern, 16R positive variation A (all long open), 16R positive variation B (1 to 4 R long open, 5 to 16 R short open), 16R normal A (all long open), 16R normal B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open) and 4R positive variation (all short open) are set. The definite change is a big hit when the probability state after the end of the special game state becomes a high probability state, and the normal is a big hit when the probability state after the end of the special game state becomes a low probability state. Therefore, in the special winning opening operation determination table, 16R positive variation A data and opening switching determination value "0", 16R positive variation B data and opening switching determination value "4", 16R normal A data and opening switching determination value "0", The 16R normal B data is stored in association with the release switching determination value “4” and the 4R probability variation data and the release switching determination value “0”. Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, the open operation is performed such that the open operation is short open when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value.

Large winning opening opening processing transition setting processing FIG. 78 shows the opening opening processing during high winning opening opening processing (step A 909) in the above-described fan fare / in-interval processing. In the special winning opening open processing transition setting process, first, set the processing number to "4" for the special winning opening opening processing (step A911), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area ( Step A 912). After that, save a signal related to the opening start of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric combination 1 operation signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step A 913) and store the number of winnings on the special winning opening. The information on the winning opening count number area is cleared (step A 914). Then, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing is ended.

Next, the details of the special winning opening open processing (step A12) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 79, in the special winning opening open process, first, the current round is compared with the current round number in the special gaming state under execution and the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). Then, if it is not the final round (step A1001; N), set the special winning opening operation determination table (step A1002), acquire the release switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (step A1003), It is determined whether the number of rounds in the gaming state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1004). If the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), save the remaining ball processing time (eg, 1.4 seconds) for the short closing in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005), Prepare an interval command related to the interval between rounds (step A1007), perform effect command setting processing (step A1010), perform the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing (step A1011), and the special winning opening is open. End the process.

Also, if the number of rounds is not larger than the release switching determination value (step A1004; N), save the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1006), prepare an interval command (step A1007), perform effect command setting processing (step A1010), perform the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing (step A1011), and end the special winning opening open processing Do.

On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), save the final remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and end the special gaming state. The ending command concerning display control etc. of the ending display screen in the case is prepared (step A1009), rendering command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, and the special winning opening residual ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, The special winning opening open processing ends.

Large winning a prize opening residual ball processing shift setting processing Figure 80 shows the special winning a prize opening residual ball processing shifting setting processing (step A1011) in the above-mentioned special winning opening open processing. In the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting process, first, the processing number is set to "5" for the special winning opening residual ball processing (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, in order to close the opening / closing member 990 of the special variation winning device 38, save the off data for turning off the big winning opening solenoid 38b in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023). The sphere process transition setting process is ended.

Next, the details of the special winning opening residual ball processing (step A13) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 81, in the special winning opening residual ball processing, first, the current round is compared with the current round number in the special gaming state being executed and the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value region of RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

Then, if the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A1101; N), set the special winning opening operation determination table (step A1102), and obtain the opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information Then (step A1103), a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A1104). Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special gaming state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1105), and if the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109 Transfer to processing of If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening opening information is a rank down effect type value (step A1106).

Here, the rank down effect corresponds to an effect of notifying that the following round will be a short open round. Specifically, as a big hit pattern, 16R positive variation A (all long open), 16R positive variation B (1-4R long open, 5-16R short open), 16R normal A (all long open), 16R normal B (all open When one of 1 to 4 R is long open and 5 to 16 R is short open), a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1 R to 3 R of the big hit round, Perform round continuation notification effect. If the selected jackpot pattern is 16R positive variation A or 16R normal B (all open long), it is notified that the long open continues in the round continuation notification effect, and the big winning opening is long open also in the 5Rth and subsequent rounds It is released by In addition, if the selected jackpot pattern is 16R positive variation B or 16R normal B (1 to 4 R is long open, 5 to 16 R is short open), rank down effect is performed in the round continuation informing effect and short open It will be informed that the big winning opening will be open in a short opening in the 5Rth and subsequent rounds.

If the special winning opening information is not a rank down effect value (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. When the special winning opening information is a rank down effect value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 4R) (step A1107). If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. If the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), for example, if the number of rounds is 4R, an interval time (for example, 3.6 seconds) for rank down effect is set (step) A1108), the process proceeds to step A1109. In addition, the number of special rounds is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the special winning opening residual ball processing Finish.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area storing the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1111), set the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the special winning opening opening information and the stop symbol pattern (step A1112), and set the ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) to the special figure game processing timer area Save (step A1113). Thereafter, the big hit end process shift setting process (step A1114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended.

[Fanfare / Inter-Intermediate Processing Transition Setting Processing 2] FIG. 82 shows the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) in the above-mentioned special winning opening remaining ball processing. In this fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 2, first, the processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1122). Next, save a signal (for example, the special electric combination 1 operating signal is OFF) relating to the open end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) in the test signal output data area (step A1123). The middle processing shift setting processing 2 ends.

[Big win end process shift setting process] FIG. 83 shows the big hit finish process shift setting process (step A1114) in the above-mentioned big winning opening remaining ball process. In the big hit end process shift setting process, first, "6" is set as the process number related to the big hit end process (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132). Thereafter, a signal (for example, the special electric symbol 1 in operation is OFF) relating to the open end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step A1134), clear the information on the round number area storing the round number of the special gaming state (step A1135) ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit value area storing the upper limit value of the round number of the special gaming state (step A1136). Then, clear the information of the round number upper limit value information area storing the flag for upper limit value determination of the round number (step A1137), and of the special winning opening open information area storing the flag for opening information determination of the special winning opening The information is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end process shift setting process is ended.

Next, the details of the big hit end process (step A14) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 84, in this big hit end process, first, the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is a high probability after the end of the special game state It is determined whether the data is high probability data set in the case of becoming a state (step A1201).

When it is not high probability data (step A1201; N), big hit end setting processing 1 is done (step A1202), when it is high probability data (step A1201; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 is carried out (step A1203) ), Prepare a probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag (step A1204), and perform command setting processing (step A1205).

Next, as processing for saving information necessary for managing the rendering mode in the game control apparatus 100, first, a rendering mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A1206). Then, with reference to the set effect mode information setting table, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1207). Furthermore, the effect residual rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A1208), and the next mode transition of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1209).

Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A1210), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A1211), and a command setting process (step A1212) is performed. Then, special processing normal processing shift setting processing 2 is performed (step A1213), and the big hit end processing is ended.

[Big Hit End Setting Process 1] FIG. 85 shows a big hit end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the above-described big hit finish process. In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal regarding the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and a signal regarding the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

Next, the common drawing high probability & common charge support flag is saved in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1223), and the special drawing low probability & time short flag is saved in the special drawing game mode flag area (step A1224). Thereafter, save the probability information command (time reduction) in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1225), save the time reduction change frequency initial value (for example 100) in the time reduction change frequency area (step A1226) The setting process 1 ends.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. In addition, by setting the initial value (for example, 100) of the short-time fluctuation count in the short-time fluctuation count area, the short-time state is ended by execution of the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Big win end setting process 2] FIG. 86 shows a big hit end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the above-described big hit finish process. In the big hit end setting process 2, first, the signal regarding the start of the high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231), and the signal regarding the start of the high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

Next, the common drawing high probability & common charge support flag is saved in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1233), and the special drawing high probability & time short flag is saved in the special drawing game mode flag area (step A1234). Thereafter, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1235), the time shortening fluctuation number area is cleared (step A1236), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended. By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game becomes the high probability state and the time saving state until the derivation of the next special result mode is achieved.

That is, the specific game state (time saving state) capable of generating a specific game state (time saving state) in which the game control device 100 extends the period in which the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined period determined after the end of the special game state. It constitutes state generation control means.

[Special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2] FIG. 87 shows the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above-mentioned big hit end process. In the special view routine process transition setting process 2, first, "0" is set as the process number relating to the special figure routine process (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1242) .

After that, save the signal regarding the end of the big hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal OFF, the big hit 3 signal OFF, the big hit 4 signal OFF) in the external information output data area (step A1243), the signal about the big hit end (eg The condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operation device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information of the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, clear the information of the special view game mode flag save area (step A1248), save the flag during the injustice monitoring period in the large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and set special processing shift processing 2 Finish.

[Small Hit Fanfare Medium Processing] Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (step A15) in the above-described special view game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 88A, in the small hit fanfare medium process, a small hit, medium process shift setting process (step A1301) is performed.

Next, the details of the small hitting medium process shift setting process (step A 1301) in the above-mentioned small hit fanfare medium process will be described. As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the small hit middle processing shift setting process, first, "8" for the small hit middle processing is set as the processing number (step A1311), and the processing number is set to the special view game processing. The file is saved in the number area (step A1312).

Next, save the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), the signal regarding the start of the small hitting operation (for example During operation, the signal is turned ON) and saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314). Next, in order to open the opening / closing member 990 of the special variation winning device 38, on data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315). Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step A 1316), save the small hitting operation initial value (for example, "0") in the small hitting middle control pointer area (Step A1317), the small hitting middle process transition setting process is ended.

[Small hit middle process] Next, details of the small hit middle process (step A16) in the above-described special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 89, in the small hit / medium process, first, the value of the small hit / medium control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and the loaded value is not less than the small hit operation end value (eg, “6”) Is determined (step A1402). If the loaded value is not greater than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hitting middle control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hitting operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed. End processing during hit.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is in the special figure height probability. It is determined whether it is a flag related to (step A1406). Thereby, it is determined whether the small hit in the special figure height probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the time saving state is in progress. If the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing is ended. If the loaded flag is not a flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), prepare a small hit end screen command (step A1407), perform rendering command setting processing (step A1408), The small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing ends.

[Small Hit Operation Shift Setting Processing] Next, the details of the small hit motion shift setting processing (step A1404) in the above-described small hit middle processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 90, in the small hitting operation shift setting process, branch processing (step A1411) is performed according to the control pointer (small hitting middle control pointer).

If the control pointer is “0”, “2” or “4” at step A1411, the wait time (eg, 1500 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412), The off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hitting operation shift setting process is ended. If the control pointer is "1", "3" or "5" at step A1411, the special winning opening open time (for example, 200 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A1414) The on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (Step A1415), and the small hitting operation shift setting process is ended.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 ms, the opening of 200 ms and the closing of 1500 ms are alternately performed, and the small hit middle control pointer is sequentially at the end of opening and at the end of closing. It will be updated. Specifically, at the end of the first 200 ms opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 ms opening to the first 1500 ms closing), the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “0,” 1 At the end of the first 1500 ms closing (that is, when switching from the first 1500 ms closing to the second 200 ms opening), the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “1”, and the second 200 ms opening is performed. The small hit middle control pointer is updated to "2" at the end, the small hit middle control pointer is updated to "3" at the end of the second 1500 ms closing, and the small hit middle control at the end of the third 200 ms open The pointer is updated to "4" and the small hit middle control pointer is updated to "5" at the end of the third 1500 ms closing. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 ms opening, the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “6”, and after the lapse of the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 ms and the small hit ending time of 100 ms thereafter, the small hit The state ends. Therefore, since it is closed for 2000 ms after the fourth 200 ms opening, the visual ending time is 2000 ms.

[Small Hit Residual Ball Processing Shift Setting Processing] Next, the details of the small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing (step A1409) in the above-described small hit middle processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 91, in the small hit residual ball processing shift setting process, first, “9” for the small hit residual ball processing is set as the processing number (step A 1421), and the processing number is set to the special view game processing number Save to the area (step A1422). Next, the small hit residual ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1424), small The remaining ball processing shift setting process is ended.

[Small Hit Residual Ball Processing] Next, details of the small hit residual ball processing (step A17) in the above-described special view game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 92A, in the small hit residual ball processing, a small hit end processing shift setting process (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hitting end processing shift setting processing] Next, details of the small hit ending processing shift setting processing (step A1501) in the above-described small hit remaining ball processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), in the small hitting end process transition setting process, first, "10" according to the small hitting end process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is processed as a special drawing game process. The file is saved in the number area (step A1512).

Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric character 1 operating signal is turned off) Are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514). Next, clear the information of the large winning opening count count area (step A1515), clear the information of the small hit middle control pointer area (for example, clear 0) (step A1516), and end the small hit end processing shift setting process .

[Small hit end process] Next, the details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 93, in the small hitting end process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability Step A1602). If the loaded flag is not the flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), the effect mode set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of stop symbol setting) The address of the table corresponding to the transition information is acquired (step A1604).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A 776), the effect remaining rotation number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation number in the RAM The image data is saved in the area (step A1606), the next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired, and the next mode shift information area in the RWM is saved (step A1607). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610), An effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed. Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A1612), and effect command setting processing (step A1613) is performed. Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A 1614), and rendering command setting processing (step A 1615) is performed. Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a mode to hit the left (step A1616), and if it is not a mode to hit the left (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. If the mode is the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and after the rendering command setting process (step A1618) is performed, the process of step A1619 is performed. Transition.

Then, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1619), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure time-short (time-short state) (step A1620). If the loaded flag is a flag relating to special drawing time reduction (step A1620; Y), special drawing transition processing setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end processing is ended. Also, if the loaded flag is not a flag relating to special drawing time (N in step A 1620; N), save a signal relating to a left hitting instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A1621), in order to turn off the display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) in the right hitting, save the number in the left hitting state in the gaming state indication number 2 area (step A1622) Processing transition setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hitting end processing is ended.

[Special figure usual processing shift setting processing 3] Next, the details of the special figure usual processing shift setting processing 3 (step A1623) in the above-mentioned small hitting end processing are explained. As shown in FIG. 94, in the special processing routine processing transition setting processing, first, "0" relating to the special processing routine processing is set as the processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is set as the special processing game processing number area. Save (step A1632).

Next, save the signal related to the small hit end (for example, the big hit 1 signal OFF) in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal related to the small hit end (eg special symbol 1 small hit signal OFF) Are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634). Next, the information of the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information of the special view game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1637). Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special processing routine processing transition setting processing 3 is ended.

[Demonstration Command Setting Processing] Next, the details of the rendering command setting processing in each processing executed during the timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 95, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2001). If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process for reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2004). If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), the command data (ACTION) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process is ended. The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as "command setting process".

[Design Variation Control Processing] FIG. 96 shows the symbol variation control processing (steps A20 and A22) in the special drawing game processing described above and the symbol variation control processing (step B15) in the common drawing game processing described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol (the first special figure, the second special figure, etc.) or the ordinary symbol (the common figure) and setting the display data of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol.

In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag applied to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the common figure) is changing (step A2101) . In the case of this embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A19, step A21 and step B14 The address for stop) and the address for display table 1 (for variation) are defined.

If the fluctuation flag pertaining to the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating (step A2102; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2103). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21 and step B14. Next, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), and it is determined whether the updated blinking control timer is "0" (step A2105), and the updated blinking control timer is "0". If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

Also, when the blinking control timer after updating is "0" (step A2105; Y), the blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target blinking timer area is saved (step A2106), and the variation symbol number of the control object Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

On the other hand, when the changing flag concerning the symbol to be controlled is not changing (step A2102; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2109). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21 and step B14. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

The blinking control timer initial value saved in step A2106 is a value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. Here, a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the blinking control timer initial value in the variation control table of the first special figure (first special figure variation display game), and the second special figure (second special figure variation display game) A value corresponding to 104 ms is defined as the blinking control timer initial value in the fluctuation control table of), and a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the blinking control timer initial value in the fluctuation control table of the common drawing (generally drawn fluctuation display game) It is done. The blinking control timer initial value is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the fluctuation time.

Further, the corresponding range in step A2107 is defined by the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variation symbol number reaches the upper limit value by updating the variation symbol number by +1 in step A2107, the variation symbol number is set to 0, and the variation symbol number is 0 to 0 (variation symbol number upper limit judgment value -1 It is updated sequentially in the range of). In steps A2108 and A2111, display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the fluctuation symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value. Will be repeatedly displayed.

Here, 8 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit judgment value in the variation control table of the first special figure (first special figure variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0-7. Therefore, the special figure 1 in-varying display which is repeatedly displayed during the variation display of the first special figure variation display game makes a round with updating of the lighting pattern of eight times. In addition, 2 is defined as the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value in the fluctuation control table of the second special figure (the second special figure fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation symbol numbers can be updated alternately with 0 and 1. Therefore, the special figure 2 in-varying display which is repeatedly displayed during the variable indication of the second special figure variation display game makes a round with updating of the lighting patterns of two times. Further, 4 is defined as the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value in the fluctuation control table of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0-3. Therefore, the common drawing in-progress display, which is repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the common drawing change display game, makes one round of four lighting pattern updates.

By defining the blinking control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed as described above, the interval and the display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are round The number of updates to be made can be set for each game.

Next, details of the common drawing game processing (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described. In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a, control of the entire processing concerning the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of common drawing, and the like are performed.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the common-play game processing, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general competition winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the common-play game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the common drawing game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

If it is determined that the value of the common-play game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, it is determined that the time-up or time-up has occurred, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the common-play game processing number The routine drawing game sequence branch table is set in the register (step B5), and the table is used to obtain the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the regular drawing game process number (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the common drawing game process number (step B7).

In step B7, when the popular drawing game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the common drawing fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of fluctuation start of the common drawing fluctuation display game and the setting of the effect, or The ordinary drawing process (step B8) is performed to set information necessary for performing the process. If the drawing game processing number is “1” in step B7, a drawing change processing (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the drawing display processing.

In addition, if the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit when the common drawing game processing number is "2" in step B7, the setting of the common charge open time according to whether or not the time saving state is being performed. In addition, the general drawing display processing (step B10) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common processing per processing. In addition, if the common drawing game processing number is "3" in step B7, then the common drawing is continued during the common drawing, or the common drawing is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common electric residual ball processing, etc. A process (step B11) is performed.

In step B7, if the common drawing game process number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) is performed to set information required for performing the common drawing end processing. If the drawing game processing number is "5" in step B7, the drawing drawing end processing (step B13) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the drawing common processing.

Then, after preparing the common drawing fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the common drawing display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the common symbol by the common drawing display (step B15) ), And end the common drawing game processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in step B4 that the value of the common-play game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Gate Switch Monitoring Process] Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described common game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether the game state (for example, during the big hit, during the small hit, during the special view time, during the common charge support) (Step B102). When it is a game state to hit the right (step B102; Y), it is determined whether the common drawing reservation number is obtained and the general drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105). If the game state is not right-handed (step B102; N), a left-handed command is prepared (step B103), and the rendering command setting process (step B104) is performed, and then the common drawing reserve number is acquired. It is determined whether the number of general drawing reservations is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).

If the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the common drawing reservation number is updated by 1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated common drawing reservation number is calculated. (Step B107). Then, the random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (step B108), and the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit symbol random number storage area (step B109). Finish.

If it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or if it is determined in step B105 that the number of general drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (step B105; N), End the gate switch monitoring process.

[Puppet Winning Switch Monitoring Process] Next, the details of the routine playing prize switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described regular drawing game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 99, in the common electric winning switch switch monitoring process, first, whether it is in the common drawing, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game is hit and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. It is determined whether there is any (step B201). Then, if the drawing is in the middle (step B201; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202) and there is an input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y) If it is determined, the count number of the common charge counter is updated by 1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated common charge counter is the upper limit value (for example, "6") or more (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is the upper limit value or more (step B204; Y) Then, hit the control pointer area in the common drawing and save the operation end value (for example, "4") (step B205), clear the common drawing game processing timer to 0 (step B206), and execute the general electric winning switch monitoring process finish. That is, when there is a routine power prize higher than the upper limit value in the hit state of the common drawing, the hit state of the common drawing is ended halfway at that point.

If it is determined in step B201 that a per figure drawing is not in progress (step B201; N), if it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. When it is determined that the common charge count number is not the upper limit value or more (step B204; N), the common match winning switch monitoring process is ended.

Next, details of the common drawing routine processing (step B8) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 100, in the ordinary drawing routine, first, it is determined whether the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301), and the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B201; Y ) Performs ordinary drawing transition processing transition setting processing 1 (step B321), and ends ordinary circulation processing. Also, if the common drawing reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), load random numbers from the RWM hit random number storage area (for the hold number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for the hold number 1) ( Step B302), clear random number storage area (for holding number 1), touch symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability of hit results in a common drawing variation display game is normal It is determined whether it is in the common map high probability raised higher than the probability (that is, the common map low probability), ie, in the short time state (step B304).

If the drawing probability is not in the high probability (step B304; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower judgment value) in the low probability of the drawing is set (step B305). ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the general drawing high probability (step B306). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B307). If the value of the random number is not greater than or equal to the upper judgment value (step B307; N), the value of the random number is determined to be B305 or B306. It is determined whether it is less than the lower limit judgment value set (step B308).

If the value of the per-random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B307; Y) or if the value of the per-random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; Y), the per-flag In the area, save the deviation information (step B309), set the out-of-stop symbol number (step B310), save the out-of-pattern information in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B311), stop the common symbol number stop Save to the symbol area (step B315). On the other hand, if the value of the random number per hit is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B312) and the load loaded in step B302 The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B313), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B314), and the stop symbol number is common drawing stop symbol Save to the area (step B315).

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at high probability is 250/251, the upper judgment value is “251”, and the low probability judgment value is “251”, the high probability lower limit judgment value is “1”. Therefore, at the time of the general drawing low probability, the value of the hit random number deviates in all cases of “0” to “250”. Further, at the time of the drawing normal probability, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of “1” to “250” is present, and the case where the value of the hit random number is “0” is not.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol area (step B315), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316). Thereafter, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B317), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B318), and the common drawing reserve number is updated by -1 (step B319). That is, with the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 being executed, the processing of raising the positions of the common drawing reservation numbers 2 to 4 held by the common drawing reservation number 1 or later one by one I do. As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to the number 3 for general drawing reservation It will be done. Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 of the random number storage area per common drawing is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one. Then, the general drawing variation processing transition setting process (step B320) is performed, and the general drawing routine processing is ended.

[General drawing ordinary processing transition setting processing 1] In FIG. 101, the ordinary drawing general processing transition setting processing 1 (step B 321) in the ordinary drawing normal processing described above, and the common drawing routine processing transition in general drawing display processing described later The setting process 1 (step B508) is shown. In this common drawing routine processing transition setting processing 1, first, "0" is set as a processing number for moving to common drawing normal processing (step B331), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (step B332). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B333), and the routine diagram transition processing setting processing 1 ends.

[Processing setting transition processing during general drawing fluctuation] FIG. 102 shows the processing transition setting processing during general drawing fluctuation processing (step B320) in the above-described ordinary drawing normal processing. In this common drawing fluctuating process transition setting process, first, “1” is set as a processing number for shifting to the common drawing fluctuating process (step B 341), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area ( Step B342). After that, the common drawing fluctuation time (for example, 500 ms. In the case of this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation time is common between the common drawing low probability state and the common drawing high probability state) Save (step B343), save the signal related to the start of the common drawing fluctuation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step B344), and change the common drawing fluctuation display game A floating flag indicating medium is saved in the common drawing fluctuation control flag area (step B345). Then, save the blinking control timer initial value (here, 52 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the common drawing indicator, in the common drawing blinking control timer area (step B346) Finish.

Next, the details of the general drawing variation processing (step B9) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the general-diagram variation processing, a general-diagram-display processing transition setting process (step B401) is performed.

Next, the details of the processing for setting transition to general processing during general distribution display processing (step B401) will be described. As shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the processing for setting transition to general processing, first, the processing number is set to "2" as setting processing for transitioning to processing during general display (step B411), The number is saved in the common drawing game process number area (step B412). Thereafter, the common drawing display time (for example, 600 ms) which is the display time of the common drawing fluctuation display game result in the common drawing indicator is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B413). (For example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and the stop flag indicating that the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the common drawing fluctuation control flag area Then (step B415), the processing transition setting processing during the display of the general drawing is ended.

Next, the details of the general drawing display processing (step B10) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 104, in the processing for displaying the common drawing, first, the hit flag (hit information or out information) set in the common processing is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503)

If the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), the common drawing routine processing transition setting processing 1 (step B508) for moving to the common drawing normal processing is performed, and the common drawing display processing is ended. On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B 503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B 504), and the hit start pointer value (eg, “0 "," "2" or "4") is obtained and saved in the control pointer area during the drawing (step B505). Next, a general power release time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 ms) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B506). Thereafter, the processing transition setting processing (step B211) is performed per common drawing, and the common drawing display processing is ended.

[Process for setting transition to normal processing per common drawing] FIG. 105 shows processing for setting transition to normal processing per common processing (step B507) in the above-described processing for displaying general drawing. In this processing per process setting processing, first, "3" is set as a processing number for processing transition to processing per common drawing (step B511), and the processing number is saved in the general processing game processing number area. (Step B512). After that, test signal output data for the signal related to the hit of the common drawing fluctuation display game (for example, the signal during normal symbol 1 is ON) and the signal for the start of power operation (for example, the signal for ordinary electric character 1 operation is ON) In order to save in the area (step B513) and output a signal for driving (turning on) the common voltage solenoid, the on data is saved in the common voltage solenoid output data area (step B514).

Further, the information of the common charge count number area storing the number of winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is cleared (step B515), and the general electric number storing the winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the regular monitoring period The information on the incorrect winning number area is cleared (step B516). Then, a flag (outside of fraud monitoring period flag) defining out of fraud monitoring period of normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is saved in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B 517), and the processing transition setting processing is completed per common drawing. Do.

Next, the details of the common drawing processing (step B11) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, in the middle processing per normal drawing, first, the middle control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the control pointer per common drawing loaded is equal to or more than the upper limit It is determined (step B602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer in the common drawing is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step B602; N), the control pointer in the common drawing is updated by +1 (step B603), and Go and finish the process during the popular map. If the value of the control pointer during the common drawing is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; Y), then the general processing shift is performed without performing processing of updating the processing control pointer area during the common drawing by +1 in step B603. The setting process (step B604) is performed, and the process is ended during the common drawing.

[Generalization Operation Transition Setting Process] FIG. 107 shows the general operation transition setting process (step B604) in the above-described per-normal-period process. The routine operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the drive of the routine power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (general control pointer). It is like that. In this routine operation transition setting process, first, a branch process is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B611).

If the value of the control pointer is “0” or “2”, the process proceeds to step B 612 to control the closing of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, so after the closing of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 corresponding to the control pointer Saves the off time in the common power solenoid output data area (step B613), and sets the common power operation shift to save the wait time of the general game processing timer area (step B612) and turn off the common power solenoid 37c. End the process.

If the value of the control pointer is “1” or “3”, the process proceeds to step B 614 to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so that the normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer In order to save the general power release time, which is the open time, in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B614) and turn on the general power solenoid 37c, save the on data in the general power solenoid output data area (step B615) Ends the routine operation transition setting process.

If the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B616 to end the release control of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 and perform the general electric power remaining ball processing, so "4" as the processing number Are set (step B 616). Then, the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (step B617), and the general electric power remaining ball processing time is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B619). Thereafter, in order to turn off the common solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B619), and the common power operation transition setting process is ended.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, a weight time of 200 ms is saved in step B612, 1700 ms is saved in step B614 as the common charge release time, and 600 ms is saved in step B618 as the common charge residual ball processing time. . Furthermore, when the stop figure symbol is “per hit symbol 1”, “4” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the processing during the stop status display shown in FIG. In step B506, "500 ms" is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, since the release time of the general power is "500 ms", the normal power (normal fluctuation winning device 37) opens for 500 ms, and then the control pointer is "4" Therefore, the general charge residual ball processing time of 600 ms is set. In addition, when the stop figure design symbol is “hit pattern 2”, “2” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the processing during the hit map display shown in FIG. In step B506, “1700 milliseconds” is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, since the release time of the common charge is "1700 ms", the common charge is released for 1700 ms, and then the weight of 200 ms is kept since the control pointer is "2" Since the time is set and then the control pointer is updated to "3" during the normal drawing, the power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer is updated to "4" during the normal drawing, 600 ms of The normal charge residual ball processing time is set. In addition, when the stop figure design symbol is “per hit pattern 3”, “0” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the processing during the general view display shown in FIG. In step B506, “1700 milliseconds” is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, since the PV release time is "1700 ms", the PV is released for 1700 ms, and thereafter, since the control pointer is "0", the weight of 200 ms is waited. The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "1" during the normal drawing, and the general power is released for 1700 ms, and then 200 ms since the control pointer during the expansion is updated to "2". The wait time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "3" during the general drawing, and the general power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer is updated to "4" during the general drawing, 600 ms. The normal charge residual ball processing time is set.

Next, the details of the general electric residual ball processing (step B12) in the above-described general drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), in the generalization residual ball processing, the end processing shift setting processing (step B701) is performed per common drawing.

Next, the details of the processing for setting transition processing per processing for general drawing (step B 701) in the above-described processing for remaining electric power sphere will be described. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), in the processing for setting end processing per common drawing, first, the processing number "5" related to the end processing per common drawing is set (step B711), and the processing number The file is saved in the processing number area (step B712).

Thereafter, the common drawing ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B 713), and a signal related to the operation termination of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (for example, the normal electric character 1 operation signal OFF) Are saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the common charge count number area for counting the number of prizes for the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is cleared (step B715). Then, the control pointer area in the common drawing is cleared (step B716), and the processing for setting the end processing per common drawing is ended.

Next, the details of the end-of-popular-completion process (step B13) in the above-mentioned common-play game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 109 (a), in the end processing per common drawing, common processing normal processing shift setting processing 2 (step B801) is performed.

Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing transition setting processing 2 (step B801) in the above-described processing of ending the common drawing per routine will be described. As shown in FIG. 109 (b), in the ordinary drawing normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the ordinary drawing normal process is set (step B811), and the process number is set to the ordinary drawing game process Save in the number area (step B812).

After that, save the signal (for example, the signal is turned off during the normal symbol 1) to the test signal output data area (step B 813) and define the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The flag (during fraud monitoring period flag) is saved in the routine power transmission fraud monitoring period flag area (step B 814), and the routine drawing transition processing setting process 2 is ended.

[Segment LED Editing Process] Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S111) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special view 1 suspension display, the special view 2 suspension display, the general drawing suspension display, the first gaming status display unit, the second gaming status display unit, and the round display provided in the collective display device 50 Perform settings related to driving of the segment LEDs that make up the unit.

As shown in FIG. 110, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blink control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether the output on timing is based on whether the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1 or not. (Step S502). In the present embodiment, when the bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on timing, thereby creating a blinking cycle of 128 ms. If the output is on timing (step S502; Y), the common drawing reservation number display table 1 is set among the common drawing reservation number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode in the common drawing reservation display is defined. (Step S503) When it is not the output on timing (Step S502; N), the common drawing reserve number display table 2 is set (Step S504). Then, display data corresponding to the common drawing reservation number is acquired from the set common drawing reservation number display table and saved in the segment area of the common drawing reservation display unit (step S505). In the present embodiment, if the common drawing reserve number is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data becomes the same regardless of which common drawing reserve number display table is set.

Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506), and in the case of the output on timing (step S506; Y), the special figure 1 reserve number in which the display mode on the special figure 1 reserve indicator is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold count display table 1 is set (step S507), and when it is not the output on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold count display table 2 is set (step S506) Step S508). Then, display data corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 1 holding number display table, and saved in the segment area of the special drawing 1 holding display (step S 509).

Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S510), and in the case of the output on timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 reserve number display in which the display mode on the special view 2 reserve indicator is defined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 pending number display table 1 is set (step S511), and when it is not the output on timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 pending number display table 2 is set (step S510) S512). Then, display data corresponding to the special drawing 2 holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 2 holding number display table and saved in the segment area of the special drawing 2 holding display (step S513). Furthermore, a round display table in which the display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the round display unit (step S515). ).

Next, the game state display table 1 is set in which the display mode in the second game state display unit 58 that lights up when the time saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time saving state (step S516) The display data corresponding to is acquired, and it saves in the segment area | region of a 1st game state display part (step S517). In the present embodiment, the first gaming state display unit consisting of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal operation and to be turned on during special display time (short during power support). After that, the gaming state display table 2 is set in which the display mode in the second gaming state display unit is notified that the gaming state is more advantageous to the right hitting than the left hitting (step S518). The display data corresponding to the state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second gaming state display unit (step S519), and the segment LED editing process is ended. In the present embodiment, the second gaming state display unit consisting of one LED is turned off at the time of normal hitting (left hitting) and right hitting (in the case of the present embodiment, during the big hit, during the small hit, during the common charge support) ) Is configured to light up.

[Magnet Fraud Monitoring Process] Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and the end of fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 111, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (step S601). If the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (step S602). It is determined whether the time is up (step S603). In the case of the present embodiment, when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 ms or more, it is determined that time is up.

If the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60 seconds is saved in the magnet fraud alert timer area (step S605). Then, a command for magnet informing notification is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a predetermined period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality occurs.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud specifying the notification time of the magnet fraud If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). In addition, the minimum value of the magnet fraud alerting | reporting timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is "0" (step S610). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is not time-up (step S603; N), it transfers to the process of step S609.

Then, if the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is not "0" (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. Also, if the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is "0" (step S610; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is up, and the fraud alert period ends, or from the beginning it is fraudulent If the notification has not been made, a command for magnet notification end is prepared (step S611). Furthermore, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

Then, if the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and rendering command setting processing is performed. Then (step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. Here, “step S601; N” → “step S608” → “step S609” → “step S610; Y” → “step S611” → “step S612” → “step S613; Y” are normal routes.

Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and the end of the fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 112, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, It is determined whether the board radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). If the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the radio wave fraud alert timer is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area (step S702).

Then, prepare a command of board radio wave fraud notification (step S703), prepare a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S704), and prepare the prepared board radio wave fraud flag with the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times, while in the case of board radio wave fraud, the board radio sensor 62 is detected once. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred at the time of

On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S 701; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer defining the notification time of radio wave fraud is not “0” −1 It updates (step S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is "0" (step S706).

If the value of the radio wave injustice timer is not “0” (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave improper monitoring process is ended. If the value of the radio wave informing timer is "0" (step S706; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already been up, and the period of the informing notification ends, or from the beginning it is incorrect. If the notification has not been made, prepare a command to terminate the board radio wave illegal notification (step S 707), prepare a board radio wave illegality cancellation flag as the board radio wave illegality flag (step S 708), and the prepared board radio wave illegality flag It is determined whether the value of the board radio wave illegal flag area matches (step S709).

Then, if the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing is ended. If the prepared board radio wave fraud flag does not match the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S710), and the rendering command is performed. The setting process is performed (step S711), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is ended. Here, “step S701; N” → “step S705” → “step S706; Y” → “step S707” → “step S708” → “step S709; Y” are normal routes.

[External Information Editing Process] Next, details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S105), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112), and board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) Based on the information collecting terminal, external equipment such as the game arcade internal management device, and information to be output to the test shot testing device, processing is performed to set in the output buffer.

As shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, in the external information editing process, first, no glass frame opening error occurs (step S801; N), and no main body frame opening error occurs (step S802; N) The off data of the door / frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. . On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y) or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer, which measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch or the like, is updated by -1 unless it is "0". Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set at the time of setting the initial value of the RAM when activated by clearing the RAM in the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808). If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809). Transfer to processing of If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S 808; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the process of step S 810 is not performed and the process of step S 810 is performed. Transition.

Then, if the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), if the board radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), if the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), If the fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), or if the big winning opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area ( Step S816) The on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817), and the process proceeds to step S818. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, there is no magnet fraud (step S 810; N), no board radio fraud (step S 811; N), no frame radio fraud (step S 812; N), no generation of general electricity fraud (Step S813; N) If it is not even the occurrence of the big winning opening fraud (Step S814; N), the off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (Step S815). Transfer to processing.

Then, main prize ball signal editing processing (step S 818) is performed to set information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, and starting opening signal editing processing (step S 819) is performed to edit the winning opening signal of the starting opening. Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S 820). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is "0" (step S821).

If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S821; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area Then, the external information editing process is ended (step S822). Also, if the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S821; N), that is, if the time is not up, save the on data of the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area (step S823), the external information editing process is ended.

[Main Prize Ball Signal Editing Process] Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S 818) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The main prize ball signal editing process externally generates the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (predetermined number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (10 in the case of this embodiment). It is processing to output to the device.

As shown in FIG. 115, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of times the main prize ball signal output is "0" (step S833).

Then, if the main prize ball signal output number is not "0" (step S833; N), the main prize ball signal output number is updated by -1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal control timer area is displayed. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S 835). The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is the time between the on state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal (for example, 128 ms) and the time for the off state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 ms) It is an on-state time (for example, 128 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended. If the main prize ball signal output count is "0" (step S833; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838) The main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0" (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period is that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0". If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S 836; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

In the present embodiment, a main prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100 every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out becomes 10, and the payout control device 200 comes to have 10 game balls paid out. A main prize ball signal is output each time. Specifically, the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball number signal output frequency by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every 10 payout schedules (every time the payout command is transmitted), and updates (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) The main prize ball signal is output as many times as the number of outputs set. Since the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 pieces of payout are actually performed for the main prize ball signal outputted for each schedule, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to respond to fraudulent withdrawals. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to a lack of balls, etc., and even if it is paid out after the big hit, the hall computer (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judged).

[Starting Port Signal Editing Process] Next, details of the starting port signal editing process (step S819) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start opening signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the starting opening signal editing process, first, if the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the starting opening signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842). When the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of starting opening signal output is "0" (step S843).

Then, if the starting opening signal output number is not "0" (step S843; N), the starting opening signal output number is updated by -1 (step S844), and the starting opening signal output control timer in the starting opening signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The starting opening signal output control timer initial value is the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) of the starting opening signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) for the OFF state (for example, low level) It is on time (for example, 128 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the starting opening signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the starting opening signal editing process is ended. Moreover, when the number of times of starting opening signal output is "0" (step S8)
43; Y) saves the off data for turning off the starting port signal for the external device in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S848), and ends the starting port signal editing process.

On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0" (step S842; N), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846). In addition, that a starting opening signal output control timer is in an output on area is that the value of a starting opening signal output control timer is not "0". When the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the start-up signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start-up signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM ( Step S848), the starting opening signal editing process is ended.

Next, an effect in a game and control by the effect control device 300 for controlling this effect will be described. FIGS. 117 and 118 show an example of effects in the special game state. Here, a case is shown where a 16R probability variation B big hit including short opening occurred.

After the big hit result mode is derived in the special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), after the fanfare effect according to the big hit type is performed, the round game is started. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the display device 41, the number-of-rounds display 41a showing the number of rounds, the symbol display 41b displaying the big hit symbols derived in the decorative special view variable display game, and the right hitting instruction instructing right hitting A display 41c and an acquired game ball number display 41d indicating the number of winning balls acquired in the long opening are displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), when the gaming ball is won to the special variation winning device 38 in the long open round and the winning ball is obtained, the number of the winning balls is displayed as the winning ball number display 41e. , Is added to the acquired game ball number display 41d. When the round ends and becomes an interval, as shown in FIG. 117 (d), an interval effect is performed. Here, since the next round is also long open, interval effect for long open is performed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 117 (e), when a round game progresses and it becomes a mode transition selection round in which a notification mode at the end of the special game state and an effect mode after the end of the special game state can be selected. A selection screen 41 f is displayed. In this mode transition selection screen 41f, it is possible to select a normal mode that makes the first mode and a dele mode that makes the second mode, and the player operates the effect button effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 to operate the cursor imitating a finger. Make a selection by moving it.

In addition, in the interval production of the round which may become short release from next time, that is, in the interval production after the end of 4R here, the round continuation production 41g which notifies whether or not the long release continues from next time is performed . In this round continuation effect 41g, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the characters “short” and “long” blink alternately and show the result by the finally lit characters, and here the jackpot type is Since it is 16R definite variation B, it is reported that it becomes short open. Further, when it is informed that the short opening will be made, as an interval effect, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), an promotion effect 41h is generated to urge to aim at the special variation winning device 38. For example, when the type of the big hit is 16R definite variation A (all open long), in the round continuation effect 41g, it is informed that the character of "long" lights up and becomes long open.

As shown in FIG. 118 (c), the promotion effect 41h is continued even in the short open round. Further, an emphasizing effect 41i is performed to emphasize that the special variation winning device 38 is open. The emphasizing effect 41i is displayed as if light is emitted from the special variation winning device 38. In addition, although the special variation winning device 38 is provided with a decoration means for performing decoration by light emission, to associate the light emission timing, the light emission intensity, the light emission color, etc. between the light emission mode by this decoration means and the display mode of the highlighting effect 41i It may be synchronized or not synchronized.

In addition, when the round in the short opening is started, the short opening winning game ball number indication 41j indicating the winning ball number acquired in the short opening separately from the acquired game ball number indication 41d indicating the winning ball number acquired in the long opening Is displayed. Further, the number-of-rounds display 41a displays the number of remaining openings. Here, there are 12 remaining rounds including the running round, and since it is released once in each round, it is displayed as 12 more open. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), when the round at the short opening ends and the interval time comes, the promotion effect 41h is continued, but the emphasis effect 41i emphasizes that the special variation winning device 38 is open. Once it is ended and the next round is started as shown in FIG. 118 (e), the emphasizing effect 41i is resumed.

Then, when the final round ends, an ending effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 118 (f) and (g). In this ending effect, as shown in FIG. 118 (f), the number-of-earnings game number display 41d showing the number of winning balls obtained in the long opening, and the short opening winning game number display 41j showing the number of winning balls obtained in the short opening. An effect is performed in which the value in is added, and a total number display 41k is performed to display the total number of winning balls obtained in the special game state as shown in FIG. 118 (g).

In addition, in the ending effect, a state indication display 41m is performed, which is a display indicating the probability state after the end of the special game state. The contents of this state suggestion display are different depending on the effect mode selected by the player in the mode transition selection round, and as shown in FIG. 119, according to the probability state after the end of the special game state (1) to The character (4) is selected according to a predetermined selection rate. When the normal mode forming the first mode is selected as shown in FIG. 119 (a), only the character of (1) is selected in the high probability state and the character is in the low probability state (2 Only the character of) is selected. Also, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), when the second mode is selected, the characters (1) to (4) are selected according to the selection rate according to the probability state. It has become. Note that the probability state may be suggested not only by the character image but also by character information such as words.

[Main Process] In order to perform the effects as described above, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 120 and timer interrupt processing (not shown) in the gaming machine of this embodiment. . As shown in FIG. 120, in the main processing, processing at the start of the program is performed first. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is inhibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, a power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) is performed to create input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Reading of the input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a process of changing the contents of the effect is performed.

Then, a hall / player setting mode process is performed to receive operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as brightness of LED and liquid crystal and volume, and change of brightness and volume of LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number updating process (step C11) is performed to update the random number for determining the details of the variation mode of the decorative special view variation display game.

Then, the command from the game control apparatus 100 is analyzed and a reception command check process (step C12) for handling is performed, and effect display editing process (step C13) for editing the setting for controlling the progression of the effect and the drawing command ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (one frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated in a timing later than 1/60 seconds (frame Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that the frame switching timing is not reached (step C15; N), the processing in step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C18) A movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Reception Command Check Process] FIG. 121 shows the reception command check process in the main process described above. In this reception command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter which counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the number of command reception (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). When it is determined that the command reception number is 0 (step C202; N), the reception command check process is ended. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), and the command reading index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205). It is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, without analyzing the command directly in the reception command buffer, the content of the reception command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. In this way, it is possible to move a command (data) to make a vacancy in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during analysis of the command. In addition, analysis of commands can be performed collectively in one round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the processing returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and a received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210).
When it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. If it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. As described above, in the reception command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Received Command Analysis Process] FIG. 122 shows the received command analysis process in the above-described received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

If it is determined in step C232 or C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the reception command analysis process is ended.

If ACT is determined to be the correct combination in step C234 in step C234 (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235; Y), variation system command processing (step C236) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variation system command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or a round screen) relating to a big hit medium effect, or a command instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or an end screen) related to small hit medium effects. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the big hit system command (step C237; Y), the big hit system command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit system command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol system command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special drawing (for example, what to make the stop symbol of the special drawing, etc.). When it is determined that MODE is in the range of the symbol system command (step C239; Y), symbol system command processing (step C240) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol system commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of one-shot commands such as pending number command or error command. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The one-shot commands include a wait for customer demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol system commands (step C243). Then, if it is determined that MODE is the range of the pre-reading symbol system command (step C243; Y), the pre-reading symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; Y), the read change command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is ended.

The preread variation system command and the preread symbol system command are commands including information necessary to execute the preread effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the start memory (pending) not executed is a big hit when it is subsequently executed In order to notify the player in advance (with what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) to a predetermined degree of reliability, performing decoration start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a mode different from normal, or producing effects on the display device 41 It is an effect such as displaying. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading fluctuation system command and pre-reading symbol system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which corresponds to the starting memory which becomes the object of pre-reading effect, from starting game winning a prize 100 It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

[One-shot System Command Processing] FIG. 123 shows a one-shot system command process in the received command analysis process described above. In this one-shot system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information on a model set in the game control device 100 (step C261). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to a model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing is performed to rewrite internal information into model information corresponding to the command (step C262), and single-shot system command processing Finish.

If it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model specification command (step C261; N), whether it corresponds to the RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. It determines (step C263). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), the RAM initialization processing is performed (step C264), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), an area requiring initialization is initialized, and RAM initialization screen information is set. Further, scenario data for initializing the RAM is set in order to perform an effect when the initialization of the RAM is performed.

If it is determined in step C263 that MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), the MODE is a power failure recovery command indicating recovery from a power failure without initializing the RAM 111C. It is determined whether it is a corresponding one (step C265). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to a power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), power failure recovery processing is performed (step C266), and the one-shot system command processing is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), an area requiring initialization is initialized, and recovery screen information for displaying a power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to provide an effect upon power failure recovery.

If it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to a power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a customer waiting demo command indicating the start of a customer waiting demo Step C267). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C 267; Y), the customer waiting demonstration process is performed (step C 268), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set during the customer waiting demonstration, and customer waiting scenario data is set in order to perform customer waiting effects.

If it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the special view 1 suspension (step C269). And, when MODE is special figure 1 retention (step C269; Y), special figure 1 retention information setting processing which performs processing etc which displays the decoration starting memory indication which corresponds to the retention which it occurs on display unit 41 is done (Step C270), the one-shot command processing ends. When it is determined in step C269 that MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 suspension (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is special figure 2 suspension (step C271). And, when MODE is special figure 2 retention (step C271; Y), special figure 2 retention information setting processing which performs processing etc which displays the decoration starting memory indication which corresponds to the retention which it occurs on display unit 41 is done (Step C272) The one-shot command processing ends. That is, the effect control device 300 is a start storage display means for performing start storage notification display for displaying information on the start storage by the start storage display (decorative start storage display) corresponding to each start storage.

In addition, if MODE is not the special view 2 hold at step C271 (step C271; N), it is determined whether MODE is probability information (step C273). Then, when MODE is probability information (step C273; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

If MODE is not probability information in step C273 (step C273; N), it is determined whether MODE is error / illegal (step C275). Then, if MODE is error / illegal (step C 275; Y), error / illegal setting processing is performed to perform corresponding processing such as error notification (step C 276), and the one-shot command processing ends.

If MODE is not error / illegal in step C275 (step C275; N), it is determined whether MODE is effect mode switching (step C277). Then, when MODE is effect mode switching (step C277; Y), effect mode switching processing for performing processing of switching the effect mode is performed (step C278), and the one-shot command processing ends.

If MODE is not effect mode switching in step C277 (step C277; N), it is determined whether MODE is symbol stop (step C279). Then, when MODE is not symbol stop (step C279; N), the one-shot system command processing ends. If MODE is symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is normal (step C280). In the determination of whether the command is a normal command, for example, it is determined whether the target of the decoration special figure stop command is a target for the special figure currently changing.

Then, if the command is not normal (step C280; N), the one-shot system command processing ends. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), stop setting of the corresponding special view is made (step C281), and if all symbols have stopped, the gaming state flag is set to the normal state (step C282) End one-shot command processing. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decorative special game variable display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as during fluctuation, during a big hit, during a small hit, etc., and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

Pre-reading Symbol System Command Processing FIG. 124 shows pre-reading symbol system command processing (step C244) in the above-described reception command analysis processing. In this pre-reading symbol system command processing, first, it decides whether or not the latest reservation information is special figure 1 reservation (step C301). If the latest hold information is the special view 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, if the received prefetch symbol system command relates to the special view 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special view 1 hold number 1 Save in the prefetch symbol command area (step C302), set the prefetch change command reception waiting flag (step C304), and end the prefetch symbol system command processing.

In addition, when the latest hold information is not special view 1 hold (step C301; N), that is, when the received prefetch symbol system command relates to special view 2 hold, the command corresponds to the special view 2 hold number The special view 2 symbol symbol pattern area is saved (step C303), the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set (step C304), and the symbol pattern symbol command processing ends. The reason for which the prefetch change command reception waiting flag is set in step C304 is that the prefetch pattern command and the prefetch change command (prefetch change pattern command) are set (paired).

[Read-Through Variation System Command Processing] FIG. 125 shows the look-ahead variation system command processing (step C246) in the reception command analysis process described above. In this pre-reading variation system command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading variation command is waiting to be received (step C311). Here, when there is a prefetch variation command reception waiting flag set in the above-described prefetch symbol system command processing, it is determined that the reception is waiting. If it is not waiting to receive the prefetch change command (step C311; N), the prefetch change system command processing ends. On the other hand, when waiting for reception of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C311; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command reception waiting flag is cleared (step C312).

Thereafter, in the process of steps C313 to C316, a process of converting the prefetch change command (preread change pattern command) received from the game control device 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control device 300 is performed. First, a process (step C313) is performed to set the look-ahead fluctuation mode conversion table corresponding to the number of pending symbols in the latest hold information (step C313), and the information of the special view type of starting storage corresponding to the previously received fluctuation command A MODE conversion table for converting MODE is set according to the current number of reservations of the special drawing type.

Next, with reference to the set MODE conversion table, the in-sub pre-reading fluctuation command MODE corresponding to the pre-reading fluctuation command MODE is acquired (step C314). Further, the pre-reading fluctuation ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the in-sub pre-reading conversion command ACT corresponding to the pre-reading fluctuation command ACT is acquired (step C316).

Although the information on the first half fluctuation is included in the MODE, the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE change according to the number of reservations at the time of judgment. The judgment result may differ depending on the judgment at the time. Therefore, MODE is converted in the conversion mode according to the current number of reservations, in order to be able to perform processing of preview advance notice effect easily and reliably without being influenced by the number of reservations at the time of determination It can be handled in common regardless of the number of reservations. For example, there may be no reach loss fluctuation, which may result in a short first half fluctuation time depending on the holding status, or no reach out fluctuation fluctuation, such as a long first half fluctuation time regardless of the holding status. It converts into MODE classified into the item considered in the setting of pre-reading advance notice production so that processing of pre-reading advance notice production can be performed easily and certainly.

In addition, ACT contains information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach. The contents of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT do not change depending on the number of reservations at the time of determination. However, for example, even in the case of normal reach, there are various aspects even in the same kind of reach such that the final stop symbol stops at one frame before the reach symbol and the one at the end of the first symbol stops and the hit case is set. Because the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide. For this reason, the number of the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is reduced by converting the ACTs to the same ACT, and the processing load such as the check in the processing of the pre-reading advance notice effect is reduced.

Next, it is determined whether both of MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C317). If MODE and ACT after conversion are both other than 0 (step C317; N), since they are abnormal command values, the prefetch change system command processing ends. On the other hand, if MODE and ACT after conversion are both not 0 (step C317; Y), save the converted command in the latest hold information and the prefetch change command area corresponding to the number of holds (step C318), MODE The read command consistency check process (step C319) is performed to determine whether the combination of R and ACT (command combination) is normal.

If the command combination is not normal (step C320; N) as a result of the prefetch command consistency check process (step C319), the prefetch variation system command process is ended. On the other hand, if the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), a prefetch lottery process (step C321) for lottery execution of the prefetch advance notice effect is performed to determine whether the prefetch advance notice effect is to be generated (step C322).

Then, if the prefetch advance notice effect is not generated (step C322; N), the prefetch variation system command processing is ended. On the other hand, if pre-reading preview effect is generated (step C322; Y), is the pre-reading preview effect that is generated (that is, pre-reading preview effect selected in pre-selection lottery process (step C321)) start immediately? Is determined (step C323). The effect to be started immediately is, for example, a hold change notice for changing the display mode of the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. In addition, the effect of not starting immediately is a previewing notice effect performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and an effect or variation that causes a specific effect or reach condition to be generated continuously over a plurality of special figure variation display games. For example, an effect of giving a notice by a character appearing during display, a hold change notice of changing the display mode of the decoration start memory display at a timing later than the current time, or the like. In addition, as a timing which starts execution of such an effect which does not start immediately, if the special figure fluctuation display game is under execution, the special figure fluctuation display game is ended, execution of the next special figure fluctuation display game is started Timing etc. correspond.

If it is not an effect to start immediately (step C323; N), the prefetch change system command processing is ended. In this case, the advance notice is set, for example, at the start of the special view change display game in which the advance notice advance effect is executed. On the other hand, if it is an effect to be started immediately (step C323; Y), a display corresponding to the selected prefetch advance notice effect is set (step C324), and the prefetch variation system command processing is ended.

[Symbol-Based Command Processing] FIG. 126 shows symbol-based command processing (step C240) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this symbol system command processing, first, the special figure type (either special figure 1 or special figure 2) corresponding to MODE is set (step C351), and the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set. Save (step C352), and complete the symbol system command processing.

The symbol types are categories of symbols such as off symbol, 16R positive variation A big hit symbol, 16R positive variation B big hit symbol, 16R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 4R positive variation big hit symbol, small hit symbol etc. It is associated with data. Since the symbol ratio changes in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (the probability change ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and it corresponds to the data of MODE from plural symbol type setting tables Is selected and the symbol type corresponding to ACT is set with reference to the table.

[Various System Command Processing] FIG. 127 shows variable system command processing (step C236) in the above-described received command analysis process. In this variation system command processing, first, it is determined whether the special view type is undetermined (step C361). The special drawing type is information indicating whether the special drawing type is special drawing 1 or special drawing 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-described symbol system command processing.

If the special view type is undetermined (step C361; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not yet determined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variation command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variation command and the symbol type It is determined whether there is a mismatch (step C363).

If the variation command and the symbol type do not match (step C363; Y), the variation system command processing ends. If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). A symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, off symbol, 16R positive variation A big hit symbol, 16R positive variation B big hit symbol, 16R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 4R positive variation big hit symbol, small There is a hit pattern etc. If the variation command and the symbol type do not match, perform the rendering as if you received the symbol command of the 16R definite variation A big hit symbol even though the variation command (variation pattern command) of loss was received It means that it is the combination (combination of the change command and the symbol type) which contradicts above.

In the process of determining the change pattern type from the change command (step C364), the change pattern type which is a rough classification of the change display effect of the special view is determined according to the received command. And the fluctuation production setting processing which sets up the information in order to do the production which responds to the fluctuation command is done (step C365).

Next, the special figure variation is set as the P machine state (the state of the pachinko machine) (step C366). Here, “during special figure fluctuation” indicates that the special figure is fluctuating (during a customer demonstration or during a big hit, or not being a fanfare medium grade). Further, if the pre-reading effect frequency (pre-reading execution frequency) is not zero, the pre-reading effect frequency is updated by 1 (processing to reduce the pre-reading effect frequency by 1) (step C367), and the variation system command processing is ended.

[Variation Effect Setting Process] FIG. 128 shows a fluctuation effect setting process (step C365) in the above-mentioned fluctuation system command process. In this variation production setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern type is a no reach variation (step C381). If the change pattern type is no reach change (step C381; Y), the model code, the special figure type, and the first-half advance notice group address table corresponding to the effect mode at that time are set (step C382). In addition, since it is a reach no change, symbol classification is always a lost pattern, and it is not necessary to refer to symbol classification here especially. The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and naturally varies depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability change mode, a time saving mode, a latency mode and the like. Furthermore, in each mode, a plurality of modes are provided in which the distribution rate of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special view variable display game on the display device 41 are made different.

Next, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of holdings of MODE, special view type is acquired with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table (step C383). Thus, in the case of no reach fluctuation, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) appearing during each change according to the number of reservations. After that, the first half of the previous day sorting group table is used to draw a lottery for the first half appearing in the first half (step C386).

On the other hand, if the change pattern type is not reach-less change (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special view type, the effect mode and the symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half advance distribution group address table, the address of the first half advance distribution group table corresponding to MODE, fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half change is in progress using the first half advance distribution group table Perform a lottery for notice to appear in the (step C 386).

Next, a lottery is made for the second half of the change. In addition, with the second half change of the special figure fluctuation indicatory game fluctuation indication with the so-called reach action (for example, the special result feature (combination of the special design) where the display territory excluding the specific territory becomes large hitting among the display territory of the special figure) Is stopped, and it is a variable display of the state which is fluctuating display only in a specific field. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the second half of the previous day distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special drawing type, the effect mode and the symbol type is set (step C387). The second half prior distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half previous distribution group table. Then, the address of the second half of the previous day sorting group table corresponding to the ACT is acquired by referring to the second half of day prior sorting distribution group address table (step C 388), and the second half is fluctuating (reaching) using the second half day of sorting distribution group table A lottery for appearing notices is made (step C389).

Thereafter, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C390), and the contents of the effect corresponding to the preliminary lottery result are determined (step C391). As a result, the presentation and notice such as the fluctuation time and main reach contents of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are determined. Further, stop symbol setting processing is performed to determine a stop symbol with reference to the determined change pattern (such as reach effect) of the special view change display game and the advance notice content (step C392).

Next, display setting of the fluctuation effect is performed (step C393), and display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C394). By these processes, it is possible to execute an effect or a notice in the decoration special figure variation display game set as described above. Thereafter, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special view type is performed (step C395). In this process, a setting is made to reduce the decoration start storage display corresponding to the reduction of the start storage corresponding to the start of the special view variation display game.

Then, the tone number which is the BGM number, the decoration number which is the number indicating the type of the effect by the decoration lamp, etc. is set (step C396), and the decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special drawing type (variation display of identification information) Display setting is performed (step C397). Furthermore, in the information display device 630, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol that displays the decorative special view variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special view type (Step C398), and the variation effect setting process is ended.

Big-hit System Command Processing FIG. 129 shows the big-hit system command processing (step C238) in the received command analysis process described above. In this big hit system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). Then, if MODE is fanfare (step C401; Y), fanfare effect setting processing is performed to set the fanfare display image according to the big hit type and small hit (step C402), and the P machine status is set during fanfare. It sets (step C403) and ends big hit system command processing.

If the MODE is not a fanfare (Step C401; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (Step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state. Then, if MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process of updating the number-of-rounds display information is performed (step C405), and the P machine state is set during the round (step C406), End the jackpot system command processing.

If MODE is not a round (Step C404; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (Step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to an interval between rounds. Then, when MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), an interval effect setting process is performed to set effects during the interval (step C408), and the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409). End system command processing. If MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to ending after the final round.

If MODE is ending (step C410; Y), for example, if the high probability state is reached after the end of the special gaming state, the screen information to notify that the high probability state will be set, etc. An ending effect setting process for setting screen information corresponding to the later game state is performed (step C411), the P machine state is set during ending (step C412), and the big hit system command processing is ended. If MODE is not ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether MODE is counting (step C413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a special winning opening count command based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38.

If the MODE is not a count (Step C413; N), the big hit system command processing is ended. If MODE is a count (step C413; Y), count effect setting processing (step C414) is performed to set an effect corresponding to a winning on the special variation winning device 38, and the big hit system command processing is ended.

[Count Effect Setting Process] FIG. 130 shows the count effect setting process (step C414) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this fanfare effect setting process, it is determined first whether it is a short open round in which the openable time is equal to or less than a predetermined time (step C421). In the present embodiment, the openable time of the short open round is 0.2 seconds, and the openable time of the long open round is 29 seconds.

Then, if it is not a short opening round (step C421; N), that is, if it is a long opening round, the acquired gaming ball number counter is updated based on the big winning opening count command (step C422), and the acquired gaming ball number counter The display setting of the acquired acquired game ball number display 41d is performed (step C423), and the count effect setting process is ended. The acquired game ball number counter counts the number of prize balls to be paid out by winning in the special variation winning device 38 in the long opening round, and in step C422, updating is performed to add the number of prize balls paid out based on the prize. At step C423, the updated value is displayed.

In the case of the short opening round (step C421; Y), the short opening pattern counter is updated based on the special winning opening count command (step C424), and the short opening winning gaming ball based on the short opening pattern counter The display setting of the number display 41j is performed (step C425), and the count effect setting process is ended. The short release pattern counter counts the number of prize balls to be paid out by winning in the special variation winning device 38 in the short open round, and in step C424, an update is performed to add the number of prize balls paid out based on the prizes. The updated value is displayed in step C425.

As a result, the number of winnings on the special variation winning device 38 in the long opening and the number of winnings on the special variation winning device 38 in the short opening are separately counted and displayed. That is, the prize determination means for determining whether the prize to the special variation winning device 38 is the prize in the first opening mode (long opening) or the second opening mode (short opening) is the effect control device 300 It is eggplant. In addition, the effect control device 300 determines the number of winning balls based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38 in the first opening mode (long opening) based on the determination of winning by the winning determination means, and the second opening mode (short opening) The number of winning balls based on the winnings on the special variation winning device 38 is separately counted.

[Fanfare Effect Setting Process] FIG. 131 shows the fanfare effect setting process (step C402) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this fanfare effect setting process, first, it is determined whether ACT is a big hit fanfare (step C431). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command is a fanfare command corresponding to any of 16R positive variation A, 16R positive variation B, 16R normal A or 16R normal B.

If ACT is a big hit fanfare (step C431; Y), the big hit frequency is updated by 1 (step C432), and the display content of the big hit fanfare effect is determined based on the probability state and the big hit frequency (step C433). In addition, the number of big hits is cleared to 0 based on becoming a normal gaming state which is not a high probability state or a time saving state. In other words, it counts the so-called consecutive channel number. Thereafter, display setting of fanfare effect corresponding to the determined content is performed (step C434), and it is determined whether the big hit includes short opening (step C435). If the short opening is not included (step C434; N), that is, if all the rounds are long open, hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is ended. If short open is included (step C434; Y), short open big hit information is set (step C436), hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare production setting process is ended. .

If the ACT is not a big hit fanfare (step C431; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a definite fanfare (step C437). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to 4R probability variation (probability). If ACT is a sudden fanfare (step C437; Y), it is determined whether it is a hit from a continuous effect which is an effect continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (step C438).

If it is not the hit from the continuous effect (step C438; N), the display setting of the probability exclusive effect corresponding to the probability state is performed (step C439), and the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447). End the setting process. Since a special probability effect corresponding to the probability state is the high probability state after the special gaming state when the 4R probability change occurs in the low probability state, an effect of informing or suggesting that is performed. In addition, since the high probability state continues even after the special gaming state when it becomes 4R definite variation in the high probability state, an effect of notifying or indicating that is performed.

If it is a hit from the continuous performance (step C 438; Y), a lottery for a probability effect to be executed is selected from among the probability effect patterns related to the current fluctuation effect (continuous effect) (step C 440
) And display setting of the determined sudden effect (step C441), and the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is ended. That is, in the case of 4R probability variation from the continuous effect, effects related to the continuous effect will be performed even in the special game state. Also in the case of 4R positive variation, the number of big hits may be updated by +1.

If the ACT is not a sudden fanfare (step C437; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C442). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to a small hit. If the ACT is not a small hit fanfare (step C442; N), the fanfare effect setting process ends. If ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C442; Y), it is determined whether it is a hit from a continuous effect which is an effect continuously executed over a plurality of special view variable display games (step C443) ).

If it is not the hit from the continuous effect (step C443; N), the display setting of the small hit dedicated effect corresponding to the probability state is performed (step C444), and the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447). The effect setting process ends. In the case of the small hit, there is no change in the probability state before and after the small hit. Therefore, in the small hit dedicated rendering corresponding to the probability state, an indication or notification is given that the probability state at the time of the small hit is maintained.

Also, if it is a hit from the continuous performance (step C442; Y), the small winning effect to be executed is drawn from among the small hitting effect patterns related to the current changing effect (continuous effect) (step C445), The display setting of the small hit effect determined is performed (step C446), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is ended. That is, in the case of a small hit from the continuous effect, effects related to the continuous effect will be performed even in the special game state.

In the case of 4R probability variation or small hit from the continuous production, when 4R probability variation or small hit is derived (at the end of a special feature variation display game that becomes a definite probability or small hit), 4R is not shown clearly. An effect is shown that indicates which is in the special game state based on the probability change or the small hit. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which an enemy character and an ally character fight is performed as a continuous effect, and when the result mode is derived, the battle is not yet settled. Then, in the special game state, in the case of 4R positive variation, effects are produced (accurate effects) in which the teammate character wins, and in the case of small hits, effects (small hit effects) in which the enemy character is won are performed.

[Round Effect Setting Process] FIG. 132 shows the round effect setting process (step C405) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this round effect setting process, first, display setting of a right-handed instruction is performed (step C461), and it is determined whether it is a special gaming state based on a small hit or a bump (4R probability change) (step C462).

When it is a special game state based on small hit or sudden (step C462; Y), display setting of small hit / probable round effect is set (step C474), and it moves to step C475. Also, if it is not a small hit or a special gaming state based on a bump (step C462; N), the number of rounds is derived from the round command (step C463), and the short open jackpot information set in the case of big hit including short open round It is determined whether there is any (step C464).

If there is no short opening big hit information (step C464; N), that is, if it is a special game state of only long opening round, display setting of the number of rounds is done (step C465), display setting of round effect display of long opening pattern (Step C466). Next, a sound number, which is a BGM number based on the long release pattern, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect produced by a decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C467).

Thereafter, it is determined whether it is a mode transition selection round in which a notification mode at the end of the special gaming state or an effect mode after the end of the special gaming state can be selected (step C468). If it is not the mode transition selection round (Step C468; N), the round effect setting process is ended. If it is a mode transition selection round (step C468; Y), display setting of the mode transition selection screen is performed (step C469), and the round effect setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if there is short opening big hit information (step C464; Y), that is, if it is a special gaming state including a short opening round, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value to be short opening round (step C470) ). Then, if the number of rounds is not a predetermined value that is a short open round (step C470; N), that is, if it is a long open round, the process proceeds to step C465.

If the number of rounds is a predetermined value for a short opening round (step C470; Y), that is, if it is a round for short opening, display setting of the round effect of the short opening pattern is performed (step C471). The number of remaining releases is calculated from the number upper limit information and the number of rounds (step C472). Then, display setting of the remaining opening number, which is the number of times of opening in the short opening, is performed (step C473), and display setting of emphasizing effect for promoting aiming at winning in the special variation winning device 38 is performed (step C475). Thereafter, a sound number, which is a BGM number based on the emphasizing effect, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C476), and the round effect setting process is ended.

That is, in the short open round, the short open small hit and the round of 4R probability variation, effects different from the long open round are performed. As described above, the special variation winning device 38 makes it easy to hold the game ball in the opening / closing member 990, and even if it is a short opening, it is possible to aim for winning, so emphasizing the player to aim for winning Perform a production 41i.

[Interval Effect Setting Process] FIG. 133 shows the interval effect setting process (step C408) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this interval effect setting process, first, the sound number which is the BGM number of the long opening interval, and the decoration number which is the number showing the kind of the effect by the decoration lamp etc. are set (step C481) It is determined whether there is short open jackpot information set in the case of (step C482).

If there is no short opening big hit information (step C482; N), that is, if it is a special gaming state of only long opening round, the interval effect setting process is ended. In this case, a long release interval as shown in FIG. 117 (d) is set. If there is short opening big hit information (step C482; Y), that is, if it is a special gaming state including a short opening round, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483). Here, the predetermined value is the number of the last round that is long open, and is 4 in the present embodiment.

If the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483; Y), that is, if it is a round that will be open for a short time from the next time, display setting of round continuation notification effect is performed (step C484), and BGM based on round continuation notification effect A sound number which is a number, a decoration number which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like is set (step C485), and the interval effect setting process is ended. Thus, the round continuation notification effect as shown in FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b) is set.

On the other hand, if the number of rounds is not a predetermined value (step C483; N), it is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486). If the number of rounds is not larger than the predetermined value (step C486; N), the interval effect setting process is ended. In this case, it is a round where the long release will be performed next time, and the long release interval remains set.

If the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486; Y), display setting of the short opening interval is performed (step C487), and the tone number which is the BGM number of the short opening interval, decoration lamp, etc. A decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect, is set (step C488), and the interval effect setting process ends. In this case, a short release interval as shown in FIG. 118 (d) is set. In the short opening interval, the promotion effect 41h is performed but the emphasis effect 41i is not performed. However, the emphasizing effect 41i may be performed as in the round, or an emphasizing effect dedicated to the interval may be performed.

[Ending Effect Setting Process] FIG. 134 shows the ending effect setting process (step C411) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this ending effect setting process, first, the big hit type information which is the information of the big hit type that triggered the occurrence of the special gaming state this time is loaded (step C491), and the big hit type information and the selection rate in the first mode ( Setting of state indication display is performed from FIG. 119 (a) (step C492).

Next, it is determined whether there is a mode transition flag (step C493). The effect mode after the end of the special gaming state includes a first mode and a second mode, which can be selected by the player. The first mode and the second mode are effect modes in which the content of the state indication display 41m, which is an indication indicating a probability state, and the effect of the special view variation display game are different. The effect mode can be selected on the mode transition selection screen 41 f displayed in the mode transition selection round, and the player performs the selection by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Then, when the player selects the first mode, the mode transition flag is not set, and when the player selects the second mode, the mode transition flag is set.

If there is no mode transition flag (step C493; N), that is, if the first mode is set, the process proceeds to step C495. In this case, the status indication displayed in step C492 is displayed. If there is a mode transition flag (step C493; Y), that is, if the second mode is set, the state indication display based on the selection rate in the second mode (see FIG. 119 (b)) is set ( Step C494) Move to step C495.

Thereafter, the total number of acquired gaming balls is calculated from the acquired gaming ball number counter and the short release pattern counter (step C495), and display setting of addition effect based on the total number of acquired gaming balls is performed (step C496). Then, the acquired game ball number counter and the short opening pattern counter are reset (step C497), the short opening jackpot information is reset (step C498), and the ending effect setting process is ended. By the above processing, the state indication display 41m according to the effect mode selected by the player is performed at the end of the special gaming state, and the number of gaming balls acquired in the special gaming state is displayed as the total number display 41k. .

FIG. 135 shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. As shown in FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (c), a right-handed instruction display 41c for giving a right-handed instruction may be displayed so as to flow from the left to the right of the display screen. In this case, the right-handed instruction display 41c is displayed so as to flow at a position not overlapping the symbol display 41b that displays the big hit symbol derived in the decorative special figure variation display game. In addition, the right hit indication 41c may be displayed so as to flow at a position overlapping the symbol indication 41b, but the back of the symbol indication 41b is displayed so that the right hit indication 41c flows, and the symbol indication 41b is always visible State. The number-of-rounds display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the emphasis effect 41i and the like other than the symbol display 41b may or may not be hidden by the right-handed instruction display 41c.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 135 (d) to 135 (f), a promotion effect 41h may be displayed to flow toward the special variation winning device 38 so as to urge it to aim at the special variation winning device 38. In this case, when overlapping with the symbol display 41b for displaying the big hit symbol derived in the decorative special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 135 (d), display is made such that the promotion effect 41h flows on the back side of the symbol display 41b. The symbol display 41b is always visible. Further, the promotion effect 41 h may be displayed so as to flow at a position not overlapping the symbol display 41 b. In addition, the number-of-rounds display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the emphasis effect 41i, the short open winning game ball number display 41j, etc., which are displays other than the symbol display 41b, may be hidden by the promotion effect 41h or not Also good. Further, a display for operating the right-handed instruction display 41c as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (c) and a display for operating the promotion effect 41h as shown in FIGS. 135 (d) to 135 (f) are simultaneously performed. It is good.

FIG. 136 also shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. As shown in FIG. 136 (a), as the promotion effect 41h for prompting to aim at the special fluctuation winning device 38 and the emphasizing effect 41i for emphasizing that the special fluctuation winning device 38 is open, the operation unit 24 and the special fluctuation winning character The image of the device 38 may be used to instruct to turn the operation unit 24 largely to the right or to aim for the special fluctuation winning device 38. This makes it easier for the player to understand. In particular, when a plurality of special variation winning devices 38 are provided, it can be clearly indicated which special variation winning device 38 should be aimed. In addition, the light emission mode of the actual special variation winning device 38 located at the lower right of the display device 41 and the light emission mode of the image of the special variation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 are synchronized. The special fluctuation winning device 38 to be aimed is known. Of course, the light emission mode of the operation unit 24 may be synchronized as well.

The image may be a schematic animation or a moving image of the actual special variation winning device 38. In addition, in the image of the operation unit 24 and the special variation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41, the display synchronized with the light emission effect in the actual operation unit 24 and the special variation winning device 38 may be performed. good. Further, the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 may be a still image.

In addition, as for the image of the character information and the arrow included in the right-handed instruction display 41c and the promotion effect 41h, the display may be made to flow as described above. In this case, the front side of the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variation winning device 38 may be moved, or the rear side may be moved. In addition, when the collective display unit 50 is displayed on the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variation winning device 38, a display synchronized with the actual display mode of the collective display unit 50 may be performed, or a display not synchronized with it. Also good. When the display mode is not synchronized, any display mode may be used. For example, a state in which all lights are turned on or off, or a specific lighting mode (in the case of 7 segments, a big hit such as "7" is associated In the case of a group of LEDs, it is assumed that a big hit is considered as a lighting mode specific to the occurrence of a big hit.

In addition, when the game state in which the player strikes the right is started, an image may be displayed to instruct to turn the operation unit 24 largely to the right or to aim for the normal fluctuation winning device 37. . Further, when the game state in which the player strikes the left is started, an image may be displayed to instruct to turn the operation unit 24 slightly to the right or to aim at the winning device 90.

Further, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), a remaining time display 41n may be performed to display the remaining time until the end of the final round. The end condition of the round established in the case of short opening is almost the case where the release available time passes rather than the predetermined number of gaming balls winning in the special variation winning device 38, and the round ends in a fixed time Do. Therefore, when the subsequent rounds become short open, the remaining time until the end of the final round can be calculated by integrating the time of the round until the end of the final round and the time of the interval. By displaying the remaining time in this manner, it is possible to give an impression different from that in the case of notifying by the remaining number of rounds, and to improve the interest of the game. That is, it has remaining time calculation means (game control device 100 or effect control device 300) for calculating the remaining time until the end of the special gaming state, and can notify the remaining time calculated by the remaining time calculation means Become.

In the above-described embodiment, the first open mode is continued for a long open time in which the open time is a predetermined time or more, and the second open mode is continuously open in a predetermined open time or less. Although the short opening is described, the present invention is not limited to this, and any opening aspect may be used as long as the first opening aspect and the second opening aspect are different. In addition, as the gaming machine, although the gaming machine which executes the variable display game based on the winning in the starting area is mentioned, other gaming machines may be used. For example, it is possible to win a prize on an auxiliary gaming device based on winning in a starting area, and a so-called feather that generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player based on the game ball winning in the ancillary gaming device flowing into a specific area. It may be a gaming machine of (old type 2 type).

From the above, the start area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second start winning opening) provided in the gaming area 32 is provided with the gaming board 30 provided with the gaming area 32 in which gaming balls can flow 97) a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed based on the winning of the game ball, and a special game state which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result In the game machine 10, it is possible to convert the game ball into the closed state where the game ball can not win and the open state where the game ball can win, and controls the effect related to the game and the special fluctuation winning device 38 converted into the open state in the special game state. In the operation mode of the special variation winning device 38 in the special game state, the first open mode (long open) and the second open different from the first open mode are provided. Aspect A short open), there is, effect control means, so that the second in an open manner is performed, it is feasible to promote presentation 41h prompting the firing of the game ball towards special variation winning device 38. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game balls in the special game state, and to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the player operates and adjusts the launch force of the game ball (the operation unit 24), the display device 41 capable of displaying information on the game, and the special fluctuation winning device 38 by decoration A decoration means, and the effect control means displays, as the promotion effect 41h, an operation method of the firing operation portion necessary for launching the game ball toward the special variation winning device 38; The display unit 41 is configured to display the decoration mode of the special variation winning device 38 by the decoration means. Therefore, the player can easily understand the contents of the promotion effect 41 h.

In addition, the game area 30 is provided with the game area 32 in which the game balls can flow, and the start area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, the second start winning opening 97) provided in the game area 32 In the gaming machine 10, which executes a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed based on the winning of the game ball, and the special display state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. , The game ball can be converted into an open state in which the game ball can not win a prize and can be converted into an open state in which the game ball can win a prize, and is provided with a special fluctuation prize device 38 converted into an open state in the special gaming state. The 38 operation modes include the first opening mode (long opening) and the second opening mode (short opening) different from the first opening mode, and the winning of the special fluctuation winning device 38 is the first Opening mode and second opening mode And a winning determination means for determining whether a winning (effect control device 300) in any of the. Therefore, the presentation and progress of the game can be controlled based on the information by the prize determination means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38, and based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38 in the first opening mode based on the determination of the winning by the winning determining means. A counting means (effect control device 300) is provided which separately counts the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls based on winning on the special variation winning device 38 in the second open mode. Therefore, the presentation and progress of the game can be controlled based on the information by the counting means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, it has the production control means (the production control device 300) which controls the production regarding the game, the production control means, the prize ball based on the prize to special fluctuation winning a prize device 38 in the 1st opening feature on the basis of the counting result by counting means The number and the number of winning balls based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38 in the second opening mode can be notified separately. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, after the effect control means (effect control device 300) notifies only a part of the counting result by the counting means, it is possible to notify the counting result which has not been notified at a predetermined timing. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

First Modified Example Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the execution mode of the addition effect.

As shown in FIG. 137, in this modification, it is possible to not immediately display the number of winning balls obtained in the short opening on the short opening winning game ball number display 41 j. In the example shown in FIG. 137, the round with short opening is performed as shown in FIGS. 137 (a) and 137 (b), and as shown in FIG. A value equal to the number is displayed in the short open winning game ball number display 41j. After this, 15 new winning balls obtained by short opening are generated, but as shown in FIG. 136 (c), these 15 are not added to the short opening winning game ball number display 41j.

Then, in the ending effect after the final round is over, as shown in FIG. 137 (d), the acquired game ball number display 41d showing the number of winning balls obtained in the long opening shows the number of winning balls obtained in the short opening. An effect of adding the value in the short open winning game number display 41j is performed, and a total number display 41k is performed to display the total number of winning balls obtained in the special gaming state as shown in FIG. 137 (e). At this point in time, the total number display 41k does not include the 15 winning balls that were not added in FIG. 137 (c). Thereafter, in the second half of the ending effect, as shown in FIGS. 137 (f) and (g), an additional effect is performed in which 15 award balls that have not been added are added to the total number display 41k.

With regard to the short opening round, the player is interested in how much the game value (prize ball) can be obtained, and in addition to the value displayed in the short opening acquisition game ball number display 41 j By performing the effect of being added, it is possible to give the player a feeling of gaining and to increase the interest of the game.

[Count Effect Setting Process] In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs the count effect setting process shown in FIG. 138 instead of the count effect setting process shown in FIG. In this count effect setting process, if it is a short open round (step C421), a count display lottery is carried out to draw whether to display the obtained number of winning balls immediately on the short open winning game number display 41j (step C601) ).

If it is determined to be displayed as a result of the count display lottery (step C602; Y), the processing of steps C424 and C425 is performed, and the number of award balls obtained is immediately displayed on the short open winning game number display 41j. If the result of the count display lottery is not displayed (step C602; N), the non-display counter is updated based on the special winning opening count command (step C603), and the count effect setting process is ended. In this case, although the number of winning prizes is counted by the non-display counter, it is not displayed at this time.

[Ending Effect Setting Process] Also, instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 134, an ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 139 is performed. In this ending effect setting process, a retotal number is calculated from the total number of acquired gaming balls and the non-display counter (step C611), and an additional effect based on the retotal number is set (step C612). Then, the non-display counter is reset (step C612). By this processing, after the addition effect shown in FIGS. 137 (d) and (e), the additional effect shown in FIGS. 137 (f) and (g) is performed.

It should be noted that an additional effect may be provided in which the number of prize balls that has not been notified yet is notified only when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the special gaming state. For example, in the long open round, the additional effect may be performed only when a predetermined number (for example, nine) or more of winning possible in one round occurs.

Second Modified Example Next, a second modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modification differs in processing relating to the display of the state indication display 41m.

FIG. 140 shows an example of effects in the special game state in this modification. As shown in FIG. 140 (a), when the predetermined round is reached in the round for short opening, the effect button operation effect in which the player operates the effect button 25 is started. The effect button operation effect is to make the display mode of the state indication display 41 m different according to the operation result of the effect button 25.

In this effect button operation effect, a meter display 41 p is displayed that prompts the operation of the effect button 25 and displays the operation situation. The meter display 41p is a display in which a plurality of areas are vertically overlapped, and the display color is sequentially changed from the lower area according to the time the player long-pressed the presentation button 25 and the number of times the presentation button 25 was pressed. In this way, the operation status is reported.

When the player holds the effect button 25 for a predetermined time or more or presses the effect button 25 for a predetermined number of times or more within the effective period, the final condition is achieved, as shown in FIG. 140 (b), all of the meter displays 41p. The display color of the area changes. Then, as shown in FIG. 140 (c), in the ending effect, a state indication display 41m according to the effect mode selected by the player in the mode transition selection round is displayed.

Also, if the player long-presses the presentation button 25 or presses the presentation button 25 within the effective period but does not achieve the final condition, as shown in FIG. 140 (d), a part of the meter display 41p is displayed. The display color of the area changes. Here, although the final condition is not achieved, a predetermined intermediate condition is achieved, and as shown in FIG. 140 (e), in the ending effect, a state suggestion display 41m in which a part is concealed is displayed. Ru.

In addition, when the player does not operate the effect button 25 within the effective period, the display colors of all the areas of the meter display 41p do not change as shown in FIG. 140 (f). Then, as shown in FIG. 140 (g), in the ending effect, the state indication display 41m is not displayed. If the player long-presses the effect button 25 or depresses the effect button 25 within the effective period, the state indication display 41m is not displayed in the same manner as in the case where the intermediate condition is not achieved.

The state suggestion display 41m in which a part is hidden as shown in FIG. 140 (e) is selected at the selection rate shown in FIG. 141 according to the probability state after the end of the special gaming state. A part of these state indication displays 41m is concealed, but since the display modes are different from each other, it can be determined by any player who is accustomed. However, since each state indication display 41m can be selected in either the high probability state or the low probability state, it is difficult to clearly grasp the probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

[Effect button operation effect processing] In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs effect button operation effect processing shown in FIG. 142 in the effect button input processing in the main processing shown in FIG. In this effect button operation effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect button operation effect is being executed (step C621). If the effect button operation effect is not being executed (step C621; N), the effect button operation effect process Finish. If the effect button operation is being performed (step C621; Y), it is determined whether there is an operation of the effect button (step C622). If there is no operation (step C622; N), the effect button is operated End the rendering process.

When the effect button is operated (step C622; Y), the operation input counter is updated according to the operation mode of the effect button (step C623), and the meter display is set based on the operation input counter (step C624) ), Effect button operation effect processing ends. That is, the value of the operation input counter is updated each time the production button 25 is pressed and held for a predetermined time, or whenever the production button 25 is pressed for a short time, and the meter display is displayed according to this value. To be done.

[Ending Effect Setting Process] Also, instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 134, an ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 143 is performed. In this ending effect setting process, it is determined whether the operation input counter is the upper limit (step C631). If it is the upper limit (step C631; Y), that is, the final condition is achieved, the operation input counter is reset. Then (step C635), the ending effect setting process ends. In this case, the state indication display 41m set in steps C491 to C494 is displayed.

If the operation input counter is not the upper limit (step C631; N), it is determined whether the operation input counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (step C632). If the operation input counter is equal to or more than the predetermined value (step C632; Y), that is, if the intermediate condition is achieved, the state indication display 41m is set based on the selection rate of the reset table (see FIG. 141) (step C633) The operation input counter is reset (step C635), and the ending effect setting process is ended. In this case, as shown in FIG. 140 (e), a state indication display 41m partially concealed is displayed.

If the operation input counter is not equal to or more than the predetermined value (step C632; N), that is, if the intermediate condition is not achieved, the state indication display is set to non-display (step C634), and the operation input counter is reset. (Step C635) The ending effect setting process ends. In this case, the state indication display 41m is not displayed as shown in FIG. 140 (g). That is, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a notification of information about the game after the end of the special game state based on the operation mode of the operation unit (effect button 25 and touch panel 29) by the player in the special game state. It will be made to change the aspect.

In addition, according to the operation of the effect button 25 (according to the value of the operation input counter), the state indication display 41m may be gradually changed from a completely concealed state to a completely visible state.

Third Modified Example Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modification is adapted to award points in accordance with the game result in the special gaming state.

FIG. 144 shows an example of effects in the special game state in this modification. As shown in FIG. 144 (a), a round with short opening is performed, and as shown in FIG. 144 (b) based on the single game ball winning a special variation winning device 38 in this short opening round. You can now get one character. When a character has been acquired, an acquisition display 41 q for informing the type of the acquired character is performed, and the acquired character is displayed on a total acquisition display 41 r displayed by the character acquired in the special gaming state. In FIG. 144 (b), it is reported that the star character has been acquired in the acquisition display 41q, and it is shown that one star character has been acquired in the total acquisition display 41r.

As shown in FIG. 144 (c), when one special ball is won on the special variation winning device 38 again, one character is acquired. Here, it is informed that the peach character has been acquired in the acquisition display 41q, and it is shown that one star character and one peach character have been acquired in the total acquisition display 41r. The characters to be acquired are selected for each prize according to the selection rate as shown in FIG. 144 (h).

As shown in FIG. 144 (d), in the ending effect, the type of the character acquired in the total acquisition display 41r is displayed. Here, it is shown that seven star characters, one peach character, one note character, and one treasure box character have been acquired. Since one character corresponds to one winning to the special variation winning device 38, the short open winning game ball number display 41j is displayed corresponding to the total winning display 41r, and is added to the obtained gaming ball number display 41d. An additive effect is performed.

Furthermore, a privilege according to the acquired character is awarded, and along with this, an assignment notification display 41 s for reporting the assignment of the benefit is performed. As shown in FIG. 144 (e), points are awarded when a peach character is acquired. This point is available for the player to customize the presentation of the game. Also, as shown in FIG. 144 (f), when a note character is acquired, a special BGM is set as the BGM after the end of the special game state. Further, as shown in FIG. 144 (g), when the character of the treasure box is acquired, a special background is set as a background after the end of the special game state.

By granting a benefit in this manner, it is possible to aim for winning in the special variation winning device 38 even in the short opening, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, by imparting a game value different from that of the winning balls, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game. That is, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can provide a game value different from the winning balls based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38.

[Count Effect Setting Process] In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs the count effect setting process shown in FIG. 145 instead of the count effect setting process shown in FIG. In this count effect setting process, if it is a short open round (step C421), the character is selected based on the selection rate of the display icon table (see FIG. 144 (h)) (step C651), and the character display setting is performed. Perform (step C652). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 144 (b) and 144 (c), the acquisition display 41q and the total acquisition display 41r are performed.

[Ending Effect Setting Process] Also, instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 134, an ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 146 is performed. In this ending effect setting process, it is determined whether a point addition character (here, a peach character) has been acquired (step C661). If the point giving character has not been acquired (step C661; N), the process proceeds to step C663. If a point granting character has been acquired (step C661; Y), points are awarded based on the number of acquisitions (step C662), and the process proceeds to step C663.

Next, it is determined whether a BGM character (here, a note character) has been acquired (step C663). If the BGM character has not been acquired (step C663; N), the process moves to step C665. If a BGM character has been acquired (step C663; Y), a bonus BGM is set (step C664), and the process proceeds to step C665.

Next, it is determined whether a background character (here, a character of a treasure box) has been acquired (step C665). If the background character has not been acquired (step C665; N), the ending effect setting process ends. When the background character is acquired (step C665; Y), the privilege background is set (step C666), and the ending effect setting process is ended.

[Main Process] Also, instead of the main process shown in FIG. 120, the main process shown in FIG. 147 is performed. In this main processing, presentation point control processing (step C671) for performing processing relating to presentation points is performed.

[Effect Point Control Process] FIG. 148 shows an effect point control process (step C671) in the main process described above. In this effect point setting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an applied benefit selection operation flag set to a state in which the player has selected an applied benefit based on the points (step C691). Here, as a selectable privilege to be selected, in addition to the privilege BGM and the privilege background, it is possible to generate an effect that can not be usually viewed, such as making a special character appear or making a special reach possible. The thing is mentioned.

When there is a grant privilege selection operation flag (step C691; Y), the process proceeds to step C702. In addition, when there is no flag during the award selection operation (step C691; N), the state information is acquired (step C692). The state information is information indicating the state of the gaming machine, such as during execution of the special view variation display game, during the special gaming state, during waiting for customers, and the like.

Next, based on the acquired state information, it is determined whether the state is a trigger for resetting the point accumulated value (step C693). Here, the case where it is in the customer waiting state is a state which becomes a reset opportunity. If the state is not a trigger for resetting the point accumulated value (step C693; N), the process moves to step C694. When the point cumulative value is reset (step C693; Y), the point cumulative value is reset (step C694), and the process proceeds to step C695.

Next, based on the acquired state information, it is determined whether it is in a state to be a trigger for resetting the award (step C695). The granted benefit is a benefit BGM or a benefit background. Further, in this case, the case where it is in the customer waiting state is a state which becomes a reset trigger. If it is not in a state to be a trigger for resetting the award (step C695; N), the process proceeds to step C697. Further, in the case where it is in a state to be a trigger for resetting the award (step C695; Y), the award is reset (step C696), and the process proceeds to step C697.

Next, it is determined whether it is possible to exchange points based on the acquired state information (step C 697). Here, when it is other than waiting for customers, it is possible to exchange points. If point exchange is not possible (step C697; N), the effect point control process is ended. If the point exchange is possible (step C697; Y), it is determined whether the point exchange condition is satisfied (step C699). The point exchange condition is that the point accumulated value is equal to or more than the smallest point of the points required for exchange set for each award. When this point exchange condition is not satisfied (step C699; N), the effect point control process is ended. If the point exchange condition is satisfied (step C699; Y), it is determined whether there is a point exchange start operation (step C700).

The point exchange start operation is an operation of performing a predetermined operation on the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 and starting exchange of points and award benefits. If there is no point exchange start operation (step C700; N), the effect point control process is ended. In addition, when there is a point exchange start operation (step C700; Y), the award privilege selection operation flag is set (step C701), and the effect point control process is ended.

On the other hand, when there is a grant benefit selection operation flag (step C691; Y), it is determined whether or not there is a decision operation of grant benefit (step C702). If there is no operation to determine the award (step C702; N), the effect point control process is ended. In addition, when there is a decision operation of grant privilege (step C702; Y), the selected grant privilege is set (step C703), the grant privilege selection operation flag is reset (step C704), production point control processing Finish.

Note that although it has been described that a point addition character is acquired as a trigger for acquiring points, it may be possible to acquire points in other cases. For example, when the pre-reading effect is performed, points may be acquired according to the pre-reading effect to be performed. In addition, points may be made to be able to be won when the game is continued for a predetermined time, when a specific effect occurs, or when there is a prize in the prize opening.

Fourth Modified Example Next, a fourth modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of this modification, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball up to the opening and closing member 990 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 149, on the upper surface 617 of the guiding portion 616, a protruding portion 481 and a recessed portion 482 similar to the protruding portion 992 and the recessed portion 993 provided in the flow path forming portion 991 of the opening and closing member 990 are formed. With such a protrusion 481 and a recess 482, the gaming ball flowing down the upper surface 617 of the guiding portion 616 is allowed to flow to the left while meandering back and forth, and flows more than the case without the protrusion 481 and the recess 482 The speed is reduced. As a result, the flow-down speed can be sufficiently reduced until reaching the opening and closing member 990 of the special variation winning device 38, and the time for which the gaming ball is retained on the opening and closing member 990 can be lengthened.

In the configuration of FIG. 149 (a), since the gaming ball comes closer to a position closer to the player than the configuration of FIG. 149 (b), it is easy to see the flow-down mode of the gaming ball heading for the special variation winning device 38. Interest can be improved. Further, in the configuration of FIG. 149 (b), since the game balls can be prevented from colliding with the back surface of the cover glass of the glass frame 15, noise can be generated by colliding with the cover glass while being able to protect the cover glass. Can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 150, a projecting portion 481 may be provided at a portion on the upstream side of the opening / closing member 990 in the flow-down path 38f to meander the gaming ball flowing down. In this way, the speed of the gaming ball flowing into the opening and closing member 990 can be reduced, and the time for the gaming ball to stay on the opening and closing member 990 can be further lengthened. Further, as shown in FIG. 151, a protrusion 481 and a recess 482 may be provided at a portion on the upstream side of the opening and closing member 990 in the flow-down path 38f, in which the game ball flowing down may meander. This also makes it possible to reduce the speed of the gaming ball flowing into the opening and closing member 990, and to further lengthen the time for which the gaming ball stays on the opening and closing member 990.

In addition, although a vibration generate | occur | produces because a game ball meanders, you may provide the detection sensor which detects this vibration. Alternatively, a detection sensor for detecting the presence of the gaming ball may be provided at a portion where the gaming ball meanders. Then, the effect control device 300 performs effects such as causing the LED to emit light based on the detection signal from the detection sensor. By doing this, attention can be drawn to the game balls that stay meandering, and it can be shown that the game balls can flow into the special fluctuation winning device 38 in the short opening.

Fifth Modified Example Next, a fifth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of the present modification differs in the configuration of the special fluctuation winning device 38.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the special variation winning device 38 of this modification has a V flow path 955a in which a guiding flow path 955 composed of a main body 970 and a back wall member 960 extends downward; It is branched into a discharge ball flow channel 955b extending in the direction. A V-door 501 which can slide in the front-rear direction is provided at a position to be an inflow portion of the V flow path 955a. The V door 520 can be converted into a blocked state which protrudes forward to block the flow into the V flow path 955a, and a state retracted rearward to allow the flow into the V flow path 955a.

The gaming ball that has won the large winning opening 38 d and flows into the guiding channel 955 is guided to the back surface of the back wall member 960 through the through portion 968 formed in the back wall member 960 and formed in the main body 970 It is guided to the right by the rib 973 and reaches the branch portion of the V flow path 955a and the discharge ball flow path 955b. When the V door 520 is retracted backward, it can flow into the lower V flow path 955a, and the gaming ball which has flowed into the V flow path 955a detects the gaming ball which has flowed into the V flow path 955a After being detected at 460, the rib is guided to the rear by the rib 969 formed on the back wall member 960, passes through the penetrating portion 974, is guided to the back side of the main body 970, and discharges the gaming ball to the outside of the gaming machine It is designed to flow into the channel. As described later, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is not determined by the jackpot symbol, but in the special gaming state, the gaming ball flows into the V flow path 955a and the probability change operation area Based on the detection by the switch 460, a high probability state is established.

On the other hand, in a state where the V door 520 protrudes forward, the gaming ball having reached the branch portion is guided to the right through the upper surface of the V door 520 and flows into the discharge ball flow path 955b. The gaming balls having flowed into the discharge ball flow path 955b are guided to the right, reach the back side of the main body 970 through the through-holes 462 formed in the main body 970, and are guided further downward for discharge After being detected by the residual ball discharge switch 461 that detects the game balls flowing down the ball flow path 955b, the game flow is made to flow into the discharge flow path that discharges the game balls to the outside of the gaming machine. On the back surface of the rear wall member 960, at a position facing the through hole 462, a rib 463 for guiding the gaming ball flowing down the discharge ball flow passage 955b to the rear through hole 462 is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 154 to 157, a V door unit 500 for operating a V door is provided on the back side of the main body 970. The V door unit 500 is provided with a V door 520, a lever solenoid 502 for driving the V door 520, and a link member 510 for operating the V door 520 according to the drive of the lever solenoid 502.

The lever solenoid 502 is disposed so that the drive shaft 503 extends downward along the vertical direction. The first link member 511 of the link member 510 is connected to the tip of the drive shaft 503. The first link member 511 can slide in the vertical direction along with the operation of the drive shaft 503. The first link member 511 is provided with a bearing portion 512 for receiving the connection shaft 514 provided at one end of the second link member 513 so that the connection shaft 514 moves up and down with the operation of the drive shaft 503. It has become.

The second link member 513 has a shape bent in a V-shape, and a connection shaft 514 connected to the first link member 511 is provided at the end of the arm 517 extending from the bent portion to one side. There is. A connecting shaft 515 connected to the V door 520 is provided at an end of the arm 518 extending from the bent portion to the other. Further, a pivot shaft 516 is provided at the bent portion. The pivot shaft 516 is perpendicular to the extension direction of the arm portions 517 and 518 extending from the bent portion, and the connection shafts 514 and 515 extend parallel to the pivot shaft. The pivot shaft 516 is pivotally supported in the left-right direction by a bearing portion 464 formed on the back surface of the main body portion 670, and the second link member 513 is pivotable about the pivot shaft 516.

The V door 520 includes a door 521 that can extend to the V flow path 955a. The upper surface of the door portion 521 is an inclined surface which inclines to the right when viewed from the front side, and in the state of extending to the V flow path 955a, the game ball is allowed to flow down to the discharge ball flow path 955b to the right ing. Further, the front end portion in the extending direction of the door portion 521 is an inclined surface which is inclined such that the lower end is positioned on the rear side than the upper end. Thus, when the door portion 521 is extended forward to the V flow passage 955a, the gaming balls present in the inflow portion to the V flow passage 955a are released upward or downward by forming the inclined surface in this manner. be able to.

Further, an insertion portion 522 into which the connection shaft 515 of the second link member 513 is inserted is formed at the rear of the V door 520. The longitudinal width of the insertion portion 522 is slightly wider than the outer diameter of the connection shaft 515, but the vertical width is sufficiently wider than the outer diameter of the connection shaft 515, and the connection shaft 515 moves vertically in the insertion portion 522 It is made possible.

Further, a slit-like guided portion 523 along the front-rear direction is formed on the bottom surface of the V-door 520. As shown in FIG. 154, in the portion of the main body portion 670 where the V door 520 is disposed, a penetrating portion 467 penetrating in the back and forth direction is formed, and V of the V door unit 500 provided on the back surface side of the main body portion 670 The door portion 521 of the door 520 is configured to extend through the through portion 467 to the inflow portion of the V flow path 955a on the front side of the main body portion. A guide rib 465 extending along the front-rear direction for guiding the operation of the V-door 520 in the front-rear direction is formed in the through portion 467 so as to be slidably fitted with the guided portion of the V-door 520 It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 155 (a), 156 (a) and 157 (b), the V door unit 500 configured as described above is in a state where the drive shaft 503 of the lever solenoid 502 is most extended in the operation range In the (OFF state), the first link member 510 is positioned at the lower end of the operation range, and the second link member 513 is turned in the most counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right, the second link member 513 The connecting shaft 515 is located at the foremost end of the movement range. As a result, the V door 520 is pushed out to the front end of the movement range, extends upward of the V flow path 955a, and prevents the game ball from flowing into the V flow path 955a.

From this state, when the lever solenoid 502 is operated to retract the drive shaft 503 (turn it on), the first link member 510 moves upward, and the second link member 513 moves clockwise backward as viewed from the right. Rotate. Along with this, the connection shaft 515 of the second link member 513 moves rearward, and the V door 520 moves rearward. Then, as shown in FIGS. 155 (b), 156 (b) and 157 (c), when the drive shaft 503 of the lever solenoid 502 is retracted most in the operating range, the V door 520 is at the rear end of the moving range. The door portion 521 is completely retracted from the V passage 955a, and the game ball is allowed to flow into the V passage 955a. When the door portion 521 is extended above the V flow path 955a to prevent the game ball from flowing into the V flow path 955a, the operation reverse to the above is performed.

FIG. 158 shows a block diagram of the game control apparatus 100 in the game machine of this modification. A detection signal of a game ball from the probability change operation area switch 460 and the remaining ball discharge switch 461 provided in the special variation winning device 38 is input to the game control apparatus 100. Also, the lever solenoid is controlled by the game control device 100.

For the jackpot type in the gaming machine of this modification, 16R positive variation A, 16R positive variation B, 16R normal A, 16R normal B, 4R positive variation are set. And, the first round of each jackpot type is considered to be a probability variation decision round. The certain variation determination round is a round for determining whether the high probability state will be after the end of the special game state depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a. A definite change in the name of each jackpot type indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into the V flow path 955a and is likely to be in a high probability state (probable change state) after the end of the special game state, and a V flow path 955a is normal It indicates that there is a low possibility that the game ball will flow into and that it is difficult to be in a high probability state (probable change state) after the end of the special game state. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, whether or not the game ball is in the high probability state is determined depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a. If the game ball does not flow in, the high probability state is not obtained, and if the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a even if the big hit type is normal, the state becomes the high probability state.

FIG. 159 shows the operation of the special variation winning device 38 that can be performed in each round of the special game state. As shown in FIG. 159 (a), V release releases the special fluctuation winning device 38 with the start of the round (t31). Further, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 502 is turned on (in a retracted state), and the positive change operation area switch 460 is enabled. The door portion 521 covers the V flow path 955a in a state where the lever solenoid 502 is OFF (in an extended state), and the gaming ball can not flow in when the lever solenoid 502 is ON. It escapes from the path 955a and the gaming ball can enter. Further, the state in which the probability changing operation area switch 460 is effective is a state in which the detection of the gaming ball by the probability changing operation area switch 460 is treated as being effective. On the other hand, the state in which the probability changing operation area switch 460 is invalid is a state in which the detection of the gaming ball by the probability changing operation area switch 460 is treated as being invalid.

The lever solenoid 502 is turned OFF after 64 ms have elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, when 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 502 is turned off, the probability change operation area switch 460 is invalidated (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the game balls won immediately after the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened may flow into the V flow path 955a.

When 200 ms have passed since the start of the round, the special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, when 2700 ms elapses, the special fluctuation winning device 38 is released again (t35), and a condition that either a 25000 ms openable time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins is satisfied. The special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t39). Thereafter, the interval time and the special winning opening remaining ball processing time are started (t39), and when the interval time is ended, the next round is started (t41).

Further, after the second opening (t35) of the special variation winning device 38, the lever solenoid 502 is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Also, the probability change operation area switch 460 is also effective (t36). The second opening of the special variation winning device 38 is for a sufficiently long time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 502 also continues for a long time, so that the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a almost certainly Become. Therefore, when the jackpot type is positive, the probability state is almost certainly high.

Further, the lever solenoid 502 can be turned on for a predetermined time even after the special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and the gaming ball which has flowed into the special fluctuation winning device 38 just before closing. Can also flow into the V flow path 955a. In addition, the special variation winning device 38 is closed by the lapse of the openable time or when a predetermined number of gaming balls wins, and all the gaming balls that have won the special variation winning device 38 are discharged within the special winning opening residual ball processing time In this case, the lever solenoid 502 is turned off with the end of the remaining ball processing time (t42) to end the operation, and the positive change operation area switch 460 is invalidated.

In addition, the special variation winning device 38 is closed by the lapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of gaming balls are winning, and all the gaming balls having won the special variation winning device 38 are not discharged within the remaining ball processing time. If the lever solenoid 502 is completely discharged by the end (t43) of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 502 is turned off at the completion of the discharge, and the operation is ended. Switch 460 is disabled.

In addition, the special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed by the lapse of the openable time or when the predetermined number of gaming balls wins, all the gaming balls that have won the special fluctuation winning device 38 are discharged within the special winning opening residual ball processing time In the case where the lever solenoid 502 is not discharged completely by the end (t43) of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 502 is terminated at the end (t43) of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state. It becomes OFF and ends the operation. In this case, when 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 502 is turned off (t43), the positive change operation area switch 460 is invalidated (t44).

As shown in FIG. 159 (b), in the short release, the same release as the first release of the special variation winning device 38 in V release is performed (t51 to t54), and the round is ended based on the end of the release. (T54). Since the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened for a very short time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 502 is also for a short time, the possibility of the game ball flowing into the V flow path 955a is low. Therefore, when the jackpot type is normal, the probability state is high.

The operation of the lever solenoid 502 and the switching between valid and invalid of the probability variation operation area switch 460 perform the same operation as in the case of V open as long as the gaming ball remains in the special variation winning device 38 (t56 to t63 ). Therefore, when the game ball remains in the special variation winning device 38 even if the special winning opening residual ball processing time has elapsed, the lever solenoid 502 is turned off when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. When the operation is finished, the positive change operation area switch 460 is invalidated. If all gaming balls are not ejected by the end (t62) of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 502 is turned off in the end (t62) of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state. In this state, the operation is ended, and after 100 ms has elapsed after the lever solenoid 502 is turned off (t62), the positive change operation area switch 460 is invalidated (t63).

However, the control of the lever solenoid 502 and the positive change operation area switch 460 as shown in FIG. 159 (b) in the short open state is performed only when the short open state is performed in the first round. When short circuit opening is performed in other rounds, the lever solenoid 502 is not operated, and the positive change operation area switch 460 also remains invalid. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set along with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 159 (c), in the long opening, the special variation winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t 61), or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls are open When one of the conditions for winning is established, the special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round is ended (t62). Thereafter, the interval time and the special winning opening remaining ball processing time are started (t62), and when the interval time is over, the next round is started (t63). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set along with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set. In this long opening, the lever solenoid 502 is kept in the OFF state, and the positive change operation area switch 460 is also kept invalid.

In each of the above-described jackpot types, V open is performed in the first round in the case of a positive variable jackpot. Also, in the case of a big hit, a short open is usually performed in the first round. Then, for the second and subsequent rounds, 16R probability variation A and 16R probability variation A all become long open, 16R probability variation B and 16R normal B become long release from 2 to 4R, and 5 to 16R become short release. In addition, in the 4R positive variation all open short. However, the lever solenoid 502 is kept in the OFF state and the positive change operation area switch 460 is also kept invalid in the short circuit opening after 2R. Even in the case of a small hit, the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened, but the lever solenoid 502 is kept in the OFF state, and the positive change operation area switch 460 is also kept invalid.

The first opening period (t31 to t32) of the door 521 at V opening and the opening period (t51 to t52) of the door 521 at short opening are retained on the opening and closing member 990 when the opening and closing member 990 is opened. It is a difficult period for the game balls to reach the V flow path 955a.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, the gaming ball that has been staying on the opening and closing member 990 contacts the projecting portion 992 formed on the opening and closing member 990 as shown in FIG. It bounces as shown in (b) and is guided away from the big winning opening 38d. That is, it is induced in the direction away from the V flow path 955a which makes a specific region. Also, by bringing the bouncing game ball into contact with the front wall projecting portion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protruding portion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, etc., the time to reach the V flow path 955a becomes longer. It has become. From this, when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, it is difficult for the gaming ball which has been accumulated on the opening and closing member 990 to reach the V flow path 955a. However, since the projecting portions 992 formed in the opening / closing member 990 are disposed at intervals through which the gaming balls can pass, the gaming balls dropped without coming into contact with the projecting portions 992 through this interval are V channels There is a slight possibility of flowing into 955a. Of course, the game is on the opening and closing member 990 when making the opening state by arranging the projecting portion 992 without any space through which the game ball can pass, or providing the rib continuously along the front end of the upper surface. The ball may be in contact without fail.

In addition, the first opening period (t31 to t34) of the special variation winning device 38 at V opening and the opening period (t51 to t54) of the special variation winning device 38 at short opening are the protruding portions 992 and the like as described above. Even in the case of a game ball that has bounced in contact with it, it is a time that can flow into the big winning opening 38d. Thus, even if the opening is short, it is possible to flow into the big winning opening 38d. In addition, the opening period of the door portion 521 and the opening period of the special fluctuation winning device 38 are designed values for generating a high probability state set at the design stage of the gaming machine and designed values for winning ratio in short opening. , And is set according to the structure of the special variation winning device 38 such as the opening and closing member 990.

[Positive Change Operating Area Switch Monitoring Processing] Further, in the game control device 100, the positive change operating area switch monitoring processing shown in FIG. 160 is performed. In this probability change operation area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the probability change operation area switch 460 is active (step A2401). When the probability changing operation area switch 460 is active, the detection of the gaming ball by the probability changing operation area switch 460 is treated as being effective. If the positive change operation area switch 460 is not active (step A2401; N), the positive change operation area switch monitoring process ends. In addition, when the probability changing operation area switch 460 is in effect (step A2401; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the probability changing operation area switch 460 (step A2402).

Then, when there is no input to the probability change operation area switch 460 (step A2402; N), the probability change operation area switch monitoring process is ended. If the probability change operation area switch 460 has an input (step A2402; Y), a probability change operation area passing command is prepared (step A2403), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A2404). As a result, the effect control device 300 can execute effects corresponding to the game ball having flowed into the V flow path 955a.

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol is a V easy symbol (step A2405). The V-easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 16R positive variation A, 16R positive variation B, 4R positive variation. In the case of a big hit by these symbols, V opening is performed, so gaming balls will almost certainly flow into the V flow path 955a. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit by 16R normal A or 16R normal B which is not a V easy symbol, a short circuit is opened, so it is rare for game balls to flow into the V flow path 955a.

Then, when the big hit design is V easy design (step A2405; Y), set the probability variation operation area normal passage information (step A2406), save the set information in the probability variation operation area passage information region (step A2408) ), End the positive change operation area switch monitoring process. If the big hit design is not V easy design (step A2405; N), set the definite change operation area irregular passage information (step A2407), save the set information in the positive change operation area pass information area (step A2408) ), End the positive change operation area switch monitoring process.

[Big Hit End Process] Then, in place of the big hit end process shown in FIG. 84, a big hit end process shown in FIG. 161 is performed. In this big hit end processing, it is determined whether there is probability operation area passage information (probability change operation area normal passage information or probability change operation area irregular passage information) set when gaming balls flow into V flow path 955a (step A2411). Then, when there is no probability operation area passing information (step A 2411; N), the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step A 1202). In this case, the high probability state is not reached. If there is probability operation area passing information (step A2411; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 is performed (step A1203). In this case, there is a high probability state. That is, regardless of the jackpot symbol, when the gaming ball flows into the V flow path 955a, it becomes a high probability state.

[Lever Solenoid Control Processing] Further, in the game control device 100, a lever solenoid control processing for controlling the lever solenoid 502 is performed. As shown in FIG. 162, in this lever solenoid control process, it is determined first whether the lever solenoid control pointer is a no update code (here, -1) (step A2501). If the lever solenoid control pointer is a no update code (step A2501; Y), the lever solenoid control process is ended. If the lever solenoid control pointer is not a no update code (step A2501; N), the lever solenoid control timer is updated by -1 (step A2502), and it is determined whether the lever solenoid control timer becomes 0 (step A2503). .

If the lever solenoid control timer has not become 0 (step A2503; N), the lever solenoid control process ends. If the lever solenoid control timer becomes 0 (step A2503; Y), the lever solenoid control table is set (step A2504), and the table address corresponding to the lever solenoid control pointer is calculated (step A2505). The control pointer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control point area (step A2507), and the output data for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid output data area (step A2508). Thereafter, the probability variation operation region validity determination flag is acquired and saved in the probability variation operation region validity determination flag region (step A2509), and the lever solenoid control process is ended.

By the above processing, the lever solenoid control pointer is sequentially updated each time a predetermined time passes, and as shown in FIG. 159, ON and OFF of the lever solenoid 502 are set, and the positive / negative operation area switch 460 is valid / invalid It is set. When the operation of the lever solenoid 502 is ended by satisfying a predetermined condition, the lever solenoid 502 is turned off and the positive change operation area switch 460 is invalidated by setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer. . Then, after 0 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer, -1 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the state in which the operation is stopped continues.

In addition, the arrival of the gaming ball to the V flow path 955a is delayed, and in the first opening period (t31 to t32) of the door portion 521 in V opening, and in the opening period (t51 to t52) of the door portion 521 in short opening, In order to make it difficult for the game ball that has been staying on the opening and closing member 990 to reach the V flow path 955a when opening the opening and closing member 990, the recess 471 is formed in the induction flow path 955 reaching the V flow path 955a. It may be provided to slow the flow-down speed of the game ball.

For example, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), it is located behind the penetrating portion 968 formed in the back wall member 960, and guides the gaming ball guided to the back side of the back wall member 960 to the V flow path 955a side. The bent portion 470 is provided with a plurality of recesses 471 as shown in FIG. It is preferable that the corner of the recess 471 be a curved surface so as not to excessively block the flow of the gaming ball.

Further, the wall surface of the recess 471 in FIG. 163 (c) is inclined relative to the recess in FIG. 163 (b) compared to the recess in FIG. 163 (b). Can be prevented. In addition, the part which provides such an unevenness | corrugation is not restricted to the bending part 470, and should just be a part to the V flow path 955a in an induction | guidance | derivation flow path. In addition, the flow velocity of the gaming ball may be reduced by increasing the number of bent portions up to the V flow path 955a. That is, the flow velocity lowering mechanism such as the concave portion 471 or the bending portion is provided in the flow passage up to the V flow passage 955a, and the flow velocity and the gravity of the gaming ball flowing downward are reduced compared to the case without the flow velocity reduction mechanism. , V channel 955a is extended. Further, a projection may be provided on the bottom of the flow path leading to the V flow path 955a so that the game ball bounces, and the arrival timing to the V flow path 955a may be delayed.

From the above, the start area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second start winning opening) provided in the gaming area 32 is provided with the gaming board 30 provided with the gaming area 32 in which gaming balls can flow 97) a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed based on the winning of the game ball, and a special game state which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result In the game machine 10, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball can not win and the game ball can be converted into the open state in which the game ball can win. In the closed state, the game ball can be won from the opening facing upward, and it protrudes forward to close the opening, disabling the game ball from winning and in the open state retracts the back to open the opening. Enter game ball In the closed state, the game ball can flow down on the upper surface of the open / close member 990, and the open / close member 990 is an upper surface on which the game ball can flow down. Is provided with a projecting portion 992 projecting upward. Therefore, since the rolling mode of the game ball changes in the projecting portion 992, the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing into the specific area at an unintended timing, and it is possible to prevent the transition of the probability state different from the design value.

In addition, the projecting portion 992 is provided at least at the front end portion in the sliding direction on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990. When the opening / closing member 990 is converted to the open state, the rolling aspect of the gaming ball changes in the projecting portion 992, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the special variation winning device 38 is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game, and the special variation winning device 38 is provided internally with a specific area (V channel 955a) to which game balls can flow. Based on the game ball having won in the variable winning device 38 flowing into the specific area, it is possible to generate a game state more advantageous to the player after the special game state has ended than when the game ball did not flow into the specific area. The protrusion 992 is formed such that when the opening / closing member 990 is converted to the open state, the gaming ball in contact with the protrusion 992 is guided in the direction away from the specific area. Therefore, since the player is guided in the direction away from the specific area, the player's sense of apprehension can be disturbed and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the opening and closing member 990 is provided with a plurality of projecting portions 992 on the upper surface at intervals, and when the opening and closing member 990 is converted to the open state, the gaming ball located on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 The projection 992 is disposed so as to be able to pass between the two and flow downward from the front end in the sliding direction. Therefore, the rolling aspect of the game ball when converting the open / close member 990 to the open state is diversified, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the projecting portion 992 is provided at a position where the gaming ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 can contact in the closed state, and the gaming ball stays on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 more than the case without the projecting portion 992 The time will be extended. Therefore, since the time in which the game balls stay on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 is extended, the possibility of winning the special variation winning device 38 is increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Sixth Modified Example Next, a sixth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the configuration of the gaming area 32.

As shown in FIG. 164, in the gaming board 30 of the present modification, a plate-shaped partition wall 531 is provided between the center case 40 and the outer peripheral wall 31 from the upper side of the center case 40 to the right side. The partition wall 531 is disposed along the outer peripheral wall 31 at an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the gaming ball from the outer peripheral wall 31. In addition, the dividing wall 531 is the width from the front of the game board main body to the back and forth width of the game area 32 (the width from the front of the game board main body 80 to the back of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30). It extends forward.

In addition, the distance between the dividing wall 531 and the restriction wall 613 formed on the outer periphery of the center case 40 is also larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and both sides of the dividing wall 531 can flow downstream A first downstream region 541 sandwiched by the partition wall 531 and the outer peripheral wall 31 and a second downstream region 542 sandwiched by the partition wall 531 and the restriction wall 613 are formed.

The lower end of the partition wall 531 is connected to the upper end of the guiding portion 616. In the gaming machine of the present modification, the game ball can also flow down on the right side of the guiding portion 616, and the first flowing area 541 sandwiched by the partition wall 531 and the outer peripheral wall 31 is the area on the right side of the guiding portion 616 In order to guide the game ball to the out port 30a. The game balls flowing down the first flow area 541 are not out to win in any of the common drawing start gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the special fluctuation winning device 38, the general winning opening 35, and the winning device 90. It is induced to. On the other hand, the gaming balls flowing down the second flow-down area 542 sandwiched by the division wall 531 and the restriction wall 613 are the common drawing start gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, the special fluctuation winning apparatus 38, and the general winning opening 35 There is a possibility that the winning device 90 will win a prize. In the present modification, there is a possibility that the winning device 90 will win even in the case of a right-handed hit, but in the case of a right-handed hit, the winning device 90 may not be able to win.

It is possible to select which one of the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 the game balls are to be flowed in by adjusting the power. The inlets of the first flowing region 541 and the second flowing region 542 are located above the center case 40, and the inlet of the first flowing region 541 is located above the inlet of the second flowing region 542. doing. Therefore, in order to aim the inflow of gaming balls into the second flow-down area 542, it is necessary to make the launch force weaker than in the case of flowing the gaming balls into the first flow-down area 541.

In the conventional gaming machine, when performing a left strike, the game is performed by adjusting the launch force, but when performing a right strike, only the operation unit 24 is turned as much as possible. On the other hand, in the gaming board 30 of the present modification, it is necessary to adjust the driving force so as not to flow into the first flow-down area 541 even when the right strike is performed, Interest can be improved. In addition, when the player stops playing while the game ball is left on the upper tray 21 in the game arcade, the clerk turns the operation unit 24 as much as possible to fire the game ball to the first flow area 541 By making the ball flow in, it becomes possible to process the game ball without making it to the winning opening.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 165, a part of the division wall 531 is interrupted to provide a communication portion 532 in which the first downflow area 541 and the second downflow area 542 communicate with each other, and the area where the gaming balls flow down is changed. It is also possible to give the possibility. By doing this, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

By adjusting the distance between the end portions of the dividing wall 531 divided by the communication portion 532, it is possible to adjust the height of the possibility of changing the area where the gaming balls flow down. For example, the area where the gaming ball flows down is rarely changed as a width slightly wider than the diameter of the gaming ball, or the area where the gaming ball flows down frequently as the sufficiently wide interval is changed can do. Further, the provision of the guiding portion 533 for guiding the gaming ball toward the communicating portion 532 can also increase the possibility that the area in which the gaming ball flows can be changed. In the example of FIG. 165, the guiding wall 533 for guiding the gaming balls flowing down the second flow-down area 542 to the communication section 532 is formed by the restriction wall 613 of the center case 40, and the first flow-down from the second flow-down area 542 The possibility of the game ball moving to the area 541 is increased. In addition, an obstacle such as a windmill may be provided in the communication portion 532.

Further, the partition walls 531 divided by the communication portion 532 are all formed on the front surface of the one base member 534. The base member 534 is disposed along the front face of the game board main body 80 and is fixed to the game board main body 80 by screws. By providing screw holes in the communication portion 532, screwing work is performed in a wide area without the partition wall 531. The efficiency of the manufacturing operation of the game board 30 can be improved.

FIG. 166 shows another example of the game board 30 provided with the partition wall 531. As shown in FIG. 166, the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 may have a possibility of winning on the winning opening. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the rolling aspect of the gaming ball in the gaming state in which the player is right-handed colorful, and the interest of the game can be improved. In this game board 30, a first special fluctuation winning apparatus 38 and a second special fluctuation winning apparatus 39 are provided as special fluctuation winning apparatuses, and these can be opened alternately. Further, instead of the winning device 90, only the first start winning opening 36 is provided. The game method and the like are the same as those of the game board 30 of the first embodiment, and the left hit and the right hit are selected according to the game situation.

When the size of the center case 40 is reduced as in the gaming board 30, a wide space is created between the outer peripheral wall 31 and the restriction wall 613. In this case, it is common to place an obstacle member such as a game nail or a windmill in this space, but the timing and speed of the game ball reaching the right game area when right-handed due to the presence of the obstacle member Can vary. For this reason, it becomes difficult to stably reach the gaming area on the right side, and stable winning on the special fluctuation winning device 38 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is inhibited, and the profit of the player is lowered. There is a fear.

Therefore, by dividing this space into the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 by the partition wall 531, the first flow-down area 541 can stably reach the gaming area on the right without the obstacle member. The second flow-down area 542 can be an area that enjoys the change of the rolling aspect of the gaming ball by the obstacle member. As a result, it is possible to appropriately secure the interests of the player while enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 166, by providing the first flow-down area 541 on the upper side without providing any obstacle member, the game machine is fired with the strongest launch by fully turning the operation unit 24 the first flow-down area It will flow to 541. Then, by making the first flow-down area 541 a width in which the game balls flow down in a row, it is possible to always receive the game balls directed to the left by the buffer portion 545 provided on the outer peripheral wall 31. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball of the strong launch from colliding with the portion other than the buffer portion 545, and to prevent damage to the game board 30.

In addition, when the special variation winning device 38 such as the gaming machine of the first embodiment is provided, the game ball is always on the opening / closing member 990 in order to make the special variation winning device 38 win even in short opening. Needs to stay. In order to do this, it is necessary to cause the game ball to reach the special variation winning device 38 stably and at a fixed timing, but this becomes possible by providing the partition wall 531 as described above, and the profit of the player is appropriate Can be secured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167, the communication portion 532 may be provided in a range where the gaming ball moves to the right. By doing this, the gaming ball which reaches the start end of the first flow-down area 541 but is weakly propelled falls from the communication part 532 to the second flow-down area 542. As a result, the launch force that allows the first flow-down area 541 to flow down to the end is limited to a narrower range, and the timing of the game ball reaching the special fluctuation winning device 38 etc. is more stabilized. it can. In this case, the game balls flowing down the second flow-down area 542 have a lower winning rate for the special variation winning device 38 and the like than the game balls flowing down the first flow-down area 541, etc. It is preferable to make it disadvantageous.

Furthermore, a winning opening or a gate through which a gaming ball falling from the upper side can win may be provided at a position below the communication portion 532 in the second flow-down area 542. In this way, the game ball flows into the winning hole or the gate only when the game ball is fired with a firing force that falls to a predetermined position of the communication portion 532 with a firing force that reaches the beginning of the first flow-down area 541. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, in FIGS. 164 to 167, the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 are formed by arranging the plate-like partition wall 531 between the outer peripheral wall 31 and the restriction wall 613, but The first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 may be formed by a U-shaped grooved flow path forming member. In this case, the groove-like flow passage forming member may be disposed to open on the front side to form the side wall and the back wall of the flow-down region, or the groove-like flow passage forming member may be arranged on the rear side. It may be arranged to be open and may be arranged to constitute the side wall and the front wall of the flow-down area. Alternatively, the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 may be formed by a tubular flow path forming member.

By doing so, it becomes possible to form the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 with a single flow path forming member without using the restriction wall 613 and the outer peripheral wall 31 of the center case 40. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency at which the game ball collides with the control wall 613 of the center case 40 and the like, and to reduce the number of members to be discarded when reusing the components of the game board. In addition, when the flow path forming member is damaged, only the flow path forming member may be replaced, and the cost of repair can be reduced.

In addition, character information such as an explanation of the game content, information instructing not to stare at the same light for a long time from a short distance, and information indicating that a fraud prevention sensor is mounted is described in this flow path forming member It is also possible to use a flow path forming member in which necessary character information is described. In this way, it is possible to change the character information more easily than printing on the surface of the game board.

Further, a plurality of division walls 531 are provided between the outer peripheral wall 31 and the restriction wall 613 to provide three or more parallel flow-down areas so that the player can select the flow-down area to flow down by adjusting the urge. It is good. In this case, a sensor for detecting gaming balls flowing down may be provided in each flow-down area, and different effects may be provided to the player according to the flow-down area flowing down.

Also, although the starting end of the dividing wall 531 is provided above the center case 40 and the gaming ball is directed to the right, it may be provided to the right of the center case 40 and downward. . Further, although the partition wall 531 is provided above and to the right of the center case 40, it may be provided at a location other than this.

In addition, as the gaming machine provided with the dividing wall 531, the gaming machine which executes the variable display game based on the winning in the starting area as described above has been mentioned, but it is possible to provide for other gaming machines. . For example, it is possible to win a prize on an auxiliary gaming device based on winning in a starting area, and a so-called feather that generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player based on the game ball winning in the ancillary gaming device flowing into a specific area. It may be a gaming machine of (old type 2 type). In this case, the possibility of winning on the auxiliary gaming device or the possibility of winning on a specific region in the auxiliary gaming device may be different depending on the flow-down region where the gaming ball flows down.

From the above, the start area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second start winning opening) provided in the gaming area 32 is provided with the gaming board 30 provided with the gaming area 32 in which gaming balls can flow In the gaming machine 10 that executes a game based on the winning of the game ball to 97) and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the game result is a special result, the gaming board 30 is a game area An outer peripheral wall 31 which divides the outer periphery of 32 and a guiding wall 491 which is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 and which forms a guiding path 490 which guides the shot gaming ball to a predetermined position of the game area 32; A center case 40 is provided substantially at the center, and a plate-like partition wall 531 is provided between the center case 40 and the outer peripheral wall 31, and the game balls can flow down on both sides of the partition wall 531 region( 1 flows down region 541, so that the second falling region 542) is formed. Therefore, it is possible to change the manner of flow of the game balls and to improve the interest.

Further, the guiding path 490 is provided on one side to the left and right of the game area 32, the dividing wall 531 is provided on the other side to the left and right of the gaming area 32, and the dividing wall 531 is sandwiched by the player adjusting the release. It is possible to select which of the flow-down areas respectively formed on both sides of the game ball to flow into. Therefore, since the player can select the flow-down area to flow, interest can be improved.

Further, the upstream end of the dividing wall 531 in the rolling direction of the gaming ball is located above the center case 40. Therefore, it is possible to select the flow-down area to flow down above the center case 40 which is easy for the player to visually recognize.

Seventh Modified Example Next, a seventh modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of the present variation includes a reflective surface 550.

As shown in FIG. 168, the gaming machine of the present modification has a reflective surface 550 above the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, and part of a character string 551 for presenting information to the player is on the reflective surface 550. It is written to overlap. As a character string 551 for presenting information to the player, a warning message such as a display prompting that the same light is not stared for a long time from a short distance or information indicating that a fraud prevention sensor is mounted, game content And an explanation of the operation method.

When such a character string 551 is written so as to overlap the reflective surface 550, the player's attention is drawn to the reflective surface 550 giving an impression different from the surroundings, and the player looks at the reflective surface 550. Naturally, the character string 551 is also viewed, and information can be effectively transmitted to the player. In particular, since the first few characters of the character string 551 overlap the reflecting surface 550, it is easy to start reading and information can be effectively transmitted to the player. Of course, only characters other than the head of the character string 551 may overlap the reflective surface 550. The entire text 551 may overlap the reflective surface 550.

In addition, the position where the reflective surface 550 is provided and the position where the character string 551 is described are the positions where the game ball passes, and in the process of following the game ball, the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551 naturally enter eyes Thus, information can be effectively transmitted to the player. Here, the character string 551 is disposed in the portion where the gaming ball moves to the right, and the direction of reading the character string 511 matches the moving direction of the gaming ball. This also makes it possible to read the string 551 naturally. Of course, the moving direction of the game ball and the direction of reading the character string 551 may be different.

The reflective surface 550 is formed on the cell attached to the front of the game board main body 80, and the character string 551 is also printed on the cell. For example, it can be formed by processing the cells to have a metallic gloss. Furthermore, a sheet-like lens may be stacked. Also, a reflecting member such as a mirror may be disposed on the front of the game board main body 80, and the front may be covered with a transparent cell.

It is preferable that the entire face of the player 552 can be projected in a state where the player sits on the front of the gaming machine 10 to play a game as the area where the reflecting surface 550 is projected as shown in FIG. 169 (a). The reflection of the player's face attracts the player's interest, and the opportunity to see the reflecting surface 550 can be further increased, and the opportunity to see the string 551 can also be increased. Also, the upper body of the player 552 may be shown. Also, if it is possible to project the left and right rear areas of the player, it is possible to confirm, for example, that a store clerk has come when replacing a ball box.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 169 (b), the reflecting surface 550 may be configured to be able to project an area behind the player's left and right. In this case, it is preferable to be able to visually recognize the state of the lamp of the front frame provided on the gaming machine 553 of the island facility located behind the player. By doing this, it is possible to check the state of the gaming machine 553 located behind the player without looking back. In addition, the light from the rear gaming machine 553 is reflected by the reflective surface 550, so that the reflective surface 550 is indirectly decorated, and more attention can be given to the character string 551. In addition, if the reflecting surface 550 has a function as a convex mirror, it is possible to project a wide area with a small reflecting surface. Of course, it may be a concave mirror.

Further, it is preferable that the light from the light emitting member of the gaming machine 10 or the light from the illumination of the gaming arcade is not reflected directly to the player by the reflecting surface 550. With regard to the light from the light emitting members of the gaming machine 10, the arrangement of the light emitting members and the radiation direction of the light are adjusted so that the light is not reflected by the reflective surface 550 and radiated to the front of the gaming machine 10. In addition, with regard to light from the outside of the gaming machine 10 such as illumination of a game arcade, the reflecting surface 550 may be slightly directed downward, or the front periphery of the front frame 12 may be projected forward and incident on the reflecting surface 550. It can respond by preventing.

Further, the position where the reflective surface 550 is provided is not limited to the illustrated position. For example, the reflecting surface 550 may be provided in the vicinity of the guiding wall 491 and the character string 551 may be disposed along the guiding wall 491. For example, the reflective surface 550 may be provided in the vicinity of the outer peripheral wall 31, and the character string 551 may be disposed along the outer peripheral wall 31. Alternatively, the reflecting surface 550 may be provided on the guiding portion 490, and the character string 551 may be disposed along the outer peripheral wall 31 or the guiding wall 491. In addition, a reflecting surface 550 may be provided on the moving object, and the character information may be superimposed on the reflecting surface 550. As the character string 551 in this case, a character string ("super heat" or the like) relating to the effect of the game may be mentioned.

Also, the reflecting surface 550 may be a half mirror. In this case, a space is provided on the back surface side of the reflective surface 550, and this space can be illuminated by the light emitting member. In this way, if the light emitting member is turned off to darken the space, the reflecting surface 550 can be seen as a mirror for the player, and if the light emitting member is turned on to brighten the space, the player can be reflected on the reflecting surface 550. The space can be viewed through the

Further, the reflecting surface 550 and the character string 551 may be provided on the outside of the game area 32 of the game board 30 or may be provided on the front frame 12. In addition, as the gaming machine provided with the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551, a gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on winning in the starting area as described above has been mentioned, but providing for other gaming machines Is possible. For example, it is possible to win a prize on an auxiliary gaming device based on winning in a starting area, and a so-called feather that generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player based on the game ball winning in the ancillary gaming device flowing into a specific area. It may be a gaming machine of (old type 2 type). Also, the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551 may be disposed in a portion of the slot machine where the player can visually recognize.

From the above, the game can be viewed on the gaming machine 10 that executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result. A reflective surface 550 for reflecting light is provided on the front surface of the display, and a part of a character string 551 for presenting information to the player is written so as to overlap the reflective surface 550. Therefore, by attracting the player's attention by the reflecting surface 550, the player can be made aware of the presence of the character string 551, and information can be effectively provided to the player.

The reflecting surface 550 also has a function as a convex mirror. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to the reflective surface 550 more effectively, and information can be effectively provided to the player. Moreover, it becomes possible to project a wide area.

Also, the reflective surface 550 can show at least the entire face of the player playing a game. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to the reflective surface 550 more effectively, and information can be effectively provided to the player.

Also, the reflecting surface 550 can project an area behind the player's left and right. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to the reflective surface 550 more effectively, and information can be effectively provided to the player. In addition, it is possible to confirm the backward state of the player.

Further, the gaming board 30 is provided with the gaming area 32 in which the gaming balls can flow, and the reflecting surface 550 is provided in the gaming area 32, and the gaming balls can flow forward of the reflecting surface 550. . Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to the reflective surface 550 more effectively, and information can be effectively provided to the player.

Second Embodiment A gaming machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the following description, the embodiment (configuration) common to the first embodiment is applicable unless otherwise noted.

[Game Board] FIG. 170 is a front view of the game board 30 included in the game machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 170, the game board 30 includes a flat game board main body 80 which serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 is provided on the front of the game board main body 80. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball launch device into a game area 32 surrounded by the outer peripheral wall 31. A windmill, an obstacle nail or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached substantially at the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variation display device) that variably displays a plurality of identification information is disposed.

In the center case 40, a warp passage forming member 614 for forming a warp passage for guiding the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and the gaming balls passing through the warp passage roll A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is disposed above the first start winning opening 36, the gaming balls rolled on the stage portion 620 are more likely to win the first start winning opening 36.

In the right play area 32 of the center case 40, a normal symbol start gate (common view start gate) 34 is provided. Inside the drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 32) for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the gaming ball driven into the gaming area 32 passes the common drawing start gate 34, the common drawing variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are disposed in the game area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is disposed in the right portion of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball on the general winning opening 35 is detected by a winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 32) provided on the general winning opening 35.

In the lower game area 32 of the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special view 1 variation display game (first special view variation display game) is provided. . The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 32). Further, in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40, there is provided a second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special view 2 variation display game (second special view variation display game). It is done. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 32).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided between the common view starting gate 34 and the second starting winning opening 97. In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the special figure 1 variation display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start by the winning of the regular variation winning device 37 in the winning opening (general charge winning opening 37d). A winning prize memory (first start memory) is stored. That is, in the present embodiment, the winning opening (general power winning opening 37d) of the normal variation winning device 37 is a first start winning area which gives the start condition of the special view 1 variation display game (first special view variation display game). is there. The gaming ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 32), and when the starting ball is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the game control device 100 The special view 1 variable display game is immediately executed, or the special view 1 start winning memory is stored. As described above, in the present embodiment, the common use winning opening 37d and the first starting winning opening 36 correspond to the first starting winning area (the starting opening of the special view 1), and the second starting winning opening 97 is the second starting. It corresponds to the winning area (starting port of the special figure 2).

A game control device (game control means) 100 performs control to convert the movable member 37b of the normal change winning device 37 into an open state and a closed state based on a predetermined lottery result of the common drawing change display game. It connects to (conversion control means) (see FIG. 32). The details of the configuration of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 moves back and forth (slids) by the common electric solenoid 37c. This is a so-called Vero-type ordinary electric wheeler that opens the mouth 37d (makes it possible for the gaming ball to flow into the common use winning opening 37d). In addition, as the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, for example, an ordinary electric combination of the attacker type is provided in which the general electric winning opening 37d is opened by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling to the front side by the general electric solenoid 37c. May be The game control apparatus 100 can open the movable member 37b through the common electric solenoid 37c and the game ball can flow into the normal change winning apparatus 37 when the result of the common drawing change display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. Change to the open state.

In addition, the game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the common view fluctuation display game or making the hit probability of the common view fluctuation display game higher than usual. The time saving state (general power support (power support) state) is generated by lengthening the generation time of the easy winning state rather than the easy winning state generated in the gaming state.

In the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40, a special variation winning device 38 is provided. The special variation winning device 38, as shown in FIG. 17, moves the opening / closing member 990 back and forth (slides) to convert the special winning opening 38d into a state in which gaming balls can flow. The special variation winning device 38 converts the closed state of the big winning opening 38 d from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special view variation display game, and facilitates the flow of the gaming ball into the big winning opening 38 d. A predetermined gaming value (prize ball) is given to a player. The game ball that has won the special variation winning device 38 is detected by the special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 32).

The special variation winning apparatus 38 of this embodiment differs from the special variation winning apparatus 38 of the first embodiment in that the general winning opening 35 is not provided, and the other points are the special variation winning apparatus 38 of the first embodiment. Is the same as That is, in the special variation winning device 38 of the present embodiment, as in the special variation winning device 38 of the first embodiment, the opening / closing member 990 closes the special winning opening 38d by the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The opening / closing member 990 retracts from the closed state (the closed state which is disadvantageous to the player) to convert the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 32 into the open state (the advantageous state for the player). Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the game ball arriving at the special variation winning device 38 is guided obliquely backward by the front wall projecting portion 954 and the projecting portion 992, and obliquely forward by the concave portion 993 and the rear wall projecting portion 964. The guidance to to is repeated and it flows down from right to left while meandering back and forth. Thus, the game ball stays on the opening / closing member 990 more than in the case where the front wall projecting portion 954, the rear wall projecting portion 964, the projecting portion 992, the recess 993 and the like are flowed straight down without flowing become longer. Therefore, even if the game ball is always present on the opening and closing member 990 and the opening time of the special variation winning device 38 is short, the game ball existing on the opening and closing member 990 when the opening and closing member 990 is opened. There is a high possibility that the player will fall and win a prize in the big winning opening 38d, and even with a short opening, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the prize.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31, when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, the gaming ball which has been staying on the opening and closing member 990 is bounced by coming into contact with the projecting portion 992 and guided away from the big winning opening 38d Be done. In addition, the bouncing game ball may be further separated from the big winning opening 38d by coming into contact with the front wall projection 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall projection 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, and the like. Further, since the projecting portions 992 are disposed at intervals through which the game balls can pass, the projecting portions 992 may fall without contacting the projecting portions 992 through the intervals. As described above, by providing the projecting portion 992, the front wall projecting portion 954, and the rear wall projecting portion 964, the rolling aspect of the game ball when opening the opening / closing member 990 becomes colorful, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can. In addition, when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, the inflow timing of the plurality of gaming balls existing on the opening and closing member 990 to the large winning opening 38d can be shifted, and ball clogging occurs in the large winning opening 38d. Can be prevented.

The game control device (game control means) 100 can generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined special result. In the present embodiment, the special game state is a big hit state (second special game state) that can be generated when the big hit mode (second special result) and a small hit mode (first special result) A small hit game state (first special game state) that can be generated when it becomes an event shall be included.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100, special drawing based on the winning of the game ball to the common power winning opening 37d (first start winning area) or the first starting winning port 36 (first start winning area) It is possible to perform execution control of 1 fluctuation display game (the 1st special figure fluctuation display game). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a first execution control means that performs such control. Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special view 2 variation display game (a second special view variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball on the second start winning opening 97 (the second start winning area). It is possible to control the execution of the That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a second execution control means that performs such control.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100, after the end of the big hit game state (the second special game state), a situation that favors the player than the normal game state (a high probability of hitting, and a power transmission support It is possible to perform control to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the game can be progressed. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a specific game state generation means for performing such control.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the launch force to fire the gaming ball to the left gaming area (so-called left strike), thereby achieving the first start winning opening 36 and the first starting winning opening 36. It is possible to aim for winning in the general winning opening 35 disposed on the left side of the game, and by launching the game ball to the right play area (so-called right hit), the common drawing start gate 34 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37, special It is possible to aim for winning in the general winning opening 35 disposed above the variable winning device 38, the second starting winning opening 97, and the second starting winning opening 97. Then, the game ball in any of the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the regular power winning opening 37d of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the large winning opening 38d of the special fluctuation winning device 38 When the player wins a prize, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 32) discharges the winning balls from the payout device to the upper tray 21 in the number according to the type of the winning opening that has won the prize.

In addition, the gaming area 32 below the first start winning opening 36 is provided with an out port 30a for collecting gaming balls that did not win a winning opening or the like. In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the gaming board main body 80, the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and the common figure variation display game A collective display device 50 is provided.

FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 30 included in the game machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 171, the gaming board 30 comprises a gaming board main body 80 having a substantially rectangular plate shape, a front component 600 constituting the front side portion of the center case 40, and a rear side portion of the center case 40 And a rear component 700 to which various members necessary for the disc 30 are attached. The rear component 700 has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess opened forward, and inside the recess forms a board effect device 44 for providing a game effect by operating. , And various movable role units are provided.

The front component 600 is provided with a general winning opening 35, a warp passage forming member 614, a stage portion 620, and the like. Further, in addition to the front component 600, the game board main body 80 has the common drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special variation. A winning device 38, a collective display device 50 and the like are provided.

Also, as shown in FIG. 170 and FIG. 171, on the right side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a flow down path 615 covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicating vertically is formed. The game ball that failed in (specifically, the game ball that did not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 despite having arrived at the normal fluctuation winning device 37) flows downward through the outflow path 615. Below the flow passage 615, a guiding portion 616 is provided. The guiding portion 616 is an inclined surface in which the upper surface 617 descends to the left, and the upper surface 617 receives the gaming ball flowing down the downflow passage 615, and the second start winning opening 97 and the special fluctuation winning device 38 exist. It is designed to guide you to the left.

[Normal Fluctuation Winning Apparatus] Next, an example of the configuration of the normal fluctuating prize apparatus 37 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 to 180. FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 of the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 173 (a) is a top view of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in which the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and FIG. 173 (b) is an upper surface of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in which the movable member 37b is in the open state. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 173, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 has a flow path rear wall 373a disposed along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and a flow path front wall 371a disposed in front of the flow path rear wall 373a. And an outflow passage 37f through which the game balls can flow in a row. The flow-down path 37f is inclined to the right as viewed from the front side, and the gaming balls flow downward in a row. In addition, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 can pass the game ball in a row in the inside of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (specifically, the inside of the base portion configured by the front base member 373 and the rear base member 375). A substantially U-shaped bypass 37g is provided. As shown in FIG. 172, the inlet 37g1 (one end of the bypass 37g) and the outlet 37g2 (the other end of the bypass 37g) of the bypass 37g are formed in the flow path rear wall 373a. These flow into the bypass 37g from the downflow 37f one by one via the inlet 37g1 and flow out one by one from the bypass 37g via the outlet 37g2 into the downflow 37f.

As shown in FIG. 172, the flow path front wall 371a has a protrusion 371b that protrudes rearward and penetrates the flow path rear wall 373a. The protruding portion 371b is a position where the gaming balls flowing down the flowing path 37f collide with each other, and is disposed at a position between the inlet 37g1 and the outlet 37g2 of the bypass 37g. Therefore, the protrusion 371b blocks the game ball from flowing in the flow-down path 37f halfway (that is, before flowing into the end point (downstream end) of the flow-down path 37f) to the bypass path 37g. It is supposed to be guided. And since the projection part 371b is provided in the middle of the flowing down passage 37f, the gaming ball can not flow into the end point of the flowing down passage 37f unless it passes the detour 37g.

As shown in FIG. 173, the bottom surfaces of the center portion and the right end portion of the downflow path 37f and the bottom surface of the bypass path 37g are configured by movable members 37b that can slide in the front-rear direction. The movable member 37b protrudes forward as shown in FIG. 173 (a) and is in a closed state where the gaming ball can not win a prize in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (Pu.V. winning opening 37d), as shown in FIG. 173 (b). Thus, it can be converted into an open state in which the game ball can be won in the regular electric power winning opening 37d by retreating backward. That is, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the gaming ball flowing down the flow-down path 37f rolls the upper surface of the movable member 37b and can not flow into the common winning hole 37d, and the movable member 37b is open In this case, it is possible to flow into the Fuden prize winning opening 37d.

Specifically, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the gaming ball flowing down the flowing path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b. That is, the downflow path 37f flows down to the projection 371b, collides with the projection 371b, and flows into the bypass 37g. In addition, when the movable member 37b is opened before the gaming ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 37b collides with the projecting portion 371b, or the gaming ball flowing down the outflow passage 37f flows in the upper surface of the movable member 37b When the movable member 37b is in the open state at the time of the game, the gaming ball does not pass through the bypass 37g but flows into the common power winning opening 37d.

In addition, the gaming ball which has flowed through the detour 37g and flowing into the end point of the flow-down path 37f flows into the common charge winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the open state. On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the gaming ball that has passed the detour 37g and flows into the end point of the flow-down path 37f does not flow into the common power winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is closed. It goes out to the outside, for example, flows down to the induction section 616 through the down flow path 615. That is, the gaming ball is equivalent to a gaming ball that failed to win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (a gaming ball that did not win the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 despite having arrived at the normal fluctuation winning device 37) . When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, there is a gap between the movable member 37b and the flow path front wall 371a, but the gap can not allow the game ball to flow.

As shown in FIG. 172, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 includes a start port 2 switch 37a, and a movable member unit 374 having a movable member 37b and a common solenoid 37c. Furthermore, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 includes a front decoration member 371 having a flow path front wall 371a, a front base member 373 having a flow path rear wall 373a, a rear base member 375 to which a movable member 37b and the like are attached, and a rear base A rear cover member 377 covering the rear surface of the member 375, a front substrate holder 372 for fixing the front LED substrate 372a and the front LED substrate 372a to the rear surface of the front decoration member 371, a rear LED substrate 376a and the rear LED substrate 376a And a rear substrate holder 376 for fixing the rear base member 375 to the rear surface of the rear base member 375.

At least the front decoration member 371, the front base member 373 and the rear base member 375 are made of a material capable of transmitting light. A front LED substrate 372a is arranged as a decoration means behind the front decoration member 371, and a rear LED substrate 376a is arranged behind the rear base member 375 as a decoration means. It is possible to decorate the

The front decoration member 371 includes a plate-like front surface portion 371 c. The front surface of the front surface portion 371c is disposed close to the rear surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that the gaming ball does not flow down the front of the front surface. In addition, the front of the front portion 371c is a surface visible to the player, and is decorated. In addition, the upper portion of the plate-like front surface portion 371c is a flow path front wall 371a which forms a side wall on the front side of the flow-down path 37f.

As shown in FIG. 173, on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a, a plurality (two in the present embodiment) of upstream side front wall protrusions 371d are provided. The upstream side front wall projection 371d is a triangular prism-like projection whose left and right side surfaces are sloped. The upstream side front wall projection 371 d has a function of guiding the gaming ball flowing downward to the rear in order to meander the gaming ball flowing down the flowing down path 37 f and suppress the pitch. That is, the game ball flowing down the flowing path 37f forms a contact portion which can be contacted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 173, on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a, there is provided a downstream side front wall projection 371e projecting backward. The downstream side front wall projection 371 e is a triangular prism-shaped projection in which the left and right side surfaces are inclined. The downstream side front wall projection 371 e has a function of guiding the gaming ball flowing downward to the rear in order to meander the gaming ball flowing into the end point of the flow-down path 37 f to suppress the flaming. That is, the game ball flowing down the flowing path 37f forms a contact portion which can be contacted. Furthermore, in the downstream front wall projection 371e, the gaming balls flowing down around the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (outside of the normal fluctuation winning device 37) move downstream to the inside of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (in the downflow passage 37f). It has a function to prevent intrusion from the end point side).

FIG. 174 (a) is a back view of the front decoration member 371. FIG. As shown in FIG. 174 (a), on the rear surface side of the front decoration member 371, a plurality of rib-like extending walls 371f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-like front surface portion 371c are provided. The extension wall 371f has different functions depending on the place where it is provided, and a bottom portion 371f1 that forms the bottom surface of the downflow path 37f (specifically, the bottom surface of the start point (upstream end) of the downflow path 37f) The common channel winning opening forming part 371f2 forming the side wall and the bottom of the common channel winning opening 37d, the guiding channel forming part 371f3 forming the guiding channel 37e for guiding the game ball to the common channel winning opening 37d, the starting opening 2 switch It has a function as a switch mounting portion forming portion 371f4 forming a mounting portion for mounting 37a, and a surrounding wall 371f5 preventing the entry into the inside of the gaming ball flowing down around the normal fluctuation winning device 37.

The bottom surface portion 371f1 that forms the bottom surface of the flow-down path 37f is an inclined surface that inclines to the left as viewed from the rear surface side. The poten winning combination formation block 371 f 2 is inclined to collect the gaming balls having flowed into the common pot winning opening 37 d into the guiding channel 37 e. The game balls can flow in a row in the induction flow channel 37e, and a start opening 2 switch 37a is provided in the inflow portion to the induction flow channel 37e. As a result, all gaming balls having flowed into the common pot winning opening 37d are detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a and then flow into the guiding channel 37e. The induction flow path 37e formed by the induction flow path forming portion 371f3 is a flow path for guiding the gaming ball from the common pot winning opening 37d to the rear surface side of the gaming board 30, and the gaming ball is formed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 371c. A rib 371 g for guiding backward is formed.

The front LED substrate 372a and the front substrate holder 372 are disposed on the inner side (the portion surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5) than the peripheral wall 371f5 of the rear surface of the front decoration member 371. Further, in a portion of the rear surface of the front decoration member 371 and surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5, processing for scattering light (concave and convex processing in the example shown in FIG. 174A) is performed. Thus, the light from the front LED substrate 372a and the rear LED substrate 376a can be used to effectively decorate the normal variation winning device 37, and the front LED substrate 372a itself and the front substrate holder 372 can be decorated It is difficult to visually recognize the front decoration member 371 from the front of the member 371. Also, as shown in FIG. 174 (b), there are a plurality of holes for releasing heat, such as the front LED substrate 372a, in the lower part of the front base member 373 (seven in the example shown in FIG. 174 (b)) It is provided. These holes are also difficult to visually recognize from the front of the front decoration member 371 by processing for scattering the light applied to the front decoration member 371.

As shown in FIG. 172, the front base member 373 is provided with a plate-like rear surface portion 373b. A front decoration member 371 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b, and a part of the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b which is not hidden by the front decoration member 371 is decorated. An upper portion of the rear surface portion 373b is a flow path rear wall 373a which forms a rear side wall of the flow-down path 37f. In addition, a movable member insertion portion 373c penetrating in the front and rear direction for inserting the movable member 37b from the rear surface side of the front base member 373 is formed at a position to be the lower end of the flow path rear wall 373a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 173, on the front side of the front base member 373, a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) rear wall projections 373d are provided that project forward. The rear wall projection 373d is a triangular prism-shaped projection in which the left and right side surfaces are sloped, and an upstream front wall is provided behind each of the upstream front wall projections 371d provided on the flow path front wall 371a. It is provided so as to be located slightly downstream with respect to the protrusion 371d. The rear wall projection 373d has a function of guiding the gaming ball flowing downward to the front, in order to meander the gaming ball flowing down the flowing path 37f and suppress the pitch. That is, the game ball flowing down the flowing path 37f forms a contact portion which can be contacted.

FIG. 174 (b) is a back view of the front base member 373. As shown in FIG. 174 (b), the guiding channel 37e is the back surface of the rear surface portion 373b at the center of the rear surface portion 373b and in the front decoration member 371 opposite to the portion where the guiding channel 37e is formed. A penetrating portion 373 e penetrating in the back and forth direction so as to communicate with the side is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 174 (b), a plurality of rib-like extending walls 373 f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-like rear surface portion 373 b are provided on the rear surface side of the front base member 373. The extending wall 373f has different functions depending on the place where it is provided, and functions as a guiding channel forming portion 373f1 forming the guiding channel 37e and a peripheral wall 373f2 forming the periphery of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Have.

The guiding flow path forming portion 373f1 forms a guiding flow path 37e so as to guide the gaming ball having flowed into the penetration portion 373e to the rear. Further, a rib 373 g for guiding the game ball backward is formed at the lower end portion of the guiding flow path forming portion 373 f 1. The lower end portion of the induction channel forming portion 373f1 and the rib 373g formed on the lower end portion are inclined surfaces with the upper surface falling backward, and the gaming balls having flowed into the penetrating portion 373e are received by these upper surfaces It is designed to guide you. The induced game balls are made to flow into the discharge flow path for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine 10.

The surrounding wall 373f2 is formed in accordance with the shape of the penetrating portion formed in the portion to which the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is attached in the gaming board main body 80, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is attached to the gaming board main body 80 At this time, the surrounding wall 373f2 is inserted into the through portion. Further, the rear surface of the rear surface portion 373b located outside the surrounding wall 373f2 is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the normal change winning device 37 is attached to the game board main body 80. A plurality of bosses for positioning and a plurality of screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 172, the rear base member 375 includes a peripheral wall 375a that coincides with the peripheral wall 373f2 of the front base member 373. Further, as shown in FIG. 172, a pair of guide members for guiding and supporting the movable member 37b operating in the front and rear direction at a position facing the movable member insertion portion 373c formed in the front base member 373 of the rear base member 375. The movable member holding portion 375b is provided. The pair of movable member holding portions 375b are disposed at a predetermined interval (gap 375c), and can abut against the lower surface of the movable member 37b to guide and support the movable member 37b. It is provided to extend along the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 172, on the front side of the rear base member 375, a movable member unit 374 including a movable member 37b and an operation mechanism (drive mechanism) for operating the movable member 37b is attached. The movable member unit 374 includes a movable member 37b which can slide in the front-rear direction, a common voltage solenoid 37c for operating the movable member 37b, and a slider 374a which transmits the driving force from the common voltage solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. And a crank 374b.

The movable member unit 374 has a closed state in which the movable member 37b is protruded forward as shown in FIG. 173 (a) and an open state in which the movable member 37b is retracted backward as shown in FIG. 173 (b). It is convertible. The movable member 37b can appear above the potting hole 37d through the movable member holding portion 375b formed on the rear base member 375 and the movable member insertion portion 373c formed on the front base member 373. There is.

FIG. 175 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable member unit 374 and FIG. 175 (b) is a front view of the movable member 37b. FIG. 176 (a) is a top view of the movable member 37b, and FIG. 176 (b) is a bottom view of the movable member 37b. As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the movable member 37b is located at a position lower than the first middle step 37b1 and the first middle step 37b2 provided at a lower position than the upper step 37b1. The provided second middle step portion 37b3 and the lower step portion 37b4 provided at a lower position than the second middle step portion 37b3 form a step shape in which the second middle step portion 37b3 and the lower step portion 37b4 are arranged in the left-right direction. The upper stage 37b1, the first middle stage 37b2, the second middle stage 37b3, and the lower stage 37b4 are arranged in this order so that the upper stage 37b1 is disposed on the far left and the lower stage 37b4 is disposed on the right. The ball is allowed to flow from left to right.

In the upper stage portion 37b1, a front end portion extending upward of the common winning hole 37d when the movable member 37b is in a closed state is a downstream passage forming portion forming a bottom surface of the downstream passage 37f. The downstream passage forming portion of the upper stage portion 37b1 is one step lower than the portion other than the downstream passage forming portion of the upper stage portion 37b1. Further, a lower wall projection 37b5 extends forward from the right end of the upper portion 37b1 except for the flow-down path forming portion. The lower wall projecting portion 37b5 has a left side surface as an inclined surface, and is provided so as to gradually narrow the width (length in the front-rear direction) of the downflow path forming portion. The lower wall projecting portion 37b5 has a function of guiding the gaming ball flowing downward to the right in order to meander the gaming ball flowing down the flowing down path 37f to suppress the pitch. That is, the game ball flowing down the flowing path 37f forms a contact portion which can be contacted.

The first middle step portion 37b2 has a front end portion extending upward of the common winning hole 37d when the movable member 37b is in a closed state, as a flow downstream path forming portion forming the bottom surface of the flow downstream path 37f. A portion other than the portion (that is, a portion other than the down flow path forming portion) is a detour forming portion that forms the bottom of the detour 37 g. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the boundary portion between the inflow passage forming portion and the detour forming portion in the first middle step portion 37b2 is disposed immediately below the inlet 37g1 of the detour 37g.

The first middle step portion 37b2 is inclined such that the rear end is located lower than the front end. Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the gaming ball is likely to roll from the front side to the rear side of the upstream portion of the bypass 37g. Further, on the upper surface of the first middle step portion 37b2, a meandering left protruding portion 37b6 which protrudes upward and extends in the front and rear direction is formed. As a result, the gaming ball rolling on the bypass path 37g can be made to meander to suppress the ball game.

The second middle portion 37b3 is a projecting portion 371b whose front end extending upward of the common winning hole 37d guides the gaming ball flowing down the flowing passage 37f to the bypass 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. Are placed directly under the

The lower end portion 37b4 has a front end portion extending upward of the common channel winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in a closed state, the bottom surface of the flow downstream path 37f (specifically, the bottom surface of the end point of the flow downstream path 37f) A flow passage forming portion is formed, and a portion other than the front end portion (that is, a portion other than the flow passage forming portion) is a detour forming portion that forms the bottom surface of the detour 37g. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the boundary portion between the inflow passage forming portion and the detour forming portion in the lower portion 37b4 is disposed immediately below the outlet 37g2 of the detour 37g.

The lower portion 37b4 is inclined so that the rear end is positioned above the front end, and the rear end is flush with the rear end of the first middle step 37b2. Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the gaming ball can easily roll from the rear side to the front side of the downstream portion of the bypass 37g. The rear end portion of the lower portion 37b4 may be provided at a position lower than the rear end portion of the first middle step portion 37b2. Further, on the upper surface of the lower portion 37b4, a meandering right protrusion 37b7 which protrudes upward and extends in the front and rear direction is formed. As a result, the gaming ball rolling on the bypass path 37g can be made to meander to suppress the ball game.

As described above, the movable member 37 b is provided with raised portions such as the lower wall protruding portion 37 b 5, the left protrusion 37 b 6, and the right protrusion 37 b 7. In addition, the left protrusion 37b6 and the right protrusion 37b7 are formed so that the game balls rolling on the movable member 37b do not get in the way when the direction of the bypass 37g changes. Further, the front decoration member 371 is provided with an uprising portion such as an upstream side front wall projection 371d, and the front base member 373 is provided with an upset such as a back wall projection 373d. . By such an origination portion, the time for which the gaming balls stay on the movable member 37b is made long.

Further, as shown in FIG. 174 (b), sliding portions 37b8 extending downward are formed at the left end portion and the right end portion of the movable member 37b. The sliding portion 37b8 is formed to extend along the front-rear direction, and the movable member 37b is held on the holding portion 373h by contacting the upper surfaces of the pair of holding portions 373h formed on the front base member 373. It becomes possible to slide.

As shown in FIG. 175 (b) and FIG. 176 (b), a connection pin 37b9 which protrudes downward is provided at the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b. Further, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), in the crank (drive arm) 374b for transmitting the driving force from the common voltage solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b, a through portion 374b1 through which the connection pin 37b9 can be inserted is formed. The movable member 37b and the crank 374b are connected by inserting the tip (lower end) of the connection pin 37b9 into the through portion 374b1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 175 (b) and 176 (b), the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b projects downward and extends along the front-rear direction on the front and rear sides of the connection pin 37b9. Guiding ribs 37b10 are provided. The guide rib 37b10 has a gap 373i (see FIG. 174B) formed along the front-rear direction between a pair of holding portions 373h of the front base member 373 (see FIG. 174B), and a pair of movable members of the rear base member 375. It can be inserted into a gap 375c (see FIG. 172) formed along the front-rear direction between the holding portions 375b. By inserting the guide rib 37b10 of the movable member 37b from above into these gaps 373i and 375c, it is possible to guide the linear movement (slide movement) of the movable member 37b in the front-rear direction. That is, when the guide rib 37b10 of the movable member 37b fits into the gap 373i of the front base member 373 or the gap 375c of the rear base member 375, the movement of the movable member 37b in the lateral direction is restricted. Can be limited to movement in the back and forth direction.

As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the crank 374b for transmitting the driving force from the common voltage solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is a substantially L-shaped member, and the connecting pin 37b9 of the movable member 37b is provided at one end. A penetrating portion 374b1 which can be inserted is formed, and a convex portion 374b2 is formed at the other end. The slider 374a for transmitting the driving force from the common voltage solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is formed with a recess 374a1 through which the protrusion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted, and the protrusion 374b2 is inserted into the recess 374a1. The slider 374a and the crank 374b are connected. Further, a pivot shaft 374b3 extending in the vertical direction is formed at the bent portion of the crank 374b, and the crank 374b is pivotable about the pivot shaft 374b3. The pivot shaft 374b3 is held by the rear base member 375 from above and below so as to be pivotable.

As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the slider 374a is a flat plate-like main body portion 374a2 perpendicular to the vertical direction, a left wall portion 374a3 connected to the left end of the main body portion 374a2 and orthogonal to the main body portion 374a2, A front wall portion 374a4 connected to the front end of the 374a2 and orthogonal to the main body portion 374a2, and a projecting piece 374a5 projecting forward from the front wall portion 374a4 are configured. The concave portion 374a1 through which the convex portion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted is formed in the main body portion 374a2.

The left wall portion 374a3 of the slider 374a is engaged with the drive shaft 37c1 of the common solenoid 37c, and in the slider 374a, the drive shaft 37c1 extends (in the case of this embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the right) Then, when the drive shaft 37c1 is pushed to move to the right and the drive shaft 37c1 retracts (in the case of the present embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the left), it is pulled by the drive shaft 37c1 and moves to the left Do.

As shown in FIG. 174 (b), a recess 373 j extending in the left-right direction is provided on the rear surface side of the front base member 373. The protrusion 374a5 of the slider 374a can be inserted into the recess 373j, and the protrusion 374a5 is inserted into the recess 373j from the rear to guide the linear movement (slide movement) of the slider 374a in the left-right direction. be able to. The front wall portion 374a4 of the slider 374a abuts on the rear surface of the front base member 373 when the projecting piece 374a5 of the slider 374a is inserted from the rear into the recessed portion 373j of the front base member 373. As a result, the front-rear position of the slider 374a with respect to the front base member 373 is set to a predetermined front-rear position.

When converting the movable member 37b from the open state to the closed state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the common voltage solenoid 37c is extended. When the drive shaft 37c1 extends, the slider 374a slides to the right, and the crank 374b pivots counterclockwise around the pivot shaft 374b3 as viewed from the top side, so that the connection pin 983a is directed forward And the movable member 37b protrudes forward. As a result, the movable member 37b is in the closed state (the state shown in FIG. 173 (a)), and the game ball can not win the prize pot 37d.

On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is converted from the closed state to the open state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the common voltage solenoid 37c is retracted. When the drive shaft 37c1 retracts, the slider 374a slides to the left, and the crank 374b pivots clockwise about the pivot shaft 374b3 as viewed from the top, so that the connection pin 37b9 is directed rearward. The movable member 37b moves backward and retracts. As a result, the movable member 37b is in the open state (the state shown in FIG. 173 (b)), and it is possible to win a game ball on the common winning hole 37d.

FIGS. 177 to 180 show the rolling modes of the gaming balls in the normal fluctuation winning device 37. FIG. In FIG. 177 to FIG. 180, illustration of some members is omitted for the sake of explanation. The gaming ball (the gaming ball having flowed into the starting point of the flow-down path 37f) arriving at the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is first guided diagonally backward by the upstream front wall projection 371d located on the upstream side, and then the upstream Of the movable member 37b and is introduced into the front end portion of the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b.

The gaming balls having flowed into the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b are guided obliquely backward by the upstream front wall projection 371d located downstream, and then the rear wall projection 373d and the movable member 37b located downstream It is guided obliquely forward by the lower wall projection 37b5 and flows into the front end portion of the first middle step 37b2 of the movable member 37b. That is, the gaming ball flows down the flowing path 37f while meandering back and forth. As a result, the game ball stagnates on the movable member 37b more than in the case where the flowing-down path 37f does not have rising portions such as the lower wall protruding portion 37b5, the upstream front wall protruding portion 371d, and the rear wall protruding portion 373d The time will be longer.

The gaming ball having flowed into the first middle portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b collides with the projection 371b and is guided to the rear side by the projection 371b and the first middle portion 37b2 inclined downward to the rear, as shown in FIG. As shown to (a), it flows in into the said bypass route 37g from the entrance 37g1 of the bypass route 37g. As shown in FIG. 178, inside the rear base member 375, a first guide piece 375d for guiding the gaming ball rolling on the detour 37g from the first middle portion 37b2 to the lower portion 37b4, and a lower portion 37b4. A second guide piece 375e is provided to guide the upper side from the rear side to the front side. When the game ball rolls on the first middle portion 37b2 as shown in FIG. 178 and flows into the interior of the rear base member 375, it is guided to the right by the first guide piece 375d as shown in FIG. It flows into the part 37b4.

The gaming balls having flowed into the lower portion 37b4 of the movable member 37b are guided forward by the second guide piece 375e and the lower portion 37b4 inclined downward as shown in FIG. 180, as shown in FIG. 177 (b). Thus, it flows from the outlet 37g2 of the bypass 37g to the end point (the front end portion of the lower portion 37b4) of the downflow 37f. Here, since the left middle ridge portion 37b6 is formed in the first middle portion 37b2, the gaming ball rolls on the upstream side of the bypass 37g to the rear while meandering left and right. Further, since the lower portion 37b4 is formed with a meandering right protrusion 37b7, the gaming ball rolls on the downstream side of the bypass 37g to the front while meandering left and right.

Further, as shown in FIG. 174 (b), the front base member 373 is provided with a partition 373k for separating the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the detour 37g. Of the rear end portion of this partition 373k, the upstream of the detour 37g is provided. An intermediate protrusion 373k1 is formed in a portion corresponding to the portion. Therefore, while rolling on the upstream portion (that is, on the first middle portion 37b2) of the detour 37g, the gaming ball collides and bounces against the intermediate projection 373k1 and is pushed back toward the entrance 37g1. Be As a result, the game ball stays on the movable member 37b more than in the case where there is no raised portion such as the left protrusion 37b6, the right protrusion 37b7, or the middle protrusion 373k1 in the bypass 37g and the roller rolls linearly. become longer.

Thus, the downflow passage 37f is provided with raised portions such as the lower wall projection 37b5, the upstream front wall projection 371d, the rear wall projection 373d and the like, and the detour 37g is provided with the left projection 37b6 and the like. Since the projecting portions such as the right projecting portion 37b7 and the middle projecting portion 373k1 are provided, the time during which the game balls stay on the movable member 37b becomes long. Moreover, by providing these starting parts, the rolling aspect of the game ball rolling on the movable member 37b becomes colorful, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, by providing these starting parts, the inflow timing of the plurality of gaming balls existing on the movable member 37b into the common pot winning opening 37d can be shifted when the movable member 37b is opened, Ball clogging can be prevented from occurring in the winning opening 37d.

The game ball having arrived at the normal fluctuation winning device 37 flows down the flowing path 37f and first flows into the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b. When the game ball flows into the upper stage portion 37b1, if the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball does not pass the detour 37g but flows into the common charge winning opening 37d. On the other hand, when the game ball flows into the upper stage portion 37b1, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball flows down the flowing path 37f and goes to the projecting portion 371b. Then, when the movable member 37b is in the open state before the game ball collides with the projecting portion 371b, the game ball flows into the regular charge winning opening 37d without passing through the bypass path 37g. On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is not in the open state before the game ball collides with the projection 371b, the game ball collides with the projection 371b and travels to the bypass path 37g.

Even if the movable member 37b is in the open state while the gaming ball is rolling on the bypass path 37g, if the movable member 37b is in the open state while the gaming ball is rolling on the bypass path 37g If not, the gaming ball continues to roll on the bypass path 37g toward the outlet 37g2. Then, when the game ball comes out from the outlet 37g2 of the bypass 37g and the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball flows into the common power winning opening 37d. On the other hand, when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the bypass 37g, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball does not flow into the common power winning opening 37d, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 The game ball is advanced to the outside (the game area 32), and fails to win the normal variation winning device 37.

Here, the intermediate projection 373k1 (see FIG. 174 (b)) formed on the partition 373k of the front base member 373 has a function of making the gaming ball meander and prolonging the residence time of the gaming ball on the movable member 37b. Not only that, it also has a function to secure a sufficient staying time even when the movable member 37b is operated (moves back and forth) while the gaming ball is rolling on the bypass path 37g. For example, in the case where the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while the gaming ball is rolling on the downstream portion (that is, on the lower portion 37b4) of the bypass 37g, the gaming ball is the movable member 37b. The game ball rolls on the downstream portion of the bypass path 37g because it is pulled back to the rear side (upstream side) in the downstream portion of the bypass path 37g by frictional resistance, contact with the right ridge 37b 7 or the like. The staying time in which the game balls stay on the movable member 37b is longer than in the case where the movable member 37b does not change the state in the middle.

On the other hand, for example, when the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while the gaming ball is rolling on the upstream portion (that is, on the first middle portion 37b2) of the bypass 37g, the gaming ball is movable The game ball rolls over the upstream portion of the bypass path 37g because it is drawn to the rear side (downstream side) in the upstream portion of the bypass path 37g due to frictional resistance with the member 37b, contact with the left protrusion 37b6, etc. The residence time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is shorter than in the case where the movable member 37b does not change the state during movement. On the other hand, since the normal fluctuation winning device 37 of the present embodiment is provided with the intermediate projection 373k1 at the upstream portion of the detour 37g, the gaming ball is moved to the rear side (downstream) in the upstream portion of the detour 37g When drawn in, it collides with the intermediate projection 373k1 and bounces. That is, the gaming ball collides with the intermediate projection 373k1 while being drawn downstream, and is pushed back to the front side (upstream side) in the upstream portion of the bypass 37g, so the gaming ball is upstream of the bypass 37g Even in the case where the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while rolling the unit, a sufficient residence time of the game ball on the movable member 37b can be secured.

From the above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming board main body 80 in which the gaming area 32 where the gaming ball can flow down is formed on the front side, and the fluctuation winning device provided in the gaming area 32 (this embodiment In the case of the game machine, the game machine is provided with the normal fluctuation winning device 37), and the fluctuation winning device is provided with a mounting wall (rear surface portion 373b) for attaching the fluctuation winning device to the game board main body 80; An open / close member (movable) that can be converted into a winning area (in the case of the present embodiment, the common winning hole 37d) in which gaming balls flowing down 32 can win, a closed state closing the winning area, and an open state opening the winning area Member 37b), a channel (flowing channel 37f) on which the gaming ball can roll, a retention area (detour 37g) for retaining the gaming ball, and a gaming ball rolling (flowing down) the channel A guiding portion (protruding portion 371b) for guiding to the area; Eteiru. The flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall by the open / close member in the closed state, and when the open / close member is in the open state, the flow path is formed when the open / close member is in the closed state The game ball is configured to win the winning area through the space, and the staying area is formed on the rear surface side of the mounting wall regardless of the state of the opening / closing member and has a plurality of communication ports communicating with the flow path A gaming ball introduced from the flow path through the communication port (inlet 37g1) of the plurality of communication ports, which is guided by the induction portion, and the one communication port of the plurality of communication ports; Are configured to be able to flow out to the flow path via different communication ports (outlet 37g2).

Specifically, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a gaming board main body 80 in which a gaming area 32 in which gaming balls can flow down is formed on the front side, and a fluctuation winning device provided in the gaming area 32 (this embodiment In the case of the game machine, the game machine is provided with the normal fluctuation winning device 37), and the fluctuation winning device is provided with a mounting wall (rear surface portion 373b) for attaching the fluctuation winning device to the game board main body 80; The game ball can slide in the winning area (Puden winning hole 37d) where the game ball flowing down 32 can win, and by sliding movement back and forth, the game ball can not win in the winning area or the closed state where it is difficult to win, the game ball in the winning area A slide member (movable member 37b) that can be converted into an open state in which the player can win a prize, a first flow passage (flowing passage 37f) and a second flow passage (detour 37g), on which the game ball can roll; The game ball rolling (flowing down) the flow path to the second flow path Induction unit for guiding a (protruding portion 371b), and a. The first flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall by the slide member when the slide member is in the closed state, and the slide member is in the closed state when the slide member is in the open state. In some cases, the game ball is configured to win a prize area through the space in which the first flow path is formed, and the second flow path is attached to the mounting wall by the slide member regardless of the state of the slide member. A communication port formed on the rear side, both ends being in communication with the first flow path, being guided by the induction portion and flowing from the first flow path through one of the two communication ports (inlet 37g1) of the both ends The gaming ball is configured to be able to flow out to the first flow path via the other communication port (outlet 37g2) of the both ends.

That is, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 of this embodiment has a configuration in which a bypass 37g (retention area, second channel) is added to the downflow channel 37g (channel, first channel). By adding the detour 37g in this manner, the residence time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the movable member 37b (opening and closing member, slide member) becomes longer than when the detour 37g is not provided. Therefore, it becomes easy for the game ball to be won in the winning opening (in the case of the present embodiment, the common gate winning opening 37d), and the reduction of the game ball during a predetermined gaming state (in the case of this embodiment, time saving state) Can enhance the interest of the game. In addition, since the normal variation winning device 37 having the gaming ball retention function is disposed in the right gaming area (the area to the right of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32), the player can A rolling aspect can be enjoyed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the front decoration member 371 is made of a material capable of transmitting light, and the rolling mode of the gaming ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is also sufficiently visible. The rolling aspect of the gaming ball can be enjoyed more.

The fluctuation winning device provided in the game area 32 is not limited to the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the special fluctuation winning device 38 may be used. Specifically, the fluctuation winning device is, for example, the detour 37g (the stagnation area, the second flow passage) in the downstream passage 38f (flow passage, first flow passage) of the special variation winning device 38 of the first embodiment or the present embodiment. A channel may be added. Further, the opening and closing member capable of being converted to the closed state for closing the winning opening and the open state for opening the winning opening is not limited to the slide member, and can be appropriately changed. In the case of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 181A (a), the sliding member (movable member 37b) for opening and closing the winning opening is provided as the opening and closing member by sliding movement back and forth. For example, as shown in FIG. 181A (b), it may be a pivoting member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes the winning opening by pivoting about pivoting axis Z.

In addition, the retention area for retaining the gaming balls is not limited to the bypass path 37g (second flow path), and can be appropriately changed. Specifically, the stagnant region is, for example, a space in which the upstream portion and the downstream portion are not divided, that is, a space obtained by removing the partition 373k separating the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the A space may be obtained by removing a portion other than the front end portion (portion separating the inlet 37g1 and the outlet 37g2) of the partition wall 373k from the bypass path 37g.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the game balls flowing from the first flow path (flow-down path 37f) to the second flow path (detour path 37g) via the one communication port (inlet 37g1) is the other communication The rate at which the game balls flow from the first flow path (flow-down path 37f) to the second flow path (detour 37g) through the mouth (outlet 37g2) is higher than the rate at which the game ball flows into the slide member (movable member 37b) It is possible to constitute so that a height difference (in the case of this embodiment, a level difference or a slope) may be provided such that the mouth is disposed at a position higher than the other communication port. By configuring in this manner, the gaming ball can smoothly roll on the first flow path (flow-down path 37f) and the second flow path (detour path 37g), so the first flow path or second flow path Can prevent the occurrence of ball clogging.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress the pitch of the gaming ball rolling on the first flow passage (flowing passage 37f) or the second flow passage (detour 37g) on the upper surface of the slide member (movable member 37b). It is possible to constitute so as to provide the ball control portion (in the case of the present embodiment, the lower wall projecting portion 37b5, the left protrusion 37b6, and the right protrusion 37b7). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to further prolong the staying time in which the game balls stay on the upper surface of the slide member (movable member 37b), so a predetermined gaming state (in the case of this embodiment, a time saving state ) It is possible to suppress the decrease of the game ball in, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, as the ball control portion, the downflow passage 37f is provided with raised portions (convex portions) such as the lower wall protruding portion 37b5, the upstream front wall protruding portion 371d, the rear wall protruding portion 373d, and the detour 37g. In the first embodiment, raised portions (convex portions) such as the left protruding portion 37b6, the right protruding portion 37b7, and the middle protruding portion 373k1 are provided. However, the ball control portion is not limited to these and can be appropriately changed. In addition, as a weight control portion, a falling portion (concave portion) may be provided in the flow-down path 37f or the detour path 37g. Specifically, for example, a groove may be formed on the upper surface of the movable member 37b as a meandering portion, and the gaming ball may roll along the groove while meandering. In addition, as the weight control portion, an undulation (both a raised portion and a depressed portion) may be provided in the flow-down path 37f and the detour 37g, and the gaming ball may roll while meandering or the like by the unevenness. Further, the weight control portion is not limited to the raised portion (convex portion) and the depressed portion (concave portion), and can be appropriately changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the retention device (normal variation winning device 37) equipped with the gaming ball retention function in the game area 32, a member for suppressing the ball (obstacle nail, wind turbine, flow passage 615, guiding portion 616 Etc.), that is, a retaining member having a gaming ball retaining function is disposed. Therefore, since the game balls can be kept in the right play area by the stay device and the stay member, it is possible to further enjoy the rolling aspect of the game balls in the right play area. In addition, the method of making the game ball stay by providing unevenness on the surface, the method of making the game ball stay by using the material with a high coefficient of friction, and the game by performing constant operation with the driving force of the drive source (solenoid etc.) A predetermined member or device may be provided with a game ball retention function by a method of keeping a ball, a method of making a game ball stay by providing a sorting device, or the like. Further, since the normal fluctuation winning device 37 can hold the gaming balls in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10 by the starting part and the detour 37g, the holding member (may be a stagnating device other than the normal fluctuation winning device 37) Preferably, the game ball can be retained in a direction other than the front-rear direction (the left-right direction or the up-down direction of the gaming machine 10). As a result, since the gaming machine can be made to stay three-dimensionally by the staying member (and / or the staying device other than the normal fluctuation winning device 37) and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, it is necessary to earn residence time. And the interest to the rolling of the game ball is improved.

Also, the out-port 30c, the general winning port 35, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "out-port 30c, etc.") may be provided in the middle of the bypass 37g. As a result, the player's attention can be drawn also to whether or not the game ball that failed to win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 comes out from the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the interest is improved, and It becomes possible to adjust so that a rate does not become large too much, and to prevent generation | occurrence | production of ball clogging in the detour 37g. When the out port 30c or the like is provided in the middle of the bypass path 37g, the gaming ball may flow into the out port 30c or the like when the movable member 37b operates. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 181B, a through hole 37b11 is provided in the portion of the movable member 37b that forms the bypass 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. When the movable member 37b is in the open state (or in the closed state), the vertical positions of the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c coincide with each other (the through hole 37b11 is positioned directly above the out port 30c). ), The gaming ball on the movable member 37b is allowed to flow into the out port 30c, and when the movable member 37b is in the closed state (may be in the open state), the upper and lower sides of the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c The positions of the directions do not match (the through hole 37b11 deviates from immediately above the out port 30c), and it is possible to configure so that the gaming ball on the movable member 37b can not flow into the out port 30c or becomes inflow difficult. is there.

[Game State Transition Diagram (Game Flow)] Next, transition (transition) of a game state under game control of the game control apparatus 100 will be described. FIG. 182 is a diagram showing a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of the game state in the present embodiment. FIG. 182 shows a summary of each gaming state, and shows control by the game control device 100 in each gaming state, control by the effect control device 300, and characteristics in the gaming state. In the present embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal gaming state, a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state.

First, each gaming state will be described. In the normal gaming state, the gaming control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special drawing) to be a low probability so that the normal charge support (power support) is absent. In addition, in the normal gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the normal mode. In the normal gaming state, it is recommended to hit the left as the firing direction. Therefore, since the main start area is the first start winning opening 36, the main variation special view is a special view 1 variation display game.

In the first specific gaming state, the gaming control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special drawing) to be a high probability and the common power support is present (the number of times of support is 50). That is, in the first specific gaming state, it can be said that the conversion control by the common voltage solenoid 37c (conversion control means) is controlled to be executed more than the normal gaming state, and the probability state is set to the high probability state .

In addition, in the first specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the probability change mode. Also, in the first specific gaming state, it is recommended that the game ball be fired to the right. The main starting area is the winning opening of the normal change winning device 37 (Puden winning opening 37 d), since the right turn makes it easy to win the common view starting gate 34. In the present embodiment, since the special view 1 variation display game is executed by the winning of the common electric winning combination port 37d, the main variation special view becomes a special view 1 variation display game.

In the second specific gaming state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special view) to be a high probability so that the common charge support is not present. That is, when the first specific gaming state is shifted to the second specific gaming state, the conversion control by the common power solenoid 37c (conversion control means) is returned to the same control as the normal gaming state, and the probability of the special view It can be said that the state is set to the high probability state.

In addition, in the second specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to small hit RUSH. In the case of this embodiment, since the variation time of the special view 2 variation display game is set to a short time in the second specific gaming state, the small hit RUSH is a state in which a small hit is likely to occur continuously in a short time It can be said. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the second specific gaming state is executed, it is possible to derive a small hit (first special result) as a result of the special view 2 variable display game. Further, in the second specific gaming state, it is recommended to hit the game ball in the right direction. Therefore, the main start area is the second start winning opening 97, and the main variation special view is a special view 2 variation display game.

In the third specific gaming state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to be a low probability and the common power support is present (the number of times of support is 50). In addition, in the third specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the time saving mode. Further, in the third specific gaming state, it is recommended to hit the game ball in the right direction. The main starting area is the winning opening of the normal change winning device 37 (Puden winning opening 37 d), since the right turn makes it easy to win the common view starting gate 34. In the present embodiment, since the special view 1 variation display game is executed by the winning of the common electric winning combination port 37d, the main variation special view becomes a special view 1 variation display game.

Next, the transition (transition) from each gaming state will be described. Suppose that a big hit occurs in the normal gaming state. When the big hit is a probability change big hit, after the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state. If the big hit is a big hit in the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the third specific gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends.

If a big hit occurs in the first specific gaming state and the big hit is usually a big hit, after the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state transitions from the first specific gaming state to the third specific gaming state . In addition, when the big hit is a definite variation big hit in the first specific gaming state, after the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state shifts to the first specific gaming state again. On the other hand, in the first specific gaming state, when the jackpot does not occur and the general charge support is ended, the gaming state shifts from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state (“high support rule in FIG. 182 "The number of times is over." "High support" means that the hit probability is high and there is power support).

That is, in the first specific gaming state, as a transition condition to the other gaming state, when the occurrence of the big hit gaming state (the second special gaming state) as a condition (first transition condition), and a predetermined number There is a case where support (execution of the variable display game) is made a condition (second transition condition). By this configuration, for example, the first specific gaming state can be generated after the occurrence of the big hit gaming state (second special gaming state) in the normal gaming state, but in this first specific gaming state, When the above-described second transition condition is established, the second specific gaming state can be generated.

If a big hit occurs in the second specific gaming state, and the big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state transitions from the second specific gaming state to the first specific gaming state . When the big hit is a big hit normally in the second specific gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the second specific gaming state to the third specific gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends. That is, in the second specific gaming state, the occurrence of the big hit gaming state (second special gaming state) is a condition as a transition condition to another gaming state.

If a big hit occurs in the third specific gaming state, and the big hit is a certainty big hit, after the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state shifts from the third specific gaming state to the first specific gaming state . When the big hit is a big hit normally in the third specific gaming state, after the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state shifts again to the third specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the third specific gaming state, when the jackpot does not occur and the general charge support ends, the gaming state shifts from the third specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (the “low support period” in FIG. 182 “Low support” means that the hit probability is low and there is a power support).

Since the gaming state shifts in this way, it is possible to shift the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state after the probability variation big hit occurs in the normal gaming state. In the first specific gaming state, since the power conversion support is executed and the hit probability is also set to a high probability, a big hit can be easily generated. And, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, even if a big hit does not occur in the first specific gaming state, in the present embodiment, the gaming state shifts from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state. In the second specific gaming state, although the general power support is not executed, the special view 2 variation display game can be executed by winning in the second start winning opening 97. Here, the small hitting probability in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set to a high probability unlike the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (see FIG. 184). Therefore, in the second specific gaming state, until the next big hit gaming state (second special gaming state) occurs, the "small hitting RUSH" mode that generates small hitting gaming state (first special gaming state) with high frequency Can be performed. And, since it is possible to increase the payout in the gaming state other than the big hit gaming state, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 having novel game characteristics.

Moreover, in the second specific gaming state, there is no common power support as in the normal gaming state, but in the second specific gaming state, the fluctuation time of the special view 2 fluctuation display game is shorter than that in the normal gaming state. It is set to. Therefore, in the second specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation display game with many small hit gaming states (first special gaming state) allocated with good tempo.

Here, in the present embodiment, the average value of the fluctuation time (execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game) in the fluctuation pattern table of each gaming state is the second specific gaming state <the first specific gaming state and the third The specific gaming state is less than the normal gaming state, and the types of variation patterns selectable in the second specific gaming state are smaller than the types of selectable variation patterns in the normal gaming state. That is, as the number of types of selectable fluctuation patterns is smaller, the average value of fluctuation times is smaller. If there are many types of variation patterns that can be selected in the second specific gaming state (that is, the average value of variation time is large), small hits can not be generated with good tempo, and the payout rate is 100% or more However, as in the present embodiment, small hits (that is, the average value of the variation time) can be selected in the second specific gaming state, as in the present embodiment, to achieve a small tempo with a good tempo. It is possible to generate the same as the design value and to realize the payout rate as designed.

In the second specific gaming state, since the jackpot probability is set to a high probability, the jackpot gaming state (second special gaming state) occurs at an appropriate timing and transition conditions to other gaming states are established. Do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an extreme increase in payout due to the second specific gaming state continuing excessively.

Since the normal fluctuation winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a gaming ball retention function for retaining the gaming ball on the upper surface of the movable member 37b, the gaming ball is held on the movable member 37b while the movable member 37b is in the closed state. When the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball can be swallowed (the game ball staying on the movable member 37b can be dropped to make a prize in the common pot winning opening 37d). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of gaming balls that fail to win the normal fluctuation winning device 37, that is, the gaming balls that can not win the regular game winning opening 37d despite having arrived at the normal fluctuation winning device 37. In addition, since the second start winning opening 97 is disposed below the normal change winning device 37, the game ball that failed to win the normal changing winning device 37 can win the second start winning opening 97. . In the case of the present embodiment, the gaming ball retaining function of the normal variation winning device 37 reduces the number of gaming balls that fail to achieve the normal variation winning device 37, so that the gaming state (the first starting area is In the first specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state), it is difficult to win the second start winning opening 97.

The main start area of the high / low probability support existence state (first specific gaming state, third specific gaming state) is the common power winning opening 37d, and the main of the high probability support absence state (second specific gaming state) Since the start area is the second start winning opening 97, it is impossible (difficult) to win the second start winning opening 97 when in the high / low probability support state, and the second start only when the high probability support is not present. It is preferable that a winning on the winning opening 97 is possible. If the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 97 and a small hit occurs in the right-handed support existence state (first specific gaming state, third specific gaming state), the payout rate is large from the design value There is a risk of divergence.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second start winning opening 97 is disposed at the lower right of the game area 32, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is disposed above the second start winning opening 97. And, since the normal fluctuation winning device 37 has the gaming ball retention function, it is possible to reduce the number of gaming balls that fail to win the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Furthermore, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to the start of the operation, the residence time of the gaming ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the gaming ball rolls from the start point to the end point of the flow down passage 37f To make the failure of winning to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the hit state of the common drawing almost zero, that is, to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the hit state of the common drawing. It is also possible to make the winning rate almost 100%. By setting the winning rate to the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 in the hit state of the drawing to almost 100%, it is difficult to win the second starting winning opening 97 disposed below the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 Therefore, it is possible to realize the target performance (outfall rate).

The winning rate for the normal fluctuation winning device 37 can be calculated using the following equation (1). Winning rate [%] = number of gaming balls that have won a prize in the common electric winning opening 37d / number of gaming balls that have arrived at the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of gaming balls that have flowed into the starting point of the flow-down path 37f) × 100 ... (1 On the other hand, when the high probability support no state (second specific gaming state), since the normal fluctuation winning device 37 does not open, it is possible to win the gaming ball to the second start winning opening 97, small hit RUSH It can be realized. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second start winning opening 97 can be made to win only when the high probability support absence state (the second specific gaming state), and the performance as aimed can be realized. .

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 183 (a), the time of spread fluctuation (that is, spread fluctuation time) is 200 ms, and the time of stop of spread (that is, display time of spread) is 100 ms. Yes, the time for normal operation (that is, the sum of the general open time and the total wait time per one hit per normal state figure) is 5800 ms, and the ending time (ie, normal remaining ball) If the sum of the processing time and the general drawing ending time) is 700 ms, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is at least 1000 ms (= 700 ms + 200 ms + 100 ms). In this case, the residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is appropriately designed to be 1000 ms, by appropriately designing the length of the flow-down path 37f and the detour 37g, the number and shape of the bumps provided in the flow-down path 37f and the detour 37g. By approaching it, it is possible to make the winning rate to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the hit state of the common figure almost 100%.

Of course, as in the example shown here, depending on the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation, the winning ratio to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the hit state of the drawing is almost 100% The residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may be set, or conversely, according to the residence time of the gaming ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 in the hit state of the common drawing. The time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation may be set so that the winning rate for the game is almost 100%.

That is, in the present embodiment, one of the residence time of the gaming ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation corresponds to the other (a time substantially the same as the other By setting the time to the other time or the like, it is possible to increase the winning percentage of the game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37. In addition, by increasing the residence time of the gaming ball in the normal variation winning device 37 by increasing the part that suppresses the influence such as the rising part and the falling part, during the interval of the common charge (operation from the operation end of the movable member 37b Until the start), it is possible to hold more gaming balls on the movable member 37b, and when the movable member 37b is in the open state, to win the gaming balls held on the movable member 37b Therefore, the winning percentage of the game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 has a game ball retention function, and the second start winning opening 97 and the special fluctuation winning device 38 are disposed below the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Therefore, the time from the shooting of the game ball to the arrival at the second start winning opening 97 or the special variation winning device 38 is made longer than in the case where the normal variation winning device 37 does not have the game ball retaining function. Can. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the non-recommended strike method and to increase the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the big winning opening (opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing member 990).

In the normal gaming state, it is recommended to hit the left, but in the normal gaming state, when the right is hit and the gaming ball wins the second start winning opening 97, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed. In the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time of the special view 2 fluctuation display game is set to a long time than in the second specific gaming state, so by performing aim hitting (stopping, timing hit, etc.) It becomes possible to win a game ball. That is, when the normal variation winning device 37 disposed above the special variation winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed during the normal gaming state. In the special variation winning device 38 by the end of the small hitting gaming state by aiming to start hitting the gaming ball with the start of the small hitting gaming state (open opening of the big winning opening) It becomes possible to win a prize in the big prize mouth. Therefore, there is a risk that a non-recommended strike (right strike) may be made in order to execute the special view 2 variable display game during the normal gaming state.

On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, the game ball arrives at the special fluctuation winning device 38 because the normal fluctuation winning device 37 disposed above the special fluctuation winning device 38 has the gaming ball retention function. It takes time to do it. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed during the normal gaming state, the game ball may be launched even if the aim is to start hitting the game ball with the start of the small hit gaming state (the opening of the big winning opening). Can not arrive at the special variation winning device 38 by the end of the small hit gaming state. Therefore, since it is useless to execute the special view 2 change display game during the normal gaming state, it is useless to play the special view 2 change display game during the normal game state, that is, not recommended for the normal play state Can be avoided. As described above, according to the present embodiment, an illegal prize by capture, that is, a small hit is generated by right hitting in the normal gaming state, and a small hit is made by aiming to win a small winning prize ) Can be prevented.

In addition, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 disposed above the special fluctuation winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, it prevents illegal winnings due to capture (avoiding the recommendation method from being hit) ), It is necessary to set restrictions on the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state, such as performing short opening only once. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, the game ball arrives at the special fluctuation winning device 38 because the normal fluctuation winning device 37 disposed above the special fluctuation winning device 38 has the gaming ball retention function. It takes time to do it. Therefore, even if the large winning opening is opened several times during the small hitting gaming state, it is possible to prevent an unfair winning by capture, so the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hitting gaming state it can.

Here, for example, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 disposed above the special fluctuation winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, and arrives at the special fluctuation winning device 38 after the game ball is fired. It takes about 2 seconds to finish. In such a case, if the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. 183 (b), that is, a pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is performed only once, the small hit Even when aiming to start hitting the gaming ball with the start of the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state has ended by the time the gaming ball arrives at the special variation winning device 38, so the gaming ball is in the big winning opening I can not win a prize.

On the other hand, in such a case, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state is, for example, the pattern shown in FIG. 183 (c), that is, "0.5 seconds open state → 1.0 seconds closed state → 0 If it is the pattern of .5 second open state-> 1.0 second closed state-> 0.5 second open state, the small hit game state is performed by aiming to start hitting the game ball with the start of the small hit game state etc. Since the game ball can be made to arrive at the special variation winning device 38 by the end of the game ball, the game ball can win a prize winning opening. Therefore, in such a case, if an opening pattern or the like for opening the large winning opening a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state, it is impossible to prevent the unfair winning by capture. On the other hand, adopting an opening pattern or the like for opening the big winning opening multiple times as the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hitting gaming state, that is, increasing the freedom of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hitting gaming state If it is possible, the improvement of small hit performance (the increase in the number of withdrawal balls in the small hit gaming state) can be realized, but it can not be realized by the illegal winning by the capture.

A retention device for delaying the time from the game ball being fired to the arrival at the special variation winning device 38 in order to simultaneously prevent the illegal winning by the capture and improve the small hitting performance (the embodiment of the present invention In the case, it is assumed that the normal fluctuation winning device 37) and the like are provided. If a delay of 2 seconds is given by the retention device (a delay time of 2 seconds is given), it will take about 4 seconds for the game ball to be fired and to arrive at the special fluctuation winning device 38.

As a result, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hitting gaming state is, for example, the pattern shown in FIG. 183 (c), that is, "0.5 second open state → 1.0 second closed state → 0.5 second open state → In the pattern of “1.0 second closed state → 0.5 second open state”, it takes 3.5 seconds (= 0.5 seconds + 1.0 seconds + 0.5 seconds + 1.0) until the operation of the opening / closing member 990 is completed. It takes about 4 seconds to reach the special fluctuation winning device 38 after the game ball is fired, while it takes 2 seconds + 0.5 seconds). That is, in this embodiment, the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special fluctuation winning device 38 is longer than the time from the start of operation of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit gaming state to the end of the operation. According to the opening and closing pattern (opening pattern of the big winning opening) of the opening and closing member 990 in the small hitting game state, it can be configured to determine the residence time of the game ball in the normal variation winning device 37.

The time from when the game ball is fired to when it arrives at the special fluctuation winning device 38 (this time than the time from the operation start to the operation end of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit gaming state (3.5 seconds in this example) In the example, even if the aim is to start hitting the game ball with the start of the small hit gaming state by lengthening about 4 seconds), the game ball arrives at the special fluctuation winning device 38 and the small hit game The state has ended. Therefore, even if an open pattern in which the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state, it is possible to prevent an unfair winning by capture.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by providing a retention device or the like that gives a delay time to the time from the shooting of the game ball to the arrival at the special variation winning device 38, illegal prizes due to capture are prevented. , Small hit performance can be improved. Moreover, since the total time of the small hit gaming state can be extended as the delay time is longer, the small hit performance can be enhanced. Further, as the delay time is longer, it takes more time to arrive at the special variation winning device 38, so it is more difficult to achieve an illegal winning by capture. Moreover, providing such a retention device or the like is effective not only for aiming in the common power support but also for aiming in the small hit RUSH. In addition, as the delay time is longer, it is more difficult to hit the target, and it is not necessary to keep hitting, and stable data can be acquired also in the operation of the hole.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, a right hit is made to win a prize in the second start winning opening 97 and a small hit occurs, and thereafter, the gaming ball passes through the common drawing start gate 34 The game ball staying function of the normal fluctuation electric winning device 38 can reduce the number of gaming balls that fail to achieve the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so that the game ball is disposed below the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It is possible to make it difficult to win the special fluctuation winning device 38. That is, according to the present embodiment, it takes time for the game ball to arrive at the special variation winning device 38 by the gaming ball retention function of the normal variation winning device 37, so that it is possible to prevent an unfair winning by capture. Further, since the game ball retaining function of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 can reduce the number of gaming balls that fail to achieve the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (can be made harder to win the special fluctuation winning device 38) Can minimize the damage caused by

In addition, by increasing the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hitting gaming state, not only can improve the small hitting performance (increased payout in the small hitting gaming state), and open the large winning opening 38d Since it is also possible to increase the number of times, the player can enjoy whether or not the game ball flows into the big winning opening 38d, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, about 2 seconds when there is no retention device and about 4 seconds when there is a retention device were illustrated as time from the game ball being fired until it arrives at the special fluctuation winning device 38 The arrival time is just an average of the actual values, and of course there is an error in the actual arrival time.

In addition, a warning (error notification) performed when the game is played in the normal gaming state may be performed when a predetermined number of gaming balls satisfy the condition of winning in the second start winning opening 97. It may be performed when the condition that a predetermined number of game balls have passed the common drawing start gate 34 may be satisfied, or the number of the game balls winning the second start winning opening 97 and the common drawing start gate 34 have passed It may be performed when the condition that the sum with the number of gaming balls has reached a predetermined number is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as a decrease in interest and a decrease in the game intention that the user is immediately alerted although the player has made a right strike by mistake. Also, in the normal gaming state, the counter for counting the gaming balls that have won in the second start winning opening 97 and the counter for counting the gaming balls that have passed through the general drawing start gate 34 are configured to clear at a predetermined timing. Alternatively, each time the first starting winning opening 36 is won, it may be updated by -1.

Hereinafter, each process in the second embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, since the common-play game processing (step S110) is performed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 38), the common-play variation display game can be executed. Then, when the regular drawing variation display game is in the hit mode, the winning opening (generally winning winning opening 37d) of the normal variation winning device 37 is opened, and the special drawing 1 variation is made by the gaming ball winning in the common winning combination opening 37d. The display game can be started.

In particular, in the first specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state, general power support is executed (see FIG. 182). In the first specific gaming state, the special power support (power support) enables the special view 1 variable display game to be generated frequently and the hit probability is high, so it is easy to generate a big hit be able to. Further, even in the third specific gaming state, the special electric power changing game can be generated frequently by the common power support.

FIG. 184 is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, the falling probability, and the probability variation probability in the present embodiment. These tables are the big hit probability (the probability that the judgment result will be a big hit) by the big hit judgment processing and the small hit judgment processing, the small hit probability (the probability that the judgment result will be a small hit), the out probability (the judgment result is a lost probability) The probability variation probability (probability variation rush ratio) is shown for the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. FIG. 184 (a) shows the probability in the low probability state, FIG. 184 (b) shows the probability in the high probability state, and FIG. 184 (c) shows the probability variable rush rate.

Also in the present embodiment, the big hit probability (the occurrence probability of big hit) is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state. Also, the small hit probability (small hit probability) is the same between the high probability state and the low probability state. A configuration is also possible in which the small hit probability is high in the high probability state and low in the low probability state. For example, the small hit probability of the special view 1 fluctuation display game may be set to “0” in the low probability state. In addition, the loss probability (the probability of occurrence of loss) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a big hit mode (second game) in the special view 1 change display game (first special view change display game) or the special view 2 change display game (second special view change display game). The low probability state in which the probability that the special result is derived is set to the low probability, and the high probability state in which the probability higher than the low probability state is set, includes controllable probability setting means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It becomes higher than in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it becomes lower than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (in the high probability state, the special game 2 fluctuation display game has a break probability of 0). Therefore, in the second specific gaming state, it is possible to generate a small hit with an extremely high probability by winning on the second start winning opening 97.

Here, also in the present embodiment, in the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time reduction state, the progress status of the special view variation display game, etc. ing. And in the case of this embodiment, step A458 (FIG. 65) of the special figure information setting process (step A344) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 58) is set when the rendering mode information is in the low probability state. In the case of the information related to the effect mode, the second half fluctuation group selection pointer for long time fluctuation is acquired as the second half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the presentation mode information, so the special figure 2 fluctuation display game changes for a long time ( Long fluctuation). On the other hand, when the rendering mode information is information related to the rendering mode set when the high probability state is set, the latter half fluctuation group for fluctuation of the normal fluctuation time as the second half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the rendering mode information In order to acquire the selection pointer, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes fluctuation of normal fluctuation time (short fluctuation compared with long fluctuation). As a result, in the second specific gaming state, which is a high probability state, a small hit occurs more frequently in the special view 2 fluctuation display game than in the normal gaming state or the like, which is a low probability state (small hit RUSH) .

Further, in the present embodiment, 16R positive variation A, 16R positive variation B, 16R normal A, 16R normal B, 4R positive variation, and 4R normal are set as the big hit patterns. And in this embodiment, after a big hit state ends, it becomes a definite change state or a normal state. As shown in FIG. 184 (c), the 16R probability change rate is 2% for both the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game, and the 4R probability change rate is the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation. 60% for both display games. That is, the probability change rate is set to 62%. And, after the big hit is finished, 50 revolutions and general power support are executed.

Note that, for example, the special figure 1 variation display game is 2%, and the special figure 2 variation display game is 40% as the 16R probability variation entry ratio, and the special figure 1 variation display game is 60% as the 4R probability variation entry ratio, for example. The distribution of the number of rounds of the big hit in the probability variation state of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be set to be different such that the variation indication game of FIG. 2 is 22%. If configured in this way, it is possible to obtain a large number of game balls during the big hit game if you win the big hit in the small hit RUSH mode, so you will generate more small hits during the small hit RUSH. In addition to the game intention improvement of the player who is trying to acquire the game ball, the expectation for the probability variation big hit can be improved.

In addition, since the occurrence of a definite variation big hit triggers the end of the small hit RUSH mode, the occurrence of a definite variation big hit may reduce the player's willingness to play the game, but even with this definite variation big hit it is possible to obtain a sufficient gaming ball Thus, while maintaining the player's willingness to play the game, it is possible to give new willingness to play the game to try to rush into the small hit RUSH again.

[Starting Port Switch Monitoring Process] In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in this embodiment, the starting port switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 185 is performed instead of the starting port switch monitoring process shown in FIG. . In the start port switch monitoring process, first, the process of steps A101 to A103 is performed. The processes in steps A101 to A103 are the same as those in FIG. And, when there is a winning to the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) which is the starting opening of the special figure 1 (step A103; Y), during normal game state (special figure low probability & time saving none) ) Is determined (step A104a).

If it is not in the normal gaming state (step A104a; N), the process proceeds to step A105. The processes in steps A105 to A106 are the same as those in FIG. In the case of the present embodiment, the player does not win unless the player is left hitting the first starting opening (the first starting winning opening 36), and in the normal gaming state, hitting left is recommended and the first to third specified gaming states Right is recommended. Therefore, when there is a winning at the first starting port when not in the normal gaming state (ie, when left hit during the first to third specific gaming states), the right control instruction notification command effect control The effect control device 300 is configured to send a notification (alarm) instructing the player 300 to send a signal to hit the right.

On the other hand, if it is in the normal gaming state (step A104a; Y), the process proceeds to step A107. The processes in steps A107 to A113 are the same as those in FIG. And, when there is a prize for the second starting port (general purpose winning port 37d) which is the starting port of the special figure 1 (step A111; Y), when the ordinary electric role is in operation (step A112) Y) or when there is a winning on the second starting port (Puden winning port 37d) which is the starting port of the special figure 1 (step A111; Y), and the ordinary motorized part is not in operation If it is (step A112; N) and the common electric charge is not occurring (step A113; N), it is determined whether it is in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability & no time saving) (step A 124a). In the present embodiment, the second starter opening 37d and the first starting winning opening 36 correspond to a first starting winning area, and the second starting winning opening 97 corresponds to a second starting winning area. The Fuden prize winning opening 37d) is a starting opening of Special Figure 1.

If it is in the normal gaming state (step A124a; Y), a left hit instruction notification command is prepared (step A125a), effect command setting processing (step A126a) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A114. In the case of the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless the player is right-handed to the second start-up port (general-purpose winning jack 37d), and it is recommended to hit left in the normal gaming state and in the first to third specified gaming states Right strike is recommended. Therefore, when there is a winning on the second starting port when in the normal gaming state (that is, when it is hit in the normal gaming state), a left strike instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 is configured to give a notification (warning) instructing the player to hit left.

On the other hand, when it is not in the normal gaming state (step A124a; N), the process proceeds to step A114. The processes in steps A114 to A118 are the same as those in FIG. And, when there is a winning to the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) which is the starting opening of the special figure 2 (step A118; Y), during normal game state (special figure low probability & time saving none ) Is determined (step A119a).

If it is in the normal gaming state (step A119a; Y), a left hit instruction notification command is prepared (step A120a), and the process proceeds to step A121. The processes in steps A121 to A123 are the same as those in FIG. In the case of the present embodiment, the player does not win a prize unless it is a right hit to the third starting opening (the second start winning entry 97), and in the normal gaming state, a left hitting is recommended and Right is recommended. Therefore, when there is a winning on the third starting port when in the normal gaming state (that is, when it is hit in the normal gaming state), a left strike instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 is configured to give a notification (warning) instructing the player to hit left. On the other hand, when it is not in the normal gaming state (step A119a; N), the process proceeds to step A122.

[Special view start port switch common processing] In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the special view start port switch common processing shown in FIG. 53 is changed to the special view start shown in FIG. Perform mouth switch common processing. This special view starting opening switch common processing is different from the special view starting opening switch common processing shown in FIG. 53 in that the processing in step A 155 is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, small hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (step A156) regardless of whether or not the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) is a winning or not (step A156). The symbol is saved in the symbol random number storage area (step A157). The processes in steps A141 to A154 and A156 to 160 are the same as those in FIG.

[Special figure reserve information determination process] In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the special figure reserve information determination shown in FIG. 187 is substituted for the special figure reserve information determination process shown in FIG. Do the processing. This special-image suspension information determination process differs from the special-image suspension information determination process shown in FIG. 54 in that the process of step A 165 is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the small hitting determination process (step A166) is performed regardless of whether or not the first starting opening (the first starting winning opening 36) is a winning. The processes in steps A161 to A164 and A166 to 176 are the same as those in FIG.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing] In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, instead of the big hit flag 1 setting processing shown in FIG. 59, the big hit flag 1 setting processing shown in FIG. . In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step A 361 a), and the process proceeds to step A 362. The processes in steps A362 to A369 are the same as those in FIG. Then, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is a small hit (step A369; Y), the small hit information is overwritten on the small hit flag 1 area in which the release information is saved in step A361a. Save (step A370a) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing] In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, instead of the big hit flag 2 setting processing shown in FIG. 60, the big hit flag 2 setting processing shown in FIG. . In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step A 361 b), and the process proceeds to step A 371. The processes in steps A371 to A376 are the same as those in FIG. When the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is not a big hit (step A 375; N), the small hit determination process (step A 368 b) is performed.

If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A 368 b) is a small hit (step A 369 b; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area saved with the outlier information in step A 361 b (Step A370b), the big hit flag 2 setting processing ends. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368b) is not the small hit (step A369b; N), the big hit flag 2 is set while saving the outlier information in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area. End the process.

[Small Hit Determination Processing] In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the small hit determination processing shown in FIG. 190 is performed instead of the small hit determination processing shown in FIG. In the small hit determination process, first, the process of step A391 is performed. The processing of step A 391 is the same as that of FIG. If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hitting lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), it is judged whether the current fluctuation is a fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step A395a). If the current fluctuation is fluctuation of special figure 1 (step A395a; Y), the small hitting upper limit judgment value for special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (step A396a), it moves to the processing of step A392 .

On the other hand, if the present fluctuation is not the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step A395a; N), that is, if the present fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 2, the small hit upper limit judgment value for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is It sets (step A397a), and it transfers to the process of step A392. The processes in steps A392 to A394 are the same as those in FIG. Thus, when the current fluctuation is a fluctuation of the special figure 1, a small hitting upper limit judgment value for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set, and when the current fluctuation is a fluctuation of the special figure 2, Fig. 2 By setting the small hitting upper limit judgment value for the variable display game, Fig. 1
As shown in 84, the small hit probability can be made different between the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing] In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 shown in FIG. Perform stop symbol setting processing. In the special view 1 stop symbol setting process, first, the process of step A401 is performed. The processing of step A401 is the same as that of FIG. If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401; Y), the process proceeds to step A402. The processes in steps A402 to A409 and A418 to A423 are the same as those in FIG.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A410a), and if it is a small hit (step A410a; Y), the step A411 Transfer to processing of The processes in steps A411 to A415 are the same as those in FIG. If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A410a; N), the process proceeds to step A416. The processes in steps A416 to A417 are the same as those in FIG.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing] In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 shown in FIG. Perform stop symbol setting processing. In the special view 2 stop symbol setting process, first, the process of step A431 is performed. The processing of step A 431 is the same as that of FIG. If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431; Y), the process proceeds to step A432. The processes in steps A432 to A439 and A442 to A446 are the same as those in FIG. Then, after the process of step A446, the special figure 2 small hitting symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423b), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A 431; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A 410 b). If it is a small hit (step A 410 b; Y) 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) to load small hit symbol random number (step A411 b), set a special figure 2 small hit symbol table (step A 412 b), corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded The stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A413 b), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A 414 b), the stop symbol pattern The effect mode transition information corresponding to is saved (step A 415 b), and the process proceeds to step A 442. On the other hand, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A410b; N), the process proceeds to step A440. The processes in steps A440 to A441 are the same as those in FIG.

[Process while special figure is displayed] In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the special figure shown in FIG. 193 is displayed instead of the process in the special figure shown in FIGS. Do the processing. In the special view display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process, and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process The small hit flag 2 is loaded (step A 701 a), the small hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM are cleared (step A 702), and the process proceeds to step A 703. The processes in steps A703 to A724 are the same as those in FIG. Then, if the big hit flag 1 loaded is not a big hit (step A 706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A 725 a).

If the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A 725 a; Y), the process proceeds to step A 726. On the other hand, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A 725 a; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 loaded is a small hit (step A 725 b). If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A 725 b; N), the process proceeds to step A 735. The processes in steps A735 to A741 are the same as those in FIG. On the other hand, if the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A 725 b; Y), the process proceeds to step A 726. The processing of steps A 726 to A 727 is the same as that of FIG.

Then, after the process of step A727, the process proceeds to the process of step A729 without performing the process of determining whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step A728). The processes in steps A729 to A734 are the same as those in FIG. That is, in this embodiment, the decoration special drawing command is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area and prepared regardless of whether the special drawing is in high probability or not (step A729), and the rendering command setting process (step A730) ), Prepare a small hit fanfare command (step A731), and perform effect command setting processing (step A732).

[Time Reduction Variation Number Update Processing] In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in this embodiment, instead of the time reduction variation number update processing shown in FIG. 73, the time reduction variation number update shown in FIG. Do the processing. In this time reduction variation number update process, first, the process of steps A 752 to A 758 is performed. The processing of steps A 752 to A 758 is the same as that of FIG. Then, after the process of step A758, it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (in the high probability state) (step A751a). If the special figure height probability is not in progress (step A 751a; N), that is, if it is the third specific gaming state (special figure low probability & time saving state), the processing of steps A759 to A761 is performed. The processes in steps A759 to A761 are the same as those in FIG. Thereby, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state at the low support prescribed frequency.

On the other hand, if the special figure high probability is in progress (step A 751a; Y), that is, if it is the first specific gaming state (special figure high probability & time reduction state), the special figure game mode flag area Save the high probability & time saving none flag (step A762a), save the signal regarding the right-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (step A763a), save the number in the right-handed state in the gaming state display number 2 area (Step A764a), the processing for updating the number of times of time-saving change is ended. Thereby, it is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state at the high support specified number of times. In addition, the gaming state (the first specific gaming state) before transitioning with the high support regulation number of times and the gaming state (the second specific gaming state) after transitioning with the high support regulation number of times are also in the gaming state in which the right strikes Because of this, the processes of steps A 763 a to A 764 a may be omitted.

[Big win end setting process 1] In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, big hit finish setting process 1 shown in FIG. 195 is performed instead of the big hit finish setting process 1 shown in FIG. . Here, as shown in FIG. 84, in the big hit end processing, first, after the end of the special game state, the probability fluctuation determination flag set based on the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is It is determined whether the data is high probability data set in the high probability state (step A1201). Then, if it is not high probability data (step A1201; N), that is, if the type of special result that triggered the execution of the special game state of this time is a normal big hit, the big hit end setting processing 1 is performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 182, in any state of the normal gaming state and the first to third specific gaming states, the third specific if the type of the big hit is usually a big hit Transition to the game state. That is, when the type of special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is normally a big hit, by performing the big hit end setting process 1, it shifts to the third specific game state.

Specifically, in the big hit end setting processing 1, first, save the signal regarding the start of low probability & time reduction in the external information output data area (step A1221a), and test the signal regarding the start of low probability & time reduction It saves in the output data area (step A1222a). Next, save the signal related to the right-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (step A1227a), save the low probability number in the gaming state display number area (step A1228a), and right-handed in the gaming state display number 2 area The middle number is saved (step A1229a), and the process proceeds to step A1223. The processes in steps A1223 to A1226 are the same as those in FIG. In the case of the present embodiment, since the number of times of support is 50, “50” is saved as the time shortening variation number initial value in the time shortening variation number area in step A1226.

In this way, after the end of the big hit gaming state, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data, the hit probability is set to a low probability, and there is a public support as well, It is possible to shift to the specific gaming state of 3.

Here, when the big hit is a big hit in the normal gaming state, the transition from the normal gaming state, which is the gaming state to the left, to the third specific gaming state, which is the gaming state to the right, is performed. If the big hit is a big hit normally in the first specific gaming state, the transition from the first specific gaming state, which is a gaming state to the right, to the third specific gaming state, which is the gaming state to the right, is performed. If the big hit is a big hit normally in the second specific gaming state, the transition from the second specific gaming state which is the gaming state to the right to the third specific gaming state which is the gaming state to the right. When the big hit is a big hit normally in the third specific gaming state, the third specific gaming state, which is a gaming state to hit right, continues. Therefore, when the big hit is a big hit normally in the first to third specific gaming states, the game state of right-handing continues, so the processing of steps A1227a and A1229a may be omitted.

[Big win end setting process 2] In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, big hit finish setting process 2 shown in FIG. 196 is performed instead of the big hit finish setting process 2 shown in FIG. . Here, as shown in FIG. 84, in the big hit end processing, first, after the end of the special game state, the probability fluctuation determination flag set based on the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is It is determined whether the data is high probability data set in the high probability state (step A1201). Then, in the case of high probability data (step A1201; Y), that is, when the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is a probability variation big hit, the big hit end setting processing 2 is performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 182, in any state of the normal gaming state and the first to third specific gaming states, the first specific if the type of the big hit is a probability variation big hit Transition to the game state. That is, when the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is the probability variation big hit, by performing the big hit end setting processing 2, it shifts to the first specific game state.

Specifically, in the big hit end setting processing 2, first, save the signal regarding the start of high probability & time reduction in the external information output data area (step A1231a), and test the signal regarding the start of high probability & time reduction Save to the output data area (step A1232a). Next, save the signal related to the right-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (step A1237a), save the high probability number in the gaming state display number area (step A1238a), right-handed in the gaming state display number 2 area The middle number is saved (step A 1239 a), and the process proceeds to step A 1233. The processing of steps A1233 to A1235 is the same as that of FIG. After the process of step A1235, the time reduction change frequency initial value (50 in the case of this embodiment) is saved in the time reduction change frequency area (step A1236a), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended.

In this way, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data) after the big hit gaming state ends, the hit probability is set to a high probability and It is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state with the power support.

Here, when the big hit is a definite variation big hit in the normal gaming state, it shifts from the normal gaming state which is the left hitting gaming state to the first specific gaming state which is the right hitting gaming state. In the first specific gaming state, when the big hit is a definite variation big hit, the first specific gaming state which is a gaming state in which the right strike is continued. When the big hit is a definite variation big hit in the second specific gaming state, the transition from the second specific gaming state, which is a gaming state to the right, to the first specific gaming state, which is the gaming state to the right. When the big hit is a definite variation big hit in the third specified gaming state, it shifts from the third specified gaming state which is the right hitting gaming state to the first specific gaming state which is the right hitting gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit is a probability variation big hit in the first to third specific gaming states, the game state of right-handing continues, so the processing of steps A1237a and A1239a may be omitted.

[Small hitting Medium Processing] In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in this embodiment, small hitting middle processing shown in FIG. 197 is performed instead of the small hitting middle processing shown in FIG. The small hit middle process differs from the small hit middle process shown in FIG. 89 in that the process of steps A1405 and A1406 is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the small hit end screen command is prepared regardless of whether the flag saved in the special figure game mode flag save area is the flag regarding the special figure high probability middle (step A1407). And effect command setting processing (step A1408).

[Small Hit Completion Processing] In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, small hit termination processing shown in FIG. 198 is performed instead of the small hit termination processing shown in FIG. In the small hitting end process, first, the process of steps A1601 to A1619 is performed. The processes in steps A1601 to A1619 are the same as those in FIG. After the process of step A1619, it is determined whether the flag loaded in step A1601 is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1624a), and if it is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1624a; Y) Then, the process proceeds to step A1623.

On the other hand, if it is not the flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1624a; N), the process proceeds to step A1620. The processing of steps A162 to A1623 is the same as that of FIG. That is, in this embodiment, the flag loaded in step A1601 is not the flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1624a; N), and the flag loaded in step A1619 is not the flag related to the special figure time In A1620; N), the signal regarding the left hitting instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621), and the number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1622). By doing in this way, when the hit probability is not high probability and is not in time reduction, the transition from the small hit gaming state where the launch direction is right to the normal gaming state where the launch direction is left strike It can be done.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute a variable display game in which identification information is changed based on winning of the game ball in the starting area provided in the game area 32, and the variable display game It is a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state for giving a gaming value to the player when the result is a special result, and the starting area is a game ball which can be fired toward the left side of the gaming area 32 The game area includes a first start area (first start winning opening 36) and a second start area (second start winning opening 97) where a game ball fired toward the right side of the game area 32 can win A retention device (in the case of the present embodiment, the normal fluctuation winning device 37) for retaining the gaming ball is provided upstream of the second starting region of the thirty-two.

Therefore, in addition to the retention of the game balls in the retention device, the retention device (in the case of this embodiment, the normal fluctuation prize device 37) is provided on the upstream side of the second start region (the second start winning opening 97). Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to the whereabouts of the gaming ball retained by the retention device (whether or not to win a second start area, etc.), and the rendering effect by the retention device can be accurately improved. .

Further, in the present embodiment, the staying device is the normal fluctuation winning device 37 capable of converting the gaming ball into an impossible-to-win or hard-to-win state and the gaming ball to be able to win by operating the movable member 37b It can be configured to be. By configuring in this way, in addition to the stagnation of gaming balls in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, whereabouts of gaming balls held by the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the second start area (second start The player's attention can be drawn to which one of the winning opening 97) and the like, and the rendering effect by the staying device (normal fluctuation winning device 37) can be appropriately improved.

Also, in the present embodiment, after the end of the special game state, until the variable display game is performed a predetermined number of times, the electric support state (time saving state) in which the gaming ball is more likely to win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 than the normal state. In the power support state, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is approximately the same as the staying time of the game balls in the normal variation winning device 37. It can be configured to be set to be By configuring in this way, the game ball is less likely to win the second start area (second start winning opening 97) when in the power support state (the first specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state) Therefore, it is possible to achieve the target performance (outfall rate).

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute a variation display game in which the identification information is varied based on the winning of the gaming ball in the starting area (the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97), It is a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state for giving a gaming value to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, and the opening / closing member 990 operates in response to the occurrence of the special gaming state. A variable winning device (in the case of the present embodiment, the special variation winning device 38) capable of converting the gaming ball from being incapable of winning or difficult to winning to a state in which the gaming ball is capable of winning, , And a retention device for retaining gaming balls (in the case of the present embodiment, the normal fluctuation winning device 37).

Therefore, in addition to the retention of the game ball in the retention device, the retention device is retained by the retention device because the retention device (in the case of this embodiment, the normal fluctuation prize device 37) is provided upstream of the special fluctuation prize device 38 The player's attention can also be drawn to the whereabouts of the game ball (whether or not to win a special fluctuation winning device 38, etc.), and the rendering effect by the staying device can be accurately improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (small hit gaming state), and a second special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state. The game ball is fired and arrives at the fluctuation winning device (in the case of this embodiment, the special fluctuation winning device 38) more than the period from the operation start to the operation end of the opening / closing member 990 in the first special game state. The retention period (retention time) of the gaming balls in the retention device (in the case of the present embodiment, the normal fluctuation winning device 37) can be set so that the time period until it becomes long. By configuring in this manner, regardless of the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 990 (opening pattern of the big winning opening), aiming to start hitting the game ball with the start of the first special gaming state (small hitting gaming state) etc. Even when the game ball arrives at the special variation winning device 38, the first special gaming state ends, so while improving the small hitting performance (while increasing the number of small balls in the small hitting gaming state), It is possible to prevent an unfair prize by capture.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the operation mode in the first special gaming state (small hitting gaming state) of the opening and closing member 990, the fluctuation winning device (in the case of the present embodiment, the special fluctuation winning device 38) It is possible to be configured such that it is possible to select an operation mode capable of performing a plurality of operations during the period until arrival at. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the small hit performance (increase the number of balls in the small hit gaming state).

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170, for example, the gaming ball which has passed through the common drawing start gate 34 by the induction member 34b provided in the common drawing start gate 34 It is guided to the left (upstream side) of 37f. Therefore, since the possibility that the game ball flowing down the right side game area passes through the retention device (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is high, it is more difficult to make illegal winnings by capture in the normal gaming state, and It is possible to suppress the decrease of gaming balls in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the retention device (normal fluctuation winning device 37), a member (such as an obstacle nail, a windmill, a flow-down path 615, and a guiding portion 616) for suppressing gravity in the game area 32; A retaining member having a function is provided. By retaining the gaming ball using the retention device and the retention member, it is possible to change the rolling mode of the gaming ball, so the interest of the game is improved. Of course, the arrangement of the retention device and the retention member can be appropriately selected. Specifically, the arrangement of the retention device and the retention member is, for example, the game ball in the big winning opening even if aiming to start hitting the game ball with the start of the small hit gaming state (opening of the big winning opening). It is preferable that the arrangement is such that the winning combination is not made (that is, the arrangement is such that the illegal winning due to the capture is not possible).

The fluctuation winning device is not limited to the special fluctuation winning device 38, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may be used. In addition, the retention device is not limited to the normal fluctuation winning device 37, can be suitably changed, a device for holding the game ball by a slide member that can slide in the back and forth direction, etc. A device that holds gaming balls by a seesaw member that is held, a device that holds gaming balls by a rotating member that is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft, and the like, as long as the gaming balls can be held It may be In addition, the retention device is not limited to one having a winning opening such as the normal fluctuation winning device 37. In addition, a plurality of retention devices may be provided.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a special fluctuation winning device 38 which converts the open / close member 990 from the closed state to the open state when generating the small hit gaming state. The special variation winning device 38 is configured such that gaming balls can stay on the opening and closing member 990 when the opening and closing member 990 is in the closed state, and stay on the opening and closing member 990 when the opening and closing member 990 is in the open state. The game ball which has been set is configured to be able to win a prize. As a result, even in the case of a small hit in a short open state, the game ball retained in the opening / closing member 990 can win many game balls by winning in the special variation winning device 38, and in the second specific game state It is configured to be able to efficiently increase the number of balls out.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the small hitting RUSH occurs in the second specific gaming state, the variation is started every time the second starting winning opening 97 is won. As shown in FIG. 184, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 is set extremely high even in the low probability state or the high probability state, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the second specific gaming state Fluctuation is set to short fluctuation. Therefore, the small hit operation will occur one after another. When a small hit gaming state occurs,
It is possible to open the big winning a prize opening multiple times per one small hitting game state. When opening the big winning opening multiple times per one small hitting gaming state, for example, during the small hitting operation (small hitting gaming state), the opening time of the special winning hole of the special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed It is set shorter than time. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 183 (c), the opening time can be 0.5 seconds while the closing time of the special winning opening is 1.0 seconds.

In the special fluctuation winning device 38, the flow of the game ball on the opening and closing member 990 is weakened. As a result, the gaming ball is easily retained on the opening and closing member 990. In such a configuration, when a small hit RUSH occurs that the small hit occurs frequently, if the time of the closed state of the big winning opening is set to be longer than the time of the open state, the time of the closed state is often large. The game ball can be retained on the opening and closing member 990. Thereafter, the open / close member 990 is opened, so that many game balls staying on the open / close member 990 will be awarded in a big prize winning opening. As a result, when a small hit RUSH occurs, it is possible to give the player many winning balls. By doing in this way, in the gaming machine 10 of the positive variation loop type as in the present embodiment, since small hit RUSH can be executed in the second specific gaming state after leaving the first specific gaming state, It is possible to realize new playability that the game ball can be acquired as much as possible.

If a small hit occurs in the predetermined variable display game and a small hit occurs in the next variable display game of the predetermined variable display game, the game ball is generated according to the fluctuation period of the identification information in the next variable display game. It is possible to secure a period for securing the flow and stagnation state of the As a result, when the small hitting operation continues for two games, the game ball can be retained on the opening and closing member 990 by using the fluctuation time of the later game. Then, many game balls staying on the opening and closing member 990 can be made to be awarded at once in the large winning opening, and many balls can be given to the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the first specific gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, the small hitting mode (first special result) is derived Since transition to the second possible specific game state is possible, it is possible to perform an unprecedented novel game state transition. Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to efficiently vary the special view 2 variation display game (second special view variation display game) to which a large number of small hits are allocated.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit or a large hit, a notification effect of notifying the type of a hit is executed before the symbol is determined (the symbol is stopped). That is, it is comprised so that it may alert | report before a symbol stop whether a small hit or a big hit. As a result, in the case of a small hit or a big hit, since the type of the hit is notified at a common timing, it is easy to understand the timing at which the interest of the game increases and the timing at which the notification should be viewed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the second specific gaming state (small hit RUSH mode), it is possible to execute the notice effect corresponding to the small hit (shorter effect) and the notice effect corresponding to the big hit (longer effect) That is, the frequency of production is higher in the case of the preview production corresponding to the small hit, and the start timing of the production is faster in the preview production corresponding to the big hit. The preview production corresponding to the big hit has a longer presentation time than the preview production corresponding to the small hit, so for the purpose of time adjustment etc, the start timing of the preview production corresponding to the big hit is the start of the preview production corresponding to the small hit It is earlier than the timing. In addition, if the frequency of the advance notice production at the earlier start timing is increased, the player's interest in the fluctuation may decrease at an early stage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the advance notice production at the later start timing (ie The frequency of the notice effect corresponding to the small hit is higher than the frequency of the notice effect having the earlier start timing (that is, the notice effect corresponding to the big hit). In addition, it is possible to execute a notice effect corresponding to a big hit or a notice effect corresponding to a small hit as a so-called effect, and in this case, for example, a notice effect corresponding to a big hit (streaming effect) → corresponding to a small hit By executing in the order of the notice effect (showing effect) → the notice effect (not playing action) corresponding to the big hit, it is possible to execute the notice effect in which the player keeps watching.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is a type of game in which the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game simultaneously change (the variation time of the special view 2 change display game in the normal gaming state is very long). It may be a machine. Furthermore, in the case of a simultaneous variation type gaming machine, special effects are provided when the player is hit in the left hitting gaming state and wins the second start winning opening 97 and the result of the game based on the winning is a big hit It is also possible to configure to execute countdown effects, effects entering a special zone, etc.), that is, effects other than error notification effects (attention generation effects). By this configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a big hit in an unmanned state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special variation winning device 38 is configured to function as a big hit opening for big hit and a big winning opening for small hit, but the big hit opening for big hit and the big hit opening for small hit And may be separated. Specifically, for example, in the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 170, the large winning opening 38d of the special variation winning device 38 is a large winning opening for a small hit, and the general winning opening 35 provided in the right gaming area Between 615 and 615, a second special variation winning device having a large winning opening for a big hit and an opening and closing member for opening and closing the large winning opening may be provided. The opening and closing member having the second special fluctuation winning device is, for example, a member which can slide in the front and rear direction, and at least the upper surface of the opening and closing member (surface on which gaming balls roll and stay) is made of a material having a high coefficient of friction. Therefore, the time during which the game balls stay on the opening and closing member becomes longer than when the upper surface of the opening and closing member is made of a material having a low coefficient of friction.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special gaming state is the first special gaming state (small hitting gaming state) and the second special gaming state (big hit gaming which is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state). A first variation winning device (special variation winning device) that includes at least a state, and is capable of converting the gaming ball from a state incapable of winning or difficult to winning to a state in which the gaming ball can win a prize 38) and the second variation winning device (second special variation winning device) capable of converting the game ball from a state incapable of winning or difficult to winning to a state in which the gaming ball can win in accordance with the occurrence of the second special gaming state The first variation winning apparatus and the second variation winning apparatus have a retention function (game ball retention function) for retaining the game ball, and the second variation prize apparatus is located upstream of the first variation prize apparatus. Configured to install a variable winning device It is a function.

By configuring in this manner, the second fluctuation winning device (second special fluctuation winning device) is provided on the upstream side of the first fluctuation winning device (special fluctuation winning device 38). In addition to the retention of gaming balls in the device, the retention of the gaming balls in the second variation winning device and the whereabouts of the gaming balls retained by the second variation winning device can also attract the attention of the player, The effect of the second variation winning device) can be properly improved.

In addition, the game ball retention function of the first variation winning device (special variation winning device 38) is generated by providing a raised portion (which may be a raised portion or a relief), that is, by providing unevenness on the surface It is not limited to the function and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the game ball retention function of the second fluctuation winning device (second special fluctuation winning device) is not limited to the function generated by using a material having a high coefficient of friction, and can be appropriately changed. In addition, the game ball retention function may be a function generated by combining a plurality of configurations. That is, for example, the function may be generated by providing the surface with irregularities and using a material having a high coefficient of friction. Further, the arrangement of the first variation winning device (special variation winning device 38), the second variation winning device (second special variation winning device), etc. can be selected as appropriate.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a third fluctuation winning apparatus (for example, a normal fluctuation) different from the first fluctuation winning apparatus (special fluctuation winning apparatus 38) and the second fluctuation winning apparatus (second special fluctuation winning apparatus). The third variable winning device further includes a winning area (for example, a poten winning opening 37d) in which the gaming ball can win by operating the opening / closing member (for example, the movable member 37b) And a retention area (for example, detour 37g) for retaining the length of the period during which the first variable winning apparatus changes the state (period from the start of the operation of the opening and closing member 990 to the end of the operation) It can be configured to be equal to or less than the length of the period during which the movable member 37 d operates (the period from the start of the operation of the movable member 37 d to the end of the operation).

By configuring in this manner, a second variation winning device (second special variation winning device) having a gaming ball retention function on the upstream side of the first variation winning device (special variation winning device 38), and a game Since the third variable winning device (for example, the normal variation winning device 37) equipped with the ball retention function is provided, it is possible to effectively prevent an unfair winning by capture in the normal gaming state. For example, as shown in FIGS. 183 (a) to (c), the length of the period from the operation start to the operation end of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit gaming state is “1.8 seconds” or “3.5 seconds “Is set to be shorter than“ 5800 milliseconds ”which is the length of the period from the operation start of the movable member 37 d to the operation end. That is, in the present embodiment, the length of the period from the operation start to the operation end of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit gaming state is less than the period from the operation start to the operation end of the movable member 37d. The length of is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, the length of the period from the operation start to the operation end of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit gaming state (or the length of the period obtained by adding the small hit residual ball processing time to the time ) May be the same as the length of the period from the start of operation of the movable member 37d to the end of the operation.

In addition, the staying time of the gaming ball in the first variable winning device, the staying time of the gaming ball in the second changing winning device, and the staying time of the gaming ball in the third changing winning device may be all the same. All may be different, or any two may be the same and the remaining one may be different. Specifically, for example, [1] residence time is the second fluctuation winning device> first fluctuation winning device 第 third fluctuation winning device or second fluctuation winning device> third fluctuation winning device> first fluctuation winning device In the case, that is, when the residence time of the game ball in the second variable winning device is the longest, the second variable winning device is disposed in the middle of the right game area, so the game ball is turned in the middle of the right game area. You can enjoy the movement mode. Furthermore, when the combination of residence time is [1], the second variation winning device located upstream of the first variation winning device (special variation winning device 38) having a large winning opening for small hit is played Since the ball can be retained for a long time, the timing at which the game ball arrives at the first conversion winning device can be delayed. The game ball that arrives at the first variable winning device immediately after the operation of the opening and closing member 990 falls from the opening and closing member 990 before the operation of the opening and closing member 990 starts (a failure to win a prize in the first fluctuation winning device occurs Although the possibility is high, by delaying the timing at which the game ball arrives at the first converted winning device by the second variable winning device, the game ball arriving at the first variable winning device immediately after the operation of the opening / closing member 990 is reduced Because you can, you can get more balls in the small hit game state.

Also, for example, in the case where [2] residence time is third fluctuation winning device> second fluctuation winning device> first fluctuation winning device, it becomes difficult to clog the ball. That is, there is a high need to suppress the attack on the upstream side than on the downstream side of the game area, and in the conventional game machine, the stagnation is suppressed by arranging more staying members (such as obstacle nails and windmills) on the upstream side. . On the other hand, when the combination of residence time is [2], the residence time of the game ball in the third variable winning apparatus disposed most upstream is the longest, and the ball game on the upstream side is the third variation winning The device can reduce the number of retaining members provided only for the purpose of suppressing the ball, so that it is difficult to clog the ball. Furthermore, when the combination of residence time is [2], the game ball retention function of the second fluctuation winning device and the third fluctuation winning device located upstream of the first fluctuation winning device (special fluctuation winning device 38) Since the time until the game ball arrives at the first variable winning device can be further extended, it is possible to more effectively prevent the unfair winning due to the capture in the normal gaming state.

Also, for example, if [3] residence time is the second fluctuation winning device and the third fluctuation winning device> first fluctuation winning device, it is more upstream than the first fluctuation winning device (special fluctuation winning device 38) By the game ball retention function of the 2nd fluctuation winning a prize device and the 3rd fluctuation winning a prize device which is in, because it is possible to extend the time until the game ball arrives to the 1st fluctuation winning a prize device further, by the capture at the time of normal game state It is possible to prevent fraudulent winning more effectively. Any of the above [1] to [3] can be adopted as a combination of residence times, and the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hitting gaming state (timing to open the big winning opening or big winning corresponding to the adopted combination) The time when the mouth is closed, etc. are set.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of. Also, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the embodiments and the modifications described above can be combined appropriately and applied.

Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 game machine 32 game area 36 1st starting winning opening (starting area, starting area, 1st starting area) 37 normal fluctuation winning a prize device (the fluctuation winning a prize device, retention device) 37b movable member (opening and closing member) 37b5 extension part Restraint part) 37b6 Left ridge part (ball restraint part) 37b7 Right ridge part (ball restraint part) 37d Futo prize hole (winning area) 37f Downstream channel (flow channel, first channel) 37g bypass channel (retention area) , Second flow path) 37 g 1 entrance (communication opening) 37 g 2 exit (communication opening) 38 special variation winning device (variation winning device) 80 gaming board main body 97 second starting winning opening (starting area, second starting area) 100 game control Device (power supply control means) 371b Protrusion part (induction part) 373b Rear surface part (attachment wall part) 990 Opening and closing member

The present invention can execute a variable display game in which identification information is changed based on winning of a game ball in a starting area provided in the game area, and the player is given a result of the variable display game. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state for giving a gaming value to a player.

Conventionally, a game ball flowing down the game area is provided with a first start-up opening and a second start-up opening that can be won,
A gaming machine having a bonus amount to be awarded to a player based on a winning to the second starting opening higher than a bonus to be awarded to the player based on a winning to the starting opening, to the first starting opening Provided along the path of the first winning aisle, the second winning aisle communicating with the second starting opening, the sorting means for distributing the game balls to the first winning aisle and the second winning aisle, and , And a speed adjustment unit for reducing the moving speed of the game ball passing through the first winning passage, and the second winning as compared to the moving time for the game ball distributed to the first winning passage to move to the first starting opening There is known a gaming machine configured to shorten a moving time for moving a gaming ball distributed to a passage to a second starting opening (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-046179, A

However, the conventional gaming machine only allows the gaming ball to be retained by the retention device (speed adjustment unit), and the moving time for the gaming ball to move to the first starting opening is only extended, and a further effect can be expected It was not a thing.
An object of the present invention is to effectively improve the rendering effect by a retention device for retaining gaming balls.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is:
It is possible to execute a variable display game in which identification information is changed based on winning of a game ball in a start area provided in the game area, and the game value is given to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state to be granted,
The special game state includes at least a first special game state and a second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state.
A first variation winning device capable of converting a gaming ball from a state incapable of winning or difficult to winning to a state in which gaming balls can be won according to the occurrence of the first special gaming state;
And a second variable winning device capable of converting the game ball from a state incapable of winning or difficult to win to a state in which the gaming ball can win in accordance with the occurrence of the second special gaming state,
The first variable winning device and the second variable winning device have a retention function for retaining game balls,
The second fluctuation winning device is disposed upstream of the first fluctuation winning device,
A guiding unit for guiding a game ball flowing downstream without winning in the second fluctuation winning device in the direction of arrangement of the first fluctuation winning device is disposed downstream of the second fluctuation winning device It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to effectively improve the rendering effect by the retention device for retaining the gaming balls.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of a back component. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the lower movable feature unit. It is a front view explaining operation of the 1st lower movable member. It is a front view explaining operation of the 2nd lower movable member. It is a front view explaining operation of the 2nd lower movable member. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the upper movable character unit. It is a front view of the upper movable character unit. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of an upper movable character part unit, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) It is a back view. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of an upper movable character part unit, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) It is a back view. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the center movable character unit. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of a center movable role unit, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) It is a back view. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of a center movable role unit, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) It is a back view. It is a front view of a special fluctuation winning combination device. It is a top view of a special fluctuation winning combination device. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of an opening / closing member, Comprising: (a) closed state, (b) It is an open state. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of special fluctuation winning combination device. It is a rear view of a front wall member. It is a figure which shows a rear wall member, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) It is a back view. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the main-body part. It is the figure seen from the left explaining the operation | movement of an opening / closing member unit, Comprising: (a) closed state, (b) It is an open state. It is a figure which shows an opening / closing member, Comprising: (a) Top view, (b) It is a front view. (A) Front view of opening-and-closing member unit, (b) It is AA sectional drawing. It is a bottom view explaining operation of an opening and closing member unit, and is (a) closed state and (b) open state. It is a top view explaining the flow-down aspect of the game ball in a special fluctuation winning combination device. It is a figure explaining the flow-down aspect of the game ball in a special fluctuation winning combination device, and is a perspective view seen from the (a) top view and the (b) right side. It is a figure explaining the flow-down aspect of the game ball in a special fluctuation prize-winning device, and is a perspective view seen from the left. It is a front view explaining the flow-down aspect of the game ball in a special fluctuation winning a prize device, and is (a) closed state and (b) open state. It is a figure explaining the behavior of the game ball at the time of opening an opening-and-closing member. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flow chart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining input processing. It is a flow chart explaining switch reading processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payment command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flow chart explaining game machine state check processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payment busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining special processing usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining special drawing information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining distribution processing. It is a flowchart explaining 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining the time reduction change frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining a production mode information check process. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a process transfer setting process 1 during fan fare / interval. FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process 1; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during special winning opening open. It is a flow chart explaining processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a process transfer setting process 2 during fan fare / interval. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting processing 2. FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating special processing ordinary processing shift setting processing 2; (A) is a flowchart explaining the small hit fanfare medium process, (b) is a flowchart explaining the small hit medium process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit middle process. It is a flowchart explaining small hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing. (A) is a flowchart explaining small hit residual ball processing, (b) is a flow chart explaining small hitting end processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining small hit end processing. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating special processing ordinary processing shift setting processing 3; It is a flowchart explaining a production | presentation command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining symbol change control processing. It is a flow chart explaining common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a common drawing usual processing. FIG. 17 is a flowchart for explaining a general-purpose process shift setting process 1; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the processing transfer setting processing during common drawing fluctuation. (A) is a flowchart explaining the processing during the common drawing fluctuation, (b) is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing during the common drawing display. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing display. It is a flowchart explaining a process transfer setting process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a power transmission operation shift setting process. (A) is a flow chart for explaining the routine electric bulb remaining ball processing, (b) is a flow chart for explaining the end processing shift setting process per common drawing. (A) is a flow chart for explaining the end processing per common drawing, (b) is a flow chart for explaining the common processing shift processing 2 for common processing. It is a flowchart explaining segment LED edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining starting opening signal editing processing. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in special game state. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in special game state. It is a figure explaining the selection rate of a state suggestion display. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a production control device. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining pre-reading symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining pre-reading change system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining big hit system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a count production setting process. It is a flow chart explaining fanfare production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining round production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining interval production setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining an ending production setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production in special gaming state. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production in special gaming state. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the special game state in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the count production setting processing in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the ending production setting processing in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the special game state in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the reset table of the state suggestion display in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the production button operation production processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the ending production setting processing in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the special game state in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the count production setting processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the ending production setting processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the presentation point control processing in the 3rd modification. It is a top view of the induction | guidance | derivation part in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the special change winning a prize apparatus in the 4th modification, and is a figure seen from the (a) top view and the (b) left. It is a figure explaining the special change winning a prize apparatus in the 4th modification, and is a figure seen from the (a) top view and the (b) left. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the special fluctuation winning combination device in the 5th modification. It is a rear view of the back wall member in the 5th modification. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the main-body part in the 5th modification. It is the perspective view seen from the back surface side of the main-body part in the 5th modification, Comprising: (a) Door part is a blockage | prevention state, (b) Door part is a permission state. It is a rear view of the main-body part in a 5th modification, Comprising: (a) Door part is blocking state, (b) Door part is in permission state. (A) The front view of a main-body part in the 5th modification, (b) BB sectional drawing in the state where a door part is blocked, (c) It is BB sectional drawing in a state where a door part is permitted. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of the game machine in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the operation state of the special fluctuation winning combination device in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability change operation area | region switch monitoring process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end processing in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the lever solenoid control process in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the modification of the induction channel in the 5th modification, and is a back view of (a) back wall member, (b) An enlarged view of a crooked part in the 1st mode, (c) the 2nd FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of a bent portion in the aspect of FIG. It is a front view of the game board in the 6th modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in the 6th modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in the 6th modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in the 6th modification. It is a front view of the game board in the 7th modification. It is a figure explaining the image in the reflective surface in a 7th modification. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the modification of the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the modification of the usual fluctuation prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a game state transition diagram showing an example of transition of a game state in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relationship between operation | movement and the various time of the normal fluctuation prize winning device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a table which shows an example of the big hit probability in the 2nd embodiment, the small hit probability, the losing probability, and the probability variation probability. It is a flowchart explaining the starting opening switch monitoring process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening switch common processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining special map reservation information judging processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining big hit flag 1 setting processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining big hit flag 2 setting processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining small hit judging processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a special figure display in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the time reduction change frequency update process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 1 in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 2 in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit middle processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining small hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, in the front frame (body frame) 12, the game board 3
A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of 0 is attached.

In addition, lamps and LEDs are internally incorporated on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration or effect, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a delivery abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. has an abnormality notification color (for example, red , And a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting a sound (for example, a sound effect). Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided on a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (not shown) for supplying game balls to a bat firing device (not shown)
Storage tray), the upper tray ball outlet 22 through which the gaming balls paid out from the payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out, and the gaming balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full A lower tray (a saucer) 23 to be stored, an operation unit 24 of a hitting and launching apparatus, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 21
On the upper edge portion of the effect button switch 25a for receiving pressing operation input from the player
The presentation button 25 incorporating the. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided.
Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25 A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Also, to the right of the effect button 25, the ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball loan from the adjacent ball lending machine, and the discharge button operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine 28, Balance display unit (not shown) that displays the balance of the prepaid card
Etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the game ball 30 is supplied with the ball from the upper plate 21 by the ball striking device by the player turning the operation unit 24.
Fire toward the front game area 32. In addition, the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to perform an operation or the like in which the player operates in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. Further, on the left side of the gaming area 32, a guiding wall 491 is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 and forms a guiding path 490 for guiding the shot gaming ball to a predetermined position of the gaming area 32.

In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and to project forward than the display surface of the display device 41 to make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (brown tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect, etc. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, and the like) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen. In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that performs a game effect by operating. The panel rendering device 44 is operable toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common drawing start gate) 34 is provided which gives a start condition of the common drawing variation display game. The game ball that has won the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 32). Also, two general winning openings 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening is on the lower right portion of the special variation winning device 38 arranged at the lower right portion of the center case 40. 35 are arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 32).

Below the center case 40, the first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) and the second special view fluctuation display for giving the start condition of the first special view fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) There is provided a winning device 90 having a second start winning opening 97 (start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of a game (special figure 2 variation display game). The winning device 90 includes a distributing member 92 which alternately distributes the gaming balls having flowed into the inflow port 91 at the upper portion into the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97. The distributing member 92 is pivotable about a pivoting axis along the front-rear direction, and the tilting direction changes according to the weight of the game ball flowing in, and the first start winning hole 36 on the left and the second on the right The game balls are distributed alternately to the start winning opening 97. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 32), and the gaming ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 has the start opening 3 switch 97a.
(See FIG. 32). Further, below the winning device 90, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that have not been won in a winning port or the like.

Further, on the right side of the center case 40, a normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the second special view fluctuation display game is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow gaming balls to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the right, and this movable member 37b is always It is almost vertical and keeps the closed closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to which the game ball can not flow. Then, when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is turned so that the upper end side falls to the right by the common electric solenoid 37c (refer to FIG. 32) as a driving device The game ball can easily change into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 has a starting opening 2
It is detected by the switch 37a (see FIG. 32). In addition, it is possible to be able to win even when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the closed state, and in the closed state, it may be harder to win than in the open state.

On the right side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a flow-down path 615 covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicating with the upper and lower is formed, and gaming balls that did not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 pass downward through the flow-off path 615 Flow down. Below the flow passage 615, a guiding portion 616 is provided. The guiding portion 616 is an inclined surface with the upper surface 617 falling to the left, and the gaming ball flowing downward is the upper surface 61
At 7, a special fluctuation winning device 38 is adapted to be guided to the left. Further, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 for displaying information related to the special figure variation display game.

The information display device 630 is a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special view variable display game, and the second start memory, which is the right to execute the second special view change display game. A second information display unit for displaying the number of In addition, the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation display game is displayed by the fourth symbol separately from the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed by the display device 41 by the first to third symbols. The third information display unit or the display device 41 performs the first to third
A fourth information display unit for displaying an ornament special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to a second special figure variation display game by the fourth symbol separately from the ornament special figure variation display game displayed by the symbols is provided.

The first information display unit and the second information display unit are each configured by two light emitting members, and the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit are each configured by one light emitting member. In the second display device, these six light emitting members are arranged side by side in two rows, three on each side. The upper two light emitting members in the right row constitute a first information display unit, and the upper two light emitting members in the left row constitute a second information display unit. The lower one light emitting member in the right row constitutes a third information display unit, and the lower one light emitting member in the left row constitutes a fourth information display unit.

Although the first information display unit and the second information display unit are each configured by two light emitting members, a design is applied around the respective information display units to show that the two light emitting members are related. At first glance, it can be understood that one light emitting member constitutes one information display unit. In addition, although the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit are each configured by one light emitting member, the designs around these information display units are designed to be independent. At first glance, it can be understood that the information display unit is constituted by one light emitting member. The design around the light emitting member is considered to have a sense of unity with the design of the entire game machine so that the aesthetic appearance is not lost. Also, the design around the light emitting member is
It does not stick a seal or the like, but is formed as a member that constitutes the guiding portion 616, and it is possible to reduce the labor and cost at the time of manufacturing.

Furthermore, in the lower right portion of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, a special fluctuation winning device (big winning opening) 38 which can be converted into a non-accepting state and an easily accepting state according to the result of the special view fluctuation display game is arranged. It is set up. Although the details of the configuration of the special variation winning device 38 will be described later, the opening / closing member 990 is determined as a result of the special view variation display game as an auxiliary game
The closing member 990 retreats from the closed state (closed state which is disadvantageous to the player) when the large winning opening is closed, and the game ball flowing down the gaming area 32 is converted into the open state (advantageable to the player) Do. That is, the special variation winning device 38 has a special winning opening which is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 990 driven by the special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 32) as a drive device, and is in the special gaming state (second special gaming state) During small hit game state (first special game state),
By converting the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, the game ball is made to easily flow into the big winning opening, and a predetermined gaming value (winning ball) is given to the player. A special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 32) is disposed inside the special winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. .

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is taken as the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is taken as the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the power and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike), so that the first start winning opening 36 of the winning device 90 and the second starting winning opening 97
The player can aim for winning in the general winning opening 35, and shoots the game ball to the right playing area (so-called right hitting) to win the common drawing start gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special fluctuation winning device 38. It is possible to aim at

In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game making a special figure variable display game A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a common drawing variation display game as a trigger and displaying various information.

The collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 composed of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like.
A special view 1 display (first special view change display unit) 51 for the variable display game, a special view 2 display (second special view change display unit) 52 for the special view 2 change display game, and an LED lamp Provided with various displays. The various displays include a special view 1 reserve display for notifying the start memory number of the special view 1 change display game, and a special view 2 reserve display for notifying the start memory number of the special view 2 change display game. . In addition, the round display section which displays the number of rounds at the big hit (the number of opening and closing times of the special variation winning device), the first gaming status display section which reports whether it is a time saving status (during general power support or specific gaming status), left A second gaming state display unit is included to notify the player of a striking manner (a striking manner corresponding to the gaming state) to the player among the striking (normal striking) and the right striking. In addition, the third gaming state display unit (third gaming state indicator, probability state display unit) that displays that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the common drawing fluctuation display game And a general drawing hold indicator for informing the starting memory number of the common drawing variation display game.

In the special figure 1 display 51, during the variation time of the first special figure variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display is repeatedly performed in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the variation time of the first special view variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (resulting mode) corresponding to the result of the first special view variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 1 in-motion display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result aspect form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the first special figure variation display game.

In the special figure 2 display 52, during the variation time of the second special figure variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display is repeatedly performed in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the variation time of the second special view variation display game is ended, the lighting pattern (resulting mode) corresponding to the result of the second special view variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the special figure 2 fluctuating display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result aspect form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the second special figure variation display game.

In the common drawing indicator, during the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing fluctuation display is repeatedly performed in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. And
When the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game ends, the lighting pattern (resulting form) according to the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the general drawing fluctuating display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result aspect form identification information (common drawing, normal symbol) for displaying the common drawing fluctuation display game.

The special view 1 suspension display displays the number of first start memories (first suspension number), which is the right to execute the first special view variation display game, by turning off, flashing, or lighting the plurality of light emitting units. The special view 2 suspension display displays the number of second start memories (second suspension number), which is the right to execute the second special view variation display game, by turning off, flashing, or lighting the plurality of light emitting units. The common drawing suspension display displays the number of common drawing start memories (the common drawing reservation number), which is the right to execute the common drawing variable display game, by turning off, blinking, and lighting the plurality of light emitting units.

When the special game mode is not in effect, the round display unit turns off all the light emitting units, and during the special game mode, the lighting mode corresponds to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. In the case of a normal gaming state in which the time saving state is not occurring (when the fluctuation time shortening function is not activated), the first gaming state display portion (time shortening state informing portion) turns the lamp off and the time saving state occurs. If it is (when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated), the lamp is turned on. The second gaming state display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 turns off the lamp if the game state in which the left-handed game is more advantageous for the player than the right-handed game (normally hit), turns the lamp off. If the player is in the game state advantageous to the player (right strike), the lamp is turned on. The third gaming state display unit turns on the LED when the power is turned on in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when it is not in the high probability state.

Next, details of the gaming board 30 in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming board 30 comprises a gaming board main body 80 having a substantially rectangular plate shape, a front component 600 constituting the front portion of the center case 40, and a rear side portion of the center case 40. And 30 a rear component 700 to which the various members required are attached.

The front component 600 is attached by being fitted from the front side to an opening 81 which is formed in the game board main body 80 and which penetrates back and forth. The front component has an annular base member 610 to which various members are attached. The base member 610 is inserted into an opening 81 penetrating in the back and forth direction formed in the game board main body 80, and with a peripheral wall 611 forming a front portion of an inner peripheral wall in a concave chamber-like space recessed backward than the game area 32 And a plate-like hook-shaped attachment portion 612 formed vertically to the peripheral wall 611 at the front end of the peripheral wall 611.

The portion of the attachment portion 612 formed outside the space surrounded by the peripheral wall 611 is the portion of the opening 81 when the front component 600 is inserted from the front side into the opening 81 formed in the game board main body 80. It extends outside the peripheral edge, and its back surface is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80. As a result, the front and rear positions of the front component 600 with respect to the gaming board main body 80 are set to predetermined front and rear positions. Further, a plurality of screw holes are formed in the mounting portion 612, and the front component 600 can be fixed to the game board main body 80 by screws. Furthermore, a part of the attachment portion 612 is disposed on the front side of the gaming board main body 80 and at a position visible to the player, and the front face is decorated. In addition, in the base member 610, a screw hole, a screwing portion, a boss for positioning, a recess for receiving the boss, a slit for receiving the rib, and the like are formed, so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. It has become.

On the front surface of the base member 610, a stage portion 620, which will be described later, and a warp flow path forming member 614 are provided.
A regulation wall 613 is provided except for the portion where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is disposed. The restriction wall 613 is moved forward by an amount equal to the width of the play area 32 (the width from the front of the game board main body 80 to the back of the cover 14 covering the front of the game board 30) than the attachment portion 612 It has been extended. Therefore, by attaching the front structural member 600 to the predetermined position of the gaming board main body 80, the restriction wall 613 located on the front side of the mounting portion 612 extends into the gaming area 32, and the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32 is the center It is designed to regulate the flow into the case 40. Thereby, the visibility of the display device 41 is secured and the stage unit 6 is
It is designed to limit the number of game balls flowing into 20.

In addition, a warp flow is formed on the left side of the base member 610 on the left side as viewed from the front side to form a warp flow path for receiving the game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40 and guiding it to the stage portion 620. A path forming member 614 is attached. Warp channel forming member 614
Is attached to the front of the attachment portion 612, and the front-rear width of the game area 32 (the width from the front of the game board main body 80 to the back of the cover 14 (transparent member) covering the front of the game board 30) It is intended to extend forward by the amount of Further, the upper end of the warp flow passage forming member 614 is continuous with the lower end of the restriction wall 613 attached so as to extend forward than the attaching portion 612 at the left side when viewed from the front side of the base member 610 It has become.

The warp flow path formed by the warp flow path forming member 614 is a cylindrical flow path having an inner diameter that allows the game balls to flow down in a row, and opens toward the left playing area 32 of the center case 40, It is possible to receive game balls flowing down the game area 32. The upstream end forms an inlet of the warp channel. Furthermore, the warp flow path is an L-shaped flow path for guiding the gaming ball, which has flowed in from the upstream end, downward and to the right and then to the rear. The downstream end opens rearward, and guides the game ball to the left end of the stage unit 620.

In the stage unit 620, the game balls can roll back and forth and left and right, and both left and right sides are inclined surfaces toward the center, and a central portion directly above the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90 protrudes upward. It is formed in a substantially W shape. The central portion of the stage portion 620 protrudes upward but is lower than the left and right ends. The gaming ball having passed through the warp flow path from the left end flows into the stage portion 620, and rolls along the left-right direction. In addition, a game ball bounced below the stage unit 620 can also flow.

In the substantially W-shaped stage portion 620, an inclined surface 621 that descends forward is formed at the lowest portions located on both sides of the upwardly projecting central portion. Due to the inclined surface 621, the gaming ball whose flow is weakened on the stage unit 620 is guided from the front end of the stage unit 620 to the game area 32 below.

Further, in the substantially W-shaped stage portion 620, a groove-like downflow passage 622 which extends along the front-rear direction and descends rearward is provided at the apex of the upwardly projecting center portion. It is formed. The flow-down path 622 is a shallow groove, and many gaming balls roll left and right without fitting into the groove. The gaming ball fitted in the flow-off path 622 is guided rearward, flows into an inlet (not shown), and flows into a guiding channel 623 formed below the stage portion 620. Induction channel 623
Is a flow path that descends forward, and the downstream end is located immediately above the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90 and is designed to flow into the winning device 90 with high probability.

In addition, on the right side of the front component 600 as viewed from the front side, a general drawing start gate 34 through which game balls can pass is provided at the top and bottom. The common view starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a for detecting the passing game ball. Further, a normal fluctuation winning device 37 having a movable member 37 b is provided below the common view starting gate 34. The gaming ball that has won a prize in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is guided to the rear of the front component 600 and flows into a discharge flow path (not shown). Also, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a starting opening 2 switch for detecting a winning game ball and a common electric solenoid 37c for driving the movable member 37b.

On the right side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a flow-down path 615 covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicating with the upper and lower is formed, and gaming balls that did not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 pass downward through the flow-off path 615 Flow down. Below the flow passage 615, a guiding portion 616 is provided. The upper surface 617 of the induction portion is an inclined surface which descends to the left, and the upper surface 617 receives the gaming ball flowing down the downflow passage 615 downward and guides it to the left. Further, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 for displaying information related to the special figure variation display game.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the rear component 700 has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess 711 opened forward, and the rear base member 710 has screw holes and screws. A stopper, a boss for positioning, a recess for receiving the boss, a slit for receiving the rib, and the like are formed so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. Further, at the front end of the rear base member 710, a hook-like fixing portion 713 extending outward perpendicularly to the side wall 712 is formed, and the rear component 700 is formed on the back surface of the game board main body 80. It can be fixed in position. Further, a through hole 715 is formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 so as to penetrate in the front and rear direction. The through holes 715 allow visual recognition of the display surface of the display device 41 attached to the rear of the rear base member 710.

The display device 41 attached to the back surface of the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 includes a liquid crystal display device having a display surface capable of covering the whole of the through holes 715 formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. There is. The display device 41 is attached so that the display surface is on the front side, so that an image of the display surface can be viewed from the front of the game board 30 through the through holes 715 formed in the rear base member 710. It is done. The display device 41 is not limited to one including a liquid crystal display device, and may include, for example, a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A lower movable character unit 730, an upper movable character unit 800, and a central movable character unit 880 are provided inside the recess 711 of the rear base member 710 to form a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operation. ing.

As shown in FIG. 3, the lower movable item unit 730 is disposed below the through hole 715. Figure 5
As shown in FIG. 8, the lower movable service unit 730 includes two first lower movable members 740 and 741 that simulate a brow, and a second lower movable member 770 that simulates a brow, and these first lower portions The movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are operable to appear on the front side of the display device 41. In the lower movable role unit 730, the first lower movable members 740, 741 and the second
A first lower base portion 731 disposed on the front side, a second lower base portion 732 disposed at the center, and a back surface side are provided as a base portion to which a drive mechanism for operating the lower movable member 770 and various members are attached. A third lower base portion 733 is provided.

The motor 734 serving as a drive source for driving the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 has a drive shaft in the front-rear direction at the lower right portion seen from the front side of the third lower base portion 733 It is attached along the line. The first lower movable members 740 and 74 are mounted on the lower movable role unit 730.
The first and second lower movable members 770 are provided, but they are driven by one motor 734. The driving force from the motor 734 is a first gear 735 rotatable about an axis along the longitudinal direction and a second gear 737 rotatable about an axis along the longitudinal direction meshing with the first gear 735. It is simultaneously transmitted. The first gear 735 is for operating the first lower movable members 740 and 741, and on the front side is a first for transmitting power to the first lower movable members 740 and 741.
A drive shaft 736 is provided to extend forward.

Also, the second gear 737 is for operating the second lower movable member 770, and on the back surface side, a second drive shaft 738 for transmitting power to the second lower movable member 770 extends rearward. Provided in As described later, when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 drive the motor 734 in a predetermined direction (here, clockwise when viewed from the front side), the driving force is transmitted via the first drive shaft 736 to operate. When the second lower movable member 770 drives the motor 734 in the direction opposite to the above predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise as viewed from the front side), the driving force is transmitted via the second drive shaft 738. Are configured to operate.

As shown in FIG. 6, one first lower movable member 740 has a bearing portion 742 at the lower end portion, and the pivot portion 751 along the front and rear direction provided with the bearing portion 742 at the upper portion of the second lower base portion 732. Is pivotally supported by The bearing portion 742 is a gear, and the first lower movable member 740 can operate around the rotation shaft 751 by receiving the driving force from the motor 734.
Also, the other first lower movable member 741 is similarly provided with a bearing 743 at its lower end, and this bearing 7
The reference numeral 43 is pivotally supported by a pivot shaft 752 along the front-rear direction provided on the upper portion of the second lower base portion 732. The bearing portion 743 is a gear, and the first lower movable member 741 can operate around the pivot shaft 752 by receiving the driving force from the motor 734.

The gears of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740 pivotally supported by the left pivot shaft 751 when viewed from the front are doubled in the front and rear, and the driving force from the motor 734 with the front gear It is supposed to receive The rear gear transmits the driving force to the gear of the bearing portion 743 provided on the other first lower movable member 741, and the two first lower movable members 740, one motor 734, The 741 can operate at the same time.

The gear on the front side of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740 pivotally supported by the left pivot shaft 751 when viewed from the front is disposed below the bearing portion 742 and is centered on an axis along the longitudinal direction Meshing with the rotatable gear 753. The gear 753 is a slide member 760 provided on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732 slidably to the left and right with respect to the second lower base portion 732.
And the rack gear 761 provided at the top of the
The first lower movable members 740 and 741 are operated by operating left and right.

The slide member 760 is a flat member, and the plate surface is disposed along the front surface of the second lower base portion 732. The slide member 760 is formed with an oblong supported portion 762 that penetrates back and forth and extends to the left and right, and the supported portion 762 is a support shaft that protrudes forward and is formed on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732. By inserting 754, it is supported slidably in the left and right direction. Furthermore, the first lower base portion 731 attached to the front of the second lower base portion 732 covers the slide member 760 so that the slide member 760 is held so as not to fall forward.

Further, in the slide member 760, a linear through hole 763 penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed. The through hole 763 includes an arc-shaped portion and a straight portion extending downward from the right end of the arc-shaped portion when viewed from the front side. The first drive shaft 736 provided in the first gear 735 is inserted from the rear into the through hole 763 so that the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the slide member 760.

FIG. 6A shows an initial state in which both the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are at initial positions. In this state, the first drive shaft 736 is located at the connecting portion between the arc-like portion and the straight portion in the through hole. The radius of the circular arc in the circular arc portion of the through hole 763 is equal to the length from the center of the first gear 735 to the center of the first drive shaft 736. In the initial state, the center of the first gear 735 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arc-like portion of the through hole 763 coincide with each other in the front-rear direction.

From this initial state, when the first gear 735 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front side,
The drive shaft 736 moves the linear portion of the through hole 763 while pushing the slide member 760 leftward. Thereby, the slide member 760 slides to the left as shown in FIG.
When the rack gear 761 rotates the gear 753, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 rotate upward and appear on the front side of the display device 41. When returning to the initial state, the operation is opposite to that described above. The second lower movable member 7 is driven by driving the motor 734 so that the first gear 735 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front side from the initial state as described later.
70 can be operated. At this time, since the first drive shaft 736 moves along the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 763, the first lower movable member 7 does not press the slide member 760.
40, 741 does not work. The same applies to returning the second lower movable member 770 from the operated state to the initial state.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the second lower movable member 770 has a pivot shaft 7 along the front-rear direction at its lower end.
The rotary shaft 71 is rotatably supported by the second lower base portion 732 and the third lower base portion 733. In addition, in the vicinity of the rotation shaft 771, a linear through hole 77 penetrating in the front and back direction is provided.
2 is formed. The through hole 772 has an arc-shaped portion and a straight portion extending from the left end of the arc-shaped portion as viewed from the front side in the state shown in FIG. The second through hole 772
The second drive shaft 738 provided on the gear 737 is inserted from the front, and the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the second lower movable member 770.

FIG. 7A shows an initial state in which both the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are at initial positions. In this state, the second drive shaft 738 is located at the connecting portion between the arc-like portion and the straight portion in the through hole 772. The radius of the circular arc in the circular arc portion of the through hole 772 is equal to the length from the center of the second gear 737 to the center of the second drive shaft 738. Then, in the initial state, the center of the second gear 737 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arc-like portion of the through hole 772 coincide with each other in the front-rear direction.

From this initial state, when the motor 734 is driven to rotate the second gear 737 clockwise as viewed from the front side, the second drive shaft 738 pushes up the second lower movable member 770 upward, and Move the straight part. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7B, the second lower movable member 770 pivots upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41. When returning to the initial state, the operation is opposite to that described above. As described above, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 can be operated by driving the motor 734 such that the second gear 737 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the second drive shaft 738 moves along the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 772, the second lower movable member 770 does not operate without pressing the second lower movable member 770. The same applies to the case where the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are returned from the operating state to the initial state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, in a state where the second lower movable member 770 pivots upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41, effect display is performed to emphasize the second lower movable member 770 on the display device 41. It has become possible. Of course, even when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 appear on the front side of the display device 41, effects may be displayed in the same manner. Further, the display mode of the effect display is not limited to this, and any display that emphasizes the movable member appearing on the front side of the display device 41 may be used.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs are provided in a portion imitating the eyelid in the second lower movable member 770, so that decoration by light emission can be performed. In addition, the letters "Dearka" are also made to emit light. These four characters are designed to emit light independently,
As for "ru", the "no" part and the "le" part are designed to emit light further independently. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7 (b) and FIG. 8, it becomes possible to cause only the “de” part and the “no” part of “ru” to emit light and display “dere”. There is. By dividing the characters and displaying different information as described above, it is possible to perform a novel effect. In addition, the display of "Dele" informs that it is the Dere mode which is one of a plurality of effect modes. In this manner, by notifying the effect mode by the display on the movable member, it is possible to convey the set effect mode to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIG. 3, the upper movable character unit 800 is disposed above and on both sides of the through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the upper movable character unit 800 includes a circular first upper movable member 848 and a second upper movable member 860 imitating a tiger hand, and these first upper movable members 84
An effect is provided by operating the second upper movable member 860.

The upper movable character unit 800 includes a base member 8 attached to the rear base member 710.
And a movable member unit 820 which is vertically movable with respect to the base member 801 and includes a first upper movable member 848. The base member 801 is U-shaped as viewed from the front side, and the upper base portion 802 disposed above the through hole 715 and the left base portion disposed to the left as viewed from the front side of the through hole 715 And a right base portion 804 disposed to the right when viewed from the front side of the through hole 715.

At the right end portion of the left base portion 803 and at the left end portion of the right base portion 804, a guide portion 805 extending in the vertical direction is provided. The guide portion 805 guides the movable member unit 820 in the vertical direction. The left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 are each provided with a drive mechanism 806 for driving the movable member unit 820 up and down.
Each drive mechanism 806 has a motor 807 as a drive source, and by driving the motor 807, the arm 808 is pivoted. At the tip of the arm 808, a drive shaft 809 is provided. The drive shaft 809 is connected to the link member 830 of the movable member unit 820. By driving the motor 807, the link member 830 can be operated to drive the movable member unit 820 up and down.

The movable member unit 820 includes a link member 830 connected to the drive mechanism 806, a unit base 841 for attaching various members, a first upper movable member 848 disposed on the front side of the unit base 841, and a unit base A drive unit 850 disposed on the back surface side of the unit 841 to drive the first upper movable member and the second upper movable member, a back surface cover 849 covering the back surface of the unit base 841 from the rear of the drive unit 850, and a back surface cover 849 And a guided member 842 fixed to the back surface of the base member and guided by a guide portion 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804.

The link members 830 are rotatably attached to the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804, respectively, and are arranged to extend in directions opposite to each other. The link member 830 is a pivot shaft 810 extending forward along the longitudinal direction provided to the left base portion 803 or a pivot shaft extending forward along the longitudinal direction provided to the right base portion 804. A bearing portion 831 into which one end 810 is inserted is provided at one end, and is rotatably supported by the left base portion 803 or the right base portion 804. Further, the link member 830 is formed with a first guide portion 832 which is an elongated hole for inserting the drive shaft 809 provided to the arm 808 of the drive mechanism 806, and the motor 807 is driven to rotate the arm 808. By doing this, the link member 830 is pivoted up and down while the drive shaft 809 moves along the first guide portion 832.

Furthermore, a connection shaft 833 for connecting to the unit base 841 of the movable member unit 820 is provided so as to extend backward at the other end opposite to the one end where the bearing 831 is provided in the link member 830 ing. In addition, the link member 830 includes the link member 8.
A second guide portion 834, which is an elongated hole through which the support shaft 861 provided at one end of the back surface of the second upper movable member 860 attached so as to cover the front side of 30 can be formed At 834, one end of the second upper movable member 860 is guided and supported.

The unit base portion 841 includes a circular main body portion 844 and a supported portion 845 extending from the main body portion 844 to the left and right. A third guiding portion 846 which is a long hole penetrating in the front and rear direction and extending left and right is formed in the supported portion 845, and the connecting shaft 833 of the link member 830 can slide on the third guiding portion 846. The unit base 841 is operated up and down according to the operation of the link member 830 based on the drive of the motor 807. Further, at the center of the main body 844 is formed an insertion portion 847 through which a drive shaft (not shown) extending backward from the center of the circular first upper movable member 848 can be inserted. The insertion portion 847 rotatably supports the first upper movable member 848 by rotatably supporting the inserted drive shaft.

The drive unit 850 includes a motor 851 serving as a drive source, a rotation drive unit 852 connected to the first upper movable member 848, and a drive arm 853 for driving the second upper movable member 860. By driving the motor 851, the rotational drive unit 852 rotates about an axis along the front-rear direction. The drive arm 853 has one end connected to a connection shaft 856 provided on the back surface of the gear 855 rotated by the drive of the motor 851, and the drive arm 853 swings to the left and right by driving the motor 851. It is supposed to be.

The drive shaft of the first upper movable member 848 inserted into the insertion portion 847 of the unit base portion 841 is connected to the rotation center of the rotation drive portion 852 and the drive shaft is rotated by the rotation of the rotation drive portion 852 The first upper movable member 848 is configured to rotate. Also, the drive arm 85
The connection shaft 862 provided on the back surface of the other end of the second upper movable member 860 is connected to the other end of the second upper movable member 860, and the second upper movable member 860 is It is supposed to rock.

Further, back surface cover 849 is fixed to the back surface side of unit base portion 841 so as to cover drive portion 850. A guided member 842 is fixed to the back surface of the back cover 849, and thereby, the guided member 842 and the unit base 841 are fixed. Guided member 842
Is a plate-like member arranged to extend in the left-right direction, and provided at the left and right ends with a guided portion 843 guided by a guide portion 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804. It is done.

10 to 12 show the operation of the upper movable part unit 800. Note that some members are omitted for the sake of explanation. FIG. 10 shows an initial state where the movable member unit 820 is at the upper end of the operating range, and FIGS. 11 and 12 show an operating state where the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operating range. In the initial state shown in FIG. 10, the movable member unit 820 is at the upper end position in the operation range. From this initial state, when the drive mechanism 806 is operated to rotate the drive shaft 809 provided at the tip of the arm 808 toward the display device 41, the link member 830 rotates downward, and the movable member unit 820 Moves down. And, the movable member unit 820
In the operation state in which the lower end of the movement range is located, as shown in FIG. 11A, the drive shaft 809 is located at the lower end in the rotation range, and the link member 830 is also located at the lower end in the rotation range. That is, the first drive mechanism section for the first upper movable member 848 to be a first effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive mechanism 806 and the link member 830 to operate the first effect movable body And constitute a first effect device.

Further, when the drive unit 850 is operated, the first upper movable member 848 rotates in one direction, and the second upper movable member 860 is closer to the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. Repeating the operation from side to side between the state separated from the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. When the second upper movable member 860 is close to the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. 11 (a), the connecting shaft 856 provided on the back surface of the gear 855 is as shown in FIG. 11 (b). In this state, the drive arms 853 bring the second upper movable member 860 closer to the first upper movable member 848. The connection shaft 8 is rotated by rotating the gear 855 from this state.
56 urges the drive arm outwards, causing the second upper movable member 860 to move away from the first upper movable member 848.

Then, in the state where the second upper movable member 860 is most separated from the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. 12A, the connection shaft provided on the back surface of the gear 855 as shown in FIG. 8
56 are most separated from each other, and the drive arm 853 is the first upper movable member 860 as the first
It is in the state of being most separated from the upper movable member 848. By rotating the gear 855 from this state, the connection shaft 856 pulls the drive arm inward, and the second upper movable member 860 operates to approach the first upper movable member 848. As the gear 855 continues to rotate in one direction, this operation is repeated, and the second upper movable member 860 moves to the left and right. That is, the second upper movable member 860 is a second effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive unit 850 is a second drive mechanism portion for operating the second effect movable body. These constitute the second effect device.

In addition, the second upper movable member 860 is disposed so as to cover and hide the link member 830 in both the initial position shown in FIG. 10 and the position after the operation shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. It is supposed to work. Link member 830 with the second upper movable member 860 operating
Can be used to attract the player's awareness to the second upper movable member 860, effectively prevent the line of sight from going to the link member 830, and has a higher hiding effect than in the case of simply covering with a decorative member that does not operate. You get Also, particularly in the initial position, as shown in FIG.
Is covered so as not to be visible from the player. As a result, in the initial position which occupies most of the game, unnecessary portions can not be seen from the player and the decorativeness is improved.

From the above, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and in the gaming machine 10 that generates the special game state advantageous to the player when the game result is a special result, the game-related effects are controlled Controlled by the effect control means (effect control device 300) and the effect control means,
The first effect device (the first upper movable member 848, the drive mechanism 806, the link member 830) and the second effect device (the second upper movable member 860, the drive unit 85) that perform effects relating to the game by operating
0), and the first effect device is a first effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation
The first effect mechanism includes a first upper movable member 848) and a first drive mechanism (drive mechanism 806, link member 830) for operating the first effect movable body, and the second effect device performs a predetermined effect operation And a second drive mechanism unit (drive unit 850) for operating the second effect movable body, and the first drive mechanism unit The second effect movable body is disposed so as to cover it.

Therefore, since the second effect movable body is disposed so as to cover the first drive mechanism portion, it becomes difficult for the player to see an unnecessary part, and the effect of the effect device operated can be enhanced. Can be improved. In particular, by covering the first drive mechanism with the second effect movable body operating, the player's awareness can be attracted to the second effect movable body, and the line of sight can be effectively prevented from going to the first drive mechanism. As compared with the case of simply covering with a decorative member that does not operate, a high hiding effect can be obtained.

In addition, the second effect movable body (the second upper movable member 860) is at least a first effect movable body (the first
The first drive mechanism (link member 830) with the upper movable member 848 in the initial position
Is covered so as not to be visible to the player. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to see an unnecessary part when in the initial position which occupies most of the game, so that the rendering effect by the operating rendering device can be enhanced, and the interest of the gaming can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 3, the central movable product unit 880 is disposed to surround the through hole 715. As shown in FIG. 13 to FIG. 15, the central movable character unit 880 operates such that a plurality of central movable effect members 900, 910, 920, 930 divided into four are combined in front of the display device 41. It is the one that performs the

The center movable character unit 880 includes a movable effect base member 881 attached to the rear base member 710. In addition, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 which are disposed on the front upper side of the movable effect base member 881 and operate, and the movable effect base member 8
And a third central movable effect member 920 and a fourth central movable effect member 930 which are disposed and operated on the lower side of the front surface 81.

In the movable effect base member 881, the first center movable effect member 900 and the second center movable effect member 910 are attached at the center in the left-right direction of the portion located on the upper side of the display device 41. In this portion, a first pivot shaft 882 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the first central movable effect member, and the operation of the first central movable effect member are guided. A first guiding portion 883 is provided which is a long hole penetrating back and forth for the purpose. In addition, a second rotation shaft 884 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the second central movable effect member.
A second guide portion 885 is provided which is a long hole penetrating back and forth for guiding the operation of the second central movable effect member.

A drive source for operating the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 is on the right side as viewed from the front side of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located above the display device 41. A motor 886 is provided. A plurality of gears or the like for transmitting the driving force of the motor 886 to the first central movable effect member 900 is provided on the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 and in the portion from the first rotation shaft 882 to the motor 886 A drive mechanism is disposed, and a back surface cover 896 is attached to cover the back surface of the drive mechanism.

Further, in the movable effect base member 881, the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are attached to the center in the left-right direction of the portion positioned below the display device 41. In this part, the operation of the third pivot shaft 891 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the third central movable effect member and the operation of the third central movable effect member are guided. A third guiding portion 892 is provided which is a long hole penetrating back and forth for the purpose. In addition, the fourth pivot shaft 893 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the fourth central movable effect member, and the longitudinal for guiding the operation of the fourth central movable effect member The fourth hole is a long hole
A guide 894 is provided. And, the display device 4 in the movable effect base member 881
The third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth on the left side when viewed from the front side of the lower portion of
A motor 895 serving as a drive source for operating the central movable effect member 930 is provided.

The first central movable effect member 900 disposed at the upper right portion includes a decorative portion 901 which is to be decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. In addition, a first bearing portion 902 is provided at one end of the first central movable effect member 900 before and after the first pivot shaft 882 is inserted, and the first central movable effect member 900 is the first It is pivotally supported around a dynamic shaft 882.

Further, in the vicinity of the first bearing portion 902, a fan-shaped first sector gear 903 and a second sector gear 904 centered on the rotation center of the first central movable effect member 900 are provided. The first sector gear 903 is provided to face the right as viewed from the front side. The first sector gear 903 faces the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 through penetrating portions 887 which are formed on the right side of the first rotation shaft 882 of the movable effect base member 881 and which penetrates back and forth. There is. The rear surface side of the movable effect base member 881 meshes with a gear for transmitting the driving force from the motor 886.

Further, the second sector gear 904 is provided to face the left as viewed from the front side. The second sector gear 904 is engaged with a third sector gear 913 provided on a second central movable effect member 910 disposed adjacent to the left of the first central movable effect member 900. As a result, the driving force from the motor 886 received by the first sector gear 903 is also transmitted to the second central movable effect member 910 via the second sector gear 904. Further, on the back surface of the first center movable effect member 900, a guided shaft 905 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 905 is inserted into the first guide portion 883, and the first center movable effect member 900.
When the rotary movement is performed, the smooth movement of the first center movable effect member 900 is enabled by being guided along the extension direction of the first guide portion 883.

The second center movable presentation member 910 disposed at the upper left portion includes a decorative portion 911 which is to be decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Further, at one end of the second central movable effect member 910, there is provided a second bearing portion 912 penetrating back and forth through which the second pivot shaft 884 is inserted, and the second central movable effect member 910 is the second It is pivotally supported about a dynamic shaft 884.

Further, in the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912, a fan-shaped third sector gear 913 centering on the rotation center of the second center movable presentation member 910 is provided. The third sector gear 913 is provided to face the right as viewed from the front side. The third sector gear 913 engages with the second sector gear 904 provided on the first center movable effect member 900 disposed adjacent to the right of the second center movable effect member 910. Further, on the back surface of the second central movable effect member 910, a guided shaft 914 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 914 is a second guiding portion 885.
When the second central movable effect member 910 rotates.
The smooth operation of the second center movable presentation member 910 is enabled by being guided along the extension direction of the guide portion 885.

In the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912, an engaging portion 915 extending rearward is provided.
The engaging portion 915 is configured to face the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 through the penetrating portions 888 that are formed on the left side of the second rotation shaft 884 in the movable effect base member 881 and that penetrates back and forth. There is. Then, as shown in FIG. 14B, one end portion of the torsion coil spring 889 is engaged with the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881. The other end of the torsion coil spring 889 is locked to a locking portion 890 formed on the movable effect base member 881 so that the engaging portion 915 of the second central movable effect member 910 is urged upward. It is supposed to be.
Thereby, the biasing force of the torsion coil spring 889 is the first center movable effect member 900 and the second.
The first movable movable member 900 and the second movable movable member 910, which are moved downward, return to the initial position while assisting in holding the central movable effect member 910 at the initial position, which is the position of the upper end in the operation range. It helps in the case.

As shown in FIG. 13, the third central movable effect member 920 disposed at the lower left portion includes a decorative portion 921 which is to be decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. In addition, a third bearing portion 922 is provided at one end of the third central movable effect member 920 before and after the third pivot shaft 891 is inserted, and the third central movable effect member 920 is the third It is pivotally supported rotatably about a dynamic shaft 891.

Further, in the vicinity of the third bearing portion 922, a sector-shaped fourth sector gear 923 and a fifth sector gear 924 centering around the rotation center of the third central movable effect member 920 are provided. The fourth sector gear 923 is provided to face the lower left side as viewed from the front side. This fourth sector gear 923
The motor 89 is disposed at the lower left portion of the third rotation shaft 891 in the movable effect base member 881.
It meshes with the gear of 5.

The fifth sector gear 924 is provided to face the right as viewed from the front side. The fifth sector gear 924 meshes with the sixth sector gear 933 provided on the fourth central movable effect member 930 disposed adjacent to the right side of the third central movable effect member 920. Accordingly, the driving force from the motor 895 received by the fourth sector gear 923 is also transmitted to the fourth central movable effect member 930 via the fifth sector gear 924. Further, on the rear surface of the third central movable effect member 920, a guided shaft 925 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 925 is inserted into the third guide portion 892 and the third center movable effect member 920
When rotating, it is guided along the extending direction of the third guide portion 892, thereby enabling the smooth operation of the third center movable effect member 920.

The fourth central movable effect member 930 disposed at the lower right portion includes a decorative portion 931 which is to be decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. In addition, a fourth bearing portion 932 is provided at one end of the fourth central movable effect member 930, which is penetrated before and after the fourth pivot shaft 893 is inserted, and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is the fourth It is pivotally supported rotatably about a dynamic shaft 893.

Further, in the vicinity of the fourth bearing portion 932, a fan-shaped sixth sector gear 933 and a seventh sector gear 934 are provided around the rotation center of the fourth central movable effect member 930. The sixth sector gear 933 is provided to face the left as viewed from the front side. The sixth sector gear 933 engages with the fifth sector gear 924 provided on the third central movable effect member 920 disposed adjacent to the left side of the fourth central movable effect member 930. Further, on the rear surface of the fourth central movable effect member 930, a guided shaft 935 extending rearward is provided. This guided shaft 9
The fourth guide portion 894 is inserted into the fourth guide portion 894, and when the fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates, the third central movable effect member 930 is guided along the extending direction of the fourth guide portion 894. A smooth operation of the central movable effect producing member 930 is enabled.

The seventh sector gear 934 is provided to face the lower right side as viewed from the front side. The seventh sector gear 934 is a biasing mechanism 940 disposed at the lower right of the fourth central movable effect member 930.
It meshes with an eighth sector gear 942 provided on the The biasing mechanism 940 is pivotable about a pivot shaft 941 in the front-rear direction, and includes an eighth sector gear 942. The biasing mechanism 940 is provided so as to extend leftward from the pivot shaft as viewed from the front side, and is biased downward (counterclockwise direction) by a biasing member (not shown). By this,
The third center movable effect member 920 and the fourth center movable effect member 930 are urged in the direction toward the initial position, which is the position of the lower end in the operation range. Therefore, the biasing force by the biasing mechanism assists in holding the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 at the initial position, and also operates the third central movable effect member 920 operated upward. It helps the fourth center movable effect member 930 to return to the initial position.

The central movable service unit 880 configured as described above has the initial state shown in FIG.
It can be converted to the operation completed state shown in FIG. In the initial state shown in FIG. 14, the first center movable effect member 900 and the second center movable effect member 910 are at the initial position which is the upper end of the operating range,
The third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are at an initial position, which is the lower end of the operation range, and are in a state of being retracted from the front surface of the display device 41. From this initial state, when the motor 886 is operated, the first center movable effect member 900 and the second center movable effect member 910 are pivoted to descend, and when the motor 895 is operated, the third center movable effect member 9
The twenty and fourth central movable effect members 930 rotate to ascend.

Then, in the operation completed state shown in FIG. 15, the decorative portion 901 of the first center movable effect member 900.
, The decoration portion 911 of the second central movable effect member 910, the decorative portion 9 of the third central movable effect member 920
The decorative portions 931 of the 21 and the fourth center movable effect members 930 are disposed to overlap the front surface of the display device 41. Further, the end face of each of the decorative parts 901, 911, 921 and 931 is opposed to and adjacent to the end face of the adjacent decorative part 901, 911, 921 and 931 to form one annular shape in total ing. Each of the decorative portions 901, 911, 921 and 931 is made of a material capable of transmitting light, and the display device 41 can be viewed through the decorative portions 901, 911, 921 and 931.

Next, the configuration of the special variation winning device 38 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 16 to 18, the special variation winning device 38 has a flow path rear wall 962 disposed along the front of the game board main body 80,
Between the flow path front wall 952 disposed in front of the flow path rear wall 962, the game ball is provided with a flow down flow path 38f which can flow down in a row. The flow-down path 38f is inclined to the left as viewed from the front side, and the gaming balls flow downward in a row in a row.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the bottom surface of the substantially central portion of the flow-down path 38 f is configured by an opening / closing member 990 which can slide in the front-rear direction. The opening and closing member 990 is shown in FIGS.
As shown in (a), the closed state in which the game ball can not win in the special variation winning device 38 (large winning opening 38d) by protruding forward as shown in (b) of FIG. Winning mouth 3
The game ball can be converted to the open state where the game ball can win a prize to 8 d. That is, the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 38f flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state, passes through the big winning opening 38d, and when the opening / closing member 990 is in the open state. It is supposed to flow into the big winning opening. In addition, when the opening and closing member 990 is in the closed state, the flow path front wall 9
Although there is a gap between it and 52, it is a gap to such an extent that game balls can not flow into it.

As shown in FIG. 19, the special variation winning device 38 has a front wall member 950 including a flow path front wall 952.
And a rear wall member 960 having a flow path rear wall 962, a main body 970 to which the opening / closing member 990 and the like are attached, and a cover member 979 which covers the back of the main body 970.

The front wall member 950 includes a plate-like front surface 951. The front surface of the front portion 951 is disposed close to the back surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15 so that the game ball does not flow forward of the front surface. Further, the front surface of the front portion 951 is a surface that can be viewed by the player, and it is a lens that is decorated and can transmit light. An LED (not shown) is arranged on the back surface of the front wall member 950 as a decoration means, and the special fluctuation winning device 38 can be decorated with light. The color of the light for decorating the special variation winning device 38 is a color different from the color of light emitted from the batch display device 50, thereby preventing the display of the adjacent batch display device 50 from being obscured. Further, an upper portion of the plate-like front surface portion 951 is a flow path front wall 952 which forms a side wall on the front side of the flow-down path 38f.

As shown in FIG. 17, on the back side of the flow path front wall 952, a plurality of front wall protrusions 9 that project rearward are provided.
54 are provided. The front wall projecting portion 954 is a triangular prism-shaped projecting portion in which the left and right side surfaces are slopes, and the projecting portion 9 is provided in front of each of the projecting portions 992 provided in the opening / closing member 990.
It is provided to be located slightly upstream with respect to 92. The front wall projecting portion 954 and the projecting portion 992 have a function of guiding the gaming ball flowing to the left backward, in order to meander the gaming ball flowing down the flowing path 38 f as described later. That is, the gaming balls flowing down the flow-off path 38f form a contact portion that can be contacted. With the front wall projection 954 located slightly upstream,
The gaming ball flowing downward to the left is guided to the rear by the front wall projection 954 and then to the rear by the projection 992 so that the gaming ball can be effectively guided.

As shown in FIG. 20, on the back surface side of the front wall member 950, a plurality of rib-like extending walls 953 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-like front surface portion 951 are provided. The extension wall 953 has different functions depending on the place where it is provided, and a bottom portion 953a that forms the bottom surface of the downflow passage 38f.
A large winning opening forming portion 953b forming the side wall and bottom of the large winning opening 38d, a guiding flow path forming portion 953c forming a guiding flow channel 955 for guiding the gaming ball that has won the large winning opening 38d, and the large winning opening switch 38a A switch mounting portion forming portion 953d forming the mounting portion 956 to be mounted, a general winning hole forming portion 953e forming the general winning opening 35, and a surrounding wall preventing intrusion of the game ball flowing down around the special fluctuation winning device 38 It has a function as 953 f.

The bottom portion 953a that forms the bottom surface of the flow-down path 38f is an inclined surface that slopes to the right when viewed from the back surface side. Also, the special winning opening formation portion 953b is inclined so as to collect the gaming balls having flowed into the special winning opening 38d into the guiding channel 955. A game ball can flow in a row into the guiding channel 955, and a winning hole switch 38a is provided in the flowing portion into the guiding channel 955. As a result, all the game balls having flowed into the special winning opening 38d are detected by the special winning opening switch 38a and then flow into the guiding channel 955. The induction flow path 955 formed by the induction flow path formation portion 953 c is a flow path for guiding the gaming ball from the big winning opening 38 d to the back surface side of the gaming board 30, and the back surface of the front surface portion 951 Ribs 957 are formed for guiding to. In addition, the general winning a prize opening formation part 953e forms the general winning a prize opening 35 which is opened to the right when viewed from the front side of the special variation winning device 38. This general winning opening 3 is on the back of the front part 951
A rib 958 is formed to guide the gaming ball having flowed into 5 backward.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the rear wall member 960 is provided with a plate-like rear surface portion 961. A front wall member 950 is attached to a front surface of the rear surface portion 961, and a part of the front surface of the rear surface portion 961 which is not hidden by the front wall member 950 is decorated. An upper portion of the rear surface portion 961 is a flow path rear wall 962 which forms a rear side wall of the flow-down path 38f. Also, the flow path rear wall 9
At a position to be the lower end of the opening 62, an opening and closing member insertion portion 963 which penetrates in the back and forth direction for inserting the opening and closing member 990 from the back surface side of the rear wall member 960 is formed.

Further, on the front side of the flow path rear wall 962, a plurality of rear wall protrusions 964 that project forward are provided. As shown in FIG. 17, the rear wall projecting portion 964 is a triangular prism-shaped projecting portion in which the left and right side surfaces are sloped, and is provided at a position adjacent to the recess 993 provided in the opening / closing member 990. The rear wall projection 964 and the recess 993 have a function of guiding the gaming ball flowing to the left forward, in order to meander the gaming ball flowing down the flowing path 38 f as described later. That is, the gaming balls flowing down the flow-off path 38f form a contact portion that can be contacted. Since the rear wall projection 964 is provided adjacent to the recess 993, the gaming ball flows down at the portion where the recess 993 is not provided.
It is possible to prevent the right side portion of 8f from flowing down, and it is possible to make the gaming ball meander reliably.

Referring back to FIG. 21, in the front wall member 950, which is the central portion of the rear surface portion 961, the induction flow channel 95 is provided.
In a portion opposed to the portion where 5 is formed, a penetrating portion 968 which is penetrated back and forth so that the induction channel 955 communicates with the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961 is formed. In addition, the switch mounting portion 9 penetrates back and forth so as to be able to accommodate the rear portion of the big winning opening switch 38a above the induction flow channel 955.
65 are formed. Further, on the right side portion of the rear face portion 961 and facing the portion where the general winning opening 35 is formed in the front wall member 950, the gaming balls winning in the general winning opening 35 are made to the back side of the rear wall member 960. A penetrating portion 966 a which is penetrated back and forth is formed so as to communicate the general winning hole flow passage 966 to be guided with the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961.

As shown in FIG. 21B, on the back surface side of the rear wall member 960, a plurality of rib-like extending walls 967 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-like rear surface portion 961 are provided. The extending wall 967 has different functions depending on the place where it is provided, and a guiding channel forming portion 967a forming the guiding channel 955, and a general winning hole channel forming portion 967b forming the general winning hole channel 966, It has a function as a surrounding wall 967c that forms the periphery of the special variation winning device 38.

The guiding channel forming portion 967a forms a guiding channel 955 so as to guide the gaming ball guided from the penetrating portion 968 to the back side downward. In addition, an induction channel 955 formed in the rear surface portion 961
The rib 969 for guiding a game ball to the back is formed at the downstream end of the. The general winning opening flow passage forming portion 967 b forms a general winning opening flow passage 966 so as to guide the gaming ball guided from the penetrating portion 966 a to the back side downward. Further, a rib 966 b for guiding the game ball backward is formed at the downstream end of the general winning opening channel 966 formed in the rear face portion 961.

The surrounding wall 967c is formed in accordance with the shape of the penetrating portion formed in the portion to which the special variation winning device 38 is attached in the game board main body 80, and the special variation winning device 3
When 8 is attached to the game board main body 80, the surrounding wall 967c is in a state of being inserted into the through portion. Further, the back surface of the rear surface portion 961 located outside the surrounding wall 967c is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the special variation winning device 38 is attached to the game board main body 80. A plurality of bosses for positioning and a plurality of screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 22, the main body 970 includes a peripheral wall 971 that coincides with the peripheral wall 967 c of the rear wall member 960 in the front-rear direction. The main body portion 970 is provided with a rear wall portion 972 which is opposite to the guide channel forming portion 967 a formed on the back surface of the rear wall member 960 and forms a rear wall of the guide channel 955. In the rear wall portion 972, the gaming ball guided to the back surface of the rear wall member 960 through the penetrating portion 968 is formed in the guiding flow path 955 at a position facing the penetrating portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960. Ribs 973 are formed to guide rightward along. Further, at a position facing the downstream end of the guide channel 955 formed in the rear wall member 960 in the rear wall portion 972, a penetrating portion 974 penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed. The gaming ball which has flowed down the guiding channel 955 is guided to the rear by the rib 969 formed on the back wall member 960, passes through the penetrating portion 974, and is guided to the back side of the main body 970 to the outside of the gaming machine. Flow into the discharge channel to discharge the

In a portion facing the downstream end of the general winning opening channel 966 formed in the back wall member 960, a penetration for guiding the game ball flowing down the general winning opening channel 966 to the back surface side of the main body 970 Portion 975 is formed. The game ball which has flowed down the general winning opening flow path 966 is guided to the back side of the main body 970 through the penetrating portion 975 and detected by the winning opening switch 35a, and then the discharging flow is for discharging the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine. It is supposed to flow into the road.

Further, at a position facing the opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960, an opening / closing member holding portion 976 for guiding and supporting the opening / closing member 990 operating in the front-rear direction is provided. The opening and closing member holding portion 976 is a slit-like penetrating portion penetrating the front and back of the main body portion 970,
A guide wall 977 that can be in contact with the upper, lower, left, and right surfaces of the opening and closing member 990 and can guide and support the opening and closing member 990 is provided to extend along the front-rear direction.

An opening and closing member unit 980 including an opening and closing member 990 and an operating mechanism for operating the opening and closing member 990 is attached to the back surface side of the main body 970. The opening and closing member unit 980 is
A unit base member 981 for mounting various members, an opening / closing member 990 which can slide in the front-rear direction, and a special winning opening solenoid 38b for operating the opening / closing member 990 are provided.

The opening and closing member unit 980 opens and closes the special fluctuation winning device 38 with the opening and closing member 990 projecting forward as shown in FIG. 23A, and opens and closes as shown in FIG. 23B. The open / close member 990 can be converted to a state in which the special variation winning device 38 is opened with the member 990 retracted to the rear. The opening / closing member 990 can appear above the winning opening 38 d through the opening / closing member holding portion 976 formed in the main body 970 and the opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960.

The opening and closing member 990 is slidably disposed forward and backward in a holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981. As shown in FIG. 24 (a), the opening and closing member 990 is configured such that the front end portion of the upper surface of the upper surface of the winning opening 38d which is located above the large winning opening 38d is lowered by one step.
It is made into the flow-path formation part 991 which makes the bottom face of.

The flow passage forming portion 991 is formed with a plurality of projecting portions 992 projecting upward in the vicinity of the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990. The side surface on the upstream side of the projecting portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side is directed to the downstream side, and it is possible to smoothly guide the game ball flowing down from the right toward the recess 993 to the rear. Further, the downstream side surface of the projecting portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side is directed to the upstream side, so that it can be guided in the downstream direction when the game ball flowing out forward from the recess 993 comes in contact.

Further, a recessed portion 993 in which the stepped portion is recessed rearward is formed in the stepped portion of the flow path forming portion 991 which is one step lower and which is opposed to the projecting portion 992 in the sliding direction. Recess 9
The distance between the side surface of the step portion forming the portion 93 and the side surface of the projecting portion 992 is such that the game balls can flow down in a row at any position. Further, the side surface on the downstream side of the side surfaces of the step portion forming the recess 993 is obliquely formed so that the front side is directed to the downstream side, and the gaming ball can smoothly flow out from the recess 993 to the front There is.

That is, on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990, undulations such as the protruding portion 992 and the recessed portion 993 are provided. As will be described later, the time during which the game balls stay on the opening and closing member 990 is extended by such unevenness.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24B, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is an oblique surface which falls to the left, and the game ball is allowed to flow to the left. Further, on the left and right of the lower surface of the opening and closing member 990, sliding portions 994 extending downward are formed. The sliding portion 994 is formed to extend along the front-rear direction, and the open / close member 990 is held on the holding portion 982 by coming into contact with the upper surface of the holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981. It becomes possible to slide.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23A, the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996 which is inclined such that the lower end is positioned rearward of the upper end. By forming the inclined surface 996 in this manner, when the opening and closing member 990 is brought into the closed state, the opening and closing member 990 and the flow path front wall 952 are formed.
When there is a game ball in between, the game ball can be released upward or downward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at the central portion of the lower surface of the opening / closing member 990, a connection portion 995 to which a drive arm 983 for transmitting the driving force from the winning opening solenoid 38b for driving the opening / closing member 990 is connected ing. The drive arm 983 is located below the holding portion 982. As shown in FIG. 25B, the holding portion 982 is formed with a through portion 982a through which the connection pin 983a extending upward from the drive arm 983 can be inserted. The connection pin 983a is an opening and closing member It is connected to the connection part 995 of 990. Also, as shown in FIG.
As shown in a), the holding portion 982 is formed with a guide rib 982 b located on the left and right of the connection portion 995 and extending in the front-rear direction. The guide rib 982b guides the opening / closing member 990 in the front-rear direction by guiding the connecting portion 995 in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 26, one end of the drive arm 983 is connected to a connecting member 984 connected to the big winning opening solenoid 38b. Further, the drive arm 983 is provided with a pivot shaft 983b along the vertical direction, and can be pivoted about the pivot shaft 983b. Note that
The pivot shaft 983 b is rotatably held by being pinched from the front and rear by the main body 970 and the rear wall member 960 (see FIG. 19).

As shown in FIG. 26 (a), when the special variation winning device 38 is in the closed state, the drive shaft 38g of the big winning opening solenoid 38b is extended and the drive arm 983 is positioned at the front end of the rotation range . In this state, the drive arm 983 is pivoted most in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear surface side about the pivot shaft 983b, and the connection pin 983a is located at the front end of the movement range.

When the special variation winning device 38 is opened from this state, the special winning opening solenoid 38b
By retracting the drive shaft 38g, the drive arm 983 is pivoted counterclockwise around the pivot shaft 983b as viewed from the rear surface side, and the connection pin 983a is moved rearward to open and close the opening / closing member Evacuate 990 backwards. As a result, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), the special fluctuation winning device 38 is in the open state. When the special variation winning device 38 is closed, the reverse operation to the above-described operation is performed.

In FIGS. 27-30, the flow-down aspect of the gaming ball in the special variation winning device 38 is shown. In FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, a portion of the front wall member 950 is seen through for the sake of explanation. The game ball flowing down from the right to the left in the flow-down passage 38 f is first the rear wall projecting portion 964 located most upstream.
Thus, it is guided obliquely forward and flows into the flow path forming portion 991 of the opening and closing member 990. Then, while being guided obliquely backward by the front wall projection 954, the projection 99 of the opening and closing member 990
It is guided obliquely backward by 2 and flows into the recess 993. The game ball that has flowed into the recess 993 is
From the downstream side surface of the recess 993 obliquely formed toward the downstream side, and the front wall projection 954 adjacent to the downstream side, it is guided to the oblique front again.

Thereafter, the guidance to the oblique back by the front wall projection 954 and the projection 992 and the guidance to the oblique front by the recess 993 and the back wall projection 964 are repeated, and the gaming ball flowing down the falling path 38f meanders back and forth While it will flow down. As a result, there is no ups and downs of the front wall projecting portion 954, the rear wall projecting portion 964, the projecting portion 992, the recess 993 and the like in the flow-down path 38f, and the time of staying on the opening and closing member 990 is longer than when flowing straight down. It will be. For this reason, FIG. 29 and FIG. 3
As shown in 0 (a), the gaming ball is always present on the opening and closing member 990, and even when the opening time of the special variation winning device 38 is short, when the opening and closing member 990 is opened as shown in FIG.
As shown in), there is a high possibility that the game ball existing on the opening and closing member 990 falls and wins in the large winning opening 38d, to give the player a feeling of expectation for winning even if the opening is short. Can. In addition, it is preferable to secure the time required for the gaming ball to stay on the opening and closing member 990 for the interval time in which the special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed before the short open round. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 31A, when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, the gaming ball which has been retained on the opening and closing member 990 is brought into contact with the projecting portion 992 formed on the opening and closing member 990 as shown in FIG. As shown in 31 (b), it is bounced and guided away from the big winning opening 38d. In addition, the bouncing game ball may be further separated from the big winning opening 38d by contacting the front wall projecting portion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protruding portion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, and the like. Also, the opening and closing member 990
Since the protrusions 992 formed in are spaced apart such that the game balls can pass, they may fall without contacting the protrusions 992 through this interval. In addition, special fluctuation winning device 38 opening time when it becomes short opening which it mentions later becomes time which can flow into big winning a prize opening 38d even if it is the game ball which contacts and bounces to projection 992 etc as mentioned above ing. Thus, even if the opening is short, it is possible to flow into the big winning opening 38d.

By providing the projecting portion 992, the front wall projecting portion 954, and the rear wall projecting portion 964 in this manner, the rolling aspect of the game ball when opening the opening / closing member 990 becomes colorful, and the interest of the game can be improved. . In addition, when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, the inflow timings of the plurality of gaming balls existing on the opening and closing member 990 to the large winning opening 38d can be shifted, and the ball clogging occurs in the large winning opening 38d. Can be prevented.

In addition, the front wall projecting portion 954, the rear wall projecting portion 964 and the projecting portion 992 are undulated in the flow-down path 38f.
Although the recess 993 is provided, it may be other than this. For example, a groove may be formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 as a relief, and the gaming ball may flow down while meandering along the groove. In addition, rib-like protrusions and grooves are provided on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the flow-down direction as undulations, so that the game balls flow downward while being moved vertically by the protrusions and grooves. You may

From the above, the start area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second start winning opening) provided in the gaming area 32 is provided with the gaming board 30 provided with the gaming area 32 in which gaming balls can flow 97) a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed based on the winning of the game ball, and a special game state which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result The game machine is provided with a special fluctuation winning device 38 which can be converted into a closed state where the gaming ball can not win a prize and an open state where the gaming ball can win a prize, and is converted into an open state in the special gaming state. An opening and closing member which can receive a game ball from an opening facing upward, closes the opening in the closed state to disable winning of the game ball, and opens the opening in the open state to enable winning of the game ball. 990 is equipped In the closed state, the game ball is configured to allow the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 to flow downward, and the opening and closing member 990 is provided with relief (protrusion 992, recess 993) on the upper surface, and the opening and closing is more than in the case without the relief. It will be made for the time when a game ball stays in the upper surface of member 990 to become long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game balls in the special game state, and to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, around the outflow passage 38 f constituted by the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990, the outflow passage 38.
The contact part (front wall protrusion part 954, the back wall protrusion part 964) which the game ball which flows down f can contact will be provided. Therefore, by contacting the contact portion, the time for which the gaming balls stay on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 becomes longer, and the decrease of the gaming balls during the special gaming state can be suppressed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

In the closed state, the game ball is made to flow down from one of the left and right ends of the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 to the other, and the unevenness formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 It will be formed so as to meander. Therefore, the opening and closing member 990
The time during which the game balls stay on the upper surface of the game becomes longer, and the decrease of the game balls in the special game state can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The special variation winning device 38 is opened and closed by the opening and closing member 990 which slides in the front and rear direction, but in the closed state, the upper surface becomes parallel so as to cover the big winning opening 38d.
In the case of the open state, it may be configured to rotate downward.

In addition, the game area 30 is provided with a game area 32 in which game balls can flow, and a start area provided in the game area 32 (a first start winning opening 36, a normal fluctuation winning device 37, a second start winning opening 97).
A variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of identification information based on the winning of the game ball, and generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result The game ball is provided with a special fluctuation winning device 38 which can be converted to an open state in which the game ball can not win and the game ball can be converted to an open state in the special gaming state. The game ball can be won from the opening facing to the front, it protrudes forward in the closed state to close the opening and disable the game ball winning and retracts backward in the open state to open the opening to open the game ball An opening and closing member 990 slidingly movable in the front and back direction is provided to enable winning, and in the closed state, the game ball is allowed to flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990. 992, a recess 993) is provided, and the time during which the gaming balls stay on the top surface of the opening and closing member 990 is longer than in the case where there is no unevenness, and the front end portion of the opening and closing member 990 is An inclined surface 996 is formed such that the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction decreases.

Therefore, the opening / closing member 990 is provided with a relief on the upper surface, and the time during which the gaming ball is retained on the upper surface of the opening / closing member is longer than in the absence of the relief. Can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, since the inclined surface 996 is formed at the front end portion of the opening and closing member 990 so that the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction decreases toward the front end, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being pinched when closing.

Further, the upper surface of the front end portion of the opening and closing member 990 is a flat surface along the sliding direction, and the portion below the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being pinched at the time of closing, and it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game ball in the special game state by being guided downward by the inclined surface 996 and to enhance the interest of the game. it can.

FIG. 32 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (called an amusement chip (IC)).
It includes a CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a quartz oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (quartz oscillator) 113 that generates a clock serving as a reference of an operation clock or timer interrupt of the CPU and a random number generation circuit. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 include DC 32 V, DC 12 V, D generated by the power supply apparatus 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as C5V, is supplied and enabled.

The power supply device 400 generates an AC-voltage that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from the 24 V AC power supply.
The normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter or a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from the voltage of DC32V, etc. Backup power supply 420
And a control signal generation unit 430 which generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal notifying the game control apparatus 100 of occurrence and recovery of a power failure.

In this embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 or the main substrate. Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the gaming microcomputer 11 of the gaming control device 100.
The data stored in the RAM 1 is stored in the RAM 1 (especially the built-in RAM) and stored during the power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the processing for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111 B and RA which can be read and written any time
M (random access memory) 111C is provided.

The ROM 111B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as ROM 111 B or RAM 11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when it becomes a special result mode
In the gaming machine 10 that is
This refers to a display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same State that became identification information,
However, the special result mode may be excluded) and the remaining variable display area may be variably displayed from this reach state.

And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different). Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and Premier reach are set. Expected values are: No reach <Normal reach <Special 1 reach <Special 2 reach <Special 3 reach <
It becomes high in order of Premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in various reach and variation displays without reach) Random number generation for generating a hit random number etc for determining hit of the spread map variation display game The circuit includes a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, CPU 111A, in the processing regarding the special figure fluctuation display game, ROM 111B
One of the variation pattern tables is acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result of the special view variation display game
Big hit or small hit) or lost), probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special view fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, normal fluctuation winning device 3 as the current gaming state
One of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the operation state of 7 (time-saving operation state (general power support state)), the number of starting memories, and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize balls. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

In the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, a normal fluctuation winning device 37
Start opening 2 switch 37a, start opening 3 switch 97a in the second start winning opening 97, gate switch 34a in the common view start gate 34, winning opening switch 35a, special fluctuation winning device 38
Connected to the big winning opening switch 38a, the high level supplied from these switches is 1
A negative logic signal such as 1 V and a low level of 7 V is input, and an interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which converts the signal into a 0 V-5 V positive logic signal. Proximity I / F 12
1 is that the input range is 7 V-11 V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is incorrectly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected and becomes floating. Such an abnormal state can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F 1
Among the outputs of 21, the detection signals of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the start opening 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a and the special winning opening switch 38a are input to the second input port 123 Ru. Also, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121,
A detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected is input to the third input port 124. In addition, the third input port 124 may be a detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or the gaming machine 1.
A detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of 0, etc., the game machine 10
A detection signal of a main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like is also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is the main substrate 10
It is also supplied from the 0 through the relay board 70 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus.
Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37
In addition to the second input port 123, the detection signal of the a, start opening 3 switch 97a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read out by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payment control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 can accept a command), a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that the game ball is stored in the lower tray 23 by a predetermined amount or more (full)), a touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the above and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET denoised by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
While being directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, it is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RESET is input to each port 122, 123 of the input unit 120,
It is not supplied to 124. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done to the trial shot test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass the buffer. ing. In the port on the relay board 70, the gaming microcomputer 11 is
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the propulsive test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the special fluctuation winning device 38. A solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b and the movable member 37 of the normal fluctuation winning device 37.
The second for outputting the open / close data of the solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c that opens b
An output port 134 is provided. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with the external information terminal board 7 with information regarding the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information.
A fifth output port 137 for output to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the common power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 to the output unit 130. A second driver 1 for outputting an ON / OFF driving signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135
38b, a third driver 138c for outputting an ON / OFF drive signal of a digit line on the current lead-in side of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A fourth driver 138d is provided to output an external information signal to the external information terminal board 71.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 450. Photocoupler 13
9 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data with the inspection device 450 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG.
The effect control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, uses an amusement chip (IC
And a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
Is equipped.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 which can be held, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, and motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. In addition, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) Is connected.

Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311
C, a synchronization signal STS which gives data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP 312
The main control microcomputer 311 receives an interrupt signal INT0 to n and a wait for notifying that it is in a state of waiting for reception of a command or data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. Signals such as WAIT are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Also, an interrupt signal INT from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311
Is to be input. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 Receive as). The gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a function of level conversion of signals.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the information display device 630. The frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15 is provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) The board production device 44 being
A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control (for example, a movable object or the like that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if a frame rendering device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for presentation) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame rendering movable body control circuit for driving and controlling this frame rendering device is provided. good.

Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided in the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. To detect the on / off state of the effect combination switch 47 (rendering motor switch) to detect the and to input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311,
A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
And DC 32 V for driving a motor or a solenoid to supply a DC voltage of a desired level to electronic components controlled thereby, a display device 41 comprising a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving a motor or LED, DC5 to be the power supply voltage of command I / F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC voltage of 15 V for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker. Furthermore, as main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2 V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. In addition, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal) and the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
The signal is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor and the like, and these are reset. In addition, in the effect control device 300, a cooling FA for cooling various places of the gaming machine 10
In the state where N 45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on, the cooling FAN 45 is driven.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming ball (not shown) is
A game is played by hitting a pachinko ball). The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by turning members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common view starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 , 1st start winning opening 36
The second start winning opening 97, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 38 is paid, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32.
Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the special fluctuation winning device 38, the number of The winning balls are discharged from the dispensing unit controlled by the dispensing control device 200 (see FIG. 32) to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15.

A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 32) including a non-contact switch or the like for detecting gaming balls having passed through the common view start gate 34 is provided in the common view start gate 34, and the game area 32 When the game ball driven in passes through the inside of the drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. CPU 1 of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100
In 11A, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34, if the common drawing start memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) The addition (+1) is performed to store one common start memory in the ROM 111B. The number of memories of the common drawing start winning is displayed on the common drawing reservation display of the batch display device 50. Further, the common drawing start memory stores a random number value (hit random number) for hit determination for determining the result of the common drawing variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a. It is supposed to be

If the common drawing start memory is present and the common drawing fluctuation display game can be started, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game is not being executed, and the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If it is not the hit state, the hit determination random number value stored in the first stored common drawing start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit deviation of the common drawing fluctuation display game And perform a process of starting a common drawing variation display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the common drawing variation display game becomes a hit, and a specific result aspect (common drawing identification result) is derived.

Further, as processing for executing the common drawing change display game, the common drawing display provided in the batch display device 50 is predetermined with a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined for a predetermined change time as the game control apparatus 100 executes the common drawing change display game. After the common map fluctuation display which is repeatedly displayed in the above order is performed, processing is performed to display the common drawing fluctuation display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed. In addition, a common drawing indicator is configured by the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, it is stopped and displayed. You may.

If the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern which becomes any of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol which makes a special result aspect to the common drawing indicator corresponding to the kind of hit is stopped While displaying, the common power solenoid 37c is operated to perform control to open the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In the case where the result of the common drawing variation display game is a release, control is performed to display a lighting pattern as a result of the deviation on the common drawing display.

In addition, the winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97 and the winning ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are each provided with the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 provided therein.
It is detected by the switch 37a and the start opening 3 switch 97a. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100, the first start memory for making a start memory (a special view start memory) based on the winning on the first start winning opening 36 has a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). The second starting memory (starting memory) is stored based on winnings on the second starting winning opening 97 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 while storing in the limit and limiting the second starting memory to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) Remember to Big hit random number value and big hit symbol random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information based on the winning of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 respectively The extracted random number value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start storage or the second start storage. And while being displayed on the special figure 1 reservation indicator and special figure 2 reservation indicator of package display 50, the memory number of this starting memory is also displayed on display 41 of center case 40 as a decoration special figure starting memory indication Is displayed. Furthermore, an information display 630
Even displayed.

The CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first start memory corresponding to the special view change display game to be started when the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game can be started. A process of determining the hit of the special figure variation display game or the like is performed by comparing the determined big hit determination random number value with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B. Furthermore, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view variation display game to be executed.

And, when executing the first special figure fluctuation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 1 display 51 (the fluctuation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 1 is displayed during the change, a process is performed to display a first special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, when the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 2 display 52 (the variable display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 2 is displayed during the change, a process of displaying a second special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, A process of displaying a decorative special view variable display game in which numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are variably displayed is displayed. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the game control device 100
Setting of the effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and
Perform processing such as controlling the light emission of various LEDs. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

The decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, a left variation display area (first special symbol), a decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers etc. described above in the display device 41,
In each of the right variation display area (second special symbol) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high speed variation) at a speed that makes identification difficult. Then, the symbols changing after a predetermined time are stopped sequentially in the order of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area, and stopped in each of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. In addition, in the display device 41, various effect display such as appearance of a character is performed to improve interest. In addition, the decoration special figure fluctuation display game in information display device 630 blinks the light emission component during fluctuation display, when the stop time comes, the light emission feature (lights up, blinks and goes out corresponding to the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game) Etc.). That is, a decorative special symbol (ie
The result aspect is displayed by the 4th design).

And, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result aspect or a small hit result aspect to the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. While displaying a lighting pattern, the processing which generates a special game state and a small hit game state is performed. In addition, the result mode of the decorative feature variation display game displayed on the display device 41 or the information display device 630 corresponding to this is also a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

In the processing for generating the special game state or the small hit game state, C of the game control device 100
The PU 111A, for example, opens the opening / closing member 990 of the special variation winning device 38 by the special winning opening solenoid 38b, and performs control to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening. And
A large winning opening is opened until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the large winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. The control (cycle game) to repeat (repeat) a predetermined number of rounds is performed with one cycle as one. That is, in the case where the game result control device 100 is in the special result mode, the stop result mode is
It constitutes a big winning opening opening and closing control means that performs control to open and close the big winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is disapproval, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of being a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure even in the high probability state based on the result form of the special figure fluctuation display game of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (a specific game state, a common drawing high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the probability (common drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is set to a high probability (general drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general drawing low probability state) Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 in the present embodiment, the drawing probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Also, in the time saving state, the execution time of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the common drawing stop time for displaying the common drawing fluctuation display game result is, for example, 6
When it becomes 00m second, the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and as a result the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time of the first hit stop symbol (general electric power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500
m second × 1), the opening time of the second hit stop pattern (general power release time) and the number of times open (for example, 17
00 ms × 2 times, opening time of 3rd stop symbol (general electric power opening time) and opening frequency (for example,
It can be set to be 1700 ms × 3).

In addition, the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of general electric power release, and the general electric power release time are appropriately set to perform control to set the common fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time operation state. For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-described
It is possible to control the general drawing fluctuation time) to be a second fluctuation time which is shorter than the first fluctuation time (for example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Moreover, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is 704 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (the general public opening time) is the normal state (general drawing low probability state) It is possible to control to become the 2nd opening time longer than 1 opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1
352 ms). Moreover, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is the first number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game.
It is possible to set the second opening number more than the number of times (for example, four times). Also, in the time saving state, the probability of becoming a hit result of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing probability) is higher than the normal probability (general drawing low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to have a probability (generally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of common power release times, the common power release time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In the case of a hit, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

The special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special view fluctuation display so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices or separate display areas in the first special view variable display game and the second special view variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. The decoration special feature variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently and simultaneously, though it is good. Further, the special view variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10. Also,
In the description of the present embodiment, when the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are not distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as a special view variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the start opening 1 switch 36 a in the first start winning opening 36, the start opening 2 switch 37 a in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, and the start opening 3 in the second start winning opening 97 The switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the big winning opening switch 38a are provided with a coil for magnetic detection and non-contact to detect a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. Type magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used. Further, a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and a main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 etc.
A microswitch with mechanical contacts can be used.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 38 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, first, the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then, when the interrupt occurs, the start address of the area to save the value of the register etc. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S3).
4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the upper order, and the head 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5). The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the state of input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6),
A process of setting a power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the waiting time, the initialization switch 11 is started.
2 operation can be detected reliably. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing that. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

After the process of setting the power on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the waiting time (steps S8 to S12) are performed.
First, set the number of times (for example, 2 times) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 through the port and data bus and check (step S8), and determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S10;
N) returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. in this way,
By determining that a power failure has occurred when reception of a power failure monitoring signal continues for a predetermined period, false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like can be prevented, and problems at the time of power on can be appropriately addressed. .

That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure does not occur, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11). Is determined (step S12). If the timer value is not 0 (step S
12; N), that is, when the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). Also, if the timer value is 0 (step S
12; Y), that is, when the standby time is over, the access permission of read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13) and off data is output to all output ports (output Setting is made) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. From the state of the first input port 122, it is determined whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

If the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S17). (Step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection region 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection region check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S)
18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process is performed to calculate a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (step S19).
It is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at power-off match (step S2)
0). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 of FIG.
Transition to a normal operation from the power failure.

Also, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or
When it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17
N or step S18; N), the checksum is not normal (step S20; N)
If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S26 of FIG. 35 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

In step S21 of FIG. 35, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (
Step S21). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined. Then R
The area storing the gaming state in the WM is checked to determine whether the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step S22). Here, when it is not in the high probability of the special view (step S22; N), the process skips steps S23 and S24 and shifts to step S25.
Also, when the special drawing is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 (On) data is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control board (presentation control device 300) (step S2)
5) Go to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a screen designated command If so, a plurality of commands such as a recovery screen command are sent. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step S26), and all areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). Here, the area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the effect mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is the effect control board (effect control device 300)
To step S30, and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of this embodiment, step S
In 30, the model designation command, the special figure 1 pending number command, the special figure 2 pending number command, the probability information command, the command for initializing the RAM (displaying the customer waiting demo screen and displaying the predetermined time (
For example, for 30 seconds, a plurality of commands such as a command for performing notification of the RAM initialization with light and sound are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

In step S31, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator)
Perform the process of activating the circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process of step S31, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Performed by A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

Thereafter, predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power on
Of the various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random numbers that determine the hit of the common figure ), After saving in a predetermined area of RWM as an initial value (start value) of a random number (per hit symbol random number) to determine a hit symbol of a common drawing (step S33), an interrupt is permitted (step S34).
The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Is configured as. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program processing It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC 2 different from CTC (CTC 0) in timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as timer interrupt processing as a unit. Also, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value changing method of changing the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers is +1 or -1.
It may be a counter type update according to the above, or a random type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

The number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus after the initial value random number update process of step S35.
Are set (step S36), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S3).
7). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the initial value random number updating process (step S37)
It returns to step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and the initial value random number update processing in step S35 described above In order to prevent the value random number update process from being performed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem in releasing the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed and is performed only in the main process.
This has the advantage that the main processing is simplified.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38).
. And when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S3)
8: N) returns to the determination (step S37) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily prohibiting an interrupt (step S39)
), Processing of outputting off data to all output ports (step S40).

Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S41).
), The blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S42).
Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum at the time of power interruption of the RWM, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step S45), the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

In addition, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (an initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization unit (game control device 100) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. And the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 36 shows checksum calculation processing in the above-described main processing (steps S19 and S4).
3) is shown. In this checksum calculation process, first, RW is used as the start value of the calculated address.
The start address of M is set (step S51), and the number of repetitions is set (step S52).
Then, "0" is set as the calculated value (step S53). RA used for repeat count
The number of bytes of M is set.

Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is taken as a new calculated value (step S5).
4) Update the calculated address by +1 (step S55), update the number of repetitions by -1 (step S56), and determine whether the calculation of the checksum has been completed (step S57). If the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

Initial Value Random Number Update Process
FIG. 37 shows the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the jackpot symbol initial value random number is updated by 1 (step S61), and the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by 1 (step S62). Then, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S64), and the initial value random number updating process is ended.
Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, and "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the small hit of the special figure variation display game It is the random number which becomes the initial value of the random number which decides the stop design. In addition, “the initial winning random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hitting of the common drawing variation display game, “the initial symbol random number is a random number.
Is a random number that is an initial value of the random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the common drawing variation display game. Thus, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing.
In addition, small hit design random numbers naturally do not exist in models without small hits. In addition, depending on the model, there is also a gaming machine in which there is no hit symbol initial value random number.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the timer interrupt process, the periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator
It is started by being input to 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 38 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S1).
01). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input from various sensors and switches, and taking in of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S104) is performed to control the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, a common power solenoid 37c). Note that when a signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main processing, the output processing causes the emission permission signal to be output, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of release permission seen from the game control device, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating the state of release permission viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step S106),
The random number updating process 2 (step S107) is performed. Thereafter, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the start opening 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a of the common drawing, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a Also, a winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) is performed to monitor errors (whether or not the front frame or the glass frame is opened). In addition, special figure game processing (step S109) which performs processing concerning a special figure fluctuation display game and common drawing game processing (step S110) which performs processing concerning a common drawing fluctuation display game is performed.

Next, segment LED editing processing (step S111) provided in the gaming machine 10 to drive the segment LED for displaying the special view variation display game and displaying various information related to the game to display desired content (step S111) Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs processing to check the detection signal from the sensor to determine whether there is an abnormality or board radio fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality Monitoring process (step S1
13) Do. Then, an external information editing process (step S114) is performed to set signals output to various external devices in the output buffer (step S114), and the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 122 is read (step S1).
21). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

Subsequently, the read input port 1 state is saved in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (
Then, the address of the input port 2, ie, the address of the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is an inverted bit of the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data Prepare (step S12)
7) Perform switch read processing (step S128). Here, "prepare" in the present embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130).
). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is an inverted bit of the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data Are prepared (step S132), the switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is ended.

Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 may be different data but may be data of the same value as a result. is there.
Although the bit data to be inverted of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data,
As a result, it may be data of the same value.

[Switch reading process]
Next, switch reading processing in the above-described input processing (steps S128 and S133)
Explain the details of. As shown in FIG. 40, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Save (store) (step S144). After that, it waits for the delay time (for example, about 100 μs) until the second reading to elapse (step S
145).

When the delay time has elapsed, the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S147), and the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Save to
(Step S149). After that, bit 1 which has the same status in the first and second reading
Then, a definite bit pattern in which different bits are set to 0 is created (step S150), the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken, and it is set as the present definite bit (step S15).
1).

Next, an indeterminate bit pattern is created in which the state is 0 for the same state and 1 for different bits in the first and second reading (step S152), and the logic between the indeterminate bit pattern and the determined state at the previous interrupt The product is taken and it is set as the previously held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed. Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the currently decided state (step S154), exclusive OR is performed between the previous and currently decided states, and saved as the rising edge (step S155). , Finish the switch reading process.

Note that when the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read.
There is a way to determine whether the signal has changed by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing it with the result of the previous read, but if you do so, it will take you until the next interrupt processing If the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost, there is a risk that the correct determination can not be made. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interruption process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, in the output process, first, the off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 which outputs the data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output is synthesized and output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the common power solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display unit (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
The output data of the digit line is acquired (step S164). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, data of "door / frame open" data of "security signal") are output ports for digit / external information output 136
(Step S166).
Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S168). In the present embodiment, for example, special display 1 display 51, special view 2 display 52, general drawing display, special view 1 reserve display, special view 2 reserve, which are various displays provided in collective display device 50. Display, General drawing hold display, Round display and 2nd
Dynamically turn on the game state display section.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are synthesized (step S169), and the synthesized data (
For example, data of "big hit signal 1", data of "big hit signal 2", data of "big hit signal 3", data of "big hit signal 4", data of "design fixed number of times signal", data of "starting opening signal" , "Main prize ball signal" data) and the output data of the firing permission are synthesized (step S1).
70) The synthesized data is output to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / emission permission signal (step S171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S172). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S173).

Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S174). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S176), the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10) In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By matching these two signals,
It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments.

In these winning number counter areas, the winning number counter area is set according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (three winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls in the case of this embodiment). The counter number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, while transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, three winning ball counter areas of the winning number counter area 1, 10,
In the individual prize ball counter area and the 14 prize ball counter area, up to 65535 winnings can be stored, respectively, the 3 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2, the 10 prize ball counter area, and 14 prizes In the ball counter area, up to 255 winnings can be stored.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. on the other hand,
If it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), step S
Return to 181 and repeat the above process. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184).
, And the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the target number-of-games counter area 2 is obtained (step S18).
5). Then, the value of the winning balls remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining winning balls area (step S187). In addition, as the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before this processing, a fraction which does not meet a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), step S is performed.
Move to processing of 192. If the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, whenever the number of remaining winning balls is ten, the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the result of subtraction is saved in the remaining number area of winning balls (step S191), step S18.
It returns to the process of 8. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, when the payout of the game ball such as during a big hit is concentrated by outputting the main prize ball signal, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accurate occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S1).
93). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194).

The payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is in the on state (busy state) when the payout control can not be immediately started. Be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

If the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. That is, in this embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay the prize ball. When in the state, it is configured to transmit a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

The conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy status) are, for example, during the payout operation, the ball lending operation, the shoot ball out error, the overflow error, the frame radio wave illegal occurrence, the payout ball detection switch The number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormality of a switch for monitoring a shot ball, a shortage of payout error, a payout excess error, and the number of unpaid balls Etc) (when it is not = 0) etc.

If the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). Winning counter area 1
In the process of checking whether there is a count in (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, there is a counted number that is not "0" in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if

Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S197). In this judgment,
If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S 197; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198).
Then, the payout amount command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout amount command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms is set as an initial value, for example.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200) indicates that the game control device 100 can start the payout control. In this case, the winning ball command transmitting means transmits the winning ball command to the payout control means.

As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 43 shows the random number updating process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating an initial value (start value) of a big hit symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a hit random number, and a hit symbol random number which is an object of the initial value random number update processing.
In the random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).
If the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the small hitting symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).
If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number loaded corresponds The start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value (step S213). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not the random number for the general drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).
If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial initial of the loaded small hit symbol random number A value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). After that, it is determined whether or not the random number in the general drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

If the hit random number in the drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), it is determined whether the hit symbol random number in the drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220)
). If the random number per block is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the next initial stage of the random number per block is loaded The value is set in the register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the hit symbol random number in the common drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220)
.

If the hit pattern random number in the common drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. Also, if the hit pattern random number in the common drawing is waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; Y), the hit initial value random value is loaded as the next initial value (step S221)
), The next initial value of the symbol random number that corresponds to the random number counter (random number area)
Set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of
2) The random number update process 1 ends.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 44 shows the random number updating process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1 byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2 byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and both random update processing 2 Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, 2 by random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process
The update of the byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (reach fluctuation mode determination random number) is configured to be performed for either the upper one byte or the lower one byte.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for specifying in order which random number of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step S231). In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Then, when the value of the random number update scan counter is "0", the variation pattern random number 1 (upper order) is updated, and when it is "1", the variation pattern random number 1 (lower order) is updated;
In the case of “], the variation pattern random number 2 is updated, and in the case of“ 3 ”, the variation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referenced based on the calculated address (step S234). In the table referred to at this time, the upper limit judgment value for each kind of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random number has made a round is stored.

Subsequently, for example, in the CPU used as the gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment,
Refresh register (hereinafter referred to as "R register") used for refreshing the RAM
Is not provided, and instead, a counter called “M1 counter” that operates equivalent to the R register is built in, but the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). The randomness can be given randomness by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). The mask value is the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 If you want to update
It is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number. When the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter is updated. When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower order of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited thereto.

Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). Then, if the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S 236; Y), the value left by masking the value of the M 1 counter with the mask value as the added value Is set as a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “masked value”, and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S 237), and the process proceeds to step S 239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S 236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value ( Step S238), Step S239
Go to The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and adding "0" later does not change from the value before addition, so to avoid it. is there.

Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2-byte) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), Go to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated as the lower 1 byte of the random value (1 A byte is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S 242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S 237 or S 238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether this new random value is larger than the upper limit judgment value acquired in step S 233 (step S243). Then, if the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; N), the new random value is saved in a lower random number area of 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number value is taken as a new random number again (step S244). Byte random number or 2
It saves in the lower random number area of the byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number updating process 2 is ended. Also, 2
If the random number is a byte random number (step S246; Y), the new random number value (when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S24)
7) The random number update process 2 ends.
In the case of this embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated (1-byte random number, 2-byte random number (upper), 2-byte random number (lower)) on the effect random number update table. The address of the update area, etc. is defined for the type of random number to be updated (4 blocks).

As described above, the CPU 111A updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls to the starting winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37. It is a random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 45 shows the winning opening switch / status monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (step S1).
08) was shown. In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the special winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the special winning opening is opened. Even though there is no such prize, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S304) is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize at the special prize opening and to detect a normal prize.

The winning opening monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of a fraud winning number area
Information on an incorrect prize error notification command, an incorrect prize number upper limit value (incorrect judgment number), an address of the winning opening switch table, and an indication timer update information (permission / update) are defined. In addition, the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches)
In addition to the above, information on the monitoring switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1, and the lower address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined for each switch. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared for each of the switches to be monitored.

Next, prepare the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the general public (step S305), and monitor whether there is an incorrect winning and detect the normal winning while the fraud & winning monitoring process (Step S306) is executed. Then, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) which does not require fraud monitoring processing (step S307). A winning number counter updating process (step S308) is performed to update the number.

Next, a state scan counter for specifying in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state should be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the current monitoring is updated (step S309). In the case of the present embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is “0”, a switch abnormality is output when a connector of the switch is disconnected or the like. The monitoring of the state based on one signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is “2”, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is “3”, monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal is configured. Ru.

Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", the glass frame open detection switch 63
Monitoring of the state based on the signal output from is set, and the value of the state scan counter is "1"
In this case, monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the main body frame open detection switch 64 is set. Moreover, when the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is It is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315).
), Gaming machine status check processing to determine whether an error has occurred, etc. (step S
Do 316).

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. Monitoring of the state based on two signals is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) is performed to check a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. Note that the processing in steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
FIG. 46 shows the fraud & prize monitoring process (steps S302, S304, and S306) in the above-described prize hole switch / state monitoring process. In this fraud & prize monitoring process, the special winning opening switch 38 a of the special variation winning device 38 and the starting opening 2 switch 37 of the normal variation winning device 37.
It is a process performed on a. The detection of winnings is easy for the large winnings opening (special variation winning device 38) and the Fuden (normal variation winning device 37) because the opening and closing members are forcibly opened to insert the game balls and the award balls are paid out. In addition to the monitoring of fraud.

In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S 321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is under (
Step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special game state in which the special variation winning device 38 is opened when the winning hole switch targeted for error monitoring is the large winning hole switch 38a, and the winning hole switch for error monitoring is started In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is being executed based on the hit of the drawing.

Then, if it is a fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S323). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S3).
32). If there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target number of incorrect winnings is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of updated incorrect winnings is equal to or greater than the number of monitoring targets It is determined whether there is any (step S325).

In the case of this embodiment, regardless of the type of winning opening switch subject to error monitoring, the number of fraud determination determinations is set to five, but the number of unauthorized occurrences defines a different number for each type of winning opening switch. It can also be done. For example, when the winning opening in the open state is converted to the closing state, the gaming ball is caught in the door member of the winning opening, and the gaming ball is in the effective period of the winning opening switch. The reason is that it is not to judge that the signal is illegitimate if the player has won a prize or the signal has a noise, and it is not so easy to judge it as an error although it is not illegitimate.

And, if the number of incorrect winnings is not equal to or more than the number of the determined fraud occurrences of the monitoring target (step S325)
N) prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (step S330)
. Also, in the case where the number of incorrect winnings is equal to or more than the number of detected frauds to be monitored (step S 325;
Y) holds the number of incorrect winnings to the number of incorrectness determinations (step S326), and saves an initial value (for example, 60000m seconds) in the target incorrect winning notification timer area (step S327). Next, a target fraudulent generation command is prepared (step S328), a fraudulent prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step S329), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step S338). ).

On the other hand, if the fraud monitoring period is not underway (step S322; N), the winning hole monitoring table of the target winning hole switch is prepared (step S330), and the winning number counter update process (step S331) for setting the winning balls Do. Then, if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S332). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero. Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S333). If the value is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, prepare the target unauthorized cancellation command (step S).
334), prepare a false prize cancellation flag as a false flag (step S335). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the present fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of wrong prizes is cleared ( Step S337), compare the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (
Step S338). Also, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S3)
36; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S 338).

Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S)
338; Y) ends the fraud & prize monitoring process. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S 338; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S 339), and effect command setting processing is performed. (
Step S340) The fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the occurrence of an error, and an incorrect prize error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the release of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set. It will be done.

[Winning number counter update processing]
FIG. 47 shows winning number counter updating processing (steps S308 and S331) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is obtained from the winning opening monitoring table (step S 351), and whether there is an input (accurate change in input) to the target winning opening switch It determines (step S352).

If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step S362). Also, if there is an input on the target winning opening switch (
Step S352; Y) loads the value of target winning number counter area 1 (step S3).
53) The loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354), and it is determined whether the data overflows (step S355). And, when overflow does not occur (step S
355; N) saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (step S 356),
The value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). If an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for winning balls (delivery command transmission) is updated. Counter size is 2 bytes (0 to 65
Range of 535).

After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S 357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S 358), and it is determined whether it overflows (step S 35).
9). When no overflow occurs (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). It is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has ended (step S362). Also, when an overflow occurs (step S35)
9; Y) updates the table address to the address of the next record (step S361)
It is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has ended (step S362). In the case of this embodiment,
In step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

If monitoring of all the switches has not ended (step S362; N), the process returns to the process (step S352) of determining whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is ended.
As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning on the winning area, and the information on the winning is stored.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
In FIG. 48, the gaming machine state check process (in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process)
Steps S311, S313, and S316) are shown. In this gaming machine status check process,
First, the status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is acquired (step S371).
It is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the winning hole switch / state monitoring process). As this information,
For example, lower address of start address of status monitoring area, lower address of port input status area of switch control area where target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only bits of target signal, judgment data of signal ON, Status off command (If error type, make error notification end command), Status on command (Error type, error alert start command), State off monitoring timer comparison value, State on monitoring timer comparison value is included. .

If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step S373), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S373).
Step S374). After that, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S
375) Compare the value of the target signal control area with the current signal state (step S379)
. If the target signal is not on (step S 372: N), it is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (is normal), and a state that the signal from the touch switch is not touched is there.

On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S372; Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S376), and the state on command of the target is acquired and prepared (step S377). Thereafter, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S3).
79). The case where the target signal is on (step S 372; Y) is a state indicating that the error signal is an error (abnormal or incorrect), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. Is a state showing

When the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the current signal (step S379; Y)
That is, if the signal status has not changed, the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (
Step S382) It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the state of the current signal (step S379; N), that is, if the state of the signal changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area Step S380). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S 381), the target status monitoring timer is updated by 1 (step S 382), and it is determined whether the target status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step S383).

If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N
) Ends the gaming machine state check process. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and the comparison value is kept at -1 (step S384). The status flag thus compared is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S385).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check process is ended. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the rendering command setting process is performed. Then (step S387), the gaming machine state check process is ended. As a result, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in step S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Discharge busy signal check process]
FIG. 49 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first,
It is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 can not start the payout control.

If the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy status flag is prepared as the status flag (step S392), and the on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32)
m seconds) is set (step S393), and it is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S39).
394), setting the off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) (step S395)
It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S39).
6). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interrupts.

If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S396; N
In step S397, the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step S398), and the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400). If it is not greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The payout busy signal check process ends. Also, if it is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of comparison value -1 (step S401) to prepare in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process is ended.

By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, and the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be influenced by

In addition, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an undefined state until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout control device 200 immediately outputs the winning ball command even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. And the payout ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special figure game processing, the starting opening 1 switch 36 a and the starting opening 2 switch 3
7a, monitoring of the input of the start port 3 switch 97a, control of the entire processing relating to the special view variation display game, and setting of the display of the special view are performed.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the special view game processing, first, the starting opening switch monitoring processing (1) monitors the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 97a
Perform step A1). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the second starting winning opening 97 have a game ball winning, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number)
The game result pre-determination is performed to determine in advance the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the special view variation display game based on the winning.

Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of the gaming ball at the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). Special figure game processing timer value is "
If it is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if timed up or has already timed up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is registered (Step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure variation A special drawing routine processing (step A8) is performed to set information necessary for performing processing.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "1", the special figure variation process which performs setting of the stop display time of the special figure, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A
Do 9).

If the special figure game processing number is "2" at step A7, and if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the big winning opening of each big hit Special chart display processing to set the fan fare time according to the release pattern, and to set the information necessary to perform fan fare / interval processing (step A10)
)I do.

If the special figure game processing number is "3" at step A7, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the opening number, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. A fanfare / interval process (step A11) is performed.
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing of setting the ending command when the final round, the big winning opening remaining A special winning opening open process (step A12) is performed to set information necessary for ball processing.

If the special figure game processing number is "5" in step A7, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the big hit end processing Big winning opening remaining ball processing which performs setting of information necessary to do (step A13)
I do.
If the special figure game process number is "6" in step A7, a big hit end process (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is “7”, to set the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, to set the fanfare command, to perform the small hit middle processing A small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) is performed to set necessary information.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hitting middle processing which sets the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball processing etc (step A
Do 16).
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hit middle process, a small hit end process The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the above.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "10", small hit ending process (step A18) is performed to set information etc. necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special view 1 display 51 (step A)
19) Perform special symbol 1 display 51 related symbol variation control processing (step A20). And
After preparing the table for controlling the variation of the special view 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol variation control process (step A22) related to the special view 2 display 52 is performed, and the special view game process is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" at step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs and it is special as a special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 38 continuously is set (the character continuous operating device is operated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the starting opening switch monitoring processing, first, a first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), a prize monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (here, the starting port 1 switch 36a), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port is provided. Set the information to indicate that there was a prize. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the first starting opening which is the starting opening of the special view 1 (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning on the first starting opening (step A103)
In N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning on the first starting opening (step A)
103; Y) determines whether or not the special drawing time is in the middle (general pressure support) (step A)
104).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104;
In Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless it is left hitting the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), and does not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 unless it is hit right. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a win in the first starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information of suspension by the first start port (first start winning port 36) (step A107), the special view start port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, prepare a second start port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) prize monitoring table (step A1)
09) Perform hard random number acquisition processing (step A110). In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (here, the starting port 2 switch 37a), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port is provided. Set the information to indicate that there was a prize. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the second starting opening which is the starting opening of the special view 2 (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning on the second starting opening (step A111)
In N), the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the second starting opening (step A)
111; Y), the normal motorized part (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is in operation, ie,
It is determined whether or not the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in an open state in which winning of the game ball is possible (step A112), and it is determined that the ordinary electric role is in operation (step A112; Y). , Shift to the process of step A114, and perform the subsequent processes. Step A
If it is determined at 112 that the ordinary motor-operated part is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the general electric power fraud is occurring (step A113).

In step A113, when the number of incorrect winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the determined number of fraud occurrences (for example, 5), it is determined that the fraud is in progress. The normal fluctuation winning device 37
In the closed state, the game ball can not be won, and in the open state, the game ball can be won. Therefore,
When the game ball is in the closed state, the game ball is in a winning state, which is a case in which some abnormality or injustice occurs. When there is a game ball having a prize in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of incorrect winnings. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

When it is determined in step A113 that no ordinary power transmission is occurring (step A113; N
) Prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step A114), and performs the special view starting port switch common processing (step A115), and then the processing of step A116 Go to and do further processing. Also, step A113
If it is determined that the occurrence of a common electric power fraud is occurring (Step A 113; Y), Step A 1 is performed.
It shifts to 16 processes and performs subsequent processes.

Next, prepare the third start opening (the second start winning opening 97) a prize monitoring table (step A11).
6) Perform hard random number acquisition processing (step A117). In this hard random number acquisition process,
When there is an input on the target starting port switch (here, the starting port 3 switch 97a), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and there is a winning on the target starting port Set the information shown. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the third starting opening which is the starting opening of the special view 2 (step A118).
When it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning on the third starting opening (step A118)
N) ends the starting port switch monitoring process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A118 that there is a winning on the third starting opening (step A)
118; Y) determines whether or not the special drawing time is in the middle (general power support) (step A)
119).

When it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing time is not short (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing time is short (step A119;
In Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless it is hit left to the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), and does not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 if it is hit right. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a winning in the third starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the third start port (the second start winning port 97) (step A122), the special view start port switch common process (step A123) is performed to monitor the start port switch. End the process.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the hard random number acquisition process in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process (step A102)
, A110, A117) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 52, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the first starting port (first starting winning port 36), the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 3)
7) and 3rd starting opening (the 2nd starting winning opening 97), set winning a prize absence information of the starting opening for monitoring (step A131), starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a,
And it is determined whether there is an input in the starting opening switch of monitoring object among starting opening 3 switches 97a (step A132).
Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended.
On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A133), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended.
Also, when there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A 134; Y)
Loads and prepares the jackpot random number extracted in the hard random number latch register to be monitored (step A135). Then, among the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), the second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), and the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), winning of the starting opening for monitoring The presence information is set (step A136), and the hard random number acquisition process is ended.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common processing (steps A108, A115, A123) in the above-mentioned starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. The special view starting port switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the special view starting port switch common process, first, the starting port 1 switch 36
Among the starting opening 2 switch 37a and the starting opening 3 switch 97a, a starting opening signal which is the number of times information on the number of winnings on the starting opening switch to be monitored is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10. The number of outputs is loaded (step A141), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A142), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step A14).
3).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is RW
It saves in the start opening signal output frequency area of M (step A144), and proceeds to the processing of step A145.
On the other hand, if the number of times of output overflows (step A143; Y), step A1 is performed.
Transfer to 45 processes. In the present embodiment, “0” to “255” in the start opening signal output frequency region.
The values up to “can be stored. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows and saving is not performed.

Next, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97
It is determined whether the number of to-be-updated special figure holding (starting storage) corresponding to the monitored starting opening switch is less than the upper limit value (step A145).
If the number of to-be-updated holdings to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special drawing starting opening switch common processing ends.
In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), the number of to-be-updated special figures (number of special figures 1 or number of special figures 2) is updated Step A14
6), prepare the decoration special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special drawing reservation number (step A 147), perform the rendering command setting process (step A 148), and start the starting opening winning flag of the object Save (step A149). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of to-be- reserved special views is calculated (step A150).
The big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process of steps A102, A110 and A117 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM (step A151). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting opening switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A152), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A153). This jackpot symbol random number is used in the special image reservation information determination process (step A160).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random number (in the case of this embodiment, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) is saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of RWM (step A154). And the first
It is determined whether it is a winning to the starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step A155). When it is determined in step A155 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step A155; N)
To the process of step A158. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A155 that a winning on the first starting opening has been made (step A155; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted,
Prepare (step A156) and save in the small hitting symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A157). In step A158, the address (one of places from 1 to 8) of the fluctuation order flag storage area corresponding to the sum of the special drawing 1 holding number and the special drawing 2 holding number is calculated (step A158), and the calculated area Save the change order flag of the target (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) (Step A159), perform the special view reserve information determination process (Step A160), and end the special view starting opening switch common process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of gaming balls into the start winning area of the first start winning opening 36, the second start winning opening 97, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37. A start storage means is provided which stores a predetermined number at the upper limit as a start storage which becomes the right of execution of the variable display game. In addition, the starting memory means (game control device 100), various random number values which are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the 1st starting winning a prize mouth 36 which is the starting mouth of the special figure 1 Various starting random numbers that are stored as starting memory and extracted based on winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 which is the starting opening of the special figure 2, the second starting with a predetermined number as the upper limit Store as a memory.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the special figure reservation information determination process in the above-mentioned special view starting opening switch common process (step A)
160) will be described in detail. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

As shown in FIG. 54, first, a big hit determination process (step A161) is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is made depending on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step A162; Y), set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (step A163), and correspond to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A152. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A171.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A162; N), it is determined whether it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A165).
When it is determined in step A165 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step A165
In N), the stop symbol information of detachment is set (step A170), step A171
Transfer to processing of
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A165 that a winning on the first starting opening has been made (step A)
In 165) Y), a small hit determination process (step A166) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A167; N), set the stop symbol information of the removal (step A)
170), shift to the processing of step A171.
On the other hand, if the judgment result is a small hit (step A167; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A168), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A156 It acquires (step A169) and it transfers to the process of step A171.

Then, a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A171), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A172). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A 173) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A174).

Thereafter, a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special view fluctuation display game is prepared (step A175), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step A176), the special figure hold information determination process is ended. The special figure information setting process in step A173 and the variation pattern setting process in step A174 are similar to the process executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process.

With the above processing, the prefetch pattern command including the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and the prefetch fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared And sent to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start storage in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start storage (
For example, it is determined whether or not a special result is obtained, etc. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “4”, that is, whether the special winning opening is being processed (step A201). . When the special winning opening open process is being performed (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special drawing game processing number is "5", that is, the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (step A202).

If the special winning opening game is being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening game is not being processed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, the small hit is being processed (step A203) ). If the small hit is being processed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. In addition, when the small hit is not in process (step A203)
N determines whether the value of the special figure game process number is “9”, that is, the small ball remaining ball process is being performed (step A 204). Since the special figure game process number does not shift next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, it is possible to check the progress of the game by the special figure game process number.

If the small hit residual ball processing is not in progress (step A 204; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. If the small hit residual sphere process is being performed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Then, "0" is set to the winning counter (step A205), and it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch (step A206).

If there is no input on the special winning opening switch (step A206; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). Also, when there is an input on the special winning opening switch (step A206; Y), prepare a special winning opening count command (step A207)
And effect command setting processing (step A208). Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A21).
4).

When the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214), if the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215).
When the special winning opening residual ball processing is under (step A215; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and when the special winning opening residual ball processing is not under (step A215; N), the small hitting residual ball processing It is determined whether it is medium (step A216).
If small ball remaining ball processing is underway (step A216; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended, and if small ball remaining ball processing is not underway (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter is made large winning It is added to the mouth count number (step A217), and it is determined whether the big winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example "9") (step A218).

When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step A218; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening count is equal to or higher than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning opening count is limited to the upper limit (step A219).
And the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A220), and it is determined whether or not small hit is being processed (step A221). If you are not processing during a small hit (Step A 221)
N: If the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended and small hitting is being processed (Step A)
221) Y) Save the small hit opening end value in the big winning opening control pointer area (step A222), and finish the special winning opening switch monitoring process. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, details of the special view routine processing (step A8) in the special view game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the special view ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether both the special view 1 reservation number and the special view 2 reservation number are “0” (step A301).
If it is determined in step A301 that both the special drawing 1 holding number and the special drawing 2 holding number are not “0” (step A301; N), the flags are loaded from the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total holding number 1) Then (step A302), it is determined whether the current variation is the variation of the special figure 1 (step A303).
When it is determined in step A303 that the present fluctuation is a fluctuation in the special figure 1 (step A3)
Prepare the decoration special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the special drawing 1 reservation number in 03; Y) (step A)
304) The rendering command setting process (step A305) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended. At this point in time, the special figure 1 pending number is not updated by -1, but at step A304, a command (decorative special figure pending number command) corresponding to the value updated by -1 is prepared.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A303 that the present fluctuation is not the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, if the present fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 2, A decoration special figure reservation number command to be prepared is prepared (step A307), a rendering command setting process (step A308) is performed, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended. In addition, at this time, although the special figure 2 reservation number is not updated by -1, in step A307, the command corresponding to the value updated by -1 (decision special drawing reservation number command)
Prepare.

If it is determined in step A301 that both the special drawing 1 holding number and the special drawing 2 holding number are "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether a customer waiting demo has been started ( Step A310) If the customer waiting demo has not been started (Step A310; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (Step A311).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and an effect command setting process (step A313) is performed.
Next, “0” is set as the process number, which is usually associated with the special view processing (step A 314),
The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A315), and the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A316). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the special view normal processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 57, first, the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 1
) Is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321).
A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed to set shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether the first special view variation display game is a big hit or not.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (step A)
After the step 323), special figure information setting processing (step A324) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and various settings relating to setting of variation patterns of the first special A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set, is prepared (step A325). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process is set (Step A327) is performed.
Next, set “1” for the special processing during processing as the processing number (step A328)
The process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).

Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the flag during fluctuation is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display 5) is displayed in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area.
Save the initial value (for example, 52 ms) of the timer with a blinking cycle of 1 (step A333)
), Save the initial value (for example, 0) in the special figure 1 fluctuation symbol number area (step A334)
, The special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the process similar to the process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. It is done as.

As shown in FIG. 58, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341).
A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A 342) is performed to set deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information) (step A)
After 343), special figure information setting processing (step A344) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and various settings relating to setting of variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game are performed. A special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (Step A347) is performed.
Next, set “1” to be processed during the special figure change as the process number (step A348)
The process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).

Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). Thereafter, the flag during the fluctuation is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the blinking control timer is displayed in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (special figure 2 display 5
Save the initial value (for example, 104 ms) of the 2 blink cycle timer (step A35)
3) Save the initial value (for example, 0) in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (step A 354)
), The special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
In FIG. 59, the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above (step A)
322). In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A 361), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A 362). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A363), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (
The number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step A364). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A365) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit.

Then, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is a big hit (step A366; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the outlier information was saved in step A362 (step A367) ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is not a big hit (step A366; N), whether the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value or not Small hit determination processing (step A 368) to determine.

Then, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is a small hit (step A369; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area where the outlier information is saved in step A361. (Step A370), the big hit flag 1 setting processing ends. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is not the small hit (step A369; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed with the outlier information saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. Thus, in the present embodiment, the first
The result of the special view variation display game is one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “detachment”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
In FIG. 60, the big hit flag 2 setting process in the above-mentioned special view 2 change start process (step A)
342). In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (
A big hit random number is loaded from preparation 1) and prepared (step A 372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for number 1 reserve) is cleared to 0 (step A 372). In addition, the number of reservations is 1
The application is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 2). After that, the big hit decision processing which decides whether or not it is a big hit according to whether the prepared big hit random number value agrees with the big hit judgment value (step A 374)
I do.

If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is a big hit (step A 375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area saved with the out information in step A 371 (step A 375). ), And the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is not a big hit (step A 375; N), the big hit flag 2 while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2
End the setting process. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special view variation display game is either “big hit” or “losing”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 61 shows the big hit determination process (steps A161, A365, A374) in the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination process, big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this big hit judgment processing, first, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step A38)
1) It is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 387), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Specifically, the big hit determination process is a big hit determination process in the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A36).
In the case of 5), the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382;
Since Y) is a small hit or a drop, "other than a big hit (small hit or drop)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A 374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A 382; Y) Therefore, "other than big hit (out)" is set as the determination result (step A387).
If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; N), it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (step A 383).

Then, if it is in the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (step A384), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386). ). If the state is not the high probability state (step A383; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386) .

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 357), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Specifically, the big hit determination process is a big hit determination process in the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A36).
In the case of 5), if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386;
Since Y) is a small hit or a drop, "other than a big hit (small hit or drop)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A 374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A 386; Y), it is an off As the determination result, "other than big hit (out)" is set (step A387).
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A 388), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 62 shows small hit determination processing (steps A166 and A368) in the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination processing and the big hit flag 1 setting processing. In this small hit determination process, first, the small hit lower limit judgment value is set, and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is smaller than the small hit lower limit judgment value (
Step A391). In addition, small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. That is, being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value.
The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is a loss, a hit is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit judgment processing is ended.
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit judgment value is set and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (Step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is a disconnection, a gap is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit judgment processing is ended.
In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; N
), That is, if it is a small hit, set a small hit as the determination result (step A394)
, Small hit determination processing ends.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 63, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above (step A)
323). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A 401), and if it is a big hit (step A 401; Y), the special figure 1 is
The big hit symbol random number is loaded from the big hit symbol random number storage area (for retention number 1) (step A4)
02). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A 407), the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability fluctuation judgment The data is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409).

These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. In the case of the present embodiment, the rendering mode shifts in response to a hit, and the transition destination of the rendering mode, which shifts after an end, changes in accordance with the type of the hit symbol (type of big hit symbol or small hit). In addition, a specific big hit symbol (for example, 4
In the case of R probability variation symbol), it is difficult to distinguish whether it is a special effect mode in which the effect mode of the transition destination is a definite change determination or a definite change depending on whether the gaming state is in a definite change or not It is determined whether to shift to the effect mode. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and if it is a small hit (step A410; Y)
The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).
Thereafter, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), the off stop symbol pattern is in the stop symbol pattern area Save (step A417), and prepare a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A419),
An effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422). The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
In FIG. 64, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above (step A)
343). In this special view 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 is
The big hit symbol random number is loaded from the big hit symbol random number storage area (for retention number 1) (step A4)
32). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step A433), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired, it saves in the special figure 2 stop design number territory (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

Thereafter, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A 437), the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability fluctuation judgment The data is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A 442).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A 441). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A443),
An effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446). 2 Stop symbol setting processing ends.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as a variation display game based on the detection of the gaming ball at the first start winning opening (starting entry 36), and the second start winning opening (normal variation winning) The variable display game execution means is configured to execute the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the gaming ball in the device 37). In addition, game control control 100, the decision expedient (
The variable display game execution control means is configured to control the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the game control device 100).

[Special map information setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process, special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and special figure information setting process (steps A173, A324, A344) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. In the case of this embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, presence / absence of time reduction) does not affect the distribution of the change, and the effect mode managed by the game control apparatus 100 affects the distribution of the change. In the effect mode, depending on the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, and the progress of the special view fluctuation display game, etc.
One effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the special view information setting process, first, the former half fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the former half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the rendering mode information is acquired (step A452).
Next, the first half fluctuation group selection offset table is set (step A453),
The offset data corresponding to the target special drawing reservation number and the stop symbol pattern are acquired (step A454).
Next, the former half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A4)
55) The value obtained by the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, in the variable distribution information 1 area, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation mode before the start of reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, although depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when the number of reservations is large, it is only in the case of loss, and as a result, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation group is selected, and one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the latter half fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the latter half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
.
Next, the latter half fluctuation group selection offset table is set (step A459),
The offset data corresponding to the target special drawing reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).
Next, the second half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A4).
61) The value obtained by the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special map information setting process is ended. As a result, in the variable distribution information 2 area, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (including the type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of reservations only in the case of an outfall (the reach incidence rate decreases when the number of reservations is large). Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination process, special view 1 change start process, and special pattern 2 change start process (steps A174, A326, A346) at the start of change will be described. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation aspect from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation which is the fluctuation aspect from the reaching state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game The second half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection address table is set (step A 471), the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A 472) Load and prepare variation pattern random number 1 from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for number of reservations 1) (step A 473)
. In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half fluctuation group table is different in structure between a hit and a break. Specifically, it has a 1-byte size for hit and a 2-byte size for release. Since the rate of occurrence per hit is lower than the rate of occurrence of departure and even one byte is sufficient, the footprint is one byte in size from the viewpoint of saving of data capacity. Therefore, the hit time uses only the lower value of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1. In addition, the rate of occurrence of outliers is higher than the incidence rate of hits, and in order to make various renditions appear, the size for the removal is 2 bytes.

Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special view variation display game is a release (step A 474),
If it is out of step (step A 474; Y), 2-byte distribution processing (step A 4)
75) to move on to the process of step A477. If not (step A 474; N), the sorting process (step A 476) is performed and step A 477 is performed.
Transfer to processing of

Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A 477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1), Prepare (step A 478). Then, distribution processing (step A 479) is performed, and the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half fluctuation number area (step A 480). By this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step A 481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A 482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1)
Are loaded and prepared (step A 484). After that, distribution processing (step A 485)
To obtain the first-half variation number obtained as a result of the assignment, save the first-half variation number in the first-half variation number area (step A486), and complete the variation pattern setting process. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set.
That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

[Distribution process]
FIG. 67 shows the distribution process (step A 476) in the fluctuation pattern setting process described above.
A 479, A 485) were shown. In the distribution process, the latter half variation selection table of the special view variation display game is selected from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, or the second half variation selection table is selected based on the variation pattern random number 2. In the process for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number) or selecting the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. is there.

In this distribution process, first, the head data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in step A472, the latter half variation selection table prepared in step A477, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A483) Is checked if it is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (step A2201). Here, the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are at least one second half fluctuation selection table, a second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number) or a first half fluctuation pattern
Although a predetermined distribution value is stored in association with the first half variation number), in the case of a selection table that does not require distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

And if the first data of the target selection table (the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2)
202; Y) updates the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (step A2)
207), end the distribution process.
On the other hand, if the first data in the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table) is not a code without distribution (step A22)
02: N) acquires one allocation value defined first in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) (step A2203).

Subsequently, the distributed value acquired in step A2203 is subtracted from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2 or fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in step A473, A478 or A484, and a new random number value is calculated. Is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203 and the subsequent steps Do the processing.

That is, the distribution value defined next in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (step A2203)
), After that, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value already determined in the previous step A2205 (step A2204), and the calculated new random number value is “0”.
It is determined whether it is smaller than (step A2205).
The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y). Thereby, at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number) or first half variation pattern (first half variation pattern) defined in the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table or first half variation selection table) Any one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number) and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from the variation numbers).
Then, if it is determined in step A2205 that the new random value is smaller than "0" (
Step A2205; Y) Update to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (Step A2207), and complete the distribution process.

[2-byte distribution process]
FIG. 68 shows 2-byte distribution processing in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing (step A).
475). The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, the data at the top of the selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in step A 472) is a code without distribution (that is, "0").
Is checked (step A2301). Here, although the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, the second half specifies only the second half fluctuation selection table in which the second half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the fluctuation group table (for example, a part of fluctuation group table when the result is out), since there is no need to distribute, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the head .

Then, if the first data in the selection table (second-half variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step A2307). End the distribution process.
On the other hand, if the first data in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), one distribution value first defined in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is acquired (Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2303 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A473 (step A23).
04), It is determined whether the calculated new random number is smaller than “0” (step A23)
05). And, when the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step A2305; N
After updating the address of the next distribution value (step A2306),
It shifts to the processing of 03 and performs the subsequent processing.
That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and then the distribution value is newly subtracted by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305. Calculate the random number value (step A2304)
It is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than "0" (step A2305)
.

The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y). Thereby, any one second half fluctuation selection table is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table).
When it is determined in step A2305 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (
Step A2305; Y) Update to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (Step A2307), and complete the 2-byte distribution process.
The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 67 and the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG.
Although basically the same, the program instructions for calculation are different because they differ in that the size of the random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A327 and A347) in the special drawing 1 fluctuation start process and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492),
The first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the former half fluctuation time value and the latter half fluctuation time value are added (step A 496), and the addition value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 497). Thereafter, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A 498), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A 499), and rendering command setting processing is performed (step
Step A500). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by 1 (
Step A501) The address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), and the free space after the shift is cleared (step A504). Further, the variable order flag storage area is shifted (step A505), and the free space after the shift is cleared (step A506).
The variation start information setting process ends.

Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game A variation command including information on a pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of a stop time may be mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the process in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the special figure variation processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is prepared (step A601), and effect command setting processing (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of this embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and if the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, 2000 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol is If the pattern is a small hit pattern, 2000 ms is set as the display time. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, set "2" to be processed during the special map display as the processing number (step A 605)
The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606). further,
Save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Special Figure 1 (for example, the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation is OFF) in the test signal output data area (Step A 607), Save the signal to the test signal output data area (step A)
608) save the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) in the symbol determination frequency signal control timer area related to the number of times of execution of the special view variation display game for output to the external information terminal
609). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 1 display 51 is saved in the special view 1 change control flag area (step A610) Save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52) A611) The special figure changing process ends.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, the details of the special view display process (step A10) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, in the special view display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special view 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A 701) The small hit flag area is cleared (step A702).
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded (Step A703) A process (Step A704) of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is performed. Then, it is judged whether the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A705), and it is a big hit (step A70).
5; Y), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the feature continuous operation device operating signal ON) for the start of the big hit (special feature 2 big hit) of the second special view fluctuation display game,
The special symbol 2 signal is turned ON) and saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A 708), and the round number upper limit table is set (step A 709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit as a result of the check of the big hit flag 2 (step A 705; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (
Step A706) If it is determined that it is a big hit (step A706; Y), the test signal (for example, the condition device in operation signal ON), the feature, regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure fluctuation display game Continuous operation device ON signal during operation, special symbol 1 signal ON)) RW
The test signal output data area of M is saved (step A 707), and a process of setting a round number upper limit table (step A 709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 709), the round number upper limit ("16" or "4" in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM is acquired. The number of rounds is saved in the upper limit value area of (step A710). Continue to get round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information, RWM round LE
Save to the D pointer area (step A711).

Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM and prepared (step A 712), and a rendering command setting process (step A 71)
Do 3). After that, a probability information command is prepared according to the information that makes the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) (step A714). (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 1 or special view 2 stop symbol setting process
Are prepared (step A716), and effect command setting processing (step A717) is performed.

Next, the information corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A 718, two jackpots and three jacks are saved as signals corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON if the jackpot is a jackpot with a jackpot (the jackpot opening information is not the jackpot opening information 1 (4R probability change (sudging))), a jackpot without jackpots (jacket opening) Opening information is the big winning opening opening information 1 (
In the case of 4R probability variation (studging))), it will be ON if it is a big hit in a time saving state, and it will be OFF otherwise. In addition, the jackpot 3 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with some balls, and is OFF when the jackpot is a jackpot without balls.

After that, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 470) corresponding to the special winning opening information and the probability of being hit in the common view change display game and the special view change display game.
0 ms, 7700 ms or 300 ms) are set (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720).
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special view when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the large winning a prize opening fraud winning number area of the special winning a prize opening (the special fluctuation winning a prize device 38) which corresponds to the special winning a prize opening opening information is cleared (step A722), the special winning a prize winning opening which corresponds to the special winning opening information Save the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A72)
3). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process shift setting process 1 (step A 724)
) And end the processing while displaying the special map. That is, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special fluctuation winning device 38 into the open state based on the result being a special result in any of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game. It is a special game state generating means that generates a state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit at step A706 (step A706)
N) determines whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A 72)
5; Y) performs time reduction variation number update processing (step A 726) and presentation mode information check processing (step A 727) related to setting of the presentation mode, and the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is the high probability state It is determined (step A728).

At step A728, when it is determined that the high probability of the special figure is not present (step A728; N
Load the decoration special drawing command from the decoration special drawing command area) and prepare (step A)
729), Perform rendering command setting processing (step A730). Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), and a rendering command setting process (step A73)
2) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
In addition, when it is determined that the high probability of the special drawing is in step A728 (step A72)
In step 8; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. Thus, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment
At 0, when the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is high probability state, the occurrence of the small hit opens the big winning opening, but in order to make the player not aware of the occurrence of the small hit, The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Thereafter, the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A 725; N), time reduction variation number update processing (step A 735), presentation mode information check processing relating to setting of presentation mode (step A 736) is performed to set the switching preparation remaining rotation number corresponding to the rendering mode number (step A737), and it is determined whether the rendering remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A 738). Note that the switching preparation remaining rotational speed may be a different value (rotational speed) in all the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes, or the same value in any of the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes.
When it is determined in step A 738 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step A 738; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A 741)
) And end the processing while displaying the special map.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A 738 that the effect remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A 738; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A 739). After the processing (step A740) is performed, special processing shift processing setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the processing of displaying the special drawing is ended. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several revolutions before the effect mode is switched, and the effect mode switching preparation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 to cross the mode. So that there is no contradiction.

[Time reduction variation update process]
Next, the processing for updating the number of times for shortening time change in the processing while displaying the special drawing described above (step A 726,
The details of A735) will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in the time reduction variation number updating process, first, it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (in the high probability state) (step A751). When the special figure height probability is in progress (step A 751: Y), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended. In addition, when it is not in the special figure height probability (step A 751; N), it is determined whether or not the time is short (step A 752). If the time is not being saved (step A 752: N), the time reduction change number update process is ended. Also, if the time is short (step A 752; Y)
The time reduction change count is updated by 1 (step A 753), and the time reduction change count is "0".
It is determined whether or not (step A754).

If the time reduction variation count is not “0” (step A 754; N), the time reduction variation count update process is ended. In addition, when the number of times of time reduction variation becomes “0” (step A 75)
4) In Y, save the signal related to the end of time saving (for example, the big hit 2 signal OFF) in the external information output data area. Then, the signal regarding the end of the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) to the test signal output data area Save.

Next, save the number with no time saving in the game state display number area (step A757), save the common drawing low probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A758), and make special drawing in the special drawing game mode flag area. Save the low probability & time saving none flag (step A 759
). Next, save a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is OFF) relating to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step A760), and display the LED during right hitting (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57). In order to extinguish it, the number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 761), and the time shortening variation number updating process is ended.

[Demonstration mode information check processing]
Next, rendering mode information check processing in the special map display processing described above (step A727)
, A736) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 74, in the effect mode information check process, it is first determined whether the next mode shift information is a code without update (step A77).
1). If the next mode shift information is the no update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process is ended. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of special view variation display games that have been executed, and for example, the effect mode which continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

If the next mode transition information is not a no update code (step A 771; N), the effect remaining rotation number, which is the number of executable times of the special view variation display game up to the change of the effect mode, is updated by −1 (step A 772) , It is determined whether the effect remaining rotational speed has become "0" (step A
773). When the effect remaining rotation speed is not "0" (step A773; N),
The presentation mode information check process ends. Also, when the remaining effect rotation speed is "0" (
Step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is to be changed from the next special figure fluctuation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774), and the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A774) Step A 775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A 776), and the effect remaining rotation number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired,
It saves in the effect remaining rotation speed area in RWM (step A677), acquires next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted, and saves it in the next mode shift information area in RWM (step A678). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, if the state of the probability has not changed, the rendering mode information check process is ended.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A782), An effect command setting process (step A 782) is performed.
Next, prepare an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation speed (
Step A783) The effect command setting process (step A784) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A 785), and effect command setting processing (step A 786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a mode to hit the left (step A787)
If the mode is not the left strike mode (step A 787; N), the effect mode information check process is ended. If the mode is left-handed (step A 787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A 788), rendering command setting processing (step A 789) is performed, and rendering mode information check processing is ended. Do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of giving notice of switching from before the specified number of revolutions of switching of the effect mode. As described above, by managing the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100, for example, control such as generating a specific reach can be performed only in a specific effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 1 (step A 724) in the above-described process of displaying the special view will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1, first, the processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A 791), and processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A 792).

Next, save the signal about the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, 1 big hit signal ON (big hit + small hit output), big hit 4 signal ON (big hit output)) in the external information output data area (Step A 793), a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1
Variation time reduction state signal OFF, special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal OFF, normal symbol 1
Save the high probability state signal) in the test signal output data area (step A794)
. Note that, even during the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the ordinary drawing, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal motorized combination 1 open extension state signal are always off. After that, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A)
795) Save the number without time saving in the gaming state display number area (step A796),
The common drawing low probability flag is saved in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A 797).

Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability notification flag area is used to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit) provided on the gaming board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. Is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801). The time reduction variation number area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high probability state and the short time state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

Thereafter, the effect mode number is saved in the effect mode number area (step A 803),
The effect remaining rotation number area is cleared (step A804), and the no update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, a signal relating to a right-handed command (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806)
), In order to light the display LED (for example, the second gaming state display unit) in the right strike, save the number in the right strike state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 807), and process during the fanfare / interval The migration setting process 1 ends. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared as the special gaming state occurs.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the special figure display process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 76, in the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1, first, “7” for the small hit fanfare medium process is set as the process number (step A811),
The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A812).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 813), a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one signal for big hit is ON (big hit + small hit output) )) In the external information output data area (step A)
814) A signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815).

Next, the special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A 816), and the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A 817).
Next, a signal relating to a right-handed command (fire position designation signal 1 is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 818), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) is lit. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 819), and the small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / in-interval process (step A11) in the above-described special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902) And effect command setting processing (step A 903).

Thereafter, the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A 904), the release switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is obtained (step A 905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is the obtained release switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
If the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A 906; Y), the short open (
The special winning opening opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) for the second opening mode) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 907), and the special winning opening opening processing transition setting processing (step A 909)
To finish the process during the fanfare / interval.
If the number of rounds is not larger than the release switching determination value (step A 906; N), the special winning opening open time (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening (first opening mode) is set as the special figure game processing timer area Save (step A 908), and the special winning opening open processing transition processing setting process (step A
909) to complete the fanfare / interval process.

Here, in the present embodiment, as a big hit pattern, 16R positive variation A (all long open)
, 16R definite variation B (1 to 4R long opening, 5 to 16R short opening), 16R normal A (all long opening), 16R normal B (1 to 4 R long opening, 5 to 16R short opening) (All open short)
Is set. The definite change is a big hit when the probability state after the end of the special game state becomes a high probability state, and the normal is a big hit when the probability state after the end of the special game state becomes a low probability state. Therefore, in the special winning opening operation determination table, 16R positive variation A data and opening switching determination value "0", 16R positive variation B data and opening switching determination value "4", 16R normal A data and opening switching determination value "0", The 16R normal B data is stored in association with the release switching determination value “4” and the 4R probability variation data and the release switching determination value “0”. Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, the open operation is performed such that the open operation is short open when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value.

[A special winning opening open process processing transition setting process]
FIG. 78 shows the process setting setting processing during large winning opening opening (step A 909) in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval processing. In the processing for setting transition processing during the special winning opening, first, the processing number is set to "4" for the processing during opening of the special winning opening (step A91)
1) Save the process number in the special figure game process number area (step A 912). after that,
A special winning opening that saves a signal related to the opening start of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric combination 1 operation signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step A 913) The information in the count area is cleared (step A 914). Then, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing is ended.

[Big winning opening open processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open process (step A12) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 79, in the special winning opening open process, first, the current round is compared with the current round number in the special gaming state under execution and the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001).
Then, if it is not the final round (step A1001; N), set the special winning opening operation determination table (step A1002), acquire the release switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (step A1003), It is determined whether the number of rounds in the gaming state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1004).
If the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), save the remaining ball processing time (eg, 1.4 seconds) for the short closing in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005), Prepare an interval command related to the interval between rounds (
Step A1007) The effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, the special winning opening residual ball process shift setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the special winning opening open processing is ended.

Also, when the number of rounds is not larger than the release switching determination value (step A1004; N)
Save the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1006) and prepare an interval command (step A1007)
The effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, the special winning opening residual ball process shift setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the special winning opening open processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), save the final remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008),
The ending command concerning display control etc. of the ending display screen at the time of the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step A1009), effect command setting processing (step A101)
0), the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the special winning opening open processing is ended.

[Large winning hole remaining ball processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 80 shows the process setting for the big winning a prize remaining game in the above-mentioned process for opening a special winning opening (step A1011). In the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting process, first, the processing number is set to "5" for the special winning opening residual ball processing (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, to close the opening / closing member 990 of the special variation winning device 38, save the off data for turning off the big winning opening solenoid 38b in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step A102).
3), the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing ends.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 81, in the special winning opening residual ball processing, first, the current round is compared with the current round number in the special gaming state being executed and the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value region of RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

And if the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A
1101; N) sets the special winning opening operation determination table (step A1102), acquires the release switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening release information (step A1103), and sets the interval time for normal use (for example, 0. 0). 1) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special gaming state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1105), and the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A)
In 1105; Y), the process proceeds to step A1109. If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening opening information is a rank down effect type value (step A1106).

Here, the rank down effect corresponds to an effect of notifying that the following round will be a short open round. Specifically, as a big hit pattern, 16R positive variation A (all long open),
16R positive variable B (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), 16R normal A (all long open)
, 16R normal B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), when the big hit round 1R to 3R is displayed a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 And perform round continuation informing effect with the 4th R. 16 selected jackpot patterns
If it is R definite variation A or 16R normal B (all long open), it is reported that long open continues in a round continuation alerting production, and a big winning opening is open long open also in the round after the 5th R eyes. In addition, if the selected jackpot pattern is 16R positive variation B or 16R normal B (1 to 4 R is long open, 5 to 16 R is short open), rank down effect is performed in the round continuation informing effect and short open It will be informed that the big winning opening will be open in a short opening in the 5Rth and subsequent rounds.

If the special winning opening information is not a rank down effect value (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. When the special winning opening information is a rank down effect value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Also, if the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (
Step A1107; Y), for example, if the number of rounds is 4R, set an interval time for rank down effect (for example, 3.6 seconds) (step A1108), step A
It shifts to processing of 1109. In addition, the number of special rounds is not limited to one type, for example, 4R and 8R
A plurality of types may be provided.

Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the special winning opening residual ball processing Finish.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A1)
101; Y) loads a flag from the special figure game mode flag saving area storing the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1111), and the loaded flag, the special winning opening information and the stop symbol pattern Set the ending time corresponding to (step A11)
12) Save the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1113). After that, the big hit end processing shift setting processing (step A1
114) to complete the special winning opening remaining ball processing.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 82 shows the process transfer setting process 2 (step A1110) during fanfare / interval in the above-mentioned special winning opening residual ball process. In this fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 2, first, the processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1122).
Next, save a signal (for example, the special electric combination 1 operating signal is OFF) regarding the open end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) in the test signal output data area (step A112)
3) The fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 2 ends.

[Big hit end processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 83 shows the big hit end processing shift setting process (step A1114) in the above-mentioned big winning opening residual ball process. In the big hit end process shift setting process, first, "6" is set as the process number related to the big hit end process (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132). Thereafter, a signal (for example, the special electric symbol 1 in operation is OFF) relating to the open end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step A1134), clear the information on the round number area storing the round number of the special gaming state (step A1135) ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit value area storing the upper limit value of the round number of the special gaming state (step A1136). Then, the information of the round number upper limit value information area storing the flag for upper limit value determination of the round number is cleared (step A113)
7) The information on the special winning opening opening information area storing the opening information determination flag for the special winning opening is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end processing shift setting processing is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end process (step A14) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 84, in this big hit end process, first, the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is a high probability after the end of the special game state It is determined whether the data is high probability data set in the case of becoming a state (step A1201).

When it is not high probability data (step A1201; N), big hit end setting processing 1 is done (step A1202), when it is high probability data (step A1201; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 is carried out (step A1203) ), Prepare a probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag (step A1204), and execute the command setting process (step A12).
Do 05).

Next, as processing for saving information necessary for managing the rendering mode in the game control apparatus 100, first, a rendering mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A1206). Then, with reference to the set effect mode information setting table, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1207). Furthermore, the effect residual rotation number of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the effect residual rotation number region (step A1208),
The next mode transition information of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1209).

Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A1210),
The command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A1211), and command setting processing (step A1212) is performed. Then, special processing normal processing shift setting processing 2 is performed (step A1213), and the big hit end processing is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
In FIG. 85, the big hit end setting process 1 (step A120) in the above-mentioned big hit end process
2) is shown. In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal regarding the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and a signal regarding the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

Next, the common drawing high probability & common charge support flag is saved in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1223), and the special drawing low probability & time short flag is saved in the special drawing game mode flag area (step A1224). After that, the probability information command (
Time saving) is saved (step A 1225), time shortening variation frequency initial value (for example, 100) is saved in the time shortening variation frequency domain (step A 1226), and the big hit end setting process 1 is ended.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. In addition, by setting the initial value (for example, 100) of the short-time fluctuation count in the short-time fluctuation count area, the short-time state is ended by execution of the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
In FIG. 86, the big hit end setting process 2 (step A120) in the above-mentioned big hit end process
3) is shown. In the big hit end setting process 2, first, the signal regarding the start of the high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231), and the signal regarding the start of the high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

Next, the common drawing high probability & common charge support flag is saved in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1233), and the special drawing high probability & time short flag is saved in the special drawing game mode flag area (step A1234). After that, the probability information command (
The high probability) is saved (step A1235), the time shortening fluctuation number area is cleared (step A1236), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended. By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game becomes the high probability state and the time saving state until the derivation of the next special result mode is achieved.

That is, the specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the game control device 100 extends the period in which the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined period determined after the end of the special gaming state.
The special game state generation control means capable of generating

[Special figure normal processing shift setting process 2]
In FIG. 87, the special figure normal process shift setting process 2 (step A in the above-mentioned big hit end process)
1219). In the special view routine process transition setting process 2, first, "0" is set as the process number relating to the special figure routine process (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1242) .

After that, save the signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal OFF, big hit 3 signal OFF, big hit 4 signal OFF) in the external information output data area (step A1)
243), the signal about the end of the big hit (for example, the condition device in operation signal OFF, character continuous operation device in operation signal OFF, special symbol 1 per signal OFF, special symbol 2 per signal
F) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information of the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, clear the information of the special view game mode flag save area (step A1248), save the flag during the injustice monitoring period in the large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and set special processing shift processing 2 Finish.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing]
Next, the small hit fanfare middle processing in the above-mentioned special figure game processing (step A15)
Explain the details of. As shown in FIG. 88A, in the small hit fanfare medium process, a small hit, medium process shift setting process (step A1301) is performed.

[Small hitting Medium process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit middle processing shift setting process (step A1301) in the above-described small hit fanfare medium middle processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the small hit middle processing shift setting process, first, "8" for the small hit middle processing is set as the processing number (step A1311), and the processing number is set to the special view game processing. Save in the number area (step A131)
2).

Next, save the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), a signal regarding the start of the small hitting operation (for example, special electric role 1 During operation, the signal is turned ON) and saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Next, in order to open the opening / closing member 990 of the special variation winning device 38, on data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step A 1316), save the small hitting operation initial value (for example, "0") in the small hitting middle control pointer area (Step A1317), the small hitting middle process transition setting process is ended.

[Small hit during processing]
Next, details of the small hit middle process (step A16) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 89, in the small hit middle processing, first, the small hit middle control pointer value is loaded (step A1401), and the loaded value is the small hit operation end value (for example, "6").
It is determined whether it is above (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not greater than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hitting middle control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hitting operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed. End processing during hit.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is in the special figure height probability. Whether it is a flag related to (step A1406)
). Thereby, it is determined whether the small hit in the special figure height probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the time saving state is in progress.
When the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y
In step b1), the small hit residual ball processing shift setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle process ends. If the loaded flag is not a flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), prepare a small hit end screen command (step A1407), perform rendering command setting processing (step A1408), Small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing (
Step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle process ends.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting operation shift setting process (step A1404) in the above-mentioned small hit middle process will be described. As shown in FIG. 90, in the small hitting operation shift setting process, branch processing (step A1411) is performed according to the control pointer (small hitting middle control pointer).

If the control pointer is “0”, “2” or “4” at step A1411, the wait time (eg, 1500 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412), The off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hitting operation shift setting process is ended.
If the control pointer is "1", "3" or "5" at step A1411, the special winning opening open time (for example, 200 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A1414) The on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (Step A1415), and the small hitting operation shift setting process is ended.

Here, in the case of this embodiment, 200 m after the small hit fanfare time of 300 ms.
The opening of seconds and the closing of 1500 ms are alternately performed, and the small hit control pointer is sequentially updated at the end of opening and at the end of closing.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 ms opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 ms opening to the first 1500 ms closing), the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “0,” 1 At the end of the first 1500 ms closure (ie, from the first 1500 ms closure)
The control pointer is updated to “1” during the small hit)
The small hit middle control pointer is updated to “2” at the end of the second 200 ms opening, and the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “3” at the end of the second 1500 ms closing, and the third 200
The small hit middle control pointer is updated to "4" at the end of the m second opening, and the small hit middle control pointer is updated to "5" at the end of the third 1500 ms closing. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 ms opening, the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “6”, and after the lapse of the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 ms and the small hit ending time of 100 ms thereafter, the small hit The state ends. Therefore, since it is closed for 2000 ms after the fourth 200 ms opening, the visual ending time is 2000 ms.

[Small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing]
Next, small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing in the above-mentioned small hit middle processing (step A140)
The details of 9) will be described. As shown in FIG. 91, in the small hit residual ball processing shift setting process, first, “9” according to the small hit residual ball processing is set as the process number (step A 142)
1) Save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A1422).
Next, the small hit residual ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1424), small The remaining ball processing shift setting process is ended.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 92A, in the small hit residual ball processing, a small hit end processing shift setting process (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, the small hitting end processing shift setting processing in the above-mentioned small hitting remaining ball processing (step A15
The details of 01) will be described. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), in the small hitting end process shift setting process, first, “10” according to the small hit ending process is set as the process number (step A)
1511), Save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A1512)
).

Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric character 1 operating signal is turned off) Are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514).
).
Next, clear the information of the large winning opening count count area (step A1515), clear the information of the small hit middle control pointer area (for example, clear 0) (step A1516), and end the small hit end processing shift setting process .

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hitting end process (step A18) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 93, in the small hitting end process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability Step A1602).
When the loaded flag is not the flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1602; N
) Sets the rendering mode information address table (step A1603), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the rendering mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop symbol) (step A1604).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A 776), and the effect remaining rotation number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired,
It saves in the effect remaining rotation number area in the RAM (step A1606), acquires next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted, and saves it in the next mode shift information area in the RWM (step A1607). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610), Effect command setting process (step A1611)
)I do.
Then, prepare an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number (step A161)
2) Perform rendering command setting processing (step A 1613).
Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A 1614), and rendering command setting processing (step A 1615) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a mode to hit the left (step A 1616)
) And the left strike mode (step A1616; N), step A1619
Transfer to processing of Also, if it is a mode to strike left (step A1616; Y), prepare a command to issue a left strike instruction (step A1617), and perform rendering command setting processing (step A1617).
After performing step A1618), the process proceeds to step A1619.

Then, the flag is loaded from the special view game mode flag save area (step A1619)
), It is judged whether the loaded flag is the flag related to the special drawing time short and medium (during the short time state) (
Step A1620).
When the loaded flag is a flag related to special drawing time reduction (Step A 1620; Y)
In step 3, special processing shift processing setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hitting end processing is ended.
Also, if the loaded flag is not a flag relating to special drawing time saving (step A1620)
N: save a signal related to a left-handling instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A1621), and display LED being right-handed (for example,
In order to turn off the first gaming state display section 57), save the number in the left hitting state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1622), and set special process transition processing 3 (step A1)
623), and the small hit termination process ends.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3]
Next, the special view normal process shift setting process 3 (step A 162) in the above-mentioned small hit end process
The details of 3) will be described. As shown in FIG. 94, in the special processing routine processing transition setting processing, first, "0" relating to the special processing routine processing is set as the processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is set as the special processing game processing number area. Save (step A1632).

Next, save the signal regarding the small hit end (for example, the big hit 1 signal OFF) in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal regarding the small hit end (for example,
Save the special symbol 1 small hit signal in the test signal output data area (step A1)
634).
Next, the information of the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information of the special view game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1637).
Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special processing routine processing transition setting processing 3 is ended.

[Processing command setting process]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 95, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
Also, when the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A 2002; N),
Write command data (MODE) to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003)
).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004)
It is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process for reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
Also, when the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N),
Write command data (ACTION) to the serial transmission buffer for effect (Step A20)
06), finish the rendering command setting process.
The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as "command setting process".

[Symbol variation control processing]
In FIG. 96, the symbol variation control process in the special drawing game process described above (steps A20 and A22)
And symbol variation control processing (step B15) in the common drawing game processing described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol (the first special figure, the second special figure, etc.) or the ordinary symbol (the common figure) and setting the display data of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol.

In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag applied to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the common figure) is changing (step A2)
101). In the case of this embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A19, step A21 and step B14 Stop address), display table 1
An address (for variation) is defined.

In the case that the flag during fluctuation concerning the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating (step A2102; Y)
Acquires the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (step A21)
03). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21 and step B14.
Next, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), and it is determined whether the updated blinking control timer is "0" (step A2105), and the updated blinking control timer is "0". If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

If the updated blink control timer is "0" (step A2105; Y), the blink control timer initial value corresponding to the target blink timer area is saved (step A2106).
The variable symbol number to be controlled is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (step A2108).
Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111).
), End the symbol variation control process.

On the other hand, when the flag during the change of the symbol to be controlled is not changing (step A2102
N) acquires a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (step A2109). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21 and step B14.
Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (step A)
2110), save the acquired display data in the target segment area (step A21)
11), complete the symbol variation control process.

The blinking control timer initial value saved in step A2106 is a value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. Here, the first
A value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the blink control timer initial value in the fluctuation control table of the special figure (first special figure fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation control table of the second special figure (second special figure fluctuation display game) A value corresponding to 104 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer in and a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer in the fluctuation control table of the common drawing (generally displayed variation display game). The blinking control timer initial value is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the fluctuation time.

Further, the corresponding range in step A2107 is defined by the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variation symbol number reaches the upper limit value by updating the variation symbol number by +1 in step A2107, the variation symbol number is set to 0, and the variation symbol number is 0 to 0 (variation symbol number upper limit judgment value -1 It is updated sequentially in the range of). In steps A2108 and A2111, display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the fluctuation symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value. Will be repeatedly displayed.

Here, 8 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit judgment value in the variation control table of the first special figure (first special figure variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0-7. Therefore, the special figure 1 in-varying display which is repeatedly displayed during the variation display of the first special figure variation display game makes a round with updating of the lighting pattern of eight times. In addition, 2 is defined as the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value in the fluctuation control table of the second special figure (the second special figure fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation symbol numbers can be updated alternately with 0 and 1. Therefore, the special figure 2 in-varying display which is repeatedly displayed during the variable indication of the second special figure variation display game makes a round with updating of the lighting patterns of two times. Further, 4 is defined as the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value in the fluctuation control table of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0-3.
Therefore, the common drawing in-progress display, which is repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the common drawing change display game, makes one round of four lighting pattern updates.

By defining the blinking control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed as described above, the interval and the display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are round The number of updates to be made can be set for each game.

[Puppet game processing]
Next, details of the common-play game process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a, control of the entire processing concerning the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of common drawing, and the like are performed.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the common-play game processing, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general competition winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the standard game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the common drawing game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

If it is determined that the value of the common-play game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, it is determined that the time-up or time-up has already occurred, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the common-play game processing number The routine drawing game sequence branch table is set in the register (step B5), and the table is used to obtain the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the regular drawing game process number (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the common drawing game process number (step B7).

In step B7, when the popular drawing game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the common drawing fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of fluctuation start of the common drawing fluctuation display game and the setting of the effect, the common drawing fluctuation The ordinary drawing process (step B8) is performed to set information necessary for performing the process.
If the drawing game processing number is “1” in step B7, a drawing change processing (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the drawing display processing.

In addition, if the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit when the common drawing game processing number is "2" in step B7, the setting of the common charge open time according to whether or not the time saving state is being performed. In addition, the general drawing display processing (step B10) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common processing per processing.
In addition, if the common drawing game processing number is "3" in step B7, then the common drawing is continued during the common drawing, or the common drawing is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common electric residual ball processing, etc. A process (step B11) is performed.

In step B7, if the common drawing game process number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) is performed to set information required for performing the common drawing end processing.
If the drawing game processing number is "5" in step B7, the drawing drawing end processing (step B13) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the drawing common processing.

Then, after preparing the common drawing fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the common drawing display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the common symbol by the common drawing display (step B15) ), And end the common drawing game processing.
On the other hand, in step B4, the value of the drawing game processing timer is not "0" (step B4;
N), that is, when it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to the process of step B14, and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described common game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether the game state (for example, during the big hit, during the small hit, during the special view time, during the common charge support) (Step B1
02).
When it is a game state to hit the right (step B102; Y), it is determined whether the common drawing reservation number is obtained and the general drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).
If the game state is not right-handed (step B102; N), a left-handed command is prepared (step B103), and the rendering command setting process (step B104) is performed, and then the common drawing reserve number is acquired. It is determined whether the number of general drawing reservations is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).

If the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the common drawing reservation number is updated by 1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated common drawing reservation number is calculated. (Step B107). Then, the random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (step B108), and the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit symbol random number storage area (step B109). Finish.

If it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or if it is determined in step B105 that the number of general drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (step B105; N), End the gate switch monitoring process.

[Puden prize winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the common prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described common drawing game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 99, in the common electric winning switch switch monitoring process, first, whether it is in the common drawing, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game is hit and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. It is determined whether there is any (step B201). Then, if the drawing is in the middle (step B201; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202), and the input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y)
When it is determined, the count number of the common charge counter is updated by 1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether the count number of the post-update common charge counter is equal to or more than the upper limit (for example, "6") (step B204), and the count is equal to or more than the upper limit (step B204; Y)
If it is determined that the control pointer area is hit per drawing, the value of the operation end (for example, "4") is saved (step B205) and the drawing game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B206).
The Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process ends. That is, when there is a routine power prize higher than the upper limit value in the hit state of the common drawing, the hit state of the common drawing is ended halfway at that point.

In addition, when it is determined in step B201 that a common drawing is not in progress (step B201; N
), When it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the starting opening 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or when it is determined in step B204 that the common charge count number is not higher than the upper limit Ends the Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (step B8) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 100, in the ordinary drawing routine, first, it is determined whether the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301), and the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B201; Y
) Performs ordinary drawing transition processing transition setting processing 1 (step B321), and ends ordinary circulation processing. Also, if the common drawing reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), load random numbers from the RWM hit random number storage area (for the hold number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for the hold number 1) (
Step B302), clear random number storage area (for holding number 1), touch symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability of hit results in a common drawing variation display game is normal It is determined whether it is in the common map high probability raised higher than the probability (that is, the common map low probability), ie, in the short time state (step B304).

If the general drawing high probability is not (step B304; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the general drawing low probability is set (step B305), and the general drawing high probability is in progress (step B)
304; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the drawing high probability (step B306).
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B307). If the value of the random number is not greater than or equal to the upper judgment value (step B307; N), the value of the random number is determined to be B305 or B306. To determine whether it is less than the lower limit judgment value set (step B3).
08).

If the value of the per-random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B307; Y) or if the value of the per-random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B3)
08; Y) saves the shift information in the hit flag area (step B309), sets the out-of-stop symbol number (step B310), saves the out-of-pattern information in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B311) The stop symbol number is saved in the common figure stop symbol area (step B315).
On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B).
312), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the hit symbol random number loaded in step B302 is set (step B313), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B314) ), Save the stop symbol number in the common figure stop symbol area (step B315).

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at high probability is 250/251, the upper judgment value is “251”, and the low probability judgment value is “251”, the high probability lower limit judgment value is “1”.
Therefore, at the time of the general drawing low probability, the value of the hit random number deviates in all cases of “0” to “250”.
Further, at the time of the drawing normal probability, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of “1” to “250” is present, and the case where the value of the hit random number is “0” is not.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol area (step B315), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316).
Thereafter, the random number storage area is shifted (step B317), and the free space after shift is set to 0.
It clears (step B318) and updates the common drawing reservation number by -1 (step B319). That is, with the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 being executed, the processing of raising the positions of the common drawing reservation numbers 2 to 4 held by the common drawing reservation number 1 or later one by one I do. As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to the number 3 for general drawing reservation It will be done.
Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 of the random number storage area per common drawing is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one.
Then, the general drawing variation processing transition setting process (step B320) is performed, and the general drawing routine processing is ended.

[General drawing normal processing transition setting processing 1]
In FIG. 101, a general drawing routine processing transition setting process 1 in the above-described common drawing routine processing (step B32)
1) The common drawing routine processing shift setting processing 1 (step B508) in the common drawing display processing described later is shown. In this common drawing routine processing transition setting processing 1, first, "0" is set as a processing number for moving to common drawing normal processing (step B331), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (step B332). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B333), and the routine diagram transition processing setting processing 1 is ended.

[Processing setting setting process during general drawing fluctuation]
102. FIG. 102 shows the processing shift setting processing during the common drawing fluctuation in the above-described common drawing routine processing (step B32).
0) was shown. In this common drawing fluctuating process transition setting process, first, “1” is set as a processing number for shifting to the common drawing fluctuating process (step B 341), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area ( Step B342).
After that, the common drawing fluctuation time (for example, 500 ms. In the case of this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation time is common between the common drawing low probability state and the common drawing high probability state) Save (step B343), save the signal related to the start of the common drawing fluctuation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step B344), and change the common drawing fluctuation display game A floating flag indicating medium is saved in the common drawing fluctuation control flag area (step B345).
Then, save the blinking control timer initial value (here, 52 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the common drawing indicator, in the common drawing blinking control timer area (step B346) Finish.

[During processing of common map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general drawing fluctuation processing (step B9) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the general-diagram variation processing, a general-diagram-display processing transition setting process (step B401) is performed.

[Processing transition setting processing during common map display]
Next, the processing for setting transition to processing for general drawing during the processing for changing general drawing described above (step B401)
The details of) will be described. As shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the processing for setting transition to general processing, first, the processing number is set to "2" as setting processing for transitioning to processing during general display (step B411), Save the number in the map game processing number area (step B4)
12). After that, the common drawing display time (for example, 600 ms) which is the display time of the common drawing fluctuation display game result in the common drawing indicator is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B413)
), Save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of the common drawing (for example, the signal during normal symbol 1 fluctuation is OFF) in the test signal output data area (step B414), and stop flag indicating that the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped Are stored in the common drawing variation control flag area (step B415), and the common drawing display process transition setting process is ended.

[Process while displaying a common map]
Next, details of the common drawing display processing (step B10) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 104, in the processing for displaying the common drawing, first, the hit flag (hit information or removal information) set in the common processing is loaded (step B501), and the RWM is executed.
Clears the hit flag area (step B502), and determines whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503)

If the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), the common drawing routine processing transition setting processing 1 (step B508) for moving to the common drawing normal processing is performed, and the common drawing display processing is ended.
On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B 503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B 504), and the hit start pointer value (eg, “0 ",""2" or "4") is obtained and saved in the control pointer area during the drawing (step B505). Next, a general power release time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 ms) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B506). Thereafter, a per process drawing setting process transition setting process (step B21)
Perform 1) and finish the processing while displaying the general drawing.

[Per process of processing transition setting processing per common map]
FIG. 105 shows the processing transition setting processing (step B507) per common drawing in the above-described processing of displaying the common drawing. In this processing per process setting processing, first, "3" is set as a processing number for processing transition to processing per common drawing (step B511), and the processing number is saved in the general processing game processing number area. (Step B512). After that, test signal output data for the signal related to the hit of the common drawing fluctuation display game (for example, the signal during normal symbol 1 is ON) and the signal for the start of power operation (for example, the signal for ordinary electric character 1 operation is ON) In order to save in the area (step B513) and output a signal for driving (turning on) the common voltage solenoid, the on data is saved in the common voltage solenoid output data area (step B514).

Further, the information of the common charge count number area storing the number of winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is cleared (step B515), and the general electric number storing the winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the regular monitoring period The information on the incorrect winning number area is cleared (step B516). Then, a flag (outside of fraud monitoring period flag) defining out of fraud monitoring period of normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is saved in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B 517), and the processing transition setting processing is completed per common drawing. Do.

[Every time per popular map]
Next, the details of the common drawing in the common drawing game process (step B11) will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, in the middle processing per normal drawing, first, the middle control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the control pointer per common drawing loaded is equal to or more than the upper limit It is determined (step B602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer during normal drawing is not the upper limit value or more (step B602; N
) Updates the control pointer by +1 during the general drawing (step B603), performs the routine operation transition setting processing (step B604), and ends the processing during the general drawing.
Also, when the value of the control pointer during normal drawing is the upper limit value or more (step B602; Y)
In step B603, the general operation shift setting process (step B604) is performed without performing processing of updating the processing control pointer area by +1 in the common drawing per step B603, and the processing in the common drawing is ended.

[Puppet operation transition setting process]
In FIG. 107, the general-purpose power transition setting process in the above-mentioned per-normal-process processing (step B60)
4) is shown. The routine operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the drive of the routine power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and a control pointer (a control pointer in the middle of a general view).
Processing is branched according to the value of. In this routine operation transition setting process, first, a branch process is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B611).

If the value of the control pointer is "0" or "2", the process proceeds to step B612,
In order to control the closing of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, the wait time after closing of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B612)
In order to turn off the common solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B613), and the common power operation transition setting process is ended.

If the value of the control pointer is “1” or “3”, the process proceeds to step B 614 to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so that the normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer In order to save the general power release time, which is the open time, in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B614) and turn on the general power solenoid 37c, save the on data in the general power solenoid output data area (step B615) Ends the routine operation transition setting process.

If the value of the control pointer is “4”, the process proceeds to step B 616 to end the release control of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 and perform the general electric power remaining ball processing, so “4” as the processing number
Is set (step B616). Then, the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (step B617), and the general electric power remaining ball processing time is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B619). Thereafter, in order to turn off the common solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B619), and the common power operation transition setting process is ended.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, 200 m as a wait time in step B612.
In step B614, the second is saved as 1700 msec as the common charge release time, and in step B618, 600 msec as the common sphere residual ball processing time is saved.
Furthermore, when the stop figure symbol is “per hit symbol 1”, “4” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the processing during the stop status display shown in FIG. In step B506, "500 ms" is acquired as the general power release time.
Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, since the release time of the general power is "500 ms", the normal power (normal fluctuation winning device 37) opens for 500 ms, and then the control pointer is "4" Therefore, the general charge residual ball processing time of 600 ms is set.
In addition, when the stop figure design symbol is “hit pattern 2”, “2” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the processing during the hit map display shown in FIG. In step B506, “1700 milliseconds” is acquired as the general power release time.
Therefore, after the display time of 600 ms has elapsed, since the PV release time is "1700 ms", the PV is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer is "2" during the spread.
A wait time of 00 ms is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "3" during the general drawing, and the general power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer is updated to "4" during the general drawing. Because of this, the 600 m second power control ball processing time is set.
In addition, when the stop figure design symbol is “per hit pattern 3”, “0” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the processing during the general view display shown in FIG. In step B506, “1700 milliseconds” is acquired as the general power release time.
Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, since the PV release time is "1700 ms", the PV is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer is "0" during the spread 2
A wait time of 00 ms is set, and then the control pointer is updated to “1” during the general drawing, and the general power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer is updated to “2” during the general drawing. Because a 200 ms wait time is set, the control pointer
In order to be updated to "3", the routine power is released for 1700 ms, and then, the control pointer in the common state is updated to "4", and the general processing residual ball processing time of 600 ms is set.

[Puden residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the routine charge remaining ball processing (step B12) in the above-described regular game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), in the generalization residual ball processing, the end processing shift setting processing (step B701) is performed per common drawing.

[Process for setting end processing transition per common drawing]
Next, per normal drawing end processing transition setting processing in the above-mentioned normal charge residual ball processing (step B70
The details of 1) will be described. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), in the processing for setting end processing per common drawing, first, the processing number "5" related to the end processing per common drawing is set (step B711)
And the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (step B 712).

Thereafter, the common drawing ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B 713), and a signal (for example,
Save the normal motorized part 1 operation signal OFF) in the test signal output data area (step B 714), and clear the general charge count number area for counting the number of prizes to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (step B 715) . Then, the control pointer area in the common drawing is cleared (step B716), and the processing for setting the end processing per common drawing is ended.

[End processing per popular map]
Next, the details of the end-of-round-figure end process (step B13) in the above-mentioned ordinary-figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 109 (a), in the end processing per common drawing, common processing normal processing shift setting processing 2 (step B801) is performed.

[General drawing normal processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the common drawing routine processing transition setting processing 2 in the above-mentioned common drawing per-end processing (step B80
The details of 1) will be described. As shown in FIG. 109 (b), in the ordinary drawing normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the ordinary drawing normal process is set (step B811), and the process number is set to the ordinary drawing game process Save in the number area (step B812).

After that, save the signal (for example, the signal is turned off during the normal symbol 1) to the test signal output data area (step B 813) and define the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The flag (during fraud monitoring period flag) is saved in the routine power transmission fraud monitoring period flag area (step B 814), and the routine drawing transition processing setting process 2 is ended.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, segment LED editing processing in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing (step S111)
The details of) will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special view 1 reserve display, the special view 2 reserve display, the general drawing reserve display, the first gaming state display unit, and the second provided in the collective display device 50
Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the gaming state display unit and the round display unit are performed.

As shown in FIG. 110, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blink control timer is +1.
After updating (step S501), it is determined whether or not the output on timing is reached depending on whether the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1 or not (step S502). In this embodiment, when bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output on timing is 128 m.
It is making a blink cycle of seconds.
If the output on timing is set (step S502; Y), the common drawing reservation number display table 1 of the common drawing reservation number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode in the common drawing reservation display is defined (Step S503), when it is not the output on timing (Step S502; N)
Sets the common drawing reservation number display table 2 (step S504).
Then, display data corresponding to the common drawing reservation number is acquired from the set common drawing reservation number display table and saved in the segment area of the common drawing reservation display unit (step S505). In the present embodiment, if the common drawing reserve number is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data becomes the same regardless of which common drawing reserve number display table is set.

Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506), and in the case of the output on timing (step S506; Y), the special figure 1 reserve number in which the display mode on the special figure 1 reserve indicator is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold count display table 1 is set (step S507), and when it is not the output on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold count display table 2 is set (step S506) Step S508).
Then, display data corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 1 holding number display table, and saved in the segment area of the special drawing 1 holding display (step S 509).

Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S510), and in the case of the output on timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 reserve number display in which the display mode on the special view 2 reserve indicator is defined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 pending number display table 1 is set (step S511), and when it is not the output on timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 is selected.
The number-of-holds display table 2 is set (step S512).
Then, display data corresponding to the special drawing 2 holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 2 holding number display table and saved in the segment area of the special drawing 2 holding display (step S513).
Furthermore, a round display table in which the display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (
Step S514) The display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area of the round display unit (step S515).

Next, the second game state display unit 58 lights up when the time saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time saving state.
The game state display table 1 in which the display mode in the game mode is defined is set (step S516), display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit (step S517). ). In the present embodiment, the first gaming state display unit consisting of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal operation and to be turned on during special display time (short during power support).
After that, the gaming state display table 2 is set in which the display mode in the second gaming state display unit is notified that the gaming state is more advantageous to the right hitting than the left hitting (step S518)
And the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second game state display unit (step S519), and the segment LED editing process is ended. In the present embodiment, the second gaming state display unit consisting of one LED is turned off at the time of normal hitting (left hitting) and right hitting (in the case of the present embodiment, during the big hit, during the small hit, during the common charge support) ) Is configured to light up.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and the end of fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 111, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, ie, abnormal, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). It is determined whether or not magnetism has been detected (step S601
). If the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (
Step S602) It is determined whether the timer has timed up (step S603).
. In the case of the present embodiment, when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 ms or more, it is determined that time is up.

If the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S).
604) Save the magnet fraud alert timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) in the magnet fraud alert timer area (step S605). Then, prepare a command of notification of magnet irregularity (step S6).
06) Prepare a magnet fraud flag as the magnet fraud flag (step S 607), and determine whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S 6)
13). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously on for a predetermined period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud specifying the notification time of the magnet fraud If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). In addition, the minimum value of the magnet fraud alerting | reporting timer is set to "0". And
It is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is "0" (step S610). If the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step S603; N), step S
Transfer to processing of 609.

Then, if the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is not "0" (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. Also, if the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is "0" (step S610; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is up, and the fraud alert period ends, or from the beginning it is fraudulent If the notification has not been made, a command for magnet notification end is prepared (step S611). Furthermore, prepare a magnet fraud release flag as a magnet fraud flag (step S
612), It is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (
Step S613).

Then, if the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and rendering command setting processing is performed. Then (step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended.
Here, “step S601; N” → “step S608” → “step S609” →
“Step S610; Y” → “Step S611” → “Step S612” → “Step S613; Y” are normal routes.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and the end of fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 112, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, It is determined whether the board radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). When the radio wave sensor is on (step S 701)
Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, an initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the radio wave fraud alert timer is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area (step S702).

Then, prepare a command of board radio wave fraud notification (step S703), prepare a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S704), and prepare the prepared board radio wave fraud flag with the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times, while in the case of board radio wave fraud, the board radio sensor 62 is detected once. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred at the time of

On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S 701; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer defining the notification time of radio wave fraud is
If it is not "1", -1 is updated (step S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is "0" (step S706).

If the value of the radio wave injustice timer is not “0” (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave improper monitoring process is ended. If the value of the radio wave informing timer is "0" (step S706; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already been up, and the period of the informing notification ends, or from the beginning it is incorrect. If the notification has not been made, prepare a command to end the board radio wave unauthorized notification (step S70).
7) Prepare a board radio wave fraud release flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S 708),
It is determined whether the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region (step S709).

Then, if the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing is ended. If the prepared board radio wave fraud flag does not match the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S710), and the rendering command is performed. The setting process is performed (step S711), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is ended.
Here, “step S 701; N” → “step S 705” → “step S 706; Y
“Step S 707” to “step S 708” to “step S 709; Y” is a normal route.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, a payout command transmission process (step S105)
, Winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S)
112) Create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or game arcade internal management device or a shot fire test device based on the monitoring result in the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) and set it in the output buffer Perform processing etc.

As shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, in the external information editing process, first, no glass frame opening error occurs (step S801; N), and no main body frame opening error occurs (step S802; N) The off data of the door / frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. .
On the other hand, if a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y), or
If the main frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S805), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is The test signal output data area is saved (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer, which measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch or the like, is updated by -1 unless it is "0". Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set at the time of setting the initial value of the RAM when activated by clearing the RAM in the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809). Transfer to processing of Also,
If the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the process proceeds to step S810 without performing the process of step S809. .

Then, if the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), if the board radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), if the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S81)
2; Y) If the common use fraud is occurring (step S813; Y) or if the special winning opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the on data of the security signal is output as external information Save in data area (step S816), save on data of gaming machine error status signal in test signal output data area (step S817), step S818
Transfer to processing of That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither the occurrence of magnet fraud (step S810; N) nor the occurrence of board radio fraud (step S811; N) nor the occurrence of frame radio fraud (step S812; N)
If there is neither the occurrence of unfair compensation nor the occurrence of a special winning opening (step S814; N), the off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step S815), the process proceeds to step S818.

Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S 818) is performed to set information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, and a starting opening signal editing process (step S 819) for editing a winning signal for the starting opening
)I do.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S 820). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is "0" (step S821).

If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S821; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area Then, the external information editing process is ended (step S822).
Also, if the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S821; N), that is, if the time is not up, save the on data of the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area (step S823), the external information editing process is ended.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the main prize ball signal editing process in the above-mentioned external information editing process (step S818)
Explain the details of. The main prize ball signal editing process externally generates the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (predetermined number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (10 in the case of this embodiment). It is processing to output to the device.

As shown in FIG. 115, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S 832; Y), the number of times the main prize ball signal output is “0”.
"Is determined (step S833).

Then, if the main prize ball signal output number is not "0" (step S833; N), the main prize ball signal output number is updated by -1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal control timer area is displayed. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S 835). The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is a time (for example, 128 ms) of the on state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal and a time (for example, 64) of the off state (for example, low level).
It is an on-state time (for example, 128 ms) of m seconds). After that, save the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal in the external information output data area of RWM (
Step S837) The main prize ball signal editing process ends.
If the main prize ball signal output count is "0" (step S833; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838) The main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0" (step S832; N)
) Determines whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S).
836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period is that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0". If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S8)
36; N) saves the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S 838), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process.

In the present embodiment, a main prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100 every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out becomes 10, and the payout control device 200 comes to have 10 game balls paid out. A main prize ball signal is output each time.
Specifically, the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball number signal output count by +1 every 10 payout schedules (every time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in payout command transmission processing)
The main prize ball signal is output as many times as the number of outputs updated (set).
Since the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 pieces of payout are actually performed for the main prize ball signal outputted for each schedule, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to respond to fraudulent withdrawals. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to a lack of balls, etc., and even if it is paid out after the big hit, the hall computer (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judged).

[Starting mouth signal editing process]
Next, details of the starting opening signal editing process (step S819) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start opening signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the starting opening signal editing process, first, if the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the starting opening signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842). When the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of starting opening signal output is "0" (step S843).

Then, if the starting opening signal output number is not "0" (step S843; N), the starting opening signal output number is updated by -1 (step S844), and the starting opening signal output control timer in the starting opening signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The starting opening signal output control timer initial value is a time (for example, 128) of the on state (for example, high level) of the starting opening signal.
It is an on-state time (for example, 128 ms) of the time (for example, 64 ms) of the m-state and the off state (for example, low level). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the starting opening signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the starting opening signal editing process is ended.
In addition, when the number of start opening signal outputs is "0" (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start opening signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S 848), the start opening signal editing process is ended.

On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0" (step S842; N), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846)
. In addition, that a starting opening signal output control timer is in an output on area is that the value of a starting opening signal output control timer is not "0". When the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the start-up signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start-up signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM ( Step S848), the starting opening signal editing process is ended.

Next, an effect in a game and control by the effect control device 300 for controlling this effect will be described. FIGS. 117 and 118 show an example of effects in the special game state. here,
The case where 16R probability variation B big hit including short opening occurred was shown.

After the big hit result mode is derived in the special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), after the fanfare effect according to the big hit type is performed, the round game is started. In the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the number-of-rounds display 41a indicating the number of rounds,
A symbol display 41b for displaying a big hit symbol derived in the decorative special figure variation display game, a right hitting instruction indication 41c for instructing right hitting, and an acquired gaming ball number indication 41d indicating the number of winning balls obtained by long opening are displayed .

Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), when the gaming ball is won to the special variation winning device 38 in the long open round and the winning ball is obtained, the number of the winning balls is displayed as the winning ball number display 41e. , Is added to the acquired game ball number display 41d. When the round ends and becomes an interval, as shown in FIG. 117 (d), an interval effect is performed. Here, since the next round is also long open, interval effect for long open is performed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 117 (e), when a round game progresses and it becomes a mode transition selection round in which a notification mode at the end of the special game state and an effect mode after the end of the special game state can be selected. A selection screen 41 f is displayed. In this mode transition selection screen 41f, the first
The normal mode and the second mode can be selected, and the player operates the effect button effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 to move the cursor imitating a finger to make a selection.

In addition, in the interval production of the round which may become short release from next time, that is, in the interval production after the end of 4R here, the round continuation production 41g which notifies whether or not the long release continues after the next time . In this round continuation effect 41g, FIG. 118 (a
As shown in), the characters "short" and "long" flash alternately and show the result by the finally lit character. It is done. Furthermore, when it is informed that it will be a short opening, it will be shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 18 (b), a promotion effect 41h is provided to urge the special fluctuation winning device 38 to be aimed. For example, when the type of the big hit is 16R definite variation A (all open long), in the round continuation effect 41g, it is informed that the character of "long" lights up and becomes long open.

As shown in FIG. 118 (c), the promotion effect 41h is continued even in the short open round. Further, an emphasizing effect 41i is performed to emphasize that the special variation winning device 38 is open.
The emphasizing effect 41i is displayed as if light is emitted from the special variation winning device 38. In addition, although the special variation winning device 38 is provided with a decoration means for performing decoration by light emission, to associate the light emission timing, the light emission intensity, the light emission color, etc. between the light emission mode by this decoration means and the display mode of the highlighting effect 41i It may be synchronized or not synchronized.

In addition, when the round in the short opening is started, the short opening winning game ball number indication 41j indicating the winning ball number acquired in the short opening separately from the acquired game ball number indication 41d indicating the winning ball number acquired in the long opening Is displayed. Further, the number-of-rounds display 41a displays the number of remaining openings. Here, there are 12 remaining rounds including the running rounds, which are released once each round, so one more
It is displayed as opening twice. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), the promotion effect 41h is continued when the round at the short opening ends and the interval time is reached, but the special variation winning device 38
The emphasizing effect 41i for emphasizing that the character is open ends once, and as shown in FIG. 118 (e), the emphasizing effect 41i is resumed when the next round is started.

Then, when the final round ends, an ending effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 118 (f) and (g). In this ending effect, as shown in FIG. 118 (f), the number-of-earnings game number display 41d showing the number of winning balls obtained in the long opening, and the short opening winning game number display 41j showing the number of winning balls obtained in the short opening. An effect is performed in which the value in is added, and a total number display 41k is performed to display the total number of winning balls obtained in the special game state as shown in FIG. 118 (g).

In addition, in the ending effect, a state indication display 41m is performed, which is a display indicating the probability state after the end of the special game state. The contents of this state suggestion display are different depending on the effect mode selected by the player in the mode transition selection round, and as shown in FIG. 119, according to the probability state after the end of the special game state (1) to The character (4) is selected according to a predetermined selection rate. When the normal mode forming the first mode is selected as shown in FIG. 119 (a), only the character of (1) is selected in the high probability state and the character is in the low probability state (2 Only the character of) is selected. Also, FIG.
As shown in b), when the second mode derelay mode is selected, the characters (1) to (4) are selected according to the selection rate according to the probability state. Note that the probability state may be suggested not only by the character image but also by character information such as words.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 120, in the main processing, processing at the start of the program is performed first. In the process at the start of this program, first, interrupts are inhibited (step C1),
Initialize the CPU (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, a power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) is performed to create input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Reading of the input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a process of changing the contents of the effect is performed.

And setting of the changeable range such as the brightness and volume of LED and liquid crystal, LED by the player
A hall / player setting mode process is performed to receive an operation such as changing the brightness or volume of the liquid crystal or the volume (step C10). Next, a random number updating process (step C11) is performed to update the random number for determining the details of the variation mode of the decorative special view variation display game.

Then, the command from the game control apparatus 100 is analyzed and a reception command check process (step C12) for handling is performed, and effect display editing process (step C13) for editing the setting for controlling the progression of the effect and the drawing command ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) can be prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (one frame 1/30 seconds), V blank interrupt (1/6)
It is determined that it is the frame switching timing when 0 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated in a timing later than 1/60 seconds (frame Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that the frame switching timing is not reached (step C15; N), the processing in step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step C17) C18) A movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 121 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this reception command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter which counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the number of command reception (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202)
). When it is determined that the command reception number is 0 (step C202; N), the reception command check process is ended. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the receive command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
The command reading index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
Thus, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the reception command buffer,
The contents of the reception command buffer are copied to a command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during analysis of the command, the command (data)
Can be moved to make room. In addition, analysis of commands can be performed collectively in one round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the processing returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y),
The content of the command area is loaded (step C207), and a received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, if it is determined that the analysis of commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N),
It returns to the process of step C207. If it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. As described above, in the reception command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis process]
FIG. 122 shows the reception command analysis process in the reception command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (Step C232; Y, Step C233; Y
) Determines whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C2).
34).

If it is determined in step C232 or C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34) N) ends the received command analysis process.

When it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
In step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of variation system commands (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the special figure. Then, when it is determined that MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235)
In Y), variable system command processing (step C236) is performed, and the reception command analysis processing is ended.

In addition, when it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of variation system command (
In step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or a round screen) relating to a big hit medium effect, or a command instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or an end screen) related to small hit medium effects. And MO
If it is determined that DE is in the range of the big hit system command (step C237; Y), the big hit system command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit system command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol system command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special drawing (for example, what to make the stop symbol of the special drawing, etc.). Then, when it is determined that MODE is a range of symbol system commands (step C239; Y), symbol system command processing (
Step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

In addition, if it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol system commands (
In step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of one-shot commands such as the hold number command and the error command (step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The one-shot commands include a wait for customer demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. When it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C24)
In 1; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

In addition, when it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (
In step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the pre-reading symbol system command (step C243). Then, if it is determined that MODE is the range of the symbol pattern command for pre-reading (step C243; Y), the symbol system command processing for pre-reading (step C2)
44) to complete the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; Y), the read change command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. Also, in step C245,
When MODE is determined not to be in the range of the look-ahead change system command (step C245; N)
End the received command analysis process.

The preread variation system command and the preread symbol system command are commands including information necessary to execute the preread effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the start memory (pending) not executed is a big hit when it is subsequently executed In order to notify the player in advance (with what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) to a predetermined degree of reliability, performing decoration start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a mode different from normal, or producing effects on the display device 41 It is an effect such as displaying. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading fluctuation system command and pre-reading symbol system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which corresponds to the starting memory which becomes the object of pre-reading effect, from starting game winning a prize 100 It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 123 shows one-shot system command processing in the above-mentioned reception command analysis processing. In this one-shot system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information on a model set in game control device 100 (step C261).
). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to a model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing is performed to rewrite internal information into model information corresponding to the command (step C262), and single-shot system command processing Finish.

In addition, if it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to a model specification command (step C261; N), RA indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized.
It is determined whether it corresponds to the M initialization command (step C263). And M
When it is determined that ODE corresponds to a RAM initialization command (step C263)
In Y), the RAM initialization processing is performed (step C264), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), an area requiring initialization is initialized, and R
Set AM initialization screen information. Further, scenario data for initializing the RAM is set in order to perform an effect when the initialization of the RAM is performed.

If it is determined in step C263 that MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), the MODE is a power failure recovery command indicating recovery from a power failure without initializing the RAM 111C. It is determined whether it is a corresponding one (step C265). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to a power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), power failure recovery processing is performed (step C266), and the one-shot system command processing is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), an area requiring initialization is initialized, and recovery screen information for displaying a power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to provide an effect upon power failure recovery.

If it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to a power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a customer waiting demo command indicating the start of a customer waiting demo Step C267). Then, when it is determined that MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C 267; Y),
The customer waiting demo processing is performed (step C268), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set during the customer waiting demonstration, and customer waiting scenario data is set in order to perform customer waiting effects.

If it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the special view 1 suspension (step C267; N).
Step C269). And, when MODE is special figure 1 reservation (step C269; Y
In step b), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is performed to display the decoration start storage display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 (step C270), and the one-shot system command process is ended. When it is determined in step C269 that MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 suspension (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is special figure 2 suspension (step C271). And, when MODE is special figure 2 retention (step C271; Y), special figure 2 retention information setting processing which performs processing etc which displays the decoration starting memory indication which corresponds to the retention which it occurs on display unit 41 is done (Step C272) The one-shot command processing ends. That is, the effect control device 300 is a start storage display means for performing start storage notification display for displaying information on the start storage by the start storage display (decorative start storage display) corresponding to each start storage.

In addition, when MODE is not holding special figure 2 in step C271 (step C271; N
) Determines whether MODE is probability information (step C273). And MOD
If E is probability information (step C273; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the one-shot command processing ends.

In addition, when MODE is not probability information in step C273 (step C273; N)
It is determined whether MODE is error / illegal (step C275). And MO
If the DE is an error / illegal (step C275; Y), an error / illegal setting process is performed to perform corresponding processing such as error notification (step C276), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

Also, if MODE is not an error / illegal in step C275 (step C275;
In N), it is determined whether MODE is effect mode switching (step C277). Then, when MODE is effect mode switching (step C277; Y), effect mode switching processing for performing processing of switching the effect mode is performed (step C278), and the one-shot command processing ends.

In addition, when MODE is not effect mode switching in step C277 (step C277)
N: It is determined whether MODE is symbol stop (step C279). And M
If the ODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the one-shot system command processing ends. If MODE is symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is normal (step C280). In the determination of whether the command is a normal command, for example, it is determined whether the target of the decoration special figure stop command is a target for the special figure currently changing.

Then, if the command is not normal (step C280; N), the one-shot system command processing ends. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), stop setting of the corresponding special view is made (step C281), and if all symbols have stopped, the gaming state flag is set to the normal state (step C282) End one-shot command processing. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decorative special game variable display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as during fluctuation, during a big hit, during a small hit, etc., and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Ahead reading symbol system command processing]
FIG. 124 shows prefetch symbol system command processing (step C244) in the reception command analysis processing described above. In this pre-reading symbol system command processing, first, it decides whether or not the latest reservation information is special figure 1 reservation (step C301). If the latest hold information is the special view 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, if the received prefetch symbol system command relates to the special view 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special view 1 hold number 1 Save in the prefetch symbol command area (step C302), set the prefetch change command reception waiting flag (step C304), and end the prefetch symbol system command processing.

Also, when the latest hold information is not the special view 1 hold (step C301; N), that is,
If the received prefetch symbol system command relates to the special figure 2 hold, save the command in the special figure 2 look ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (step C303), and wait for the prefetch change command reception waiting flag After setting (step C304), pre-reading symbol system command processing ends. The reason for which the prefetch change command reception waiting flag is set in step C304 is that the prefetch pattern command and the prefetch change command (prefetch change pattern command) are set (paired).

[Read-ahead change system command processing]
FIG. 125 shows prefetch change system command processing (step C246) in the above-mentioned reception command analysis processing. In this pre-reading variation system command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading variation command is waiting to be received (step C311). Here, when there is a prefetch variation command reception waiting flag set in the above-described prefetch symbol system command processing, it is determined that the reception is waiting. When waiting for reception of prefetch change command (Step C31)
1; N) ends the look-ahead change system command processing. On the other hand, when waiting for reception of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C311; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command reception waiting flag is cleared (step C312).

Thereafter, in the process of steps C313 to C316, a process of converting the prefetch change command (preread change pattern command) received from the game control device 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control device 300 is performed. First, a process (step C313) is performed to set the look-ahead fluctuation mode conversion table corresponding to the number of pending symbols in the latest hold information (step C313), and the information of the special view type of starting storage corresponding to the previously received fluctuation command A MODE conversion table for converting MODE is set according to the current number of reservations of the special drawing type.

Next, with reference to the set MODE conversion table, the in-sub pre-reading fluctuation command MODE corresponding to the pre-reading fluctuation command MODE is acquired (step C314). further,
The look-ahead fluctuation ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the sub-pred look-ahead conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the look-ahead fluctuation command is acquired (step C316).

Although the information on the first half fluctuation is included in the MODE, the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE change according to the number of reservations at the time of judgment. The judgment result may differ depending on the judgment at the time. Therefore, MODE is converted in the conversion mode according to the current number of reservations, in order to be able to perform processing of preview advance notice effect easily and reliably without being influenced by the number of reservations at the time of determination It can be handled in common regardless of the number of reservations. For example, there may be no reach loss fluctuation, which may result in a short first half fluctuation time depending on the holding status, or no reach out fluctuation fluctuation, such as a long first half fluctuation time regardless of the holding status. It converts into MODE classified into the item considered in the setting of pre-reading advance notice production so that processing of pre-reading advance notice production can be performed easily and certainly.

In addition, ACT contains information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach.
The contents of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT do not change depending on the number of reservations at the time of determination. However, even in the case of normal reach, for example, the final stop symbol may be set to stop one frame before the reach symbol, and to leave one frame ahead, to be separated, and to be hit.
Even in the same reach, there are various modes, and since the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide. For this reason, the number of the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is reduced by converting the ACTs to the same ACT, and the processing load such as the check in the processing of the pre-reading advance notice effect is reduced.

Next, it is determined whether MODE and ACT after conversion are both other than 0 (step C31)
7). If MODE and ACT after conversion are both other than 0 (step C317; N),
Since it is an abnormal command value, the prefetch change system command processing is ended. Meanwhile, the converted MO
If both DE and ACT are other than 0 (step C317; Y), the converted command is saved in the latest hold information and the prefetch change command area corresponding to the number of holds (step C318).
And C) to determine whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal or not (step C319).

If the command combination is not normal (step C320; N) as a result of the prefetch command consistency check process (step C319), the prefetch variation system command process is ended. on the other hand,
If the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), a prefetch lottery process (step C321) for lottery execution of the prefetch advance notice effect is performed to determine whether the prefetch advance notice effect is to be generated (step C322).

Then, if the prefetch advance notice effect is not generated (step C322; N), the prefetch variation system command processing is ended. On the other hand, in the case of generating a preview advance notice effect (step C322; Y
) Determines whether or not the previewed advance notice effect that is generated (that is, the previewed advance notice effect selected in the pre-read lottery process (step C321)) is an effect that starts immediately (step C3).
23). The effect to be started immediately is, for example, a hold change notice for changing the display mode of the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. In addition, the effect of not starting immediately is a previewing notice effect performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and an effect or variation that causes a specific effect or reach condition to be generated continuously over a plurality of special figure variation display games. For example, an effect of giving a notice by a character appearing during display, a hold change notice of changing the display mode of the decoration start memory display at a timing later than the current time, or the like. In addition, as a timing which starts execution of such an effect which does not start immediately, if the special figure fluctuation display game is under execution, the special figure fluctuation display game is ended, execution of the next special figure fluctuation display game is started Timing etc. correspond.

If it is not an effect to start immediately (step C323; N), the prefetch change system command processing is ended. In this case, the advance notice is set, for example, at the start of the special view change display game in which the advance notice advance effect is executed. On the other hand, if it is an effect to be started immediately (step C323; Y), a display corresponding to the selected prefetch advance notice effect is set (step C324), and the prefetch variation system command processing is ended.

[Design system command processing]
FIG. 126 shows symbol-based command processing in the received command analysis processing described above (step C).
240). In this symbol system command processing, first, the special figure type corresponding to MODE (
Special figure 1 or special figure 2) is set (step C351), the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set and saved (step C352), and the symbol system command processing is ended.

With the symbol type, it is a detached symbol, 16R positive variation A big hit symbol, 16R positive variation B big hit symbol, 16
It is a category of symbols such as R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 4R positive variation big hit symbol, small hit symbol etc, and it is associated with ACT data. Since the symbol ratio changes in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (the probability change ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and it corresponds to the data of MODE from plural symbol type setting tables Is selected and the symbol type corresponding to ACT is set with reference to the table.

[Variable system command processing]
FIG. 127 shows variable system command processing in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (step C).
236). In this variation system command processing, first, it is determined whether the special view type is undetermined (step C361). The special drawing type is information indicating whether the special drawing type is special drawing 1 or special drawing 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-described symbol system command processing.

If the special view type is undetermined (step C361; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not yet determined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variation command and the symbol command is checked (
Step C362) It is determined whether the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (Step C)
363).

If the variation command and the symbol type do not match (step C363; Y), the variation system command processing ends. Also, if the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C3)
63; N) determines the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation command (step C364). A symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, off symbol, 16R positive variation A big hit symbol, 16R positive variation B big hit symbol, 16R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 4R positive variation big hit symbol, small There is a hit pattern etc. If the variation command and the symbol type do not match, perform the rendering as if you received the symbol command of the 16R definite variation A big hit symbol even though the variation command (variation pattern command) of loss was received It means that it is the combination (combination of the change command and the symbol type) which contradicts above.

In the process of determining the change pattern type from the change command (step C364), the change pattern type which is a rough classification of the change display effect of the special view is determined according to the received command. And the fluctuation production setting processing which sets up the information in order to do the production which responds to the fluctuation command is done (step C365).

Next, set the special figure fluctuation in progress as the P machine state (the state of the pachinko machine) (step C366)
). Here, “during special figure fluctuation” indicates that the special figure is fluctuating (during a customer demonstration or during a big hit, or not being a fanfare medium grade). Further, if the pre-reading effect frequency (pre-reading execution frequency) is not zero, the pre-reading effect frequency is updated by 1 (processing to reduce the pre-reading effect frequency by 1) (step C367), and the variation system command processing is ended.

[Change production setting process]
In FIG. 128, fluctuation production setting processing in the above-mentioned fluctuation system command processing (step C36)
5) is shown. In this variation production setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern type is a no reach variation (step C381). If the change pattern type is no reach change (step C381; Y), the model code, the special figure type, and the first-half advance notice group address table corresponding to the effect mode at that time are set (step C382). In addition, since it is a reach no change, symbol classification is always a lost pattern, and it is not necessary to refer to symbol classification here especially. The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300,
Naturally, it varies depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a positive variation mode, a short time mode and a latent mode. Furthermore, in each mode, a plurality of modes are provided in which the distribution rate of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special view variable display game on the display device 41 are made different.

Next, referring to the first half advance distribution group address table, the address of the first half advance distribution group table corresponding to the number of pending MODE and special view type is acquired (step C383)
. Thus, in the case of no reach fluctuation, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) appearing during each change according to the number of reservations. After that, the first half of the previous day sorting group table is used to draw a lottery for the first half appearing in the first half (step C386).

On the other hand, if the change pattern type is not reach-less change (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special view type, the effect mode and the symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half advance distribution group address table, the address of the first half advance distribution group table corresponding to MODE, fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half change is in progress using the first half advance distribution group table Perform a lottery for notice to appear in the (step C 386).

Next, a lottery is made for the second half of the change. In addition, with the second half change of the special figure fluctuation indicatory game fluctuation indication with the so-called reach action (for example, the special result feature (combination of the special design) where the display territory excluding the specific territory becomes large hitting among the display territory of the special figure) Is stopped, and it is a variable display of the state which is fluctuating display only in a specific field. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the second half of the previous day distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special drawing type, the effect mode and the symbol type is set (step C387). The second half prior distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half previous distribution group table.
Then, the address of the second half of the previous day sorting group table corresponding to the ACT is acquired by referring to the second half of day prior sorting distribution group address table (step C 388), and the second half is fluctuating (reaching) using the second half day of sorting distribution group table Make a lottery for the notice to appear (Step C389)
).

After that, the contents of the change effect corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C390),
The content of the effect corresponding to the preliminary lottery result is determined (step C391). As a result, the presentation and notice such as the fluctuation time and main reach contents of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are determined. Further, stop symbol setting processing is performed to determine a stop symbol with reference to the determined change pattern (such as reach effect) of the special view change display game and the advance notice content (step C392).

Next, display setting of the fluctuation effect is performed (step C393), and display setting of the notice effect is performed (
Step C394). By these processes, it is possible to execute an effect or a notice in the decoration special figure variation display game set as described above. Thereafter, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special view type is performed (step C395). In this process, a setting is made to reduce the decoration start storage display corresponding to the reduction of the start storage corresponding to the start of the special view variation display game.

Then, the tone number which is the BGM number, the decoration number which is the number indicating the type of the effect by the decoration lamp, etc. is set (step C396), and the decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special drawing type (variation display of identification information) Display setting is performed (step C397). Furthermore, in the information display device 630, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol that displays the decorative special view variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special view type (Step C39)
8), finish the variation production setting process.

[Big hit system command processing]
FIG. 129 shows the jackpot-based command processing (step C238) in the reception command analysis processing described above. In this big hit system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). Then, if MODE is fanfare (step C401; Y), fanfare effect setting processing is performed to set the fanfare display image according to the big hit type and small hit (step C402), and the P machine status is set during fanfare. It sets (step C403) and ends big hit system command processing.

If the MODE is not a fanfare (Step C401; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (Step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state. Then, if MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process of updating the number-of-rounds display information is performed (step C405), and the P machine state is set during the round (step C406), End the jackpot system command processing.

If MODE is not a round (Step C404; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (Step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to an interval between rounds. Then, when MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), an interval effect setting process is performed to set effects during the interval (step C408), and the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409). End system command processing. If MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to ending after the final round.

If MODE is ending (step C410; Y), for example, if the high probability state is reached after the end of the special gaming state, the screen information to notify that the high probability state will be set, etc. An ending effect setting process for setting screen information corresponding to the later game state is performed (step C411), the P machine state is set during ending (step C412), and the big hit system command processing is ended. If MODE is not ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether MODE is counting (step C).
413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a special winning opening count command based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38.

If the MODE is not a count (Step C413; N), the big hit system command processing is ended. If MODE is a count (step C413; Y), count effect setting processing (step C414) is performed to set an effect corresponding to a winning on the special variation winning device 38, and the big hit system command processing is ended.

[Count effect setting process]
FIG. 130 shows the count effect setting process (step C414) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this fanfare effect setting process, it is determined first whether it is a short open round in which the openable time is equal to or less than a predetermined time (step C421). In the present embodiment, the openable time of the short open round is 0.2 seconds, and the openable time of the long open round is 29 seconds.

Then, if it is not a short opening round (step C421; N), that is, if it is a long opening round, the acquired gaming ball number counter is updated based on the large winning opening count command (
Step C422) Display setting of the acquired game ball number display 41d based on the acquired game ball counter is performed (step C423), and the count effect setting process is ended. The acquired game ball number counter counts the number of prize balls to be paid out by winning in the special variation winning device 38 in the long opening round, and in step C422, updating is performed to add the number of prize balls paid out based on the prize. At step C423, the updated value is displayed.

In the case of the short opening round (step C421; Y), the short opening pattern counter is updated based on the special winning opening count command (step C424), and the short opening winning gaming ball based on the short opening pattern counter Make display settings for number display 41 j (Step C
425), finish the count effect setting process. The short release pattern counter counts the number of prize balls to be paid out by winning in the special variation winning device 38 in the short open round, and in step C424, an update is performed to add the number of prize balls paid out based on the prizes. The updated value is displayed in step C425.

As a result, the number of winnings on the special variation winning device 38 in the long opening and the number of winnings on the special variation winning device 38 in the short opening are separately counted and displayed. That is, the prize determination means for determining whether the prize to the special variation winning device 38 is the prize in the first opening mode (long opening) or the second opening mode (short opening) is the effect control device 300 It is eggplant. Also,
The effect control device 300 determines the number of winning balls based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38 in the first open mode (long open) based on the determination of the winning by the win determination means, and the special in the second open mode (short open) The number of winning balls based on the winning on the variable winning device 38 is separately counted.

[Fanfare production setting process]
FIG. 131 shows the fanfare effect setting process (step C402) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this fanfare effect setting process, first, it is determined whether ACT is a big hit fanfare (step C431). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command is a fanfare command corresponding to any of 16R positive variation A, 16R positive variation B, 16R normal A or 16R normal B.

If ACT is a big hit fanfare (step C431; Y), the big hit frequency is updated by 1 (step C432), and the display content of the big hit fanfare effect is determined based on the probability state and the big hit frequency (step C433). In addition, the number of big hits is cleared to 0 based on becoming a normal gaming state which is not a high probability state or a time saving state. In other words, it counts the so-called consecutive channel number. Thereafter, display setting of fanfare effect corresponding to the determined content is performed (step C434), and it is determined whether the big hit includes short opening (step C435). If the short opening is not included (step C434; N), that is, if all the rounds are long open, hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is ended. If short open is included (step C434; Y), short open big hit information is set (step C436), hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare production setting process is ended. .

If the ACT is not a big hit fanfare (step C431; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a definite fanfare (step C437). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to 4R probability variation (probability). If ACT is a sudden fanfare (step C437; Y), it is determined whether it is a hit from a continuous effect which is an effect continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (step C438).

If it is not the hit from the continuous effect (step C438; N), the display setting of the probability exclusive effect corresponding to the probability state is performed (step C439), and the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447). End the setting process. Since a special probability effect corresponding to the probability state is the high probability state after the special gaming state when the 4R probability change occurs in the low probability state, an effect of informing or suggesting that is performed. In addition, when it becomes 4R probability change in high probability state, because high probability state continues after special game state,
An effect of informing or suggesting that is performed.

Also, if it is a hit from the continuous performance (step C 438; Y), a lottery for the probable presentation to be executed is selected from among the probable presentation patterns related to the current variation production (continuous presentation) (step C 440) and determined The display setting of the surprise effect is performed (step C441), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is ended. That is, in the case of 4R probability variation from the continuous effect, effects related to the continuous effect will be performed even in the special game state. Also in the case of 4R positive variation, the number of big hits may be updated by +1.

If the ACT is not a sudden fanfare (step C437; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C442). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to a small hit. If the ACT is not a small hit fanfare (step C442; N), the fanfare effect setting process ends. Also, A
When CT is a small hit fanfare (step C442; Y), it is determined whether it is a hit from a continuous effect which is an effect continuously executed over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games (
Step C443).

If it is not the hit from the continuous effect (step C443; N), the display setting of the small hit dedicated effect corresponding to the probability state is performed (step C444), and the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447). The effect setting process ends. In the case of the small hit, there is no change in the probability state before and after the small hit. Therefore, in the small hit dedicated rendering corresponding to the probability state, an indication or notification is given that the probability state at the time of the small hit is maintained.

Also, if it is a hit from the continuous performance (step C442; Y), the small winning effect to be executed is drawn from among the small hitting effect patterns related to the current changing effect (continuous effect) (step C445), The display setting of the small hit effect determined is performed (step C446), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is ended. That is, in the case of a small hit from the continuous effect, effects related to the continuous effect will be performed even in the special game state.

In the case of 4R probability variation or small hit from the continuous production, when 4R probability variation or small hit is derived (at the end of a special feature variation display game that becomes a definite probability or small hit), 4R is not shown clearly. An effect is shown that indicates which is in the special game state based on the probability change or the small hit. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which an enemy character and an ally character fight is performed as a continuous effect, and when the result mode is derived, the battle is not yet settled. Then, in the special game state, in the case of 4R positive variation, effects are produced (accurate effects) in which the teammate character wins, and in the case of small hits, effects (small hit effects) in which the enemy character is won are performed.

[Round effect setting process]
FIG. 132 shows the round effect setting process (step C405) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this round effect setting process, first, display setting of a right-handed instruction is performed (step C461), and it is determined whether it is a special gaming state based on a small hit or a bump (4R probability change) (step C462).

When it is a special game state based on small hit or sudden (step C462; Y), display setting of small hit / probable round effect is set (step C474), and it moves to step C475. Also, if it is not a small hit or a special gaming state based on a bump (step C462; N), the number of rounds is derived from the round command (step C463), and the short open jackpot information set in the case of big hit including short open round To determine if there is (step C464)
.

If there is no short opening big hit information (step C464; N), that is, if it is a special game state of only long opening round, display setting of the number of rounds is done (step C465), display setting of round effect display of long opening pattern (Step C466). Next, a sound number, which is a BGM number based on the long release pattern, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect produced by a decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C467).

Thereafter, it is determined whether it is a mode transition selection round in which a notification mode at the end of the special gaming state or an effect mode after the end of the special gaming state can be selected (step C468). If it is not the mode transition selection round (Step C468; N), the round effect setting process is ended.
If it is a mode transition selection round (step C468; Y), display setting of the mode transition selection screen is performed (step C469), and the round effect setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if there is short opening big hit information (step C464; Y), that is, if it is a special gaming state including a short opening round, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value to be short opening round (step C470) ). Then, if the number of rounds is not a predetermined value that is a short open round (step C470; N), that is, if it is a long open round, the process proceeds to step C465.

Moreover, when the number of rounds is a predetermined value which becomes a short open round (step C470; Y)
That is, in the case of a round to be a short opening, display setting of the round effect of the short opening pattern is performed (step C471), and the remaining opening number is calculated from the round number upper limit information and the round number (step C472). Then, display setting of the remaining opening number, which is the number of times of opening in the short opening, is performed (step C473), and display setting of emphasizing effect for promoting aiming at winning in the special variation winning device 38 is performed (step C475). After that, set the tone number which is the BGM number based on the emphasizing effect, and the decoration number which is the number indicating the type of the effect by the decoration lamp etc.
Step C476) The round effect setting process ends.

That is, in the short open round, the short open small hit and the round of 4R probability variation, effects different from the long open round are performed. As mentioned above, the special variation winning device 3
8 makes it easy to hold the game ball in the opening / closing member 990 and it is possible to aim for winning even if it is short open, so an emphasizing effect 41i for urging the player to aim for winning is performed.

[Interval production setting process]
FIG. 133 shows the interval effect setting process (step C408) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this interval effect setting process, first, the sound number which is the BGM number of the long opening interval, and the decoration number which is the number showing the kind of the effect by the decoration lamp etc. are set (step C481) It is determined whether there is short open jackpot information set in the case of (step C482).

If there is no short opening big hit information (step C482; N), that is, if it is a special gaming state of only long opening round, the interval effect setting process is ended. In this case,
The long release interval as shown in 17 (d) is set. If there is short opening big hit information (step C482; Y), that is, if it is a special gaming state including a short opening round, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483). Here, the predetermined value is the number of the last round that is long open, and is 4 in the present embodiment.

If the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483; Y), that is, if it is a round that will be open for a short time from the next time, display setting of round continuation informing effect is performed (step C484)
), A tone number which is a BGM number based on a round continuation notification effect, and a decoration number which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like (step C485), and the interval effect setting process is ended. Thus, the round continuation notification effect as shown in FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b) is set.

On the other hand, if the number of rounds is not a predetermined value (step C483; N), it is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486). If the number of rounds is not larger than the predetermined value (step C486; N), the interval effect setting process is ended. In this case, it is a round where the long release will be performed next time, and the long release interval remains set.

If the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486; Y), display setting of the short opening interval is performed (step C487), and the tone number which is the BGM number of the short opening interval, decoration lamp, etc. A decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect, is set (step C488), and the interval effect setting process ends. In this case, FIG. 118 (d)
The short release interval as shown in FIG. In the short opening interval, the promotion effect 41h is performed but the emphasis effect 41i is not performed. However, the emphasizing effect 41i may be performed as in the round, or an emphasizing effect dedicated to the interval may be performed.

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 134 shows the ending effect setting process (step C411) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this ending effect setting process, first, the big hit type information which is the information of the big hit type that triggered the occurrence of the special game state this time is loaded (step C)
491), setting of the state indication display from the jackpot type information and the selection rate in the first mode (see FIG. 119 (a)) (step C492).

Next, it is determined whether there is a mode transition flag (step C493). The effect mode after the end of the special gaming state includes a first mode and a second mode, which can be selected by the player.
The content of the state indication display 41m, which is an indication indicating the probability state, in the first mode and the second mode,
This is an effect mode in which the effect of the special view variable display game is different. The effect mode can be selected on the mode transition selection screen 41 f displayed in the mode transition selection round, and the player performs the selection by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29.
Then, when the player selects the first mode, the mode transition flag is not set, and when the player selects the second mode, the mode transition flag is set.

If there is no mode transition flag (step C493; N), that is, if the first mode is set, the process proceeds to step C495. In this case, the status indication displayed in step C492 is displayed. If there is a mode transition flag (step C493; Y), that is, if the second mode is set, the state indication display based on the selection rate in the second mode (see FIG. 119 (b)) is set ( Step C494) Move to step C495.

Thereafter, the total number of acquired gaming balls is calculated from the acquired gaming ball number counter and the short release pattern counter (step C495), and display setting of addition effect based on the total number of acquired gaming balls is performed (step C496). Then, the acquired game ball number counter and the counter for the short opening pattern are reset (step C497), and the short opening jackpot information is reset (step C498).
Ending effect setting processing ends. By the above processing, the state indication display 41m according to the effect mode selected by the player is performed at the end of the special gaming state, and the number of gaming balls acquired in the special gaming state is displayed as the total number display 41k. .

FIG. 135 shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. Figure 135 (a)-(c)
As shown in FIG. 5, a right-handed instruction display 41c may be displayed so as to flow from the left to the right of the display screen. In this case, the right-handed instruction display 41c is displayed so as to flow at a position not overlapping the symbol display 41b that displays the big hit symbol derived in the decorative special figure variation display game. In addition, the right hit indication 41c may be displayed so as to flow at a position overlapping the symbol indication 41b, but the back of the symbol indication 41b is displayed so that the right hit indication 41c flows, and the symbol indication 41b is displayed.
b should always be visible. The number-of-rounds display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the emphasis effect 41i and the like other than the symbol display 41b may or may not be hidden by the right-handed instruction display 41c.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 135 (d) to 135 (f), a promotion effect 41h may be displayed to flow toward the special variation winning device 38 so as to urge it to aim at the special variation winning device 38. In this case, when overlapping with the symbol display 41b for displaying the big hit symbol derived in the decorative special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 135 (d), display is made such that the promotion effect 41h flows on the back side of the symbol display 41b. The symbol display 41b is always visible. Further, the promotion effect 41 h may be displayed so as to flow at a position not overlapping the symbol display 41 b. In addition, the number-of-rounds display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the emphasis effect 41i, the short open winning game ball number display 41j, etc., which are displays other than the symbol display 41b, may be hidden by the promotion effect 41h or not Also good. Further, a display for operating the right-handed instruction display 41c as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (c) and a display for operating the promotion effect 41h as shown in FIGS. 135 (d) to 135 (f) are simultaneously performed. It is good.

FIG. 136 also shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. As shown in FIG. 136 (a), as the promotion effect 41h for prompting to aim at the special fluctuation winning device 38 and the emphasizing effect 41i for emphasizing that the special fluctuation winning device 38 is open, the operation unit 24 and the special fluctuation winning character Device 38
It is also possible to instruct to turn the operation unit 24 largely to the right or to aim for the special fluctuation winning device 38 using the image of the above. This makes it easier for the player to understand. In particular, when a plurality of special variation winning devices 38 are provided, it can be clearly indicated which special variation winning device 38 should be aimed. In addition, the light emission mode of the actual special variation winning device 38 located at the lower right of the display device 41 and the light emission mode of the image of the special variation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 are synchronized. The special fluctuation winning device 38 to be aimed is known. Of course, the light emission mode of the operation unit 24 may be synchronized as well.

In addition, as an image, a schematic animation may be used or an actual special variation winning device 38
It may be a video of In addition, the operation unit 24 displayed on the display device 41 and the special variation winning device 3
In the eighth image, the display synchronized with the light emission effect in the actual operation unit 24 or the special variation winning device 38 may not be performed. Further, the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 may be a still image.

In addition, as for the image of the character information and the arrow included in the right-handed instruction display 41c and the promotion effect 41h, the display may be made to flow as described above. In this case, the operation unit 24
Alternatively, the front side of the image of the special variation winning device 38 may be moved, or the rear side may be moved. In addition, when the collective display unit 50 is displayed on the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variation winning device 38, a display synchronized with the actual display mode of the collective display unit 50 may be performed, or a display not synchronized with it. Also good. When the display mode is not synchronized, any display mode may be used. For example, a state in which all lights are turned on or off, or a specific lighting mode (in the case of 7 segments, a big hit such as "7" is associated In the case of a group of LEDs, it is assumed that a big hit is considered as a lighting mode specific to the occurrence of a big hit.

In addition, when the game state in which the player strikes the right is started, an image may be displayed to instruct to turn the operation unit 24 largely to the right or to aim for the normal fluctuation winning device 37. . Further, when the game state in which the player strikes the left is started, an image may be displayed to instruct to turn the operation unit 24 slightly to the right or to aim at the winning device 90.

Further, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), a remaining time display 41n may be performed to display the remaining time until the end of the final round. The end condition of the round established in the case of short opening is almost the case where the release available time passes rather than the predetermined number of gaming balls winning in the special variation winning device 38, and the round ends in a fixed time Do. Therefore, when the subsequent rounds become short open, the remaining time until the end of the final round can be calculated by integrating the time of the round until the end of the final round and the time of the interval. By displaying the remaining time in this manner, it is possible to give an impression different from that in the case of notifying by the remaining number of rounds, and to improve the interest of the game. That is, it has remaining time calculation means (game control device 100 or effect control device 300) for calculating the remaining time until the end of the special gaming state, and can notify the remaining time calculated by the remaining time calculation means Become.

In the above-described embodiment, the first open mode is continued for a long open time in which the open time is a predetermined time or more, and the second open mode is continuously open in a predetermined open time or less. Although the short opening is described, the present invention is not limited to this, and any opening aspect may be used as long as the first opening aspect and the second opening aspect are different. In addition, as the gaming machine, although the gaming machine which executes the variable display game based on the winning in the starting area is mentioned, other gaming machines may be used. For example, it is possible to win a prize on an auxiliary gaming device based on winning in a starting area, and a so-called feather that generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player based on the game ball winning in the ancillary gaming device flowing into a specific area. It may be a gaming machine of (old type 2 type).

From the above, the start area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second start winning opening) provided in the gaming area 32 is provided with the gaming board 30 provided with the gaming area 32 in which gaming balls can flow 97) a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed based on the winning of the game ball, and a special game state which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result In the game machine 10, it is possible to convert the game ball into the closed state where the game ball can not win and the open state where the game ball can win, and controls the effect related to the game and the special fluctuation winning device 38 converted into the open state in the special game state. In the operation mode of the special variation winning device 38 in the special game state, the first open mode (long open) and the second open different from the first open mode are provided. Aspect A short open), there is, effect control means, so that the second in an open manner is performed, it is feasible to promote presentation 41h prompting the firing of the game ball towards special variation winning device 38. Therefore, the reduction of gaming balls during the special gaming state is suppressed,
It can enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the player operates and adjusts the launch force of the game ball (the operation unit 24), the display device 41 capable of displaying information on the game, and the special fluctuation winning device 38 by decoration A decoration means, and the effect control means displays, as the promotion effect 41h, an operation method of the firing operation portion necessary for launching the game ball toward the special variation winning device 38; The display unit 41 is configured to display the decoration mode of the special variation winning device 38 by the decoration means. Therefore, the player can easily understand the contents of the promotion effect 41 h.

In addition, the game area 30 is provided with a game area 32 in which game balls can flow, and a start area provided in the game area 32 (a first start winning opening 36, a normal fluctuation winning device 37, a second start winning opening 97).
A variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on the winning of the game ball, and the game machine 10 generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result In the special game state, the game ball can be converted into the closed state where the game ball can not win and the game ball can be converted into the open state where the game ball can win, and the special game state is converted into the open state in the special game state. The operation mode of the device 38 includes a first open mode (long open mode) and the first open mode.
There is a second opening mode (short opening) different from the opening mode, and it is a winning combination determination to determine which of the first opening mode and the second opening mode is a winning on the special variation winning device 38 Means (effect control device 300) is provided. Therefore, the presentation and progress of the game can be controlled based on the information by the prize determination means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the special fluctuation winning device 38 in the first open mode is configured to pay out a predetermined number of winning balls based on the winning of the special fluctuation winning device 38, and based on the determination of the winning by the winning determination means.
A counting means (effect control device 300) is provided which separately counts the number of winning balls based on winnings and the number of winning balls based on winning on the special variation winning device 38 in the second open mode. Therefore, the presentation and progress of the game can be controlled based on the information by the counting means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, it has the production control means (the production control device 300) which controls the production regarding the game, the production control means, the prize ball based on the prize to special fluctuation winning a prize device 38 in the 1st opening feature on the basis of the counting result by counting means The number and the number of winning balls based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38 in the second opening mode can be notified separately. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, after the effect control means (effect control device 300) notifies only a part of the counting result by the counting means, it is possible to notify the counting result which has not been notified at a predetermined timing. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

First Modification
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the execution mode of the addition effect.

As shown in FIG. 137, in this modification, it is possible to not immediately display the number of winning balls obtained in the short opening on the short opening winning game ball number display 41 j. In the example shown in FIG.
As shown in (a) and (b), a round with short opening is performed, and as shown in FIG. 137 (b), a value equal to the number of winning balls obtained in the short opening up to this point is a short opening winning game The ball number display 41j is displayed. After this, 15 new winning balls were obtained in the short opening, but
As shown in c), these 15 pieces are not added to the short open winning game ball number indication 41j.

Then, in the ending effect after the final round is over, as shown in FIG. 137 (d), the acquired game ball number display 41d showing the number of winning balls obtained in the long opening shows the number of winning balls obtained in the short opening. An effect is performed in which the value in the short open winning game ball number display 41 j is added, as shown in FIG. 137 (e).
As shown in, a total number display 41k is performed to display the total number of winning balls obtained in the special game state. At this point in time, the total number display 41k does not include the 15 winning balls that were not added in FIG. 137 (c). Thereafter, in the second half of the ending effect, as shown in FIGS. 137 (f) and (g), an additional effect is performed in which 15 award balls that have not been added are added to the total number display 41k.

With regard to the short opening round, the player is interested in how much the game value (prize ball) can be obtained, and in addition to the value displayed in the short opening acquisition game ball number display 41 j By performing the effect of being added, it is possible to give the player a feeling of gaining and to increase the interest of the game.

[Count effect setting process]
In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs the count effect setting process shown in FIG. 138 instead of the count effect setting process shown in FIG. In this count effect setting process, if it is a short open round (step C421), a count display lottery is carried out to draw whether to display the obtained number of winning balls immediately on the short open winning game number display 41j (step C601) ).

If it is determined to be displayed as a result of the count display lottery (step C602; Y), the processing in steps C424 and C425 is performed, and the number of winning balls obtained is displayed as the number of short open winning game balls 41j.
Display immediately. If the result of the count display lottery is not displayed (step C602; N), the non-display counter is updated based on the special winning opening count command (step C603), and the count effect setting process is ended. In this case, although the number of winning prizes is counted by the non-display counter, it is not displayed at this time.

[Ending effect setting process]
Also, instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 134, an ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 139 is performed. In this ending effect setting process, a retotal number is calculated from the total number of acquired gaming balls and the non-display counter (step C611), and an additional effect based on the retotal number is set (step C612). Then, the non-display counter is reset (step C)
612). By this processing, as shown in FIG. 137 (d), after the addition effect shown in FIG.
f) The additional effects shown in (g) will be performed.

It should be noted that an additional effect may be provided in which the number of prize balls that has not been notified yet is notified only when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the special gaming state. For example, in a long open round,
The additional effect may be performed only when a predetermined number (for example, nine) or more of winning possible in one round occurs.

Second Modified Example
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modification differs in processing relating to the display of the state indication display 41m.

FIG. 140 shows an example of effects in the special game state in this modification. Fig. 140 (a)
As shown in, when it becomes a predetermined round in the round at the short opening, the effect button operation effect that the player operates the effect button 25 is started. The effect button operation effect is to make the display mode of the state indication display 41 m different according to the operation result of the effect button 25.

In this effect button operation effect, a meter display 41 p is displayed that prompts the operation of the effect button 25 and displays the operation situation. The meter display 41p is a display in which a plurality of areas are vertically overlapped, and the display color is sequentially changed from the lower area according to the time the player long-pressed the presentation button 25 and the number of times the presentation button 25 was pressed. In this way, the operation status is reported.

When the player holds the effect button 25 for a predetermined time or more or presses the effect button 25 for a predetermined number of times or more within the effective period, the final condition is achieved, as shown in FIG. 140 (b), all of the meter displays 41p. The display color of the area changes. Then, as shown in FIG. 140 (c), in the ending effect, a state indication display 41m according to the effect mode selected by the player in the mode transition selection round is displayed.

If the player long-presses the presentation button 25 or depresses the presentation button 25 within the effective period but the final condition is not achieved, the meter display 41 is displayed as shown in FIG. 140 (d).
The display color of a partial area of p changes. Here, although the final condition is not achieved, a predetermined intermediate condition is achieved, and as shown in FIG. 140 (e), in the ending effect, a state suggestion display 41m in which a part is concealed is displayed. Ru.

If the player does not operate the effect button 25 within the effective period, as shown in FIG.
As shown in 0 (f), the display color of all the areas of the meter display 41p does not change. Then, as shown in FIG. 140 (g), in the ending effect, the state indication display 41m is not displayed.
If the player long-presses the effect button 25 or depresses the effect button 25 within the effective period, the state indication display 41m is not displayed in the same manner as in the case where the intermediate condition is not achieved.

The state suggestion display 41m in which a part is hidden as shown in FIG. 140 (e) is selected at the selection rate shown in FIG. 141 according to the probability state after the end of the special gaming state. These state indication indication 41m
Although a part is concealed, since the display modes are different, it is possible to determine if the player is familiar with it. However, since each state indication display 41m can be selected in either the high probability state or the low probability state, it is difficult to clearly grasp the probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

[Effect button operation effect processing]
In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs effect button operation effect processing shown in FIG. 142 in the effect button input processing in the main processing shown in FIG. In this effect button operation effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect button operation effect is being executed (step C621). If the effect button operation effect is not being executed (step C621; N), the effect button operation effect process Finish. In addition, when the effect button operation effect is being executed (
Step C621; Y) determines whether or not there is an operation of the effect button (step C622),
If there is no operation (step C 622; N), the effect button operation effect processing ends.

When the effect button is operated (step C622; Y), the operation input counter is updated according to the operation mode of the effect button (step C623), and the meter display is set based on the operation input counter (step C624) ), Effect button operation effect processing ends. That is, the value of the operation input counter is updated each time the production button 25 is pressed and held for a predetermined time, or whenever the production button 25 is pressed for a short time, and the meter display is displayed according to this value. To be done.

[Ending effect setting process]
Also, in place of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 134, an ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 143 is performed. In this ending effect setting process, it is determined whether the operation input counter is the upper limit value (step C631), and in the case of the upper limit value (step C631; Y),
That is, when the final condition is achieved, the operation input counter is reset (step C63).
5) End the ending effect setting process. In this case, the state indication display 41m set in steps C491 to C494 is displayed.

If the operation input counter is not the upper limit (step C631; N), it is determined whether the operation input counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (step C632). If the operation input counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step C632; Y), that is, if the intermediate condition is achieved, the state indication display 41m is set based on the selection rate of the reset table (see FIG. 141) (step C).
633) The operation input counter is reset (step C635), and the ending effect setting process is ended. In this case, as shown in FIG. 140 (e), a state indication display 41m partially concealed is displayed.

When the operation input counter is not equal to or more than the predetermined value (step C632; N), that is, when the intermediate condition is not achieved, the state indication display is set to non-display (step C634).
The operation input counter is reset (step C635), and the ending effect setting process is ended. In this case, the state indication display 41m is not displayed as shown in FIG. 140 (g). That is, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a notification of information about the game after the end of the special game state based on the operation mode of the operation unit (effect button 25 and touch panel 29) by the player in the special game state. It will be made to change the aspect.

In addition, according to the operation of the effect button 25 (according to the value of the operation input counter), the state indication display 41m may be gradually changed from a completely concealed state to a completely visible state.

Third Modified Example
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modification is adapted to award points in accordance with the game result in the special gaming state.

FIG. 144 shows an example of effects in the special game state in this modification. Fig. 144 (a)
As shown in FIG. 144, a round of short opening is performed, and one character is shown as shown in FIG. 144 (b) based on the fact that one special variation winning device 38 wins in this short opening round. It is possible to acquire it. When a character has been acquired, an acquisition display 41 q for informing the type of the acquired character is performed, and the acquired character is displayed on a total acquisition display 41 r displayed by the character acquired in the special gaming state. Figure 144 (
In b), it is informed that the star character has been acquired in the acquisition display 41q, and it is shown that one star character has been acquired in the total acquisition display 41r.

As shown in FIG. 144 (c), when one special ball is won on the special variation winning device 38 again, one character is acquired. Here, it is informed that the peach character has been acquired in the acquisition display 41q, and it is shown that one star character and one peach character have been acquired in the total acquisition display 41r. The characters to be acquired are selected for each prize according to the selection rate as shown in FIG. 144 (h).

As shown in FIG. 144 (d), in the ending effect, the type of the character acquired in the total acquisition display 41r is displayed. Here, it is shown that seven star characters, one peach character, one note character, and one treasure box character have been acquired. Since one character corresponds to one winning to the special variation winning device 38, the total winning display 4
A short open winning game ball number display 41j is displayed corresponding to 1r, and an addition effect to be added to the winning game ball number display 41d is performed.

Furthermore, a privilege according to the acquired character is awarded, and along with this, an assignment notification display 41 s for reporting the assignment of the benefit is performed. As shown in FIG. 144 (e), points are awarded when a peach character is acquired. This point is available for the player to customize the presentation of the game. Also, as shown in FIG. 144 (f), when a note character is acquired, a special BGM is set as the BGM after the end of the special game state. Further, as shown in FIG. 144 (g), when the character of the treasure box is acquired, a special background is set as a background after the end of the special game state.

By granting a benefit in this manner, it is possible to aim for winning in the special variation winning device 38 even in the short opening, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, by imparting a game value different from that of the winning balls, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game. That is, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can provide a game value different from the winning balls based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38.

[Count effect setting process]
In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs the count effect setting process shown in FIG. 145 instead of the count effect setting process shown in FIG. In this count effect setting process, if it is a short open round (step C421), the character is selected based on the selection rate of the display icon table (see FIG. 144 (h)) (step C651), and the character display setting is performed. Perform (step C652). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 144 (b) and 144 (c), the acquisition display 41q and the total acquisition display 41r are performed.

[Ending effect setting process]
Also, in place of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 134, an ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 146 is performed. In this ending effect setting process, the point giving character (
Here, it is determined whether or not a peach character has been acquired (step C661). If the point giving character has not been acquired (step C661; N), the process proceeds to step C663. In addition, when the point grant character is acquired (step C661; Y),
A point is awarded based on the number of acquisitions (step C662), and the process proceeds to step C663.

Next, it is determined whether a BGM character (here, a note character) has been acquired (step C663). If the BGM character has not been acquired (step C663; N),
The process moves to step C665. Also, when a BGM character has been acquired (step C)
663; Y) sets privilege BGM (step C664), and proceeds to step C665.

Next, it is determined whether a background character (here, a character of a treasure box) has been acquired (step C665). If the background character has not been acquired (step C665; N), the ending effect setting process ends. When the background character is acquired (step C665; Y), the privilege background is set (step C666), and the ending effect setting process is ended.

[Main processing]
Also, the main processing shown in FIG. 147 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this main processing, presentation point control processing (step C671) for performing processing relating to presentation points is performed.

[Effect point control processing]
FIG. 148 shows an effect point control process (step C671) in the main process described above.
showed that. In this effect point setting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an applied benefit selection operation flag set to a state in which the player has selected an applied benefit based on the points (step C691). Here, as a selectable privilege to be selected, in addition to the privilege BGM and the privilege background, it is possible to generate an effect that can not be usually viewed, such as making a special character appear or making a special reach possible. The thing is mentioned.

If there is a grant privilege selection operation flag (step C691; Y), the process proceeds to step C702.
Migrate to In addition, when there is no flag during the grant privilege selection operation (step C691; N),
State information is acquired (step C692). The state information is information indicating the state of the gaming machine, such as during execution of the special view variation display game, during the special gaming state, during waiting for customers, and the like.

Next, based on the acquired state information, it is determined whether the state is a trigger for resetting the point accumulated value (step C693). Here, the case where it is in the customer waiting state is a state which becomes a reset opportunity. In the case where it is not a condition that triggers reset of the point accumulated value (Step C693;
N) Go to step C694. If the point cumulative value is reset (step C693; Y), the point cumulative value is reset (step C69).
4) Go to step C695.

Next, based on the acquired state information, it is determined whether it is in a state to be a trigger for resetting the granted benefit (step C695). The granted benefit is a benefit BGM or a benefit background. Further, in this case, the case where it is in the customer waiting state is a state which becomes a reset trigger. If it is not in a state to be a trigger for resetting the award (step C695; N), the process proceeds to step C697. Further, in the case where it is in a state to be a trigger for resetting the award (step C695; Y), the award is reset (step C696), and the process proceeds to step C697.

Next, it is determined whether it is possible to exchange points based on the acquired state information (step C 697). Here, when it is other than waiting for customers, it is possible to exchange points. If point exchange is not possible (step C697; N), the effect point control process is ended. In addition, when it is possible to exchange points (step C697).
Y) determines whether a point exchange condition is satisfied (step C699). The point exchange condition is that the point accumulated value is equal to or more than the smallest point of the points required for exchange set for each award. When this point exchange condition is not satisfied (step C699; N), the effect point control process is ended. If the point exchange condition is satisfied (step C699; Y), it is determined whether there is a point exchange start operation (step C700).

The point exchange start operation is an operation of performing a predetermined operation on the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 and starting exchange of points and award benefits. If there is no point exchange start operation (step C700; N), the effect point control process is ended. Also,
If there is a point exchange start operation (step C700; Y), the award privilege selection operation flag is set (step C701), and the effect point control process is ended.

On the other hand, when there is a grant benefit selection operation flag (step C691; Y), it is determined whether or not there is a decision operation of grant benefit (step C702). When there is no decision operation of the grant privilege (
Step C702; N) ends the effect point control process. In addition, when there is a decision operation of grant privilege (step C702; Y), the selected grant privilege is set (step C)
703), the awarding privilege selection operation flag is reset (step C704), and the effect point control process is ended.

In addition, although it was assumed that a point granting character was acquired as a trigger for acquiring points,
In other cases, points may be earned. For example, when the pre-reading effect is performed, points may be acquired according to the pre-reading effect to be performed. In addition, points may be made to be able to be won when the game is continued for a predetermined time, when a specific effect occurs, or when there is a prize in the prize opening.

Fourth Modified Example
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of this modification, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball up to the opening and closing member 990 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 149, the flow path forming portion 9 of the opening and closing member 990 is formed on the upper surface 617 of the guiding portion 616.
A protrusion 481 and a recess 482 similar to the protrusion 992 and the recess 993 provided on the surface 91 are formed. With such a protrusion 481 and a recess 482, the gaming ball flowing down the upper surface 617 of the guiding portion 616 is allowed to flow to the left while meandering back and forth, and flows more than the case without the protrusion 481 and the recess 482 The speed is reduced. As a result, the flow-down speed can be sufficiently reduced until reaching the opening and closing member 990 of the special variation winning device 38, and the time for which the gaming ball is retained on the opening and closing member 990 can be lengthened.

In the configuration of FIG. 149 (a), since the gaming ball is closer to a position closer to the player than the configuration of FIG. 149 (b), it is easy to see the flow-down mode of the gaming ball heading for the special variation winning device 38,
The interest of the game can be improved. Further, in the configuration of FIG. 149 (b), since the game balls can be prevented from colliding with the back surface of the cover glass of the glass frame 15, noise can be generated by colliding with the cover glass while being able to protect the cover glass. Can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 150, a projecting portion 481 may be provided at a portion on the upstream side of the opening / closing member 990 in the flow-down path 38f to meander the gaming ball flowing down. In this way, the speed of the gaming ball flowing into the opening and closing member 990 can be reduced, and the time for the gaming ball to stay on the opening and closing member 990 can be further lengthened. Also, as shown in FIG.
A protrusion 481 and a recess 482 for meandering the game ball flowing down may be provided in a portion on the upstream side of the opening and closing member 990 in 8f. This also makes it possible to reduce the speed of the gaming ball flowing into the opening and closing member 990, and to further lengthen the time for which the gaming ball stays on the opening and closing member 990.

In addition, although a vibration generate | occur | produces because a game ball meanders, you may provide the detection sensor which detects this vibration. Alternatively, a detection sensor for detecting the presence of the gaming ball may be provided at a portion where the gaming ball meanders. The effect control device 300 then generates an LED based on the detection signal from the detection sensor.
To make them emit light. By doing this, attention can be drawn to the game balls that stay meandering, and it can be shown that the game balls can flow into the special fluctuation winning device 38 in the short opening.

Fifth Modification
Next, a fifth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of the present modification differs in the configuration of the special fluctuation winning device 38.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the special variation winning device 38 of this modification has a V flow path 955a in which a guiding flow path 955 composed of a main body 970 and a back wall member 960 extends downward; It is branched into a discharge ball flow channel 955b extending in the direction. A V-door 501 which can slide in the front-rear direction is provided at a position to be an inflow portion of the V flow path 955a. The V door 520 projects forward to block the V flow path 955 a and prevents the V door from moving back to the V flow path 95.
It can be converted to an acceptable state that allows inflow to 5a.

The gaming ball that has won the large winning opening 38 d and flows into the guiding channel 955 is guided to the back surface of the back wall member 960 through the through portion 968 formed in the back wall member 960 and formed in the main body 970 It is guided to the right by the rib 973 and reaches the branch portion of the V flow path 955a and the discharge ball flow path 955b. When the V door 520 is retracted backward, it can flow into the lower V flow path 955a, and the gaming ball which has flowed into the V flow path 955a detects the gaming ball which has flowed into the V flow path 955a After being detected at 460, the rib is guided to the rear by the rib 969 formed on the back wall member 960, passes through the penetrating portion 974, is guided to the back side of the main body 970, and discharges the gaming ball to the outside of the gaming machine It is designed to flow into the channel. As described later, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is not determined by the jackpot symbol, but in the special gaming state, the gaming ball flows into the V flow path 955a and the probability change operation area Based on the detection by the switch 460, a high probability state is established.

On the other hand, in a state where the V door 520 protrudes forward, the gaming ball that has reached the branch portion is the V door 52.
It is guided to the right through the upper surface of 0 and flows into the discharge ball channel 955b. Discharge ball channel 955b
The game ball that has flowed into the main body 970 is guided to the right, and the
62 to the back surface side of the main body 970 and further directed downward to discharge the ball passage 955b
After being detected by the residual ball discharge switch 461 which detects the game balls flowing down, the flow is made to flow into the discharge flow path for discharging the game balls to the outside of the gaming machine. On the back surface of the rear wall member 960, at a position facing the through hole 462, a rib 463 for guiding the gaming ball flowing down the discharge ball flow passage 955b to the rear through hole 462 is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 154 to 157, V for operating the V door is provided on the back surface side of the main body 970.
A door unit 500 is provided. The V door unit 500 includes a V door 520, a lever solenoid 502 for driving the V door 520, and V in response to the drive of the lever solenoid 502.
A link member 510 for operating the door 520 is provided.

The lever solenoid 502 is disposed so that the drive shaft 503 extends downward along the vertical direction. The first link member 511 of the link member 510 is connected to the tip of the drive shaft 503. The first link member 511 can slide in the vertical direction along with the operation of the drive shaft 503. The first link member 511 is provided with a bearing portion 512 for receiving the connection shaft 514 provided at one end of the second link member 513 so that the connection shaft 514 moves up and down with the operation of the drive shaft 503. It has become.

The second link member 513 has a shape bent in a V-shape, and a connection shaft 514 connected to the first link member 511 is provided at the end of the arm 517 extending from the bent portion to one side. There is. A connecting shaft 515 connected to the V door 520 is provided at an end of the arm 518 extending from the bent portion to the other. Further, a pivot shaft 516 is provided at the bent portion. The pivot shaft 516 is perpendicular to the extension direction of the arm portions 517 and 518 extending from the bent portion, and the connection shafts 514 and 515 extend parallel to the pivot shaft. The rotating shaft 516 is a main body 6
The second link member 513 is pivotally supported about a pivot shaft 516 by being axially supported by a bearing portion 464 formed on the back surface of the shaft 70 in the left-right direction.

The V door 520 includes a door 521 that can extend to the V flow path 955a. The upper surface of the door portion 521 is an inclined surface which inclines to the right when viewed from the front side, and in the state of extending to the V flow path 955a, the game ball is allowed to flow down to the discharge ball flow path 955b to the right ing. Also, the door 52
The front end portion in the extension direction 1 is an inclined surface which is inclined so that the lower end is positioned rearward of the upper end. Thus, when the door portion 521 is extended forward to the V flow passage 955a, the gaming balls present in the inflow portion to the V flow passage 955a are released upward or downward by forming the inclined surface in this manner. be able to.

Further, an insertion portion 522 into which the connection shaft 515 of the second link member 513 is inserted is formed at the rear of the V door 520. The front and rear width of the insertion portion 522 is slightly wider than the outer diameter of the connection shaft 515, but the upper and lower width is sufficiently wider than the outer diameter of the connection shaft 515.
It is made movable up and down in 22.

Further, a slit-like guided portion 523 along the front-rear direction is formed on the bottom surface of the V-door 520. As shown in FIG. 154, in the portion of the main body 670 where the V door 520 is disposed,
A through portion 467 penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed, and a door portion 521 of the V door 520 of the V door unit 500 provided on the back side of the main portion 670 passes through the through portion 467 to It is extended to the inflow part of the V flow path 955a. The V door 5 is provided in the through portion 467.
A guide rib 465 is formed extending in the front-rear direction to guide the movement of the V-door 20 in the front-rear direction, and is slidably fitted with the guided portion of the V door 520.

As shown in FIGS. 155 (a), 156 (a) and 157 (b), the V door unit 500 configured as described above is in a state where the drive shaft 503 of the lever solenoid 502 is most extended in the operation range In the (OFF state), the first link member 510 is positioned at the lower end of the operation range, and the second link member 513 is most pivoted counterclockwise as viewed from the right side.
The connecting shaft 515 of the link member 513 is located at the foremost end of the movement range. As a result, the V door 520 is pushed out to the front end of the movement range, extends upward of the V flow path 955a, and prevents the game ball from flowing into the V flow path 955a.

From this state, when the lever solenoid 502 is operated to retract the drive shaft 503 (turn it on), the first link member 510 moves upward, and the second link member 513 moves clockwise backward as viewed from the right. Rotate. Along with this, the connection shaft 515 of the second link member 513 moves rearward, and the V door 520 moves rearward. And FIG. 155 (b), FIG. 156 (b) and FIG.
As shown in 57 (c), when the drive shaft 503 of the lever solenoid 502 retracts most in the operating range, the V door 520 is positioned at the rear end of the moving range, and the door portion 521 is V
In the state of being completely retracted from the flow path 955a, the flow of gaming balls into the V flow path 955a is permitted. When the door portion 521 is extended above the V flow path 955a to prevent the game ball from flowing into the V flow path 955a, the operation reverse to the above is performed.

FIG. 158 shows a block diagram of the game control apparatus 100 in the game machine of this modification.
The positive change operation area switch 460 and the remaining ball discharging switch 4 provided in the special fluctuation winning device 38
The detection signal of the game ball from 61 is input to the game control apparatus 100. Also, the lever solenoid is controlled by the game control device 100.

The big hit types in the gaming machine of this modification are 16R positive variation A, 16R positive variation B, 16R normal A,
16R normal B, 4R positive variation is set. And, the first round of each jackpot type is considered to be a probability variation decision round. The certain variation determination round is a round for determining whether the high probability state will be after the end of the special game state depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a.
A definite change in the name of each jackpot type indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into the V flow path 955a and is likely to be in a high probability state (probable change state) after the end of the special game state, and a V flow path 955a is normal It indicates that there is a low possibility that the game ball will flow into and that it is difficult to be in a high probability state (probable change state) after the end of the special game state. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, whether or not the game ball is in the high probability state is determined depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a. If the game ball does not flow in, the high probability state is not obtained, and if the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a even if the big hit type is normal, the state becomes the high probability state.

FIG. 159 shows the operation of the special variation winning device 38 that can be performed in each round of the special game state. As shown in FIG. 159 (a), V release releases the special fluctuation winning device 38 with the start of the round (t31). Furthermore, when the round starts, the lever solenoid 502 is turned on.
In addition to the N state (retracted state), the positive change operation area switch 460 is enabled.
The door portion 521 covers the V flow path 955a in a state where the lever solenoid 502 is OFF (in an extended state), and the gaming ball can not flow in when the lever solenoid 502 is ON. It escapes from the path 955a and the gaming ball can enter. Further, the state in which the probability changing operation area switch 460 is effective is a state in which the detection of the gaming ball by the probability changing operation area switch 460 is treated as being effective. On the other hand, the state in which the probability changing operation area switch 460 is invalid is a state in which the detection of the gaming ball by the probability changing operation area switch 460 is treated as being invalid.

The lever solenoid 502 is turned OFF after 64 ms have elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, when 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 502 is turned off, the probability change operation area switch 460 is invalidated (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the game ball won immediately after the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened may flow into the V flow path 955a.

The special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed 200 ms after the start of the round (t34
). Then, when 2700 ms elapses, the special fluctuation winning device 38 is released again (t35)
The special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (when the condition of 25000 ms openable time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, nine) game balls win) is satisfied.
t39). Thereafter, the interval time and the winning opening game residual ball processing time are started (t39),
When the interval time ends, the next round is started (t41).

Also, after the second opening (t35) of the special variation winning device 38, the lever solenoid 502
Is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Also, the probability change operation area switch 460 is also effective (t36). The second opening of the special variation winning device 38 is for a sufficiently long time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 502 also continues for a long time, so that the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a almost certainly Become. Therefore, when the jackpot type is positive, the probability state is almost certainly high.

Further, the lever solenoid 502 can be turned on for a predetermined time even after the special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and the special fluctuation winning device 3 is just before closing.
The game ball having flowed into 8 can also flow into the V flow path 955a. In addition, the special variation winning device 38 is closed by the lapse of the openable time or when a predetermined number of gaming balls wins, and all the gaming balls that have won the special variation winning device 38 are discharged within the special winning opening residual ball processing time When the remaining ball processing time is over (t42), the lever
As the F state is reached to end the operation, the positive change operation area switch 460 is invalidated.

In addition, the special variation winning device 38 is closed by the lapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of gaming balls are winning, and all the gaming balls having won the special variation winning device 38 are not discharged within the remaining ball processing time. End of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state (t4
If it is completely discharged by 3), the lever solenoid 502 is turned off when the discharge is completed.
As the state is reached and the operation is ended, the positive change operation area switch 460 is invalidated.

In addition, the special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed by the lapse of the openable time or when the predetermined number of gaming balls wins, all the gaming balls that have won the special fluctuation winning device 38 are discharged within the special winning opening residual ball processing time In the case where the lever solenoid 502 is not discharged completely by the end (t43) of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 502 is terminated at the end (t43) of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state. It becomes OFF and ends the operation. In this case, after the lever solenoid 502 is turned off (t43)
When 100 ms elapses, the positive change operation area switch 460 is invalidated (t44).

As shown in FIG. 159 (b), in the short release, the special variation winning device 38 in V release is
The same release as the first release is performed (t51 to t54), and the round is ended based on the end of the release (t54). This special variation winning device 38 is opened for a very short time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 502 is also for a short time.
The possibility of the game ball flowing into 55a is low. Therefore, when the jackpot type is normal, the probability state is high.

The operation of the lever solenoid 502 and the switching between valid and invalid of the probability variation operation area switch 460 perform the same operation as in the case of V open as long as the gaming ball remains in the special variation winning device 38 (t56 to t63 ). Therefore, when the game ball remains in the special variation winning device 38 even if the special winning opening residual ball processing time has elapsed, the lever solenoid 502 is turned off when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. When the operation is finished, the positive change operation area switch 460 is invalidated. Also, the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state (t
If all game balls have not been ejected by 62), the lever solenoid 502 is turned off at the end (t62) of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is turned on and the operation is ended, and the lever solenoid 502 is turned off. 100ms after the state (t62)
When it passes, the probability change operation area switch 460 is invalidated (t63).

However, the lever solenoid 502 and the positive change operation area switch 460
Is controlled as shown in FIG. 159 (b) only when the short release is performed in the first round. If short circuit opening is performed in any other round, the lever solenoid 50
Do not operate 2 and the positive change operation area switch 460 also remains disabled. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set along with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 159 (c), in the long opening, the special variation winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t 61), or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls are open When one of the conditions for winning is established, the special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round is ended (t62). After that, the interval time and the winning opening game residual ball processing time are started (t62), and when the interval time is over, the next round is started (t63)
). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round,
The ending time is then set. In this long opening, the lever solenoid 502 is kept in the OFF state, and the positive change operation area switch 460 is also kept invalid.

In each of the above-described jackpot types, V open is performed in the first round in the case of a positive variable jackpot.
Also, in the case of a big hit, a short open is usually performed in the first round. Then, for the second and subsequent rounds, 16R probability variation A and 16R probability variation A all become long open, 16R probability variation B and 16R normal B become long release from 2 to 4R, and 5 to 16R become short release. In addition, in the 4R positive variation all open short. However, the lever solenoid 502 is kept in the OFF state and the positive change operation area switch 460 is also kept invalid in the short circuit opening after 2R. Even in the case of a small hit, the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened, but the lever solenoid 502 is kept in the OFF state, and the positive change operation area switch 460 is also kept invalid.

The first opening period (t31 to t32) of the door 521 at V opening and the opening period (t51 to t52) of the door 521 at short opening are retained on the opening and closing member 990 when the opening and closing member 990 is opened. It is a difficult period for the game balls to reach the V flow path 955a.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, the gaming ball that has been staying on the opening and closing member 990 contacts the projecting portion 992 formed on the opening and closing member 990 as shown in FIG.
It bounces as shown in (b) and is guided away from the big winning opening 38d. That is, it is induced in the direction away from the V flow path 955a which makes a specific region. Also, by bringing the bouncing game ball into contact with the front wall projecting portion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protruding portion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, etc., the time to reach the V flow path 955a becomes longer. It has become. From this, when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, it is difficult for the gaming ball which has been accumulated on the opening and closing member 990 to reach the V flow path 955a. However, since the projecting portions 992 formed in the opening / closing member 990 are disposed at intervals through which the gaming balls can pass, the gaming balls dropped without coming into contact with the projecting portions 992 through this interval are V channels There is a slight possibility of flowing into 955a. Of course, the game is on the opening and closing member 990 when making the opening state by arranging the projecting portion 992 without any space through which the game ball can pass, or providing the rib continuously along the front end of the upper surface. The ball may be in contact without fail.

In addition, the first opening period (t31 to t34) of the special variation winning device 38 in V opening;
The opening period (t51 to t54) of the special variation winning device 38 in the short opening becomes a time that can flow into the big winning opening 38d even if it is the gaming ball which has bounced in contact with the projecting portion 992 as described above. ing. Thus, even if the opening is short, it is possible to flow into the big winning opening 38d. In addition, the opening period of the door portion 521 and the opening period of the special fluctuation winning device 38 are designed values for generating a high probability state set at the design stage of the gaming machine and designed values for winning ratio in short opening. , And is set according to the structure of the special variation winning device 38 such as the opening and closing member 990.

[Probability change operation area switch monitoring process]
Further, in the game control device 100, a probability change operation area switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 160 is performed. In this probability change operation area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the probability change operation area switch 460 is active (step A2401). The fact that the probability variation operation area switch 460 is active means that the detection of the gaming ball by the probability variation operation area switch 460 is treated as being effective. If the positive change operation area switch 460 is not active (step A2401; N), the positive change operation area switch monitoring process ends. In addition, when the probability changing operation area switch 460 is in effect (step A2401; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the probability changing operation area switch 460 (step A2402).

Then, when there is no input to the probability change operation area switch 460 (step A2402; N), the probability change operation area switch monitoring process is ended. If the probability change operation area switch 460 has an input (step A2402; Y), a probability change operation area passing command is prepared (step A2403), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A2404). As a result, the effect control device 300 can execute effects corresponding to the game ball having flowed into the V flow path 955a.

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol is a V easy symbol (step A2405). The V-easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 16R positive variation A, 16R positive variation B, 4R positive variation. In the case of a big hit by these symbols, V opening is performed, so gaming balls will almost certainly flow into the V flow path 955a. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit by 16R normal A or 16R normal B which is not a V easy symbol, a short circuit is opened, so it is rare for game balls to flow into the V flow path 955a.

Then, when the big hit design is V easy design (step A2405; Y), set the probability variation operation area normal passage information (step A2406), save the set information in the probability variation operation area passage information region (step A2408) ), End the positive change operation area switch monitoring process. If the big hit design is not V easy design (step A2405; N), set the definite change operation area irregular passage information (step A2407), save the set information in the positive change operation area pass information area (step A2408) ), End the positive change operation area switch monitoring process.

[Big hit end processing]
Then, the big hit end process shown in FIG. 161 is performed instead of the big hit end process shown in FIG. In this big hit end processing, it is determined whether there is probability operation area passage information (probability change operation area normal passage information or probability change operation area irregular passage information) set when gaming balls flow into V flow path 955a (step A2411). And if there is no probability operation area passing information (
In step A2411; N), a big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step A1202). In this case, the high probability state is not reached. If there is probability operation area passing information (step A2411; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 is performed (step A1203). In this case, there is a high probability state. That is, regardless of the jackpot symbol V flow path 955a
When the game ball flows in, it becomes high probability state.

[Lever solenoid control process]
Further, in the game control apparatus 100, a lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 502 is performed. As shown in FIG. 162, in this lever solenoid control process, it is determined first whether the lever solenoid control pointer is a no update code (here, -1) (step A2501). If the lever solenoid control pointer is a no update code (
Step A2501; Y) ends the lever solenoid control process. If the lever solenoid control pointer is not a no update code (step A2501; N), the lever solenoid control timer is updated by -1 (step A2502), and it is determined whether the lever solenoid control timer becomes 0 (step A2503). .

If the lever solenoid control timer is not 0 (step A2503; N),
The lever solenoid control process ends. When the lever solenoid control timer becomes 0 (step A2503; Y), the lever solenoid control table is set (step A2504), and the table address corresponding to the lever solenoid control pointer is calculated (step A2504).
Step A2505). The control pointer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control point area (step A2507), and the output data for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid output data area (step A2508). Thereafter, the probability variation operation region validity determination flag is acquired and saved in the probability variation operation region validity determination flag region (step A2).
509), the lever solenoid control process ends.

By the above processing, the lever solenoid control pointer is sequentially updated each time a predetermined time passes, and as shown in FIG. 159, ON and OFF of the lever solenoid 502 are set, and the positive / negative operation area switch 460 is valid / invalid It is set. When the operation of the lever solenoid 502 is ended by satisfying a predetermined condition, the lever solenoid 502 is turned off and the positive change operation area switch 460 is invalidated by setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer. . Then, after 0 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer, -1 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the state in which the operation is stopped continues.

In addition, the arrival of the gaming ball to the V flow path 955a is delayed, and the first open period (t31 to t32) of the door 521 at V open and the open period of the door 521 at short open (t51)
In order to make it difficult for the game ball which has been staying on the opening and closing member 990 to reach the V flow passage 955a when the opening and closing member 990 is opened at t52), an induction flow passage leading to the V flow passage 955a 9
A recess 471 may be provided on the surface 55 to slow the flow-down speed of the gaming ball.

For example, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), it is located behind the penetrating portion 968 formed in the back wall member 960, and guides the gaming ball guided to the back side of the back wall member 960 to the V flow path 955a side. The bent portion 470 is provided with a plurality of recesses 471 as shown in FIG. Recess 4
It is preferable that the corners of the surface 71 be curved so as not to excessively block the flow of the game balls.

Further, the wall surface of the recess 471 in FIG. 163 (c) is inclined relative to the recess in FIG. 163 (b) compared to the recess in FIG. 163 (b). Can be prevented. In addition, the part which provides such an unevenness | corrugation is not restricted to the bending part 470, and should just be a part until it reaches the V flow path 955a in an induction flow path. In addition, the flow velocity of the gaming ball may be reduced by increasing the number of bent portions up to the V flow path 955a. That is,
A flow rate reduction mechanism such as a recess 471 or a bending portion is provided in the flow path up to the V flow path 955a, and the flow rate and gravity of the gaming ball flowing down are reduced compared to the case without the flow rate reduction mechanism.
The time taken to reach the V channel 955a is made longer. Further, a projection may be provided on the bottom of the flow path leading to the V flow path 955a so that the game ball bounces, and the arrival timing to the V flow path 955a may be delayed.

From the above, the start area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second start winning opening) provided in the gaming area 32 is provided with the gaming board 30 provided with the gaming area 32 in which gaming balls can flow 97) a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed based on the winning of the game ball, and a special game state which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result In the game machine 10, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball can not win and the game ball can be converted into the open state in which the game ball can win. In the closed state, the game ball can be won from the opening facing upward, and it protrudes forward to close the opening, disabling the game ball from winning and in the open state retracts the back to open the opening. Enter game ball In the closed state, the game ball can flow down on the upper surface of the open / close member 990, and the open / close member 990 is an upper surface on which the game ball can flow down. Is provided with a projecting portion 992 projecting upward. Therefore, since the rolling mode of the gaming ball changes in the projecting portion 992,
It can enhance the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing into the specific area at unintended timing, and it is possible to prevent transition of the probability state different from the design value.

In addition, the projecting portion 992 is provided at least at the front end portion in the sliding direction on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990. When the opening / closing member 990 is converted to the open state, the rolling aspect of the gaming ball changes in the projecting portion 992, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the special variation winning device 38 is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game, and the special variation winning device 38 is provided internally with a specific area (V channel 955a) to which game balls can flow. Based on the game ball having won in the variable winning device 38 flowing into the specific area, it is possible to generate a game state more advantageous to the player after the special game state has ended than when the game ball did not flow into the specific area. The protrusion 992 is formed such that when the opening / closing member 990 is converted to the open state, the gaming ball in contact with the protrusion 992 is guided in the direction away from the specific area. Therefore, since the player is guided in the direction away from the specific area, the player's sense of apprehension can be disturbed and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the opening and closing member 990 is provided with a plurality of projecting portions 992 on the upper surface at intervals, and when the opening and closing member 990 is converted to the open state, the gaming ball located on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 is the projecting portion 992 Projection 99 so as to be able to pass between the two and flow downward from the front end in the sliding direction
2 will be distributed. Therefore, the rolling aspect of the game ball when converting the open / close member 990 to the open state is diversified, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the projecting portion 992 is provided at a position where the gaming ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 can contact in the closed state, and the gaming ball stays on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 more than the case without the projecting portion 992 The time will be extended. Therefore, the opening and closing member 9
Since the time for the game balls to stay on the upper surface of 90 is extended, the possibility of winning the special variation winning device 38 is increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Sixth Modification
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the configuration of the gaming area 32.

As shown in FIG. 164, in the gaming board 30 of the present modification, a plate-shaped partition wall 531 is provided between the center case 40 and the outer peripheral wall 31 from the upper side of the center case 40 to the right side. The partition wall 531 is disposed along the outer peripheral wall 31 at an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the gaming ball from the outer peripheral wall 31. In addition, the division wall 531 is a game area 32 from the front of the game board main body.
Front and rear width (cover glass covering the front of the game board 30 from the front of the game board main body 80 (transparent member)
It extends forward by the width of 14).

In addition, the distance between the dividing wall 531 and the restriction wall 613 formed on the outer periphery of the center case 40 is also larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and both sides of the dividing wall 531 can flow downstream A first downstream region 541 sandwiched by the partition wall 531 and the outer peripheral wall 31 and a second downstream region 542 sandwiched by the partition wall 531 and the restriction wall 613 are formed.

The lower end of the partition wall 531 is connected to the upper end of the guiding portion 616. In the gaming machine of the present modification, the game ball can also flow down on the right side of the guiding portion 616, and the first flowing area 541 sandwiched by the partition wall 531 and the outer peripheral wall 31 is the area on the right side of the guiding portion 616 In order to guide the game ball to the out port 30a. The game balls flowing down the first flow-down area 541 are the common drawing start gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, the special fluctuation winning apparatus 38, and the general winning opening 35.
The player is guided to the out port 30a without winning in any of the winning devices 90. On the other hand, the gaming balls flowing down the second flow-down area 542 sandwiched by the division wall 531 and the restriction wall 613 are the common drawing start gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, the special fluctuation winning apparatus 38, and the general winning opening 35
There is a possibility that the winning device 90 will win a prize. In the present modification, the winning device 9 is also used in the case of a right-handed hit.
There is a possibility of winning at 0, but in the case of a right-handed hit, the winning device 90 may not be able to win.

It is possible to select which one of the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 the game balls are to be flowed in by adjusting the power. First flow down area 541 and second flow down area 5
The inflow port 42 is located above the center case 40, and the inflow port of the first falling area 541 is located above the inflow port of the second falling area 542. Therefore, the second flow down area 5
In order to aim for the inflow of gaming balls to 42, it is necessary to make the launch force weaker than in the case of flowing the gaming balls into the first flow-down area 541.

In the conventional gaming machine, when performing a left strike, the game is performed by adjusting the launch force, but when performing a right strike, only the operation unit 24 is turned as much as possible. On the other hand, the game board 30 of this modification
Then, it is necessary to adjust the launch force so as not to flow into the first flow-down area 541 even when performing a right strike, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the gaming state where the right strike is performed. Also,
When the player stops playing while the game ball is left on the upper plate 21 in the game arcade,
The store clerk can rotate the operation unit 24 as much as possible to shoot the game ball and flow the game ball into the first flow area 541, so that the game ball can be processed without winning in the winning opening.

In addition, as shown in FIG.
A communication portion 532 may be provided in which the second flow-down area 542 and the second flow-down area 542 communicate with each other, and the area in which the game ball flows down may be changed. By doing this, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

By adjusting the distance between the end portions of the dividing wall 531 divided by the communication portion 532, it is possible to adjust the height of the possibility of changing the area where the gaming balls flow down. For example, the area where the gaming ball flows down is rarely changed as a width slightly wider than the diameter of the gaming ball, or the area where the gaming ball flows down frequently as the sufficiently wide interval is changed can do. Further, the provision of the guiding portion 533 for guiding the gaming ball toward the communicating portion 532 can also increase the possibility that the area in which the gaming ball flows can be changed. In the example of FIG. 165, the guiding wall 533 for guiding the gaming balls flowing down the second flow-down area 542 to the communication section 532 is formed by the restriction wall 613 of the center case 40, and the first flow-down from the second flow-down area 542 The possibility of the game ball moving to the area 541 is increased. In addition, an obstacle such as a windmill may be provided in the communication portion 532.

Further, the partition walls 531 divided by the communication portion 532 are all formed on the front surface of the one base member 534. The base member 534 is disposed along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and is fixed to the game board main body 80 by a screw.
The screwing operation can be performed in a wide area where there is no space, and the efficiency of the manufacturing operation of the game board 30 can be improved.

FIG. 166 shows another example of the game board 30 provided with the partition wall 531. As shown in FIG. 166, the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 may have a possibility of winning on the winning opening. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the rolling aspect of the gaming ball in the gaming state in which the player is right-handed colorful, and the interest of the game can be improved. In this game board 30, the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 3 as special variation winning devices
9 and can be opened alternately. Further, instead of the winning device 90, only the first start winning opening 36 is provided. The game method and the like are the same as those of the game board 30 of the first embodiment, and the left hit and the right hit are selected according to the game situation.

When the size of the center case 40 is reduced as in this gaming board 30, the outer peripheral wall 31
There is a wide space between the and the restriction wall 613. In this case, it is common to place an obstacle member such as a game nail or a windmill in this space, but the timing and speed of the game ball reaching the right game area when right-handed due to the presence of the obstacle member Can vary.
For this reason, it becomes difficult to stably reach the gaming area on the right side, and stable winning on the special fluctuation winning device 38 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is inhibited, and the profit of the player is lowered. There is a fear.

Therefore, by dividing this space into the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 by the partition wall 531, the first flow-down area 541 can stably reach the gaming area on the right without the obstacle member. The second flow-down area 542 can be an area that enjoys the change of the rolling aspect of the gaming ball by the obstacle member. As a result, it is possible to appropriately secure the interests of the player while enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 166, by providing the first flow-down area 541 on the upper side without providing any obstacle member, the game machine is fired with the strongest launch by fully turning the operation unit 24 the first flow-down area It will flow to 541. Then, by making the first flow-down area 541 a width in which the game balls flow down in a row, it is possible to always receive the game balls directed to the left by the buffer portion 545 provided on the outer peripheral wall 31. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball of the strong launch from colliding with the portion other than the buffer portion 545, and to prevent damage to the game board 30.

In addition, when the special variation winning device 38 such as the gaming machine of the first embodiment is provided, the game ball is always on the opening / closing member 990 in order to make the special variation winning device 38 win even in short opening. Needs to stay. In order to do this, it is necessary to cause the game ball to reach the special variation winning device 38 at a stable and constant timing, but the division wall 531 as described above
Can be made possible, and the profit of the player can be appropriately secured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167, the communication portion 532 may be provided in a range where the gaming ball moves to the right. By doing this, the gaming ball which reaches the start end of the first flow-down area 541 but is weakly propelled falls from the communication part 532 to the second flow-down area 542. As a result, the launch force that allows the first flow-down area 541 to flow down to the end is limited to a narrower range, and the timing of the game ball reaching the special fluctuation winning device 38 etc. is more stabilized. it can. In this case, the game balls flowing down the second flow-down area 542 have a lower winning rate for the special variation winning device 38 and the like than the game balls flowing down the first flow-down area 541, etc. It is preferable to make it disadvantageous.

Furthermore, a winning opening or a gate through which a gaming ball falling from the upper side can win may be provided at a position below the communication portion 532 in the second flow-down area 542. In this way, the game ball flows into the winning hole or the gate only when the game ball is fired with a firing force that falls to a predetermined position of the communication portion 532 with a firing force that reaches the beginning of the first flow-down area 541. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, in FIGS. 164 to 167, a plate-like partition wall 53 is provided between the outer peripheral wall 31 and the restriction wall 613.
The first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 are formed by arranging the first flow-through area 541. May be formed. In this case, the groove-like flow passage forming member may be disposed to be open on the front side to form the side wall and the back wall of the flow-down region, It may be arranged to be open and may be arranged to constitute the side wall and the front wall of the flow-down area. Alternatively, the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 may be formed by a tubular flow path forming member.

By doing so, it becomes possible to form the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 with a single flow path forming member without using the restriction wall 613 and the outer peripheral wall 31 of the center case 40. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency at which the game ball collides with the control wall 613 of the center case 40 and the like, and to reduce the number of members to be discarded when reusing the components of the game board. In addition, when the flow path forming member is damaged, only the flow path forming member may be replaced, and the cost of repair can be reduced.

In addition, character information such as an explanation of the game content, information instructing not to stare at the same light for a long time from a short distance, and information indicating that a fraud prevention sensor is mounted is described in this flow path forming member It is also possible to use a flow path forming member in which necessary character information is described. In this way, it is possible to change the character information more easily than printing on the surface of the game board.

Further, a plurality of division walls 531 are provided between the outer peripheral wall 31 and the restriction wall 613 to provide three or more parallel flow-down areas so that the player can select the flow-down area to flow down by adjusting the urge. It is good. In this case, a sensor for detecting gaming balls flowing down may be provided in each flow-down area, and different effects may be provided to the player according to the flow-down area flowing down.

Also, although the starting end of the dividing wall 531 is provided above the center case 40 and the gaming ball is directed to the right, it may be provided to the right of the center case 40 and downward. . Further, although the partition wall 531 is provided above and to the right of the center case 40, it may be provided at a location other than this.

In addition, as the gaming machine provided with the dividing wall 531, the gaming machine which executes the variable display game based on the winning in the starting area as described above has been mentioned, but it is possible to provide for other gaming machines. . For example, it is possible to win a prize on an auxiliary gaming device based on winning in a starting area, and a so-called feather that generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player based on the game ball winning in the ancillary gaming device flowing into a specific area. It may be a gaming machine of (old type 2 type). In this case, the possibility of winning on the auxiliary gaming device or the possibility of winning on a specific region in the auxiliary gaming device may be different depending on the flow-down region where the gaming ball flows down.

From the above, the start area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second start winning opening) provided in the gaming area 32 is provided with the gaming board 30 provided with the gaming area 32 in which gaming balls can flow In the gaming machine 10, which executes a game based on the winning of the gaming ball to 97) and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the game result is a special result, the gaming board 30
An outer peripheral wall 31 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 32, and a guiding wall 491 which is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 and which forms a guiding path 490 which guides the fired game ball to a predetermined position of the game area 32;
A center case 40 provided substantially at the center of the game area 32;
And the outer peripheral wall 31 are provided with a plate-like partition wall 531, and on both sides of the partition wall 531, a flow-down area (first flow-down area 541, second flow-down area 542) is formed in which gaming balls can flow It will be. Therefore, it is possible to change the manner of flow of the game balls and to improve the interest.

Further, the guiding path 490 is provided on one side to the left and right of the game area 32, the dividing wall 531 is provided on the other side to the left and right of the gaming area 32, and the dividing wall 531 is sandwiched by the player adjusting the release. It is possible to select which of the flow-down areas respectively formed on both sides of the game ball to flow into. Therefore, since the player can select the flow-down area to flow, interest can be improved.

Further, the upstream end of the dividing wall 531 in the rolling direction of the gaming ball is located above the center case 40. Therefore, it is possible to select the flow-down area to flow down above the center case 40 which is easy for the player to visually recognize.

Seventh Modified Example
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of the present variation includes a reflective surface 550.

As shown in FIG. 168, the gaming machine of the present modification has a center case 40 in the gaming area 32.
A reflective surface 550 is provided above, and a part of a character string 551 for presenting information to the player is written so as to overlap the reflective surface 550. As a character string 551 for presenting information to the player, a warning message such as a display prompting that the same light is not stared for a long time from a short distance or information indicating that a fraud prevention sensor is mounted, game content And an explanation of the operation method.

Since such a character string 551 is written so as to overlap the reflective surface 550, the player's attention is drawn to the reflective surface 550 giving an impression different from that of the surroundings, and the player reflects the reflective surface 550.
When looking at the character string 551 is also naturally seen, information can be effectively transmitted to the player. In particular, since the first few characters of the character string 551 overlap the reflecting surface 550, it is easy to start reading and information can be effectively transmitted to the player. Of course, only characters other than the head of the character string 551 may overlap the reflective surface 550. The entire text 551 may overlap the reflective surface 550.

In addition, the position where the reflective surface 550 is provided and the position where the character string 551 is described are the positions where the game ball passes, and in the process of following the game ball, the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551 naturally enter eyes Thus, information can be effectively transmitted to the player. Here, the character string 551 is disposed in the portion where the gaming ball moves to the right, and the direction of reading the character string 511 matches the moving direction of the gaming ball. This also makes it possible to read the string 551 naturally. Of course, the moving direction of the game ball and the direction of reading the character string 551 may be different.

The reflective surface 550 is formed on a cell attached to the front of the game board main body 80, and a character string 55 is formed.
1 is also printed on the cell. For example, it can be formed by processing the cells to have a metallic gloss. Furthermore, a sheet-like lens may be stacked. Also, a reflecting member such as a mirror may be disposed on the front of the game board main body 80, and the front may be covered with a transparent cell.

It is preferable that the entire face of the player 552 can be projected in a state where the player sits on the front of the gaming machine 10 to play a game as the area where the reflecting surface 550 is projected as shown in FIG. 169 (a).
The reflection of the player's face attracts the player's interest, and the opportunity to see the reflecting surface 550 can be further increased, and the opportunity to see the string 551 can also be increased. Also, the upper body of the player 552 may be shown. Also, if it is possible to project the left and right rear areas of the player, it is possible to confirm, for example, that a store clerk has come when replacing a ball box.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 169 (b), the reflecting surface 550 may be configured to be able to project an area behind the player's left and right. In this case, it is preferable to be able to visually recognize the state of the lamp of the front frame provided on the gaming machine 553 of the island facility located behind the player. By doing this, it is possible to check the state of the gaming machine 553 located behind the player without looking back. Also, the light from the rear gaming machine 553 is reflected by the reflective surface 550,
The reflective surface 550 is indirectly decorated, and more attention can be given to the character string 551. In addition, if the reflecting surface 550 has a function as a convex mirror, it is possible to project a wide area with a small reflecting surface. Of course, it may be a concave mirror.

Further, it is preferable that the light from the light emitting member of the gaming machine 10 or the light from the illumination of the gaming arcade is not reflected directly to the player by the reflecting surface 550. With regard to the light from the light emitting members of the gaming machine 10, the arrangement of the light emitting members and the radiation direction of the light are adjusted so that the light is not reflected by the reflective surface 550 and radiated to the front of the gaming machine 10. In addition, with regard to light from the outside of the gaming machine 10 such as illumination of a game arcade, the reflecting surface 550 may be slightly directed downward, or the front periphery of the front frame 12 may be projected forward and incident on the reflecting surface 550. It can respond by preventing.

Further, the position where the reflective surface 550 is provided is not limited to the illustrated position. For example, the reflecting surface 550 may be provided in the vicinity of the guiding wall 491 and the character string 551 may be disposed along the guiding wall 491. For example, the reflective surface 550 is provided in the vicinity of the outer peripheral wall 31, and the character string 551 is
It may be arranged along one. Also, the reflecting surface 550 is provided on the guiding portion 490, and the character string 55
1 may be disposed along the outer peripheral wall 31 or the induction wall 491. In addition, a reflecting surface 550 may be provided on the moving object, and the character information may be superimposed on the reflecting surface 550. String 551 in this case
As the character string ("super heat" etc.) regarding the production of the game is mentioned.

Also, the reflecting surface 550 may be a half mirror. In this case, a space is provided on the back surface side of the reflective surface 550, and this space can be illuminated by the light emitting member. In this way, if the light emitting member is turned off to darken the space, the reflecting surface 550 can be seen as a mirror for the player, and if the light emitting member is turned on to brighten the space, the player can be reflected on the reflecting surface 550. The space can be viewed through the

Further, the reflecting surface 550 and the character string 551 may be provided on the outside of the game area 32 of the game board 30 or may be provided on the front frame 12. In addition, as the gaming machine provided with the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551, a gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on winning in the starting area as described above has been mentioned, but providing for other gaming machines Is possible. For example, it is possible to win a prize on an auxiliary gaming device based on winning in a starting area, and a so-called feather that generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player based on the game ball winning in the ancillary gaming device flowing into a specific area. It may be a gaming machine of (old type 2 type). Also, the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551 may be disposed in a portion of the slot machine where the player can visually recognize.

From the above, the game can be viewed on the gaming machine 10 that executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result. A reflective surface 550 for reflecting light is provided on the front surface of the display, and a part of a character string 551 for presenting information to the player is written so as to overlap the reflective surface 550. Therefore, by attracting the player's attention by the reflecting surface 550, the player can be made aware of the presence of the character string 551, and information can be effectively provided to the player.

The reflecting surface 550 also has a function as a convex mirror. Therefore, more reflective surface 550
Can attract the player's attention and can effectively provide information to the player. Moreover, it becomes possible to project a wide area.

Also, the reflective surface 550 can show at least the entire face of the player playing a game. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to the reflective surface 550 more effectively, and information can be effectively provided to the player.

Also, the reflecting surface 550 can project an area behind the player's left and right. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to the reflective surface 550 more effectively, and information can be effectively provided to the player. In addition, it is possible to confirm the backward state of the player.

Further, the gaming board 30 is provided with the gaming area 32 in which the gaming balls can flow, and the reflecting surface 550 is provided in the gaming area 32, and the gaming balls can flow forward of the reflecting surface 550. . Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to the reflective surface 550 more effectively, and information can be effectively provided to the player.

Second Embodiment
The gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the following description, the embodiment (configuration) common to the first embodiment is applicable unless otherwise noted.

[Play board]
FIG. 170 is a front view of the game board 30 included in the game machine 10 according to the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 170, the game board 30 includes a flat game board main body 80 which serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 is provided on the front of the game board main body 80. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball launch device into a game area 32 surrounded by the outer peripheral wall 31. A windmill, an obstacle nail or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached substantially at the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variation display device) that variably displays a plurality of identification information is disposed.

In the center case 40, a warp passage forming member 614 for forming a warp passage for guiding the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and the gaming balls passing through the warp passage roll A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is disposed above the first start winning hole 36, the stage portion 620
The game ball rolled up is easy to win the first start winning opening 36.

In the right play area 32 of the center case 40, a normal symbol start gate (common view start gate) 34 is provided. Inside the drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 32) for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the drawing start gate 34 is provided.
When the gaming ball driven into the gaming area 32 passes the common drawing start gate 34, the common drawing variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are disposed in the game area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is disposed in the right portion of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to these general winning a prize opening 35, the winning a prize opening switch 35a which is equipped in the general winning a prize opening 35
(See FIG. 32).

In the lower game area 32 of the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special view 1 variation display game (first special view variation display game) is provided. . The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36, the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 32)
Is detected by
Also, in the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40, the special figure 2 variable display game (second
A second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area) is provided to give a start condition of the special figure variation display game). The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 97, the starting opening 3 switch 97a (Figure 3
2) detected.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided between the common view starting gate 34 and the second starting winning opening 97.
In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the special figure 1 variation display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start by the winning of the regular variation winning device 37 in the winning opening (general charge winning opening 37d). A winning prize memory (first start memory) is stored. That is, in the present embodiment,
The winning opening (general power winning opening 37d) of the normal variation winning device 37 is a first start winning area for giving a start condition of the special view 1 variation display game (first special view variation display game). The gaming ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 32), and when the starting ball is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the game control device 100 The special view 1 variable display game is immediately executed, or the special view 1 start winning memory is stored.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the common use winning opening 37d and the first starting winning opening 36 correspond to the first starting winning area (the starting opening of the special view 1), and the second starting winning opening 97 is the second starting. It corresponds to the winning area (starting port of the special figure 2).

A game control device (game control means) 100 performs control to convert the movable member 37b of the normal change winning device 37 into an open state and a closed state based on a predetermined lottery result of the common drawing change display game. It connects to (conversion control means) (see FIG. 32). Regular fluctuation winning device 37
In the present embodiment, the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning apparatus 37 moves back and forth (slides) in the back and forth direction by the common voltage solenoid 37c.
It is a so-called Vero-type ordinary electric wheeler that opens the common use winning opening 37d (makes it possible for the gaming ball to flow into the common opening winning opening 37d). In addition, as the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, for example, an ordinary electric combination of the attacker type is provided in which the general electric winning opening 37d is opened by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling to the front side May be Game control device 10
0 is an open state in which the game ball can flow into the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 by opening the movable member 37b via the common electric solenoid 37c when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode Change to

In addition, the game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the common view fluctuation display game or making the hit probability of the common view fluctuation display game higher than usual. The time saving state (general power support (power support) state) is generated by lengthening the generation time of the easy winning state rather than the easy winning state generated in the gaming state.

In the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40, a special variation winning device 38 is provided.
The special variation winning device 38, as shown in FIG. 17, moves the opening / closing member 990 back and forth (slides) to convert the special winning opening 38d into a state in which gaming balls can flow. The special variation winning device 38 converts the closed state of the big winning opening 38 d from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special view variation display game, and facilitates the flow of the gaming ball into the big winning opening 38 d. A predetermined gaming value (prize ball) is given to a player. The game ball that has won the special variation winning device 38 is detected by the special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 32).

The special variation winning apparatus 38 of this embodiment differs from the special variation winning apparatus 38 of the first embodiment in that the general winning opening 35 is not provided, and the other points are the special variation winning apparatus 38 of the first embodiment. Is the same as
That is, the special variation winning device 38 of this embodiment is the special variation winning device 3 of the first embodiment.
Similar to 8, the opening / closing member 990 retracts from the closed state (the closing state disadvantageous to the player) in which the opening / closing member 990 closes the big winning opening 38d as a result of the special view variation display game as an auxiliary game. Is converted into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) which can be received. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the game ball arriving at the special variation winning device 38 is guided obliquely backward by the front wall projecting portion 954 and the projecting portion 992, and obliquely forward by the concave portion 993 and the rear wall projecting portion 964. The guidance to to is repeated and it flows down from right to left while meandering back and forth. Thereby, the front wall projecting portion 954, the rear wall projecting portion 964 and the projecting portion 9
The time during which the game balls stay on the opening and closing member 990 is longer than when the grooves 92, 993 and the like are not undulated and flow straight down. Therefore, even if the game ball is always present on the opening and closing member 990 and the opening time of the special variation winning device 38 is short, the game ball existing on the opening and closing member 990 when the opening and closing member 990 is opened. There is a high possibility that the player will fall and win a prize in the big winning opening 38d, and even with a short opening, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the prize.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31, when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, the gaming ball which has been staying on the opening and closing member 990 is bounced by coming into contact with the projecting portion 992 and guided away from the big winning opening 38d Be done. In addition, the bouncing game ball may be further separated from the big winning opening 38d by coming into contact with the front wall projection 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall projection 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, and the like. Further, since the projecting portions 992 are disposed at intervals through which the game balls can pass, the projecting portions 992 may fall without contacting the projecting portions 992 through the intervals.
As described above, by providing the projecting portion 992, the front wall projecting portion 954, and the rear wall projecting portion 964, the rolling aspect of the game ball when opening the opening / closing member 990 becomes colorful, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can. In addition, when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, the inflow timing of the plurality of gaming balls existing on the opening and closing member 990 to the large winning opening 38d can be shifted, and ball clogging occurs in the large winning opening 38d. Can be prevented.

The game control device (game control means) 100 can generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined special result. In the present embodiment, the special game state is a big hit state (second special game state) that can be generated when the big hit mode (second special result) and a small hit mode (first special result) A small hit game state (first special game state) that can be generated when it becomes an event shall be included.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100, special drawing based on the winning of the game ball to the common power winning opening 37d (first start winning area) or the first starting winning port 36 (first start winning area) It is possible to perform execution control of 1 fluctuation display game (the 1st special figure fluctuation display game). That is,
The game control device (game control means) 100 includes a first execution control means for performing such control.
Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special view 2 variation display game (a second special view variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball on the second start winning opening 97 (the second start winning area). It is possible to control the execution of the That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a second execution control means that performs such control.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100, the big hit game state (the second special game state)
After the end of the control to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) that can proceed with the game in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state (a high probability of winning and with power support). It is possible. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a specific game state generation means for performing such control.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the launch force to fire the gaming ball to the left gaming area (so-called left strike), thereby achieving the first start winning opening 36 and the first starting winning opening 36. It is possible to aim for winning in the general winning opening 35 disposed on the left side of the game, and by launching the game ball to the right play area (so-called right hit), the common drawing start gate 34 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37, special It is possible to aim for winning in the general winning opening 35 disposed above the variable winning device 38, the second starting winning opening 97, and the second starting winning opening 97.
Then, the game ball in any of the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the regular power winning opening 37d of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the large winning opening 38d of the special fluctuation winning device 38 When the player wins a prize, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 32) discharges the winning balls from the payout device to the upper tray 21 in the number according to the type of the winning opening that has won the prize.

In addition, the gaming area 32 below the first start winning opening 36 is provided with an out port 30a for collecting gaming balls that did not win a winning opening or the like.
In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the gaming board main body 80, the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and the common figure variation display game A collective display device 50 is provided.

FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 30 included in the game machine 10 according to the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 171, the gaming board 30 comprises a gaming board main body 80 having a substantially rectangular plate shape, a front component 600 constituting the front side portion of the center case 40, and a rear side portion of the center case 40 And a rear component 700 to which various members necessary for the disc 30 are attached.
The rear component 700 is a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 71 having a recess opened forward.
There are 0, and inside the recess, there are provided various movable role units that constitute a board effect device 44 that performs effects of the game by operating.

The front component 600 has a general winning opening 35, a warp passage forming member 614, and a stage 6
20 mag is provided.
Further, in addition to the front component 600, the game board main body 80 has the common drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special variation. A winning device 38, a collective display device 50 and the like are provided.

Also, as shown in FIG. 170 and FIG. 171, on the right side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a flow down path 615 covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicating vertically is formed. The game ball that failed in (specifically, the game ball that did not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 despite having arrived at the normal fluctuation winning device 37) flows downward through the outflow path 615. Below the flow passage 615, a guiding portion 616 is provided. The guiding portion 616 is an inclined surface in which the upper surface 617 descends to the left, and the upper surface 617 receives the gaming ball flowing down the downflow passage 615, and the second start winning opening 97 and the special fluctuation winning device 38 exist. It is designed to guide you to the left.

[Normal fluctuation winning device]
Next, referring to FIGS. 172 to 180, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the second embodiment.
An example of the configuration of will be described.
FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 of the second embodiment. Also, FIG.
3 (a) is a top view of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in which the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and FIG.
73 (b) is a top view of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in which the movable member 37b is in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 173, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 has a flow path rear wall 373a disposed along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and a flow path front wall 371a disposed in front of the flow path rear wall 373a. And an outflow passage 37f through which the game balls can flow in a row. The flow-down path 37f is inclined to the right as viewed from the front side, and the gaming balls flow downward in a row.
In addition, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 can pass the game ball in a row in the inside of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (specifically, the inside of the base portion configured by the front base member 373 and the rear base member 375). A substantially U-shaped bypass 37g is provided. As shown in FIG. 172, the detour 3
The inlet 37g1 (one end of the bypass 37g) and the outlet 37g2 (the other end of the bypass 37g) of 7 g are formed in the flow path rear wall 373a, and the gaming balls are one through the inlet 37g1. Flows from the downflow path 37f into the bypass path 37g one by one via the outlet 37g2
It flows out from g to the down flow path 37f.

As shown in FIG. 172, the flow path front wall 371a has a protrusion 371b that protrudes rearward and penetrates the flow path rear wall 373a. The protruding portion 371b is a position where the gaming balls flowing down the flowing path 37f collide with each other, and is disposed at a position between the inlet 37g1 and the outlet 37g2 of the bypass 37g. Therefore, the projecting portion 371b blocks the flow of the gaming ball in the flow-down path 37f midway (that is, before flowing into the end point (downstream end) of the flow-down path 37f),
The game ball is guided to the bypass 37g. And since the projection part 371b is provided in the middle of the flowing down passage 37f, the gaming ball can not flow into the end point of the flowing down passage 37f unless it passes the detour 37g.

As shown in FIG. 173, the bottom surfaces of the center portion and the right end portion of the downflow path 37f and the bottom surface of the bypass path 37g are configured by movable members 37b that can slide in the front-rear direction.
The movable member 37b protrudes forward as shown in FIG.
A closed state in which the gaming ball can not win a prize in the (general charge winning opening 37d) and an open state in which the gaming ball can retreat in the general presence winning opening 37d by retreating backward as shown in FIG. And can be converted. That is, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the gaming ball flowing down the flow-down path 37f rolls the upper surface of the movable member 37b and can not flow into the common winning hole 37d, and the movable member 37b is open In this case, it is possible to flow into the Fuden prize winning opening 37d.

Specifically, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the gaming ball flowing down the flowing path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b. That is, the downflow path 37f flows down to the projection 371b, collides with the projection 371b, and flows into the bypass 37g.
In addition, when the movable member 37b is opened before the gaming ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 37b collides with the projecting portion 371b, or the gaming ball flowing down the outflow passage 37f flows in the upper surface of the movable member 37b When the movable member 37b is in the open state at the time of playing, the game ball is a detour 37g.
Flow into the Fuden prize winning opening 37d without passing through.

In addition, the gaming ball which has flowed through the detour 37g to the end point of the flow-down path 37f is the movable member 37.
When b is in the open state, it flows into the common power winning hole 37d.
On the other hand, the gaming ball which has passed the detour 37g and flowed into the end point of the flow-down path 37f is the movable member 37.
When b is in the closed state, it does not flow into the common power winning opening 37d, but advances outside the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and flows down to the guiding portion 616, for example, through the flow down path 615. That is, the gaming ball is equivalent to a gaming ball that failed to win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (a gaming ball that did not win the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 despite having arrived at the normal fluctuation winning device 37) .
When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, there is a gap between the movable member 37b and the flow path front wall 371a, but the gap can not allow the game ball to flow.

As shown in FIG. 172, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 includes a start port 2 switch 37a, and a movable member unit 374 having a movable member 37b and a common solenoid 37c. further,
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 has a front decoration member 371 having a flow path front wall 371a, and a flow path rear wall 37.
3a, a rear base member 375 to which the movable member 37b and the like are attached, a rear cover member 377 covering the rear surface of the rear base member 375, and a front LED substrate 372
a and a front substrate holder 372 for fixing the front LED substrate 372a to the rear surface of the front decoration member 371, a rear LED substrate 376a and the rear LED substrate 376a as a rear base member 375
And a rear substrate holder 376 for fixing on the rear surface of the substrate.

At least the front decoration member 371, the front base member 373 and the rear base member 375 are made of a material capable of transmitting light. The front LED board 372 as a decoration means behind the front decoration member 371
The rear LED substrate 376a is arranged as a decoration means at the rear of the rear base member 375, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 can be decorated with light.

The front decoration member 371 includes a plate-like front surface portion 371 c. The front surface of the front surface portion 371c is disposed close to the rear surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that the gaming ball does not flow down the front of the front surface. In addition, the front of the front portion 371c is a surface visible to the player, and is decorated. In addition, the upper portion of the plate-like front portion 371c is
It is a flow path front wall 371a which forms a side wall on the front side of the flow-off path 37f.

As shown in FIG. 173, on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a, a plurality (two in the present embodiment) of upstream side front wall protrusions 371d are provided. The upstream front wall projection 3
The reference numeral 71 d denotes a triangular prism-like protrusion whose left and right side surfaces are inclined. The upstream front wall projection 37
1d has a function of guiding the gaming ball flowing downward to the rear in order to meander the gaming ball flowing down the flow-down path 37f and to suppress the attack. That is, the game ball flowing down the flowing path 37f forms a contact portion which can be contacted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 173, on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a, there is provided a downstream side front wall projection 371e projecting backward. The downstream side front wall projection 371 e is a triangular prism-shaped projection in which the left and right side surfaces are inclined. The downstream side front wall projection 371 e has a function of guiding the gaming ball flowing downward to the rear in order to meander the gaming ball flowing into the end point of the flow-down path 37 f to suppress the flaming. That is, the game ball flowing down the flowing path 37f forms a contact portion which can be contacted. Furthermore, in the downstream front wall projection 371e, the gaming balls flowing down the periphery of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (outside of the normal fluctuation winning device 37) are downstream to the inside of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (
It has a function to prevent intrusion from the end point side of the downflow path 37f).

FIG. 174 (a) is a back view of the front decoration member 371. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 174 (a), on the rear surface side of the front decoration member 371, a plurality of rib-like extending walls 371f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-like front surface portion 371c are provided. This extending wall 37
1f has different functions depending on the place where it is provided, and a bottom portion 371f1 which forms the bottom surface of the downflow path 37f (specifically, the bottom surface of the start point (upstream end) of the downflow path 37f) Attached to the common channel winning opening forming part 371f2 which forms the side wall and bottom of 37d, the guiding channel forming part 371f3 which forms the guiding channel 37e which guides the game ball to the winning common terminal winning opening 37d It has a function as a switch attachment portion forming portion 371f4 forming a portion, and a surrounding wall 371f5 preventing entry into the inside of the gaming ball flowing down around the normal fluctuation winning device 37.

The bottom surface portion 371f1 that forms the bottom surface of the flow-down path 37f is an inclined surface that inclines to the left as viewed from the rear surface side.
The Futo prize winning opening formation unit 371 f 2 guides the game ball that has flowed into the Futo winning prize opening 37 d into the guiding channel 37 e
It is inclined to collect into.
The game balls can flow in a row in the induction flow channel 37e, and a start opening 2 switch 37a is provided in the inflow portion to the induction flow channel 37e. As a result, all gaming balls having flowed into the common pot winning opening 37d are detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a and then flow into the guiding channel 37e. The induction flow channel 37e formed by the induction flow channel forming portion 371f3 is a common channel winning hole 37d.
The rib 371g for guiding the gaming ball backward is formed on the rear surface of the front portion 371c.

The front LED substrate 372a and the front substrate holder 372 are disposed on the inner side (the portion surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5) than the peripheral wall 371f5 of the rear surface of the front decoration member 371.
Further, in a portion of the rear surface of the front decoration member 371 and surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5, processing for scattering light (concave and convex processing in the example shown in FIG. 174A) is performed. Thus, the light from the front LED substrate 372a and the rear LED substrate 376a causes the normal fluctuation winning device 3
While being able to decorate 7 effectively, it becomes difficult to visually recognize front LED board 372a itself, front board holder 372, etc. through front decoration member 371 from the front of front decoration member 371. ing.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 174 (b), the lower portion of the front base member 373 is a front LED substrate 3.
A plurality of holes (7 in the example shown in FIG. 174 (b)) for releasing heat such as 72a are provided. These holes are also difficult to visually recognize from the front of the front decoration member 371 by processing for scattering the light applied to the front decoration member 371.

As shown in FIG. 172, the front base member 373 is provided with a plate-like rear surface portion 373b.
A front decoration member 371 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b, and a part of the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b which is not hidden by the front decoration member 371 is decorated. An upper portion of the rear surface portion 373b is a flow path rear wall 373a which forms a rear side wall of the flow-down path 37f.
In addition, a movable member insertion portion 373c penetrating in the front and rear direction for inserting the movable member 37b from the rear surface side of the front base member 373 is formed at a position to be the lower end of the flow path rear wall 373a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 173, on the front side of the front base member 373, a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) rear wall projections 373d are provided that project forward. This rear wall projection 373
Symbol d denotes a triangular prism-shaped protrusion in which the left and right side surfaces are sloped, with respect to the upstream side front wall projection 371d behind each of the upstream side front wall projections 371d provided on the flow path front wall 371a It is provided to be located slightly downstream. The rear wall projection 373 d is a flow passage 3.
In order to meander the gaming ball flowing down 7f and control the power, it has a function to guide the gaming ball flowing down to the right. That is, the game ball flowing down the flowing path 37f forms a contact portion which can be contacted.

FIG. 174 (b) is a back view of the front base member 373.
As shown in FIG. 174 (b), the guiding flow channel 37e is formed in the center of the rear surface portion 373b and is opposed to the portion where the guiding flow channel 37e is formed in the front decoration member 371.
A penetrating portion 373 e penetrating in the back and forth direction is formed to communicate with the rear surface side of 73 b.
Further, as shown in FIG. 174 (b), a plurality of rib-like extending walls 373 f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-like rear surface portion 373 b are provided on the rear surface side of the front base member 373. The extending wall 373f has different functions depending on the place where the extending wall 373f is provided.
Of the induction channel forming portion 373f1 forming the surrounding wall 3 forming the periphery of the normal fluctuation winning device 37
It has a function as 73f2.

The guiding flow path forming portion 373f1 forms a guiding flow path 37e so as to guide the gaming ball having flowed into the penetration portion 373e to the rear. Further, a rib 373 g for guiding the game ball backward is formed at the lower end portion of the guiding flow path forming portion 373 f 1.
The lower end portion of the induction channel forming portion 373f1 and the rib 373g formed on the lower end portion are inclined surfaces with the upper surface falling backward, and the gaming balls having flowed into the penetrating portion 373e are received by these upper surfaces It is designed to guide you. The induced game balls are made to flow into the discharge flow path for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine 10.

The surrounding wall 373f2 is formed in accordance with the shape of the penetrating portion formed in the portion to which the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is attached in the gaming board main body 80, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is attached to the gaming board main body 80 At this time, the surrounding wall 373f2 is inserted into the through portion. Further, the rear surface of the rear surface portion 373b located outside the surrounding wall 373f2 is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the normal change winning device 37 is attached to the game board main body 80. A plurality of bosses for positioning and a plurality of screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 172, the rear base member 375 is a peripheral wall 373f of the front base member 373.
2 and the surrounding wall 375a which corresponds back and forth.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 172, a movable member 37b that operates in the front-rear direction at a position facing the movable member insertion portion 373c formed on the front base member 373 of the rear base member 375.
A pair of movable member holding parts 375b are provided to guide and support. The pair of movable member holding portions 375b are disposed at a predetermined interval (gap 375c), and the movable member 37b is
It is provided to extend along the front-rear direction so as to be able to contact the lower surface of the movable member 37b and to guide and support the movable member 37b.

As shown in FIG. 172, on the front side of the rear base member 375, a movable member unit 374 including a movable member 37b and an operation mechanism (drive mechanism) for operating the movable member 37b is attached. The movable member unit 374 includes a movable member 37b which can slide in the front-rear direction, a common voltage solenoid 37c for operating the movable member 37b, and a slider 374a which transmits the driving force from the common voltage solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. And crank 37
And 4b.

The movable member unit 374 has a closed state in which the movable member 37b is protruded forward as shown in FIG. 173 (a) and an open state in which the movable member 37b is retracted backward as shown in FIG. 173 (b). It is convertible. The movable member 37b can appear above the potting hole 37d through the movable member holding portion 375b formed on the rear base member 375 and the movable member insertion portion 373c formed on the front base member 373. There is.

FIG. 175 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable member unit 374 and FIG. 175 (b) is an exploded perspective view.
It is a front view of movable member 37b. FIG. 176 (a) is a top view of the movable member 37b, and FIG. 176 (b) is a bottom view of the movable member 37b.
As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the movable member 37b includes an upper portion 37b1 and the upper portion 37b.
a first middle step portion 37b2 provided at a position lower than b1, a second middle step portion 37b3 provided at a position lower than the first middle step portion 37b2, and a lower position than the second middle step portion 37b3 The lower portion 37b4 has a step-like shape aligned in the left-right direction. Upper part 37b
Upper portion 37 so that the lower portion 37b4 is disposed at the rightmost position.
The b1, the first middle portion 37b2, the second middle portion 37b3, and the lower portion 37b4 are arranged in this order, and the game ball is allowed to flow from left to right.

In the upper stage portion 37b1, a front end portion extending upward of the common winning hole 37d when the movable member 37b is in a closed state is a downstream passage forming portion forming a bottom surface of the downstream passage 37f. Upper part 37b1
The flow passage forming portion of the upper stage portion 37b1 is one step lower than the portion other than the flow passage forming portion of the upper stage portion 37b1. In addition, from the right end of the portion of the upper portion 37b1 other than the downflow passage forming portion, the lower wall protruding portion 37b5
Extends forward. The lower wall projection 37b5 has a slope on the left side,
It is provided to gradually narrow the width (length in the front-rear direction) of the flow-through path forming portion. The lower wall projecting portion 37b5 has a function of guiding the gaming ball flowing downward to the right in order to meander the gaming ball flowing down the flowing down path 37f to suppress the pitch. That is, the game ball flowing down the flowing path 37f forms a contact portion which can be contacted.

The first middle step portion 37b2 has a front end portion extending upward of the common winning hole 37d when the movable member 37b is in a closed state, as a flow downstream path forming portion forming the bottom surface of the flow downstream path 37f. A portion other than the portion (that is, a portion other than the down flow path forming portion) is a detour forming portion that forms the bottom of the detour 37 g. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the boundary portion between the inflow passage forming portion and the detour forming portion in the first middle step portion 37b2 is disposed immediately below the inlet 37g1 of the detour 37g.

The first middle step portion 37b2 is inclined such that the rear end is located lower than the front end. Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the gaming ball is likely to roll from the front side to the rear side of the upstream portion of the bypass 37g.
Further, on the upper surface of the first middle step portion 37b2, a meandering left protruding portion 37b6 which protrudes upward and extends in the front and rear direction is formed. As a result, the gaming ball rolling on the bypass path 37g can be made to meander to suppress the ball game.

The second middle portion 37b3 has a front end portion extending upward of the common winning hole 37d when the movable member 37b is in a closed state, and the protruding portion 3 for guiding the gaming ball flowing down the flowing passage 37f to the bypass 37g.
It is placed directly below 71b.

The lower end portion 37b4 has a front end portion extending upward of the common channel winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in a closed state, the bottom surface of the flow downstream path 37f (specifically, the bottom surface of the end point of the flow downstream path 37f) A flow passage forming portion is formed, and a portion other than the front end portion (that is, a portion other than the flow passage forming portion) is a detour forming portion that forms the bottom surface of the detour 37g. Of the lower portion 37b4,
The boundary between the flow passage forming portion and the detour forming portion is disposed immediately below the outlet 37g2 of the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

The lower portion 37b4 is inclined so that the rear end is positioned above the front end, and the rear end is flush with the rear end of the first middle step 37b2. Thus, for example, as shown in FIG.
As shown in 6 (a), the gaming ball is likely to roll from the rear side to the front side of the downstream portion of the bypass 37g. The rear end portion of the lower portion 37b4 may be provided at a position lower than the rear end portion of the first middle step portion 37b2.
Further, on the upper surface of the lower portion 37 b 4, a meandering right protrusion 37 that protrudes upward and extends back and forth
b7 is formed. As a result, the gaming ball rolling on the bypass path 37g can be made to meander to suppress the ball game.

As described above, the movable member 37 b is provided with raised portions such as the lower wall protruding portion 37 b 5, the left protrusion 37 b 6, and the right protrusion 37 b 7. In addition, the left protrusion 37b6 and the right protrusion 37b7 are formed so that the game balls rolling on the movable member 37b do not get in the way when the direction of the bypass 37g changes. Further, the front decoration member 371 is provided with an uprising portion such as an upstream side front wall projection 371d, and the front base member 373 is provided with an upset such as a back wall projection 373d. . By such an origination portion, the time for which the gaming balls stay on the movable member 37b is made long.

Further, as shown in FIG. 174 (b), sliding portions 37b8 extending downward are formed at the left end portion and the right end portion of the movable member 37b. The sliding portion 37b8 is formed to extend along the front-rear direction, and the movable member 37b is held on the holding portion 373h by contacting the upper surfaces of the pair of holding portions 373h formed on the front base member 373. It becomes possible to slide.

As shown in FIG. 175 (b) and FIG. 176 (b), a connection pin 37b9 which protrudes downward is provided at the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b. Further, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), in the crank (drive arm) 374b for transmitting the driving force from the common voltage solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b, a through portion 374b1 through which the connection pin 37b9 can be inserted is formed. Yes,
The distal end portion (lower end portion) of the connection pin 37 b 9 is inserted into the through portion 374 b 1 to move the movable member 3.
7b and crank 374b are connected.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 175 (b) and 176 (b), the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b projects downward and extends along the front-rear direction on the front and rear sides of the connection pin 37b9. Guiding ribs 37b10 are provided. The guide rib 37b10 is a front base member 37.
A gap 373i formed along the front-rear direction between a pair of holding portions 373h of the third embodiment (see FIG. 1).
And a gap 375c (see FIG. 172) formed along the front-rear direction between a pair of movable member holding portions 375b of the rear base member 375. By inserting the guide rib 37b10 of the movable member 37b from above into these gaps 373i and 375c, it is possible to guide the linear movement (slide movement) of the movable member 37b in the front-rear direction.
That is, when the guide rib 37b10 of the movable member 37b fits into the gap 373i of the front base member 373 or the gap 375c of the rear base member 375, the movement of the movable member 37b in the lateral direction is restricted. Can be limited to movement in the back and forth direction.

As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the crank 374b for transmitting the driving force from the common voltage solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is a substantially L-shaped member, and the connecting pin 37b9 of the movable member 37b is provided at one end. A penetrating portion 374b1 which can be inserted is formed, and a convex portion 374b is formed at the other end.
2 is formed. Further, the slider 374a for transmitting the driving force from the common voltage solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b has a recess 374 through which the protrusion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted.
a1 is formed, and the slider 3 is formed by inserting the convex portion 374b2 into the concave portion 374a1.
74a and crank 374b are connected.
Further, a pivot shaft 374b3 extending in the vertical direction is formed at the bent portion of the crank 374b, and the crank 374b is pivotable about the pivot shaft 374b3.
The pivot shaft 374b3 is held by the rear base member 375 from above and below so as to be pivotable.

As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the slider 374a is a flat plate-like main body portion 374a2 perpendicular to the vertical direction, a left wall portion 374a3 connected to the left end of the main body portion 374a2 and orthogonal to the main body portion 374a2, A front wall portion 374a4 connected to the front end of the 374a2 and orthogonal to the main body portion 374a2, and a projecting piece 374a5 projecting forward from the front wall portion 374a4 are configured. The concave portion 374a1 through which the convex portion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted is formed in the main body portion 374a2.

The left wall portion 374a3 of the slider 374a is engaged with the drive shaft 37c1 of the common solenoid 37c, and in the slider 374a, the drive shaft 37c1 extends (in the case of this embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the right) Then, when the drive shaft 37c1 is pushed to move to the right and the drive shaft 37c1 retracts (in the case of the present embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the left), it is pulled by the drive shaft 37c1 and moves to the left Do.

As shown in FIG. 174 (b), a recess 373 j extending in the left-right direction is provided on the rear surface side of the front base member 373. The protrusion 374a5 of the slider 374a can be inserted into the recess 373j, and the protrusion 374a5 is inserted into the recess 373j from the rear to guide the linear movement (slide movement) of the slider 374a in the left-right direction. be able to.
Further, the front wall portion 374a4 of the slider 374a is a recessed portion 373j of the front base member 373.
When the projecting piece 374a5 of the slider 374a is inserted from the rear, it abuts on the rear surface of the front base member 373. As a result, the front-rear position of the slider 374a with respect to the front base member 373 is set to a predetermined front-rear position.

When converting the movable member 37b from the open state to the closed state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the common voltage solenoid 37c is extended. When the drive shaft 37c1 extends, the slider 374a slides to the right, and the crank 374b pivots counterclockwise around the pivot shaft 374b3 as viewed from the top side, so that the connection pin 983a is directed forward And the movable member 37b protrudes forward. As a result, the movable member 37b is in the closed state (the state shown in FIG. 173 (a)), and the game ball can not win the prize pot 37d.

On the other hand, when converting the movable member 37 b from the closed state to the open state,
The drive shaft 37c1 of c is retracted. When the drive shaft 37c1 retracts, the slider 374a slides to the left, and the crank 374b pivots clockwise about the pivot shaft 374b3 as viewed from the top, so that the connection pin 37b9 is directed rearward. Move to moveable member 37
b retracts backward. As a result, the movable member 37b is in the open state (the state shown in FIG. 173 (b)), and it is possible to win a game ball on the common winning hole 37d.

FIGS. 177 to 180 show the rolling modes of the gaming balls in the normal fluctuation winning device 37. FIG. In FIG. 177 to FIG. 180, illustration of some members is omitted for the sake of explanation.
The gaming ball (the gaming ball that has flowed into the starting point of the flow-down path 37f) that has arrived at the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is
First, it is guided obliquely backward by the upstream side front wall projection 371d positioned on the upstream side, and then is guided obliquely diagonally forward by the rear wall projection 373d positioned on the upstream side, and the movable member 37b
Flows into the front end portion of the upper stage portion 37b1.

The gaming ball having flowed into the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b is guided obliquely backward by the upstream front wall projection 371d located downstream, and then the rear wall projection 373 located downstream
and the lower wall projection 37b5 of the movable member 37b to be guided obliquely
It flows into the front end portion of the first middle step 37b2 of b. That is, the gaming ball flows down the flowing path 37f while meandering back and forth. As a result, the game ball stagnates on the movable member 37b more than in the case where the flowing-down path 37f does not have rising portions such as the lower wall protruding portion 37b5, the upstream front wall protruding portion 371d, and the rear wall protruding portion 373d The time will be longer.

The gaming ball having flowed into the first middle portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b collides with the projecting portion 371b,
It is guided to the rear side by the projection 371b and the first middle step 37b2 inclined downward to the rear, and as shown in FIG. 177 (a), the bypass 37g from the entrance 37g1 of the bypass 37g.
Flow into
As shown in FIG. 178, inside the rear base member 375, a first guide piece 375d for guiding the gaming ball rolling on the detour 37g from the first middle portion 37b2 to the lower portion 37b4, and a lower portion 37b4. A second guide piece 375e is provided to guide the upper side from the rear side to the front side.
When the game ball rolls on the first middle portion 37b2 as shown in FIG. 178 and flows into the interior of the rear base member 375, it is guided to the right by the first guide piece 375d as shown in FIG. It flows into the part 37b4.

The gaming balls having flowed into the lower portion 37b4 of the movable member 37b are guided forward by the second guide piece 375e and the lower portion 37b4 inclined downward as shown in FIG. 180, as shown in FIG.
As shown at 77 (b), the air flows from the outlet 37g2 of the bypass 37g to the end point of the downflow 37f (the front end portion of the lower portion 37b4).
Here, since the left middle ridge portion 37b6 is formed in the first middle portion 37b2, the gaming ball rolls on the upstream side of the bypass 37g to the rear while meandering left and right. Lower part 37
Since the meandering right projection 37b7 is formed on b4, the gaming ball rolls on the downstream side of the bypass 37g to the front while meandering left and right.

Further, as shown in FIG. 174 (b), the front base member 373 is provided with a partition 373k for separating the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the bypass 37g. Of the rear end of the partition 373k, the bypass 3 is provided.
An intermediate protrusion 373k1 is formed in a portion corresponding to the upstream portion of 7g. Therefore, while rolling on the upstream portion (that is, on the first middle portion 37b2) of the detour 37g, the gaming ball collides and bounces against the intermediate projection 373k1 and is pushed back toward the entrance 37g1. Be
As a result, the left protrusion 37 b 6, the right protrusion 37 b 7, and the middle protrusion 373
The time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is longer than in the case where there is no raised portion such as k1 and the roller rolls linearly.

As described above, the downflow passage 37f is provided with raised portions such as the lower wall projection 37b5, the upstream front wall projection 371d, and the rear wall projection 373d, and the detour 37g is provided with the left projection 37b.
Since the raised portions such as 6 and the right protruding portion 37b7 and the middle protruding portion 373k1 are provided, the time for which the game balls stay on the movable member 37b becomes long. Moreover, by providing these starting parts, the rolling aspect of the game ball rolling on the movable member 37b becomes colorful, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the movable member 37b is opened by providing these raised portions, the movable member 3
The inflow timings of the plurality of gaming balls existing on 7b into the regular charge winning opening 37d can be shifted, and the occurrence of ball clogging in the regular charge winning opening 37d can be prevented.

The game ball arriving at the normal fluctuation winning device 37 flows down the downflow path 37f, and first the movable member 3
It flows into the upper portion 37b1 of 7b. When the game ball flows into the upper stage 37b1, the movable member 37
When b is in the open state, the gaming ball does not pass the detour 37g and the Puden winning opening 37d
Flow into On the other hand, when the game ball flows into the upper stage portion 37b1, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball flows down the flowing path 37f and goes to the projecting portion 371b.
Then, when the movable member 37b is in the open state before the game ball collides with the projecting portion 371b, the game ball flows into the regular charge winning opening 37d without passing through the bypass path 37g. On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is not in the open state before the game ball collides with the projection 371b,
The gaming ball collides with the protrusion 371b and travels to the bypass 37g.

Even when the movable member 37b is in the open state while the gaming ball is rolling on the bypass path 37g,
Even if the movable member 37b is not in the open state while the gaming ball is rolling on the bypass route 37g, the gaming ball continues rolling on the bypass route 37g toward the outlet 37g2.
Then, when the game ball comes out from the outlet 37g2 of the bypass 37g and the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball flows into the common power winning opening 37d. On the other hand, when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the bypass 37g, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball does not flow into the common power winning opening 37d, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 Outside (playing area 32)
It becomes a gaming ball which has advanced to a normal position and failed to win a prize in the normal fluctuation prize device 37.

Here, an intermediate projection 373k1 formed on the partition 373k of the front base member 373 (see FIG. 1).
74 (b)) not only has the function of meandering the gaming ball to lengthen the staying time of the gaming ball staying on the movable member 37b, but it is movable while the gaming ball is rolling on the bypass path 37g Member 37b
It also has a function to secure a sufficient residence time even when it moves (moves back and forth).
For example, in the case where the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while the gaming ball is rolling on the downstream portion (that is, on the lower portion 37b4) of the bypass 37g, the gaming ball is the movable member 37b. The game ball rolls on the downstream portion of the bypass path 37g because it is pulled back to the rear side (upstream side) in the downstream portion of the bypass path 37g by frictional resistance, contact with the right ridge 37b 7 or the like. The staying time in which the game balls stay on the movable member 37b is longer than in the case where the movable member 37b does not change the state in the middle.

On the other hand, for example, when the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while the gaming ball is rolling on the upstream portion (that is, on the first middle portion 37b2) of the bypass 37g, the gaming ball is movable The game ball rolls over the upstream portion of the bypass path 37g because it is drawn to the rear side (downstream side) in the upstream portion of the bypass path 37g due to frictional resistance with the member 37b, contact with the left protrusion 37b6, etc. The residence time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is shorter than in the case where the movable member 37b does not change the state during movement.
On the other hand, since the normal fluctuation winning device 37 of the present embodiment is provided with the intermediate projection 373k1 at the upstream portion of the detour 37g, the gaming ball is moved to the rear side (downstream) in the upstream portion of the detour 37g. When drawn in, it collides with the intermediate projection 373k1 and bounces. That is, the gaming ball collides with the intermediate projection 373k1 while being drawn downstream, and is pushed back to the front side (upstream side) in the upstream portion of the bypass 37g, so the gaming ball is upstream of the bypass 37g Even when the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while rolling the part, the movable member 3 of the game ball is
A sufficient residence time on 7b can be ensured.

From the above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming area 3 in which gaming balls can flow down to the front side
2. A gaming machine comprising a gaming board main body 80 in which 2 is formed and a fluctuation winning device (normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the case of the present embodiment) provided in the gaming area 32, and the fluctuation winning device is A mounting wall portion (back surface portion 373b) for attaching the variable winning device to the game board main body 80, and a winning area where the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 32 can win (in the case of this embodiment, the Futo winning opening 37d)
The opening and closing member (movable member 37b) that can be converted to the closed state closing the winning area and the open state opening the winning area, the flow path (flowing down path 37f) on which the gaming ball can roll, and the gaming ball And a guiding portion (protruding portion 371b) for guiding the gaming balls rolling (flowing down) the flow path to the stagnating region. The flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall by the open / close member in the closed state, and when the open / close member is in the open state, the flow path is formed when the open / close member is in the closed state The game ball is configured to win the winning area through the space, and the staying area is formed on the rear surface side of the mounting wall regardless of the state of the opening / closing member and has a plurality of communication ports communicating with the flow path A gaming ball introduced from the flow path through the communication port (inlet 37g1) of the plurality of communication ports, which is guided by the induction portion, and the one communication port of the plurality of communication ports; Are configured to be able to flow out to the flow path via different communication ports (outlet 37g2).

Specifically, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a gaming board main body 80 in which a gaming area 32 in which gaming balls can flow down is formed on the front side, and a fluctuation winning device provided in the gaming area 32 (this embodiment In the case of the game machine, the game machine is provided with the normal fluctuation winning device 37), and the fluctuation winning device is provided with a mounting wall (rear surface portion 373b) for attaching the fluctuation winning device to the game board main body 80; 3
The game ball can not win a prize in the winning area or the closed state difficult to win in the winning area by sliding movement back and forth with the winning area (Puden winning hole 37d) where the gaming ball flowing down 2 can win A slide member (movable member 37b) that can be converted into an open state in which the player can win a prize, a first flow passage (flowing passage 37f) and a second flow passage (detour 37g), on which the game ball can roll; And a guiding portion (protruding portion 371b) for guiding the gaming ball rolling (flowing down) the flow path to the second flow path. The first flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall by the slide member when the slide member is in the closed state, and the slide member is in the closed state when the slide member is in the open state. In some cases, the game ball is configured to win a prize area through the space in which the first flow path is formed, and the second flow path is attached to the mounting wall by the slide member regardless of the state of the slide member. A communication port formed on the rear side, both ends being in communication with the first flow path, being guided by the induction portion and flowing from the first flow path through one of the two communication ports (inlet 37g1) of the both ends The gaming ball is configured to be able to flow out to the first flow path via the other communication port (outlet 37g2) of the both ends.

That is, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 of this embodiment has a configuration in which a bypass 37g (retention area, second channel) is added to the downflow channel 37g (channel, first channel). By adding the detour 37g in this manner, the residence time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the movable member 37b (opening and closing member, slide member) becomes longer than when the detour 37g is not provided. Therefore, it becomes easy for the game ball to be won in the winning opening (in the case of the present embodiment, the common gate winning opening 37d), and the reduction of the game ball during a predetermined gaming state (in the case of this embodiment, time saving state) Can enhance the interest of the game.
In addition, since the normal variation winning device 37 having the gaming ball retention function is disposed in the right gaming area (the area to the right of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32), the player can A rolling aspect can be enjoyed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the front decoration member 37
1 is made of a material capable of transmitting light, and the rolling aspect of the gaming ball in the normal variation winning device 37 is also sufficiently visible, so enjoy the rolling aspect of the gaming ball in the right gaming area more Can.

The fluctuation winning device provided in the game area 32 is not limited to the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the special fluctuation winning device 38 may be used. Specifically, the fluctuation winning device is, for example, the downflow passage 38 of the special fluctuation winning device 38 of the first embodiment or the present embodiment.
A bypass path 37g (retention area, second flow path) may be added to f (flow path, first flow path).
Further, the opening and closing member capable of being converted to the closed state for closing the winning opening and the open state for opening the winning opening is not limited to the slide member, and can be appropriately changed. In the case of the present embodiment, for example, FIG. 181A (a)
As shown in the drawing, the sliding member (movable member 37b) for opening and closing the winning opening by sliding forward and backward is provided as the opening and closing member, but the opening and closing member is not limited to this.
As shown in A (b), it may be a pivoting member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes the winning opening by pivoting about the pivoting axis Z.

In addition, the retention area for retaining the gaming balls is not limited to the bypass path 37g (second flow path), and can be appropriately changed. Specifically, the stagnant region is, for example, a space in which the upstream portion and the downstream portion are not divided, that is, a space obtained by removing the partition 373k separating the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the bypass 37g from the bypass 37g. , From the bypass path 37g to the front end portion of the bulkhead 373k (
It may be a space from which a portion other than the inlet 37g1 and the outlet 37g2 is removed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the game balls flowing from the first flow path (flow-down path 37f) to the second flow path (detour path 37g) via the one communication port (inlet 37g1) is the other communication The rate at which the game balls flow from the first flow path (flow-down path 37f) to the second flow path (detour 37g) through the mouth (outlet 37g2) is higher than the rate at which the game ball flows It is possible to constitute so that a height difference (in the case of this embodiment, a level difference or a slope) may be provided such that the mouth is disposed at a position higher than the other communication port.
By configuring in this manner, the gaming ball can smoothly roll on the first flow path (flow-down path 37f) and the second flow path (detour path 37g), so the first flow path or second flow path Can prevent the occurrence of ball clogging.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first flow path (on the upper surface of the slide member (the movable member 37b)
The ball control portion (in the case of the present embodiment, the lower wall projection 37b5, the left projection 37b6, the right) for suppressing the pitch of the gaming ball rolling the downflow path 37f) or the second flow path (the bypass path 37g) Projections 37
It is possible to arrange to provide b7).
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to further prolong the staying time in which the game balls stay on the upper surface of the slide member (movable member 37b), so a predetermined gaming state (in the case of this embodiment, a time saving state ) It is possible to suppress the decrease of the game ball in, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, as the ball control portion, the downflow passage 37f is provided with raised portions (convex portions) such as the lower wall protruding portion 37b5, the upstream front wall protruding portion 371d, the rear wall protruding portion 373d, and the detour 37g. In the first embodiment, raised portions (convex portions) such as the left protruding portion 37b6, the right protruding portion 37b7, and the middle protruding portion 373k1 are provided. However, the ball control portion is not limited to these and can be appropriately changed.
In addition, as a weight control portion, a falling portion (concave portion) may be provided in the flow-down path 37f or the detour path 37g. Specifically, for example, a groove may be formed on the upper surface of the movable member 37b as a meandering portion, and the gaming ball may roll along the groove while meandering.
In addition, as a weight control section, ups and downs (both raised and lowered portions) on the downflow path 37f and the detour path 37g.
The game ball may roll while meandering or the like due to the unevenness.
Further, the weight control portion is not limited to the raised portion (convex portion) and the depressed portion (concave portion), and can be appropriately changed.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the game device 32 is provided with a stay device having a game ball stay function (
In addition to the normal fluctuation winning device 37), members for suppressing ballism (obstacle nails, wind turbines, downflow paths 615, guiding portions 616, etc.), that is, retaining members having a game ball retaining function are provided. Therefore, since the game balls can be kept in the right play area by the stay device and the stay member, it is possible to further enjoy the rolling aspect of the game balls in the right play area.
In addition, the method of making the game ball stay by providing unevenness on the surface, the method of making the game ball stay by using the material with a high coefficient of friction, and the game by performing constant operation with the driving force of the drive source (solenoid etc.) A predetermined member or device may be provided with a game ball retention function by a method of keeping a ball, a method of making a game ball stay by providing a sorting device, or the like.
Further, since the normal fluctuation winning device 37 can hold the gaming balls in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10 by the starting part and the detour 37g, the holding member (may be a stagnating device other than the normal fluctuation winning device 37) Preferably, the game ball can be retained in a direction other than the front-rear direction (the left-right direction or the up-down direction of the gaming machine 10). Thereby, the retention member (and / or
Or, since it becomes possible to hold the gaming machine three-dimensionally by the staying device other than the normally changing winning device 37 and the normally changing winning device 37, it is possible to earn a staying time, and to change the game ball. Interest in movement improves.

In addition, in the middle of the detour 37g, the out port 30c, the general winning port 35, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “out port 3
0c etc. " ) May be provided. As a result, the player's attention can be drawn also to whether or not the game ball that failed to win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 comes out from the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the interest is improved, and Adjust the rate not to be too high, or
It becomes possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging in the bypass path 37g.
When the out port 30c or the like is provided in the middle of the bypass path 37g, the gaming ball may flow into the out port 30c or the like when the movable member 37b operates. Specifically, for example, FIG.
As shown in 81B, a through hole 37b11 is provided in a portion of the movable member 37b which forms the bypass 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. When the movable member 37b is in the open state (or in the closed state), the vertical positions of the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c coincide with each other (the through hole 37b11 is positioned directly above the out port 30c). ), Movable member 3
When the gaming ball on 7b can flow into the out port 30c and the movable member 37b is in the closed state (may be in the open state), the vertical positions of the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c coincide with each other (The through hole 37b11 is offset from immediately above the outlet 30c), the movable member 37b
It is also possible to configure such that the upper gaming ball can not flow into the outlet 30c or can not flow into the outlet 30c.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the gaming state by the gaming control of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described.
FIG. 182 is a diagram showing a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of the game state in the present embodiment. FIG. 182 shows a summary of each gaming state, and shows control by the game control device 100 in each gaming state, control by the effect control device 300, and characteristics in the gaming state.
In the present embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal gaming state, a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state.

First, each gaming state will be described.
In the normal gaming state, the gaming control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special drawing) to be a low probability so that the normal charge support (power support) is absent.
In addition, in the normal gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the normal mode.
In the normal gaming state, it is recommended to hit the left as the firing direction. Therefore, since the main start area is the first start winning opening 36, the main variation special view is a special view 1 variation display game.

In the first specific gaming state, the gaming control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special drawing) to be a high probability and the common power support is present (the number of times of support is 50). That is, in the first specific gaming state, it can be said that the conversion control by the common voltage solenoid 37c (conversion control means) is controlled to be executed more than the normal gaming state, and the probability state is set to the high probability state .

In addition, in the first specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the probability change mode.
Also, in the first specific gaming state, it is recommended that the game ball be fired to the right. The main starting area is the winning opening of the normal change winning device 37 (Puden winning opening 37 d), since the right turn makes it easy to win the common view starting gate 34. In the present embodiment, the Fuden prize winning opening 37d
Since the special figure 1 variation display game is executed by winning a prize, the main variation special figure becomes the special figure 1 variation display game.

In the second specific gaming state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special view) to be a high probability so that the common charge support is not present. That is, when the first specific gaming state is shifted to the second specific gaming state, the conversion control by the common power solenoid 37c (conversion control means) is returned to the same control as the normal gaming state, and the probability of the special view It can be said that the state is set to the high probability state.

In addition, in the second specific gaming state, the effect control device 300, the small hit RU effect mode
Let's say SH. In the case of this embodiment, since the variation time of the special view 2 variation display game is set to a short time in the second specific gaming state, the small hit RUSH is a state in which a small hit is likely to occur continuously in a short time It can be said. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the second specific gaming state is executed, it is possible to derive a small hit (first special result) as a result of the special view 2 variable display game.
Further, in the second specific gaming state, it is recommended to hit the game ball in the right direction. Therefore, the main start area is the second start winning opening 97, and the main variation special view is a special view 2 variation display game.

In the third specific gaming state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to be a low probability and the common power support is present (the number of supports is 50).
In addition, in the third specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the time saving mode.
Further, in the third specific gaming state, it is recommended to hit the game ball in the right direction. The main starting area is the winning opening of the normal change winning device 37 (Puden winning opening 37 d), since the right turn makes it easy to win the common view starting gate 34. In the present embodiment, the Fuden prize winning opening 37d
Since the special figure 1 variation display game is executed by winning a prize, the main variation special figure becomes the special figure 1 variation display game.

Next, the transition (transition) from each gaming state will be described.
Suppose that a big hit occurs in the normal gaming state. When the big hit is a probability change big hit, after the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state. If the big hit is a big hit in the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the third specific gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends.

If a big hit occurs in the first specific gaming state, and the big hit is usually a big hit,
After the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state shifts from the first specific gaming state to the third specific gaming state. In addition, when the big hit is a definite variation big hit in the first specific gaming state, after the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state shifts to the first specific gaming state again.
On the other hand, in the first specific gaming state, when the jackpot does not occur and the general charge support ends, the gaming state shifts from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state (see FIG. 182).
The high support period has ended. Note that “high support” means that the hit probability is high and there is power support).

That is, in the first specific gaming state, as a transition condition to the other gaming state, when the occurrence of the big hit gaming state (the second special gaming state) as a condition (first transition condition), and a predetermined number There is a case where support (execution of the variable display game) is made a condition (second transition condition). By this configuration, for example, the first specific gaming state can be generated after the occurrence of the big hit gaming state (second special gaming state) in the normal gaming state, but in this first specific gaming state, When the above-described second transition condition is established, the second specific gaming state can be generated.

If a big hit occurs in the second specific gaming state, and the big hit is a probability variation big hit,
After the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state shifts from the second specific gaming state to the first specific gaming state. When the big hit is a big hit normally in the second specific gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the second specific gaming state to the third specific gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends. That is, in the second specific gaming state, the occurrence of the big hit gaming state (second special gaming state) is a condition as a transition condition to another gaming state.

If a big hit occurs in the third specific gaming state, and the big hit is a probability variation big hit,
After the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state shifts from the third specific gaming state to the first specific gaming state. When the big hit is a big hit normally in the third specific gaming state, after the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state shifts again to the third specific gaming state.
On the other hand, in the third specific gaming state, when the jackpot does not occur and the general charge support ends, the gaming state shifts from the third specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (the “low support period” in FIG. 182 “Low support” means that the hit probability is low and there is a power support).

Since the gaming state shifts in this way, it is possible to shift the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state after the probability variation big hit occurs in the normal gaming state. In the first specific gaming state, because the power support is executed and the hit probability is also set to a high probability,
A big hit can be made easy to occur. And, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, even if a big hit does not occur in the first specific gaming state, in the present embodiment, the gaming state shifts from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state.
In the second specific gaming state, although the general power support is not executed, the special view 2 variation display game can be executed by winning in the second start winning opening 97. Here, the small hitting probability in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set to a high probability unlike the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (see FIG. 184). Therefore, in the second specific gaming state, until the next big hit gaming state (second special gaming state) occurs, the "small hitting RUSH" mode that generates small hitting gaming state (first special gaming state) with high frequency Can be performed. And, since it is possible to increase the payout in the gaming state other than the big hit gaming state, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 having novel game characteristics.

Moreover, in the second specific gaming state, there is no common power support as in the normal gaming state, but in the second specific gaming state, the fluctuation time of the special view 2 fluctuation display game is shorter than that in the normal gaming state. It is set to. Therefore, in the second specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation display game with many small hit gaming states (first special gaming state) allocated with good tempo.

Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern table of each gaming state (
The average value of the execution time of the special figure variation display game) is the second specified gaming state <the first specified gaming state and the third specified gaming state <the normal gaming state, and in the second specified gaming state The types of selectable variation patterns are smaller than the types of selectable variation patterns in the normal gaming state. That is, as the number of types of selectable fluctuation patterns is smaller, the average value of fluctuation times is smaller. If there are many types of variation patterns that can be selected in the second specific gaming state (that is, the average value of variation time is large), small hits can not be generated with good tempo, and the payout rate is 100% or more Cause problems such as
As in the present embodiment, by reducing the types of selectable variation patterns in the second specific gaming state (that is, reducing the average value of variation times), it is possible to generate a small hit with good tempo. It becomes possible to realize the payout rate as designed.

In the second specific gaming state, since the jackpot probability is set to a high probability, the jackpot gaming state (second special gaming state) occurs at an appropriate timing and transition conditions to other gaming states are established. Do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an extreme increase in payout due to the second specific gaming state continuing excessively.

Since the normal fluctuation winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a gaming ball retention function for retaining the gaming ball on the upper surface of the movable member 37b, the gaming ball is held on the movable member 37b while the movable member 37b is in the closed state. And the game ball is swallowed when the movable member 37b is in the open state (the movable member 3).
It is possible to drop the game ball staying on 7b and make a prize on the common electric winning hole 37d). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of gaming balls that fail to win the normal fluctuation winning device 37, that is, the gaming balls that can not win the regular game winning opening 37d despite having arrived at the normal fluctuation winning device 37.
In addition, since the second start winning opening 97 is disposed below the normal change winning device 37, the game ball that failed to win the normal changing winning device 37 can win the second start winning opening 97. .
In the case of the present embodiment, the gaming ball retaining function of the normal variation winning device 37 reduces the number of gaming balls that fail to achieve the normal variation winning device 37, so that the gaming state (the first starting area is In the first specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state), it is difficult to win the second start winning opening 97.

The main start area of the high / low probability support existence state (first specific gaming state, third specific gaming state) is the common power winning opening 37d, and the main of the high probability support absence state (second specific gaming state) Since the start area is the second start winning opening 97, it is impossible (difficult) to win the second start winning opening 97 when in the high / low probability support state, and the second start only when the high probability support is not present. It is preferable that a winning on the winning opening 97 is possible. Right-handed support existence state (first specified gaming state, third specified gaming state)
If the game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 97 and a small hit occurs at this time, the payout rate may be largely deviated from the design value.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second start winning opening 97 is disposed at the lower right of the game area 32, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is disposed above the second start winning opening 97. And, since the normal fluctuation winning device 37 has the gaming ball retention function, it is possible to reduce the number of gaming balls that fail to win the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Furthermore, the movable member 37 of the normal fluctuation winning device 37
By adjusting the time from the end of the operation of b to the start of the operation, the residence time of the gaming ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the time taken for the gaming ball to roll from the start point to the end point of the flow down path 37f), etc. It is also possible to nearly eliminate the failure of winning to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the hit state of the common drawing, that is, to make the winning rate to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the common state of the common drawing to almost 100%. It is. Almost 100% of the winning rate for the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the hit state of the map
Since it can be made difficult to win the second starting winning opening 97 disposed below the normal fluctuation winning device 37, it is possible to realize the target performance (dispensing rate).

The winning rate for the normal fluctuation winning device 37 can be calculated using the following equation (1).
Winning rate [%] = number of gaming balls that have won in the common electric winning entry 37d / normal fluctuation winning device 37
The number of game balls that arrived at (the number of game balls that flowed into the starting point of the flow-down path 37f) × 100 (1)
On the other hand, when the high probability support no state (second specific gaming state), since the normal fluctuation winning device 37 does not open, it is possible to win the gaming ball to the second start winning opening 97, and realize small hit RUSH can do.
As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second start winning opening 97 can be made to win only when the high probability support absence state (the second specific gaming state), and the performance as aimed can be realized. .

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 183 (a), the time of spread fluctuation (that is, spread fluctuation time) is 200 ms, and the time of stop of spread (that is, display time of spread) is 100 ms. Yes, the time for normal operation (that is, the sum of the general open time and the total wait time per one hit per normal state figure) is 5800 ms, and the ending time (ie, normal remaining ball) If the sum of the processing time and the general drawing ending time) is 700 ms, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is at least 1000 ms (= 700 ms + 200 ms + 100 ms).
In this case, the residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is appropriately designed to be 1000 ms, by appropriately designing the length of the flow-down path 37f and the detour 37g, the number and shape of the bumps provided in the flow-down path 37f and the detour 37g. By approaching it, it is possible to make the winning rate to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the hit state of the common figure almost 100%.

Of course, as in the example shown here, depending on the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation, the winning ratio to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the hit state of the drawing is almost 100% The residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may be set, or conversely, according to the residence time of the gaming ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 in the hit state of the common drawing. The time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation may be set so that the winning rate for the game is almost 100%.

That is, in the present embodiment, one of the residence time of the gaming ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation corresponds to the other (
By setting the time substantially the same as the other, the time more than the other, etc.), it is possible to increase the winning percentage of the gaming ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37.
In addition, by increasing the residence time of the gaming ball in the normal variation winning device 37 by increasing the part that suppresses the influence such as the rising part and the falling part, during the interval of the common charge (operation from the operation end of the movable member 37b Until the start), it is possible to hold more gaming balls on the movable member 37b, and when the movable member 37b is in the open state, to win the gaming balls held on the movable member 37b Therefore, the winning percentage of the game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is improved.

Also, in the present embodiment, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 has a game ball retention function,
Since the second start winning opening 97 and the special variation winning device 38 are disposed below the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball is fired and then the second starting winning aperture 97 and the special variation winning device 38 arrive. The time until the game can be made longer than in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 does not have the game ball retention function.
Therefore, it is possible to avoid the non-recommended strike method and to increase the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the big winning opening (opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing member 990).

In the normal gaming state, it is recommended to hit the left, but in the normal gaming state, when the right is hit and the gaming ball wins the second start winning opening 97, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed. In the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time of the special view 2 fluctuation display game is set to a long time than in the second specific gaming state, so by performing aim hitting (stopping, timing hit, etc.) It becomes possible to win a game ball.
That is, when the normal variation winning device 37 disposed above the special variation winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed during the normal gaming state. In the special variation winning device 38 by the end of the small hitting gaming state by aiming to start hitting the gaming ball with the start of the small hitting gaming state (open opening of the big winning opening) It becomes possible to win a prize in the big prize mouth.
Therefore, there is a risk that a non-recommended strike (right strike) may be made in order to execute the special view 2 variable display game during the normal gaming state.

On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, the game ball arrives at the special fluctuation winning device 38 because the normal fluctuation winning device 37 disposed above the special fluctuation winning device 38 has the gaming ball retention function. It takes time to do it. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed during the normal gaming state, the game ball may be launched even if the aim is to start hitting the game ball with the start of the small hit gaming state (the opening of the big winning opening). Is a special fluctuation winning device 3 by the end of the small hit gaming state
I can not arrive at 8. Therefore, since it is useless to execute the special view 2 change display game during the normal gaming state, it is useless to play the special view 2 change display game during the normal game state, that is, not recommended for the normal play state Can be avoided.
As described above, according to the present embodiment, an illegal prize by capture, that is, a small hit is generated by right hitting in the normal gaming state, and a small hit is made by aiming to win (a winning in a large winning opening in a small hit period). ) Can be prevented.

In addition, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 disposed above the special fluctuation winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, it prevents illegal winnings due to capture (avoiding the recommendation method from being hit) ), It is necessary to set restrictions on the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state, such as performing short opening only once.
On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, the game ball arrives at the special fluctuation winning device 38 because the normal fluctuation winning device 37 disposed above the special fluctuation winning device 38 has the gaming ball retention function. It takes time to do it. Therefore, even if the large winning opening is opened several times during the small hitting gaming state, it is possible to prevent an unfair winning by capture, so the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hitting gaming state can be increased. it can.

Here, for example, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 disposed above the special fluctuation winning device 38
Is not equipped with the game ball retention function, and it takes about 2 seconds to arrive at the special fluctuation winning device 38 after the game ball is fired.
In such a case, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state is, for example, as shown in FIG.
In the pattern shown in 3 (b), that is, a pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is performed only once, the game ball is able to strike even when the small hitting game state is started and the game ball is started to strike, etc. Since the small hit gaming state is finished by the time the special variation winning device 38 arrives, the gaming ball can not win the big winning opening.

On the other hand, in such a case, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state is, for example, the pattern shown in FIG. 183 (c), that is, "0.5 seconds open state → 1.0 seconds closed state → 0
. If the pattern is 5 seconds open → 1.0 seconds closed → 0.5 seconds open, the small hit game state is achieved by aiming to start hitting the game ball with the start of the small hit game state. Since the game ball can be made to arrive at the special variation winning device 38 by the end, the game ball can win a prize winning opening.
Therefore, in such a case, if an opening pattern or the like for opening the large winning opening a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state, it is impossible to prevent the unfair winning by capture. On the other hand, adopting an opening pattern or the like for opening the big winning opening multiple times as the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hitting gaming state, that is, increasing the freedom of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hitting gaming state If it is possible, the improvement of small hit performance (the increase in the number of withdrawal balls in the small hit gaming state) can be realized, but it can not be realized by the illegal winning by the capture.

A retention device for delaying the time from the game ball being fired to the arrival at the special variation winning device 38 in order to simultaneously prevent the illegal winning by the capture and improve the small hitting performance (the embodiment of the present invention In the case, it is assumed that the normal fluctuation winning device 37) and the like are provided. If a delay of 2 seconds is given by the retention device (a delay time of 2 seconds is given), it will take about 4 seconds for the game ball to be fired and to arrive at the special fluctuation winning device 38.

Thus, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state is, for example, as shown in FIG.
In the case of the pattern shown in), that is, “0.5 seconds open → 1.0 seconds closed → 0.5 seconds open → 1.0 seconds closed → 0.5 seconds open” While it takes 3.5 seconds (= 0.5 seconds + 1.0 seconds + 0.5 seconds + 1.0 seconds + 0.5 seconds) to complete the operation of the opening and closing member 990, the game ball is launched and then special variation winning It takes about 4 seconds to arrive at the device 38. That is, in this embodiment, the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special fluctuation winning device 38 is longer than the time from the start of operation of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit gaming state to the end of the operation. According to the opening and closing pattern (opening pattern of the big winning opening) of the opening and closing member 990 in the small hitting game state, it can be configured to determine the residence time of the game ball in the normal variation winning device 37.

The time from when the game ball is fired to when it arrives at the special fluctuation winning device 38 (this time than the time from the operation start to the operation end of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit gaming state (3.5 seconds in this example) In the example, even if the aim is to start hitting the game ball with the start of the small hit gaming state by lengthening about 4 seconds), the game ball arrives at the special fluctuation winning device 38 and the small hit game The state has ended. Therefore, even if an open pattern in which the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state, it is possible to prevent an unfair winning by capture.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by providing a retention device or the like that gives a delay time to the time from the shooting of the game ball to the arrival at the special variation winning device 38, illegal prizes due to capture are prevented. , Small hit performance can be improved. Moreover, since the total time of the small hit gaming state can be extended as the delay time is longer, the small hit performance can be enhanced. Further, as the delay time is longer, it takes more time to arrive at the special variation winning device 38, so it is more difficult to achieve an illegal winning by capture.
In addition, providing such a retention device is not only aiming at the common power support, but also
It is effective for the aim strike in small hit RUSH. In addition, as the delay time is longer, it is more difficult to hit the target, and it is not necessary to keep hitting, and stable data can be acquired also in the operation of the hole.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, a right hit is made to win a prize in the second start winning opening 97 and a small hit occurs, and thereafter, the gaming ball passes through the common drawing start gate 34 and the common drawing The game ball staying function of the normal fluctuation electric winning device 38 can reduce the number of gaming balls that fail to achieve the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so that the game ball is disposed below the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It is possible to make it difficult to win the special fluctuation winning device 38.
That is, according to the present embodiment, it takes time for the game ball to arrive at the special variation winning device 38 by the gaming ball retention function of the normal variation winning device 37, so that it is possible to prevent an unfair winning by capture. Further, since the game ball retaining function of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 can reduce the number of gaming balls that fail to achieve the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (can be made harder to win the special fluctuation winning device 38) Can minimize the damage caused by

In addition, by increasing the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hitting gaming state, not only can improve the small hitting performance (increased payout in the small hitting gaming state), and open the large winning opening 38d Since it is also possible to increase the number of times, the player can enjoy whether or not the game ball flows into the big winning opening 38d, and the interest of the game is improved.
In addition, about 2 seconds when there is no retention device and about 4 seconds when there is a retention device were illustrated as time from the game ball being fired until it arrives at the special fluctuation winning device 38 The arrival time is just an average of the actual values, and of course there is an error in the actual arrival time.

In addition, a warning (error notification) performed when the game is played in the normal gaming state may be performed when a predetermined number of gaming balls satisfy the condition of winning in the second start winning opening 97. It may be performed when the condition that a predetermined number of game balls have passed the common drawing start gate 34 may be satisfied, or the number of the game balls winning the second start winning opening 97 and the common drawing start gate 34 have passed It may be performed when the condition that the sum with the number of gaming balls has reached a predetermined number is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as a decrease in interest and a decrease in the game intention that the user is immediately alerted although the player has made a right strike by mistake.
Also, in the normal gaming state, the counter for counting the gaming balls that have won in the second start winning opening 97 and the counter for counting the gaming balls that have passed through the general drawing start gate 34 are configured to clear at a predetermined timing. -Or every time you win the first start winning opening 36-
It may be configured to be updated.

Hereinafter, each process in the second embodiment will be described.
In this embodiment, since the common-play game processing (step S110) is performed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 38), the common-play variation display game can be executed. Then, when the common drawing variation display game is in the hit mode, the winning opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (Puden winning opening 37d
Can be started, and the special figure 1 variation display game can be started by the game ball winning in the common electric winning opening 37d.

In particular, in the first specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state, general power support is executed (see FIG. 182). In the first specific gaming state, the special power support (power support) enables the special view 1 variable display game to be generated frequently and the hit probability is high, so it is easy to generate a big hit be able to. Further, even in the third specific gaming state, the special electric power changing game can be generated frequently by the common power support.

FIG. 184 is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, the falling probability, and the probability variation probability in the present embodiment. These tables are the big hit probability by the big hit judgment process and the small hit judgment process (the probability that the judgment result is a big hit), the small hit probability (the probability that the judgment result is a small hit)
, An out probability (probability of determination result being out), a probability variation probability (probability variation inrush ratio) are shown for the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. FIG. 184 (a) shows the probability in the low probability state, FIG. 184 (b) shows the probability in the high probability state, FIG. 184 (c)
Indicates the probability change rate.

Also in the present embodiment, the big hit probability (the occurrence probability of big hit) is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state.
Also, the small hit probability (small hit probability) is the same between the high probability state and the low probability state. A configuration is also possible in which the small hit probability is high in the high probability state and low in the low probability state. For example, the small hit probability of the special view 1 fluctuation display game may be set to “0” in the low probability state.
In addition, the loss probability (the probability of occurrence of loss) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a big hit mode (second game) in the special view 1 change display game (first special view change display game) or the special view 2 change display game (second special view change display game). The low probability state in which the probability that the special result is derived is set to the low probability, and the high probability state in which the probability higher than the low probability state is set, includes controllable probability setting means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It becomes higher than in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it becomes lower than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (in the high probability state, the special game 2 fluctuation display game has a break probability of 0). Therefore, in the second specific gaming state, it is possible to generate a small hit with an extremely high probability by winning on the second start winning opening 97.

Here, also in the present embodiment, in the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time reduction state, the progress status of the special view variation display game, etc. ing.
And in the case of this embodiment, step A458 (FIG. 65) of the special figure information setting process (step A344) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 58) is set when the rendering mode information is in the low probability state. In the case of the information related to the effect mode, the second half fluctuation group selection pointer for long time fluctuation is acquired as the second half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the presentation mode information, so the special figure 2 fluctuation display game changes for a long time ( Long fluctuation). On the other hand, when the rendering mode information is information related to the rendering mode set when the high probability state is set, the latter half fluctuation group for fluctuation of the normal fluctuation time as the second half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the rendering mode information In order to acquire the selection pointer, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes fluctuation of normal fluctuation time (short fluctuation compared with long fluctuation). As a result, in the second specific gaming state, which is a high probability state, a small hit occurs more frequently in the special view 2 fluctuation display game than in the normal gaming state or the like, which is a low probability state (small hit RUSH) .

Further, in the present embodiment, as the big hit pattern, 16R positive variation A and 16R positive variation B
The 16R normal A, the 16R normal B, the 4R probability variation, and the 4R normal are set.
And in this embodiment, after a big hit state ends, it becomes a definite change state or a normal state. Figure 184
As shown in (c), the 16R probability variation rate is 2% for both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and the 4R probability variation rate is the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are 60%. That is, the probability change rate is set to 62%. And, after the big hit is finished, 50 revolutions and general power support are executed.

Note that, for example, the special figure 1 variation display game is 2%, the special figure 2 variation display game is 40%, and the 4R probability variation rush rate is 60% of the special figure 1 variation display game, for example.
The distribution of the number of rounds of the big hit in the special variation state of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be set so that the special figure 2 variation display game is 22%. If configured in this way, it is possible to obtain a large number of game balls during the big hit game if you win the big hit in the small hit RUSH mode, so you will generate more small hits during the small hit RUSH. In addition to the game intention improvement of the player who is trying to acquire the game ball, the expectation for the probability variation big hit can be improved.

In addition, since the occurrence of a definite variation big hit triggers the end of the small hit RUSH mode, the occurrence of a definite variation big hit may reduce the player's willingness to play the game, but even with this definite variation big hit it is possible to obtain a sufficient gaming ball In order to maintain the player's willingness to play, small hit RUSH again
It is possible to give a new game willingness to rush into

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the starting opening switch monitoring processing shown in FIG. 185 is performed instead of the starting opening switch monitoring processing shown in FIG. In the start port switch monitoring process, first, the process of steps A101 to A103 is performed. Step A
The processing of 101 to A103 is the same as that of FIG.
And, when there is a winning to the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) which is the starting opening of the special figure 1 (step A103; Y), during normal game state (special figure low probability & time saving none) ) Is determined (step A104a).

If it is not in the normal gaming state (step A104a; N), the process proceeds to step A105. The processes in steps A105 to A106 are the same as those in FIG.
In the case of the present embodiment, it does not win unless it is left-handed to the first starting opening (the first starting winning opening 36).
In the normal gaming state, left hitting is recommended, and in the first to third specific gaming states, right hitting is recommended. Therefore, when there is a winning at the first starting port when not in the normal gaming state (ie, when left hit during the first to third specific gaming states), the right control instruction notification command effect control The effect control device 300 is configured to send a notification (alarm) instructing the player 300 to send a signal to hit the right.

On the other hand, if it is in the normal gaming state (step A104a; Y), step A107
Transfer to processing of The processes in steps A107 to A113 are the same as those in FIG.
And, when there is a prize for the second starting opening (Puden winning opening 37d) which is the starting opening of the special figure 1 (
Step A111; Y), and the ordinary motorized part is in operation (step A112)
Y) or when there is a winning on the second starting port (Puden winning port 37d) which is the starting port of the special figure 1 (step A111; Y), and the ordinary motorized part is not in operation If it is (step A112; N) and the common electric charge is not occurring (step A113; N), it is determined whether it is in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability & no time saving) (step A 124a). In the present embodiment, the Fuden prize winning opening 37d and the first starting winning opening 36 correspond to a first starting winning area,
Because the second start winning opening 97 corresponds to the second starting winning area, the second starting opening (Puden winning opening 37 d
) Is the starting port of Special Figure 1.

If it is in the normal gaming state (step A124a; Y), a left hit instruction notification command is prepared (step A125a), effect command setting processing (step A126a) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A114.
In the case of the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless the player is right-handed to the second start-up port (general-purpose winning jack 37d), and in the normal gaming state, left-handing is recommended. Right strike is recommended. Therefore, when there is a winning on the second starting port when in the normal gaming state (that is, when it is hit in the normal gaming state), a left strike instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Effect control device 300 to instruct to make a left strike
Is configured to do.

On the other hand, if it is not in the normal gaming state (step A124a; N), step A114
Transfer to processing of The processes in steps A114 to A118 are the same as those in FIG.
And, when there is a winning to the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) which is the starting opening of the special figure 2 (step A118; Y), during normal game state (special figure low probability & time saving none ) Is determined (step A119a).

If it is in the normal gaming state (step A119a; Y), a left hit instruction notification command is prepared (step A120a), and the process proceeds to step A121. Step A1
The processes of 21 to A123 are the same as those of FIG.
In the case of the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless he or she strikes the right at the third starting opening (the second starting winning opening 97).
In the normal gaming state, left hitting is recommended, and in the first to third specific gaming states, right hitting is recommended. Therefore, when there is a winning on the third starting port when in the normal gaming state (that is, when it is hit in the normal gaming state), a left strike instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Effect control device 30 to instruct to make a left strike
It is configured to do by 0.
On the other hand, when not in the normal gaming state (step A119a; N), step A122
Transfer to processing of

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the special view starting opening switch common processing shown in FIG. 186 is performed in place of the special view starting opening switch common processing shown in FIG.
This special view starting opening switch common processing is different from the special view starting opening switch common processing shown in FIG. 53 in that the processing in step A 155 is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, small hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (step A156) regardless of whether or not the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) is a winning or not (step A156). Save to the hit symbol random number storage area (Step A
157). The processes in steps A141 to A154 and A156 to 160 are the same as those in FIG.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, in place of the special view reserve information determination process shown in FIG. 54, the special view reserve information determination process shown in FIG. This special-image suspension information determination process differs from the special-image suspension information determination process shown in FIG. 54 in that the process of step A 165 is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the small hitting determination process (step A166) is performed regardless of whether or not the first starting opening (the first starting winning opening 36) is a winning. Step A
The processes of 161 to A164 and A166 to 176 are the same as those in FIG.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 188 is performed instead of the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step A 361 a), and the process proceeds to step A 362. The processes in steps A362 to A369 are the same as those in FIG.
Then, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A 368) is a small hit (step A 369; Y), the small hit flag 1 for which the outlier information is saved in step A 361 a
The small hit information is overwritten and saved in the area (step A370a), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 189 is performed instead of the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step A 361 b), and the process proceeds to step A 371. The processes in steps A371 to A376 are the same as those in FIG.
When the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is not a big hit (step A 375; N), the small hit determination process (step A 368 b) is performed.

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A 368 b) is a small hit (step A 3)
In 69b; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area in which the outlier information is saved in step A 361 b (step A 370 b), and the big hit flag 2 setting processing is ended. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368b) is not the small hit (step A369b; N), the big hit flag 2 is set while saving the outlier information in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area. End the process.

[Small hit judgment processing]
In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the small hit determination process shown in FIG. 190 is performed instead of the small hit determination process shown in FIG. In this small hit determination process,
First, the process of step A391 is performed. The processing of step A 391 is the same as that of FIG.
If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hitting lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), it is judged whether the current fluctuation is a fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step A395a).
If the current fluctuation is fluctuation of special figure 1 (step A395a; Y), the small hitting upper limit judgment value for special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (step A396a), it moves to the processing of step A392 .

On the other hand, if the present fluctuation is not the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step A395a; N), that is, if the present fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 2, the small hit upper limit judgment value for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is It sets (step A397a), and it transfers to the process of step A392. Step A39
The processes of 2 to A 394 are the same as those in FIG.
Thus, when the current fluctuation is a fluctuation of the special figure 1, a small hitting upper limit judgment value for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set, and when the current fluctuation is a fluctuation of the special figure 2, Fig. 2 By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value for the variable display game, as shown in Fig. 184, the small hit probability can be set as the special figure 1
The variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game can be differentiated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the special view 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 191 is performed instead of the special view 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. In the special view 1 stop symbol setting process, first, the process of step A401 is performed. The processing of step A401 is the same as that of FIG.
If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401; Y), step A402
Transfer to processing of The process of steps A402 to A409 and A418 to A423 is shown in FIG.
The description is omitted because it is the same as

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A410a), and if it is a small hit (step A410)
At a; Y), the process proceeds to step A411. The processes in steps A411 to A415 are the same as those in FIG.
If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A410a; N), the process proceeds to step A416. The processes in steps A416 to A417 are the same as those in FIG.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the special view 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 192 is performed instead of the special view 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. In the special view 2 stop symbol setting process, first, the process of step A431 is performed. The processing of step A 431 is the same as that of FIG.
If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A 431; Y), step A 432 is performed.
Transfer to processing of The processing of steps A432 to A439 and A442 to A446 is the same as FIG.
The description is omitted because it is the same as Then, after the process of step A446, the special figure 2 small hitting symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423b) is performed,
The special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing ends.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A 431; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A 410 b), and if it is a small hit (step A 410)
b) Load a small hit symbol random number from the Special Figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) in (b) Y) (Step A 411 b), and set the Special Figure 2 small hit symbol table (Step A 412 b)
), Obtain the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number and save it in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A413 b), obtain the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number and stop symbol pattern area (Step A414b), the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415b), and the process proceeds to step A442.
On the other hand, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A410b; N), the process proceeds to step A440. The processes in steps A440 to A441 are the same as those in FIG.

[Process while displaying special map]
In the present embodiment, in order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, FIGS. 71 and 72.
Instead of the special chart display process shown in, the special chart display process shown in FIG. 193 is performed. In the special view display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process, and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process The small hit flag 2 is loaded (step A 701 a), the small hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM are cleared (step A 702), and the process proceeds to step A 703. The processes in steps A703 to A724 are the same as those in FIG.
Then, if the big hit flag 1 loaded is not a big hit (step A 706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A 725 a).

If the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A 725 a; Y), step A 72.
Move to processing of 6. On the other hand, when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (Step A 725 a;
In N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 loaded is a small hit (step A 725 b).
If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A 725 b; N), the step A 73 is performed.
Move to processing of 5. The processes in steps A735 to A741 are the same as those in FIG. On the other hand, if the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A 725 b; Y), the process proceeds to step A 726. The process of steps A726 to A727 is shown in FIG.
The description is omitted because it is the same as

Then, after the process of step A727, the process proceeds to the process of step A729 without performing the process of determining whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step A728). The processes in steps A729 to A734 are the same as those in FIG.
That is, in this embodiment, the decoration special drawing command is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area and prepared regardless of whether the special drawing is in high probability or not (step A729), and the rendering command setting process (step A730) ), Prepare a small hit fanfare command (step A731), and perform effect command setting processing (step A732).

[Time reduction variation update process]
In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in this embodiment, in place of the time shortening variation number updating process shown in FIG. 73, the time shortening variation number updating process shown in FIG. In this time reduction variation number update process, first, the process of steps A 752 to A 758 is performed. The processing of steps A 752 to A 758 is the same as that of FIG.
Then, after the process of step A758, it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (in the high probability state) (step A751a). If the special figure height probability is not in progress (step A 751a; N), that is, if it is the third specific gaming state (special figure low probability & time reduction state), step A
The processing of 759 to A761 is performed. The processes in steps A759 to A761 are the same as those in FIG. Thereby, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state at the low support prescribed frequency.

On the other hand, if the special figure high probability is in progress (step A 751a; Y), that is, if it is the first specific gaming state (special figure high probability & time reduction state), the special figure game mode flag area Save the high probability & time saving none flag (step A762a), save the signal regarding the right-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (step A763a), save the number in the right-handed state in the gaming state display number 2 area (Step A764a), the processing for updating the number of times of time-saving change is ended. Thereby, it is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state at the high support specified number of times.
In addition, the gaming state (the first specific gaming state) before transitioning with the high support regulation number of times and the gaming state (the second specific gaming state) after transitioning with the high support regulation number of times are also in the gaming state in which the right strikes Because of this, the processes of steps A 763 a to A 764 a may be omitted.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the big hit end setting process 1 shown in FIG. 195 is performed instead of the big hit end setting process 1 shown in FIG.
Here, as shown in FIG. 84, in the big hit end processing, first, after the end of the special game state, the probability fluctuation determination flag set based on the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is Determine whether it is high probability data set in the case of high probability state (step A
1201). Then, if it is not high probability data (step A1201; N), that is, if the type of special result that triggered the execution of the special game state of this time is a normal big hit, the big hit end setting processing 1 is performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 182, in any state of the normal gaming state and the first to third specific gaming states, the third specific if the type of the big hit is usually a big hit Transition to the game state.
That is, when the type of special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is normally a big hit, by performing the big hit end setting process 1, it shifts to the third specific game state.

Specifically, in the big hit end setting processing 1, first, save the signal regarding the start of low probability & time reduction in the external information output data area (step A1221a), and test the signal regarding the start of low probability & time reduction It saves in the output data area (step A1222a).
Then, save the signal relating to the rightward command in the test signal output data area (step A1).
227a), save the low probability number in the gaming state display number area (step A1228a)
), Save the number in the right-handed state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1229a
And the process of step A1223. The process of steps A1223 to A1226 is
The description is omitted because it is the same as FIG. In the case of the present embodiment, since the number of times of support is 50, “50” is saved as the time shortening variation number initial value in the time shortening variation number area in step A1226.

In this way, after the end of the big hit gaming state, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is a low probability data, the hit probability is set to a low probability, and there is a public support as well, It is possible to shift to the specific gaming state of 3.

Here, when the big hit is a big hit in the normal gaming state, the transition from the normal gaming state, which is the gaming state to the left, to the third specific gaming state, which is the gaming state to the right, is performed.
If the big hit is a big hit normally in the first specific gaming state, the transition from the first specific gaming state, which is a gaming state to the right, to the third specific gaming state, which is the gaming state to the right, is performed.
If the big hit is a big hit normally in the second specific gaming state, the transition from the second specific gaming state which is the gaming state to the right to the third specific gaming state which is the gaming state to the right.
When the big hit is a big hit normally in the third specific gaming state, the third specific gaming state, which is a gaming state to hit right, continues.
Therefore, if the big hit is usually a big hit in the first to third specific gaming state,
Since the gaming state in which the player strikes the right continues, the processing of steps A1227a and A1229a may be omitted.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, a big hit end setting process 2 shown in FIG. 196 is performed in place of the big hit end setting process 2 shown in FIG.
Here, as shown in FIG. 84, in the big hit end processing, first, after the end of the special game state, the probability fluctuation determination flag set based on the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is Determine whether it is high probability data set in the case of high probability state (step A
1201). Then, in the case of high probability data (step A1201; Y), that is, when the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is a probability variation big hit, the big hit end setting processing 2 is performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 182, in any state of the normal gaming state and the first to third specific gaming states, the first specific if the type of the big hit is a probability variation big hit Transition to the game state.
That is, when the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is the probability variation big hit, by performing the big hit end setting processing 2, it shifts to the first specific game state.

Specifically, in the big hit end setting processing 2, first, save the signal regarding the start of high probability & time reduction in the external information output data area (step A1231a), and test the signal regarding the start of high probability & time reduction Save to the output data area (step A1232a).
Then, save the signal relating to the rightward command in the test signal output data area (step A1).
237a), save the high probability number in the gaming state display number area (step A1238a)
), Save the number in the right-handed state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1239a
And the process of step A1233. The process of steps A1233 to A1235 is
Since this is the same as FIG. 86, the description is omitted.
After the process of step A1235, save the time shortening variation frequency initial value (50 in the case of this embodiment) in the time shortening variation frequency domain (step A1236a), and the big hit end setting process 2
Finish.

In this way, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data) after the big hit gaming state ends, the hit probability is set to a high probability and It is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state with the power support.

Here, when the big hit is a definite variation big hit in the normal gaming state, it shifts from the normal gaming state which is the left hitting gaming state to the first specific gaming state which is the right hitting gaming state.
In the first specific gaming state, when the big hit is a definite variation big hit, the first specific gaming state which is a gaming state in which the right strike is continued.
When the big hit is a definite variation big hit in the second specific gaming state, the transition from the second specific gaming state, which is a gaming state to the right, to the first specific gaming state, which is the gaming state to the right.
When the big hit is a definite variation big hit in the third specified gaming state, it shifts from the third specified gaming state which is the right hitting gaming state to the first specific gaming state which is the right hitting gaming state.
Therefore, in the first to third specific gaming state, if the big hit was a definite big hit,
Since the gaming state in which the player strikes the right continues, the processing of steps A1237a and A1239a may be omitted.

[Small hit during processing]
In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, instead of the small hitting middle process shown in FIG. 89, the small hitting middle process shown in FIG. 197 is performed. The small hit middle process differs from the small hit middle process shown in FIG. 89 in that the process of steps A1405 and A1406 is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the small hit end screen command is prepared regardless of whether the flag saved in the special figure game mode flag save area is the flag regarding the special figure high probability middle (step A1407). And effect command setting processing (step A1408).

[Small hit end processing]
In order to realize the gaming state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the small hit termination process shown in FIG. 198 is performed instead of the small hit termination process shown in FIG. In this small hit end process,
First, the processing of steps A1601 to A1619 is performed. Steps A1601 to A1619
Since the process of is the same as FIG. 93, the description is omitted.
After the process of step A1619, it is determined whether the flag loaded in step A1601 is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1624a), and if it is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1624a; Y) Then, the process proceeds to step A1623.

On the other hand, if it is not the flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1624a; N), the process proceeds to step A1620. The process of step A1620 to A1623 is shown in FIG.
The description is omitted because it is the same as That is, in the present embodiment, when the flag loaded in step A1601 is not the flag related to during the special figure high probability (step A1624a; N)
If the flag loaded in step A1619 is not a flag relating to the special view time (N in step A1620), save the signal related to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step A1621), and display the gaming state The number in the left hitting state is saved in the number 2 area (step A1622).
By doing in this way, when the hit probability is not high probability and is not in time reduction, the transition from the small hit gaming state where the launch direction is right to the normal gaming state where the launch direction is left strike It can be done.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute a variable display game in which identification information is changed based on winning of the game ball in the starting area provided in the game area 32, and the variable display game It is a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state for giving a gaming value to the player when the result is a special result, and the starting area is a game ball which can be fired toward the left side of the gaming area 32 The game area includes a first start area (first start winning opening 36) and a second start area (second start winning opening 97) where a game ball fired toward the right side of the game area 32 can win 32
A retention device (in the case of the present embodiment, the normal fluctuation winning device 37) is provided upstream of the second starting region of the above.

Therefore, in addition to the retention of the game balls in the retention device, the retention device (in the case of this embodiment, the normal fluctuation prize device 37) is provided on the upstream side of the second start region (the second start winning opening 97). Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to the whereabouts of the gaming ball retained by the retention device (whether or not to win a second start area, etc.), and the rendering effect by the retention device can be accurately improved. .

Further, in the present embodiment, the staying device is the normal fluctuation winning device 37 capable of converting the gaming ball into an impossible-to-win or hard-to-win state and the gaming ball to be in a winable state by the movable member 37b operating. It can be configured to be.
By configuring in this way, in addition to the stagnation of gaming balls in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, whereabouts of gaming balls held by the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the second start area (second start The player's attention can be drawn to which one of the winning opening 97) and the like, and the rendering effect by the staying device (normal fluctuation winning device 37) can be appropriately improved.

Also, in the present embodiment, after the end of the special game state, until the variable display game is performed a predetermined number of times, the power support state in which the gaming ball is more likely to win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 than the normal state (
The game support control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of generating a short time state) is provided, and in the power support state, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is It can be configured to be set to be substantially the same as time.
By configuring in this way, the game ball is less likely to win the second start area (second start winning opening 97) when in the power support state (the first specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state) Therefore, it is possible to achieve the target performance (outfall rate).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a start area (a first start winning opening 36, a second start winning opening 9).
7) It is possible to execute a variable display game that changes identification information based on winning of a game ball to
It is a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state for giving a gaming value to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, and the opening / closing member 990 operates in response to the occurrence of the special gaming state. A variable winning device (in the case of the present embodiment, the special variation winning device 38) capable of converting the gaming ball from being incapable of winning or difficult to winning to a state in which the gaming ball can be won, and provided upstream of the variable winning device , And a retention device for retaining gaming balls (in the case of the present embodiment, the normal fluctuation winning device 37).

Therefore, in addition to the retention of the game ball in the retention device, the retention device is retained by the retention device because the retention device (in the case of this embodiment, the normal fluctuation prize device 37) is provided upstream of the special fluctuation prize device 38 The player's attention can also be drawn to the whereabouts of the game ball (whether or not to win a special fluctuation winning device 38, etc.), and the rendering effect by the staying device can be accurately improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (small hit gaming state), and a second special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state.
The game machine is fired after the game ball is fired more than the period from the operation start to the operation end of the opening / closing member 990 in the first special game state, and the fluctuation winning device (in the case of this embodiment, the special fluctuation winning device 38
The stay period (stay time) of the gaming balls in the stay device (in the case of the present embodiment, the normal variation winning device 37) can be set so that the time period until the arrival at) becomes long.
By configuring in this manner, regardless of the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 990 (opening pattern of the big winning opening), aiming to start hitting the game ball with the start of the first special gaming state (small hitting gaming state) etc. Even when the game ball arrives at the special variation winning device 38, the first special gaming state ends, so while improving the small hitting performance (while increasing the number of small balls in the small hitting gaming state), It is possible to prevent an unfair prize by capture.

Also, in the present embodiment, the first special gaming state (small hitting gaming state) of the opening and closing member 990
As an operation mode in, it is possible to select an operation mode in which a plurality of operations can be performed in a period from when the game ball is fired to when it arrives at the variable winning device (in the case of this embodiment, the special variation winning device 38). It can be configured as
By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the small hit performance (increase the number of balls in the small hit gaming state).

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170, for example, the gaming ball which has passed through the common drawing start gate 34 by the induction member 34b provided in the common drawing start gate 34 It is guided to the left (upstream side) of 37f. Therefore, since the possibility that the game ball flowing down the right side game area passes through the retention device (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is high, it is more difficult to make illegal winnings by capture in the normal gaming state, and It is possible to suppress the decrease of gaming balls in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the retention device (normal fluctuation winning device 37), a member (such as an obstacle nail, a windmill, a flow-down path 615, and a guiding portion 616) for suppressing gravity in the game area 32; A retaining member having a function is provided. By retaining the gaming ball using the retention device and the retention member, it is possible to change the rolling mode of the gaming ball, so the interest of the game is improved.
Of course, the arrangement of the retention device and the retention member can be appropriately selected. Specifically, the arrangement of the retention device and the retention member is, for example, the game ball in the big winning opening even if aiming to start hitting the game ball with the start of the small hit gaming state (opening of the big winning opening). Placements that do not win (ie
It is preferable that it is arrangement | positioning which can not do the illegal prize winning by capture.

The fluctuation winning device is not limited to the special fluctuation winning device 38, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may be used.
In addition, the retention device is not limited to the normal fluctuation winning device 37, can be suitably changed, a device for holding the game ball by a slide member that can slide in the back and forth direction, etc. A device that holds gaming balls by a seesaw member that is held, a device that holds gaming balls by a rotating member that is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft, and the like, as long as the gaming balls can be held It may be In addition, the retention device is not limited to one having a winning opening such as the normal fluctuation winning device 37. In addition, a plurality of retention devices may be provided.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when generating a small hit gaming state, the opening and closing member 99
A special variable winning device 38 is provided to convert 0 from the closed state to the open state. The special variation winning device 38 is configured such that gaming balls can stay on the opening and closing member 990 when the opening and closing member 990 is in the closed state, and the opening and closing member 99 when the opening and closing member 990 is in the open state.
The game ball staying on 0 is configured to be able to win a prize. As a result, even in the case of a small hit in a short open state, the game ball retained in the opening / closing member 990 can win many game balls by winning in the special variation winning device 38, and in the second specific game state It is configured to be able to efficiently increase the number of balls out.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the small hitting RUSH occurs in the second specific gaming state, the variation is started every time the second starting winning opening 97 is won. As shown in FIG. 184, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 is set extremely high even in the low probability state or the high probability state, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the second specific gaming state Fluctuation is set to short fluctuation. Therefore, the small hit operation will occur one after another.
When the small hit gaming state occurs, it is possible to open the large winning opening a plurality of times per one small hit gaming state. When opening the big winning opening multiple times per one small hitting gaming state, for example, during the small hitting operation (small hitting gaming state), the opening time of the special winning hole of the special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed It is set shorter than time. Specifically, for example, FIG.
As shown in, the opening time can be 0.5 seconds while the closing time of the special winning opening is 1.0 seconds.

In the special fluctuation winning device 38, the flow of the game ball on the opening and closing member 990 is weakened. As a result, the gaming ball is easily retained on the opening and closing member 990.
In such a configuration, when a small hit RUSH occurs that the small hit occurs frequently, if the time of the closed state of the big winning opening is set to be longer than the time of the open state, the time of the closed state is often large. The game ball can be retained on the opening and closing member 990. Thereafter, the open / close member 990 is opened, so that many game balls staying on the open / close member 990 will be awarded in a big prize winning opening. As a result, when a small hit RUSH occurs, it is possible to give the player many winning balls.
By doing this, as in the present embodiment, in the gaming machine 10 of the positive variation loop type, the first
Since small hit RUSH can be executed in the second specific gaming state after leaving the specific gaming state of, it is possible to realize new playability that the game ball can be acquired as much as possible.

If a small hit occurs in the predetermined variable display game and a small hit occurs in the next variable display game of the predetermined variable display game, the game ball is generated according to the fluctuation period of the identification information in the next variable display game. It is possible to secure a period for securing the flow and stagnation state of the As a result, when the small hitting operation continues for two games, the game ball can be retained on the opening and closing member 990 by using the fluctuation time of the later game. Then, many game balls staying on the opening and closing member 990 can be made to be awarded at once in the large winning opening, and many balls can be given to the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the first specific gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, the small hitting mode (first special result) is derived Since transition to the second possible specific game state is possible, it is possible to perform an unprecedented novel game state transition.
Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to efficiently vary the special view 2 variation display game (second special view variation display game) to which a large number of small hits are allocated.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit or a large hit, a notification effect of notifying the type of a hit is executed before the symbol is determined (the symbol is stopped). That is, it is comprised so that it may alert | report before a symbol stop whether a small hit or a big hit. As a result, in the case of a small hit or a big hit, since the type of the hit is notified at a common timing, it is easy to understand the timing at which the interest of the game increases and the timing at which the notification should be viewed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the second specific gaming state (small hit RUSH mode), it is possible to execute the notice effect corresponding to the small hit (shorter effect) and the notice effect corresponding to the big hit (longer effect) That is, the frequency of production is higher in the case of the preview production corresponding to the small hit, and the start timing of the production is faster in the preview production corresponding to the big hit. The preview production corresponding to the big hit has a longer presentation time than the preview production corresponding to the small hit, so for the purpose of time adjustment etc, the start timing of the preview production corresponding to the big hit is the start of the preview production corresponding to the small hit It is earlier than the timing. In addition, if the frequency of the advance notice production at the earlier start timing is increased, the player's interest in the fluctuation may decrease at an early stage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the advance notice production at the later start timing (ie , Notice production corresponding to the small hit)
In the case of the frequency of, the start timing is earlier notice production (ie, notice production corresponding to the big hit)
It is higher than the frequency of
In addition, it is possible to execute a notice effect corresponding to a big hit or a notice effect corresponding to a small hit as a so-called effect, and in this case, for example, a notice effect corresponding to a big hit (streaming effect) → corresponding to a small hit Notice production (production of Gase) → notice production corresponding to the big hit (production not Gase)
By performing in order of, it becomes possible to execute the notice effect that the player keeps watching.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is a type of game in which the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game simultaneously change (the variation time of the special view 2 change display game in the normal gaming state is very long). It may be a machine. Furthermore, in the case of a simultaneous variation type gaming machine, special effects are provided when the player is hit in the left hitting gaming state and wins the second start winning opening 97 and the result of the game based on the winning is a big hit It is also possible to configure to execute countdown effects, effects entering a special zone, etc.), that is, effects other than error notification effects (attention generation effects). By this configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a big hit in an unmanned state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special variation winning device 38 is configured to function as a big hit opening for big hit and a big winning opening for small hit, but the big hit opening for big hit and the big hit opening for small hit And may be separated.
Specifically, for example, in the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 170, the large winning opening 38d of the special variation winning device 38 is a large winning opening for a small hit, and the general winning opening 35 provided in the right gaming area Between 615 and 615, a second special variation winning device having a large winning opening for a big hit and an opening and closing member for opening and closing the large winning opening may be provided. The opening and closing member having the second special fluctuation winning device is, for example, a member which can slide in the front and rear direction, and at least the upper surface of the opening and closing member (surface on which gaming balls roll and stay) is made of a material having a high coefficient of friction. Therefore, the time during which the game balls stay on the opening and closing member becomes longer than when the upper surface of the opening and closing member is made of a material having a low coefficient of friction.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special gaming state is the first special gaming state (small hitting gaming state) and the second special gaming state (big hit gaming which is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state). A first variation winning device (special variation winning device) that includes at least a state, and is capable of converting the gaming ball from a state incapable of winning or difficult to winning to a state in which the gaming ball can win a prize according to the occurrence of the first special gaming state 38) and the second variation winning device (second special variation winning device) capable of converting the game ball from a state incapable of winning or difficult to winning to a state in which the gaming ball can win in accordance with the occurrence of the second special gaming state The first variation winning apparatus and the second variation winning apparatus have a retention function (game ball retention function) for retaining the game ball, and the second variation prize apparatus is located upstream of the first variation prize apparatus. Configured to install a variable winning device It is a function.

By configuring in this manner, the second fluctuation winning device (second special fluctuation winning device) is provided on the upstream side of the first fluctuation winning device (special fluctuation winning device 38). In addition to the retention of gaming balls in the device, the player's attention can be drawn to the retention of gaming balls in the second variation winning device and the whereabouts of gaming balls retained by the second variation winning device,
The rendering effect by the staying device (the second fluctuation winning device) can be accurately improved.

In addition, the game ball retention function of the first variation winning device (special variation winning device 38) is generated by providing a raised portion (which may be a raised portion or a relief), that is, by providing unevenness on the surface It is not limited to the function and can be changed as appropriate.
In addition, the game ball retention function of the second fluctuation winning device (second special fluctuation winning device) is not limited to the function generated by using a material having a high coefficient of friction, and can be appropriately changed.
In addition, the game ball retention function may be a function generated by combining a plurality of configurations. That is, for example, the function may be generated by providing the surface with irregularities and using a material having a high coefficient of friction.
Further, the arrangement of the first variation winning device (special variation winning device 38), the second variation winning device (second special variation winning device), etc. can be selected as appropriate.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a third fluctuation winning apparatus (for example, a normal fluctuation) different from the first fluctuation winning apparatus (special fluctuation winning apparatus 38) and the second fluctuation winning apparatus (second special fluctuation winning apparatus). The third variation winning device further includes a winning device 37), such as an opening / closing member (eg, a movable member 37b).
), And has a retention area (for example, the common channel winning opening 37d) where the gaming ball can win a prize, and a retention area for retaining the gaming ball (for example, the bypass path 37g) The length of the period during which the device changes state (period from the start of operation of the opening / closing member 990 to the end of operation) is equal to or less than the period of time during which the opening / closing member operates (period from the start of operation of the movable member 37d to the end of operation) Can be configured to

By configuring in this way, a second variation winning device (second special variation winning device) having a gaming ball retention function on the upstream side of the first variation winning device (special variation winning device 38),
Since the third variable winning device (for example, the normal variation winning device 37) equipped with the game ball retention function is provided, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal winnings by capture during the normal gaming state.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 183 (a) to (c), the length of the period from the operation start to the operation end of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit gaming state is “1.8 seconds” or “3.5 seconds “Is set to be shorter than“ 5800 milliseconds ”which is the length of the period from the start of the operation of the movable member 37 d to the end of the operation. That is, in the present embodiment, the opening and closing member 990 in the small hit gaming state
The length of the period from the start of the operation to the end of the operation is less than the length of the period from the start of the operation of the movable member 37d to the end of the operation, but the lengths of these periods are not limited thereto. Specifically, for example, the length of a period from the operation start to the operation end of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit gaming state
Alternatively, the length of the period obtained by adding the small hit residual ball processing time to the time may be the same as the length of the period from the start of the operation of the movable member 37 d to the end of the operation.

In addition, the staying time of the gaming ball in the first variable winning device, the staying time of the gaming ball in the second changing winning device, and the staying time of the gaming ball in the third changing winning device may be all the same. All may be different, or any two may be the same and the remaining one may be different.
Specifically, for example, [1] residence time is the second fluctuation winning device> first fluctuation winning device 第 third fluctuation winning device or second fluctuation winning device> third fluctuation winning device> first fluctuation winning device In the case, that is, when the residence time of the game ball in the second variable winning device is the longest, the second variable winning device is disposed in the middle of the right game area, so the game ball is turned in the middle of the right game area. You can enjoy the movement mode. Furthermore, when the combination of residence time is [1], the second one is upstream of the first variation winning device (special variation winning device 38) having a large winning opening for small hit.
Since the game balls can be held for a long time in the variable winning device, the timing at which the game balls arrive at the first conversion winning device can be delayed. The game ball that arrives at the first variable winning device immediately after the operation of the opening and closing member 990 falls from the opening and closing member 990 before the operation of the opening and closing member 990 starts (a failure to win a prize in the first fluctuation winning device occurs 2.) The possibility is high, but by delaying the timing when the game ball arrives at the first conversion winning device by the second variable winning device,
Since it is possible to reduce the number of game balls arriving at the first variable winning device immediately after the end of the operation of the opening / closing member 990, it is possible to obtain more balls in the small hit gaming state.

Also, for example, in the case where [2] residence time is third fluctuation winning device> second fluctuation winning device> first fluctuation winning device, it becomes difficult to clog the ball. That is, there is a high need to suppress the attack on the upstream side than on the downstream side of the game area, and in the conventional game machine, the stagnation is suppressed by arranging more staying members (such as obstacle nails and windmills) on the upstream side. . On the other hand, when the combination of residence time is [2], the residence time of the game ball in the third variable winning apparatus disposed most upstream is the longest, and the ball game on the upstream side is the third variation winning The device can reduce the number of retaining members provided only for the purpose of suppressing the ball, so that it is difficult to clog the ball. Furthermore, when the combination of residence time is [2], the game ball retention function of the second fluctuation winning device and the third fluctuation winning device located upstream of the first fluctuation winning device (special fluctuation winning device 38) Since the time until the game ball arrives at the first variable winning device can be further extended, it is possible to more effectively prevent the unfair winning due to the capture in the normal gaming state.

Also, for example, if [3] residence time is the second fluctuation winning device and the third fluctuation winning device> first fluctuation winning device, it is more upstream than the first fluctuation winning device (special fluctuation winning device 38) By the game ball retention function of the 2nd fluctuation winning a prize device and the 3rd fluctuation winning a prize device which is in, because it is possible to extend the time until the game ball arrives to the 1st fluctuation winning a prize device further, by the capture at the time of normal game state It is possible to prevent fraudulent winning more effectively.
Any of the above [1] to [3] can be adopted as a combination of residence times, and the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hitting gaming state (timing to open the big winning opening or big winning corresponding to the adopted combination) The time when the mouth is closed, etc. are set.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of. Also, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the embodiments and the modifications described above can be combined appropriately and applied.

Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

10 gaming machine 32 gaming area 36 first starting winning opening (starting area, starting area, first starting area)
37 Normal Fluctuation Winning Device (Variant Winning Device, Staying Device)
37b Movable member (opening and closing member)
37b5 extension (ball control section)
37b6 Left ridge (ball control section)
37b7 Right ridge (ball restraint)
37d Fuden prize winning opening (winning area)
37f Flow down path (channel, 1st channel)
37 g detour (retention area, second flow path)
37g1 inlet (communication port)
37g2 outlet (communication port)
38 Special Variation Winning Device (Variation Winning Device)
80 game board main body 97 second starting winning opening (starting area, second starting area)
100 gaming control device (power support control means)
371b Projection part (induction part)
373b Rear surface (mounting wall)
990 Opening and closing member

Claims (2)

It is possible to execute a variable display game in which identification information is changed based on winning of a game ball in a start area provided in the game area, and the game value is given to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state to be granted, the special gaming state includes at least a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state. According to the occurrence of the first special gaming state, a first variation winning device capable of converting the gaming ball from a state incapable of winning or difficult to winning to a state in which the gaming ball can be won, and according to the occurrence of the second special gaming state A second variable winning device capable of converting a game ball into a state in which the game ball can not win or difficult to win, the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device Delay The second variable winning device is disposed on the upstream side of the first variable winning device, and the game ball flows downstream without winning in the second variable winning device. A game machine characterized in that a guiding unit for guiding the first variable winning device in the direction of arrangement is disposed downstream of the second variable winning device. The game machine further comprises a third variable winning apparatus different from the first variable winning apparatus and the second variable winning apparatus, and the third variable winning apparatus is a winning area in which the game ball can win by operating the opening / closing member. And a retention area for retaining the ball, wherein a length of a period during which the first variable winning device changes state is equal to or less than a length of a period during which the opening / closing member operates. The gaming machine described in.